JP6652731B1 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

Provided is a gaming machine capable of making LEDs on a lamp board look good without causing the appearance of the LEDs to deteriorate. An upper frame lamp portion provided on a glass door of a pachinko game machine includes an upper frame right lamp substrate 611 on which an LED 641a is mounted, and an upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651 on which the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is mounted. Have. The mounting surface (the upper surface in the figure) of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 on which the LED 641a is mounted is configured in white. A positioning hole 685a into which the positioning boss 682a is inserted and a fixing hole 686a into which the screw 683a is inserted are provided close to the upper frame right lamp substrate 611. The opening area of the positioning hole 685a is set to be different from the opening area of the fixing hole 686a. The positioning boss 682a has a protruding portion 687 protruding on the mounting surface side (upper surface side in the drawing) of the LED 641a, and the protruding portion 687 is formed in a convex curved shape. [Selection] Fig. 123

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine has been known as one of gaming machines (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-19669

  The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problem by the following means (the configuration of a corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses).
The present invention
A cabinet (13),
In a gaming machine (slot machine 10) having a front door (front door 12) attached to the cabinet so as to be openable and closable,
A predetermined lamp substrate (for example, a right frame lamp substrate 27a) is provided at a predetermined position (for example, a right front portion) of the front door ,
A predetermined light emitting means (LED) is mounted on the predetermined lamp substrate ,
Mounting surface of the predetermined light emitting means in the predetermined lamp substrate is at least partially formed of a substantially white,
The predetermined lamp substrate is fixed by a predetermined fixing member (screw),
On the basis of the mounting surface of the predetermined lamp substrate, a height of the predetermined fixing member in a state where the predetermined lamp substrate is fixed is higher than a height of the predetermined light emitting unit,
The gaming machine further includes a front door sensor (door sensor),
A first closing portion (13c) is provided at a lower portion of the cabinet,
The first closing portion protrudes toward the front door in a state where the front door is closed,
A second closing part (12a) and a third closing part (12b) are provided below the front door.
The second closing portion and the third closing portion project toward the cabinet in a state where the front door is closed,
In a state where the front door is closed, it is configured such that there is a portion where the first closing portion is disposed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion,
When the front door is opened from the state where the front door is closed, the position of the front door when the opening of the front door is first detected by the front door sensor is a detection start position,
In a state where the front door is at the detection start position, it is configured such that there is a portion where the first closing portion is disposed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion,
In a state where the front door is closed, the third closing portion and the first closing portion at a position where the first closing portion is disposed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion. (The distance between the opposing surfaces indicates a distance in a direction perpendicular to the opposing surface of the third closing portion and the first closing portion), and the game medium (medal) ) Is “t”, “h2> t”, and the first closing portion is disposed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion. The distance between the opposing surfaces of the second closing portion and the first closing portion at (the distance between the opposing surfaces is the distance in the direction perpendicular to the facing surface of the second closing portion and the first closing portion). ) Is “h1”, “h1> t” holds, and
In the front door,
Game media slot (medal slot 47),
A detection unit A (insertion sensor 44a) and a detection unit B (insertion sensor 44b) (detection unit) that are provided in a passage (medal passage) through which the game medium inserted from the game medium insertion port and that can detect the game medium. B is located downstream of the detection means A.)
Further comprising
In a predetermined situation in which the passage of the game medium is permitted, in a case where the game medium is inserted from the game medium insertion port, if the detection states of the detection unit A and the detection unit B for the game medium satisfy a predetermined condition. , The number of credits or the number of bets can be added by “1”.
In a predetermined situation in which the passage of the game medium is permitted, from the time when the power supply interruption event occurs, the event of the power supply interruption is detected and the passage of the game medium is prohibited. The design value for the period up to the point is “T1” (T1 in FIG. 3),
In a predetermined situation where the passage of the game medium is permitted, when the game medium is inserted at the initial speed “0” from the game medium slot, the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine. When the design value of the period from time (the position of M2 in FIG. 2) to the position where the game medium is detected by the detection means A (the position of M3 in FIG. 2) is “T2”,
It is characterized in that "T1 <T2" .

  According to the present invention, the performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

It is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine which is an example of a gaming machine in the embodiment. FIG. 7 is a front view illustrating a state in which medals inserted from a medal insertion slot pass through an insertion sensor in the embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a voltage drop when a power failure occurs in a first embodiment (A) in a time chart. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a throw-in sensor and passing of a medal in the first embodiment (B). It is a figure explaining ON / OFF of an injection sensor in a 1st embodiment (B) with a time chart. It is a schematic diagram when a medal is discharged from a medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). It is a schematic diagram which shows the mode of ON (detection) / OFF (non-detection) of a payout sensor when a medal is delivered from a medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). It is a figure which shows ON / OFF of a payout sensor by a time chart in 1st Embodiment (C). FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a main control board and a board case in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a board case accommodating a main control board. (B) is an AA arrow sectional view showing Example 1 of the gate mark. (C) is an AA arrow sectional view showing Example 2 of the gate mark. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a flow of processing when a disconnection occurs between a main control board and a sub control board in the third embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is sectional drawing (schematic diagram) explaining movement of the stop button of a stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, (b) shows when a detection sensor is turned on from off. (C) shows a state where the stop button is pushed to the deepest part, and (d) shows a state where the push of the stop button is released and the detection sensor is turned off from on. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing in a time chart the relationship between the movement of the stop button and the excitation state of the motor, wherein (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. In the fifth embodiment, it is a diagram showing in a time chart the relationship between the power on / off and the voltage level, where (a) shows a power off after the main program is started, and (b) is a state before the main program is started. Indicates power off. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state before the last ejected medal contacts the fixed axis and the movable axis, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing apparatus in which the last ejected medal is the fixed axis and the movable axis. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state before the contact with the movable shaft and in which the rotation of the hopper disk has advanced from (a). In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state where the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed axis and the movable axis, and (b) is movable by being pushed by the last discharged medal. It is a top view of a medal payout device showing a state where an axis has moved. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit, and (b) is a diagram showing a state after ejecting the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout apparatus which shows the state where rotation of a hopper disk stopped. It is a time chart which shows the relation between the drive signal of a hopper motor, the drive state of a hopper motor, and the discharge state of the medal from a discharge part in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a relationship among an operation of a main control board, a driving state of a hopper motor, a detection state of a payout sensor, and a medal ejection timing in a sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 17 is a side sectional view of the slot machine with a front door closed in a seventh embodiment, illustrating a positional relationship between a main control board and a sub control board. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a main CPU on a main control board and an electrolytic capacitor on a sub-control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) Shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. FIG. 17C is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitors on the sub-control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) Shows Example 3, and (d) shows Example 4. FIG. 23 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion (A in FIG. 22) of the slot machine with the front door closed in the eighth embodiment, illustrating a gap between the cabinet and the front door. is there. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing a type of special combination (gear) and an end condition, (b) is a diagram showing a type of game state and a specified number of each game state, (C) is a figure which shows the number table of the internal drawing in the setting 1, and the advantageous section drawing. It is a figure showing an effect determination table used for non-RT and RT (non-AT) in the ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing an effect determination table used commonly in the inside of RB and the inside of BB in the ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing example 1 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED in a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing example 2 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED in a 10th embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display substrate, (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs, and (C) is a diagram showing set value display LEDs. It is. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an output port in an eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a relationship among an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal, and a segment signal. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating addresses, label names, names, and the like of data stored in the RWM. It is a figure explaining the concept of a difference number counter value, (a) shows example 1, and (b) shows example 2. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a difference number counter value and an advantageous area, (a) shows the example 1 and (b) shows the example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the program start process (M_PRG_START) by a main control board. 39 is a flowchart showing a setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a power return process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG. 38. It is a flow chart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in an eleventh embodiment. 41 is a flowchart showing a game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG. 41. 42 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section shift lottery process in step S283 in FIG. 41. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section shift process in step S347 of FIG. 44. It is a flowchart which shows AT lottery processing in step S355 of FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an AT initial game frequency determination process in step S363 in FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a pressing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41. 41 is a flowchart showing medal payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294 in FIG. 41. 42 is a flowchart showing a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 in FIG. 50. 51 is a flowchart illustrating Example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 in FIG. 50. It is a flowchart which shows an interruption process (I_INTR). FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53. 53 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453 in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows sub difference number counter management processing in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a sub difference number counter management process in the eleventh embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 56. In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the accessory condition device and the operation termination condition, (B) shows the prescribed number for each RT, and (C) shows the winning number for each winning number. It is the front view, top view, and right side view which show the outline | summary of a structure containing the reel and the stop switch in 13th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the elapse of the minimum game time in the fourteenth embodiment (A). It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (A). It is a flow chart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 14th embodiment (B). It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the elapse of the minimum game time in the fourteenth embodiment (B). It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (B). It is a flow chart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 14th embodiment (C). It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in the 14th embodiment (C). It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the elapse of the minimum game time in the fourteenth embodiment (C). It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (C). It is a flow chart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 14th embodiment (D). It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the elapse of the minimum game time in the fourteenth embodiment (D). It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (D). It is a flow chart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 14th embodiment (E). It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the elapse of the minimum game time in the fourteenth embodiment (E). It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (E). It is a front view showing an outline of composition including a reel, an operation instruction lamp, and a stop switch in a fourteenth embodiment (F). It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the elapse of the minimum game time in the fourteenth embodiment (F). It is a time chart which shows the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (F). It is a time chart which shows the display start timing of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the elapse of the minimum game time in the fourteenth embodiment (G), and the display end timing. It is a time chart which shows the display start timing and the display end timing of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (G). It is a figure showing the execution timing of the medal addition processing in a 15th embodiment (A). It is a figure showing the execution timing of the medal addition processing in a 15th embodiment (B). It is a figure showing the execution timing of the medal addition processing in a 15th embodiment (C). It is the schematic diagram which looked at the medal selector, the chute path | pass, and the chute sensor 49 in 16th Embodiment from the front. It is a front view of the passage formation member in a 17th embodiment. It is a rear view of the passage formation member in a 17th embodiment. It is a left view of the passage formation member in a 17th embodiment. FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view of the passage forming member according to the seventeenth embodiment, taken along the line AA of FIG. 85. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating the main storage areas of the RWM described in the eighteenth embodiment. 35 is a time chart (example 1) showing output timings of external signals 4 and 5 in the eighteenth embodiment. 30 is a time chart (example 2) showing output timings of external signals 4 and 5 in the eighteenth embodiment. 30 is a flowchart (example 1) illustrating an external signal output process in the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart (example 1) showing an external signal output process in the eighteenth embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 344. 30 is a flowchart (example 2) showing an external signal output process in the eighteenth embodiment. 30 is a flowchart (example 3) illustrating an external signal output process in the eighteenth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine in a nineteenth embodiment (A). It is a time chart which shows a setting change state, a setting change end sound, a lamp effect, and a relationship with one game time described later in a nineteenth embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the back side. It is a block diagram in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart for explaining the flow of activation after power-on of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of one game in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a board case (upper case and lower case) and a main control board as viewed from the front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a board case (upper case and lower case) and a main control board as viewed from the rear side. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view illustrating a state where a main control board is accommodated in a board case. It is the front view which looked at the state where the main control board was stored in the board case from the front side. It is the front view which looked at the state where the main control board was stored in the board case from the back (back) side. It is sectional drawing of the side surface which shows the fitting state of an upper case and a lower case, (a) shows a temporary fitting state (before sliding movement), (b) shows a full fitting state (after sliding movement). . It is the top view which looked at the side wall vicinity from the lower case side in the temporary fitting state. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a state where a harness is connected to a connector of a main control board. It is a front view which shows a harness and its connector terminal in detail. It is a perspective view which shows the example which hides the lead wire regarding starting. FIG. 4 is a side sectional view showing a positional relationship among an upper case, a cover, a setting key insertion slot, and a setting change (reset) switch of a board case. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in a 23rd embodiment. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine in a 23rd embodiment from the front side (the player side). FIG. 47 is a front view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover removed in the twenty-third embodiment. In the 23rd embodiment, it is the perspective view which looked at the right base member in the state where the upper part of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover was removed from the right side. FIG. 47 is a rear view of the right base member in a state where upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover are removed in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 33 is an enlarged front upper view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed from the upper portions in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 47 is an enlarged perspective view of the right base member with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, as viewed from the left side, in the twenty-third embodiment. In a 23rd embodiment, it is a left side upper part enlarged view of the right base member in the state where the upper part of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover was removed. FIG. 37 is an enlarged bottom view of the upper portion of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover removed in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 119 is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 119. FIG. 117 is a front view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover, the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover, and the right frame lamp substrate removed in the twenty-third embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 116. In the 23rd embodiment, it is a rear enlarged view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover removed and the right frame lamp cover attached. It is a sectional enlarged view of the lens part of the right frame lamp cover in a 23rd embodiment. In the twenty-third embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing an effect pattern 1 at the time of a break in a pachinko gaming machine, and (b) is a time chart showing an effect pattern 2 at a time of a break in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating substantially the same color using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a diagram for describing similar colors using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of a cross section taken along line AA of FIG. 119, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 123. FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of a slot machine according to a modification of the twenty-third embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). In the modification of the twenty-third embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing an effect pattern 1 when the slot machine is not won, and (b) is a time chart showing an effect pattern 2 when the slot machine is not won. It is.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"Bet" means to bet a medal (game medium) to play a game. In order to bet a medal, the player enters the medal through the medal insertion slot 47 or operates the bet switch 40 to bet a credited (reserved) medal.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as" storing ")" means storing medals inside the slot machine 10 unlike "bet" described above. In this specification, “credit” is used in a sense that does not include “bet”.
Further, “insertion” means to bet or credit a medal.
The “specified number” refers to the number of bets that can start (execute) a game in the game. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of “2” or “3”, a game can be started with either a bet number of “2” or “3”, and cannot be played with a bet number of “1”.
Note that the “specified number” may be referred to as a “bet number” for convenience of explanation.
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may indicate a value other than the "specified number". For example, in a game with a prescribed number of “2” or “3”, when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the bet number is “1” (the number bet at that time).

“Care” means that a player inserts medals from a medal insertion slot 47 (described later).
The “care bet” means that the player bets medals by taking care of medals from the medal slot 47.
The “care credit” means that a player credits medals by adding medals through the medal slot 47 (adds credits).
“Bet medal” refers to a bet medal.
“Stored medals” refers to medals that have been credited (stored).

The “reserved bet” means that when a player operates a bet switch 40 (described later), a part or all of the credited medals are bet in order to play a game within a range where a bet can be made in the game. To do.
The “auto bet” means that when the replay has been won, the control process of the slot machine 10 automatically bets the number of medals previously bet in the game.
Here, the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that the symbol combination has stopped at the activated line. The same applies hereinafter) is referred to as "small combination winning". On the other hand, in the “Rules on Approval of Gaming Machines and Type Certification” (hereinafter simply referred to as “rules”), when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the condition device related to the replay is activated. Is not interpreted as "winning". However, in the present application (this specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the combinations (replay combination), and the stop of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay may be referred to as “replay winning”.
“Payment” refers to paying out a bet medal and / or a stored medal to a player. In the present embodiment, the settlement process is executed when a settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

The term “payout” refers to paying out medals to a player based on winning of a winning combination, or paying out medals by the above-mentioned settlement. When paying out the medals to the player based on the winning of the role, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)) and paying out. Includes both paying out the actual medals from the mouth (not shown). For payout of medals, for example, credit is set to "50" as a limit number, and medals whose credit number exceeds "50" are controlled so as to be actually paid out to the player.
Note that “payout” may be referred to as “grant”. Therefore, the “number of payouts” may be referred to as the “number of grants”.

The “gaming medium” is a medal in the present embodiment, but in the case of, for example, an enclosure-type (ECO) gaming machine, electronic information (electronic medal, electronic data) is used as a gaming medium. In addition, "electronic information" means, for example, when money (banknote) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played by a gaming machine. That can be credited to a gaming machine as a game medium for performing the game.
The “game medium” may be referred to as a “game value”.

  In the case where the game medium is electronic information, “payout of medals” means that credit (addition) is made to the game medium credit device provided in the game machine. Therefore, "payout of medals" does not only mean that medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 (described later), but the electronic information corresponding to the payout corresponding to the winning combination is credited to the gaming media credit device. Addition) is also included.

  When the game progresses as “N−1” game eyes, “N” game eyes, “N + 1” game eyes,... (“N” is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is “N” games. When it is an eye, the game of the “N” game eye is referred to as “this game”. Also, the game of the “N−1” game eye is referred to as “previous game”. Furthermore, the game of the “N + 1” game is referred to as “next game”.

In this specification, a numerical value obtained by adding “(B)” to the end of a number (especially, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value with “(H)” added to the end of the numerical value means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating “16” in decimal is expressed as “00010000 (B)” in binary, and is expressed as “10 (H)” in hexadecimal. Numerical values indicating decimal numbers are described as “16 (D)” as necessary.
However, when it is clear which of a binary number, a decimal number, and a hexadecimal number, the suffixes of “(B)”, “(D)”, and “(H)” may be omitted. .

The “operation mode” of the stop switch 42 means the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing (the timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the active line).
The “advantageous operation mode” of the stop switch 42 refers to a game having payouts or a large number of payouts in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 gives an advantage / disadvantage to a game result (a symbol combination stopped on an active line). This refers to an operation mode in which the symbol combination stops, an operation mode in which the symbol combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT stops, or an operation mode in which a symbol combination that does not shift (falls) to an unfavorable RT stops. The “advantageous operation mode” is also referred to as a correct operation mode and a correct answer pressing order.

  “A game in which an advantage / disadvantage occurs in the game result by the operation mode of the stop switch 42” is, for example, a game (a so-called “push order bell”) that has been won in one of the winning numbers “3” to “8” shown in FIG. Game). In addition, although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game that has been won in a plurality of types of replays (at the time of a duplicate replay win; a game that has been won in a so-called “push order replay”), the RT is shifted according to the type of the winning replay. Is also equivalent.

The “instruction function” means a function of instructing the operation mode of the stop switch 42 to the player. The instruction function is, in principle, a function of instructing the player on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "pointing function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
Note that displaying the contents of the “instruction” so as to be visible is “display”, and notifying the contents of the instruction to the player is “notification”. Therefore, the “instruction function” is both a “display function” and a “notification function”.

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. Then, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous may be “actuation of the instruction function”, but the notification of any operation mode including the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous is “instruction of the instruction function”. Operation ".
For example, when the pressing order bells shown in the winning numbers "3" to "8" in FIG. 58B described later are in the 6-selection pressing order, the payout at the time of winning the pressing order bell is 10 or in the example of FIG. Although it is one, it is assumed that, instead of this, one of three, four, ten, or missing (non-winning) is selected according to the pressing order.
Here, the notification of the pressing order for winning the ten-prize combination is a notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and naturally corresponds to the “operation of the instruction function”.
On the other hand, the notification of the pressing order for winning the one-part, three-part, or four-part wins may be referred to as “notification of an advantageous operation mode (operation of the instruction function)”, or “advantageous operation mode”. Notification ".

The pressing order for winning the four-prize combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because the pressing order does not cause the ten-prong combination to win. However, since the payout number is "4" for the bet number "3" and the difference number of the game is "+1", this is an operation mode for increasing the difference page number, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the pressing order for winning three winning combinations is a pressing order for not winning ten winning combinations, and is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, since the payout number is “3” with respect to the bet number “3”, and the difference number is maintained as it is (the difference number is not reduced), it is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation state.

  Further, similarly, since the pressing order for winning one winning combination is a pressing order for not winning the ten winning combinations, it is not the most advantageous operation mode. Further, the payout number is “1” with respect to the bet number “3”, and the number of payouts is reduced. However, it can be said that this is an operation mode in which a role is not missed, and thus it may not be said that it is an unfavorable operation mode.

In the present embodiment, in the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the pushing order bell, the operation mode (correct answering order) in which the hand with the largest payout number wins is notified.
However, for example, when the difference sheet counter value (described later) in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit value (“2400 (D)”), but there is room for the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (the advantageous section clear counter value described later). It is conceivable that, when a push order bell is won, the push order in which, for example, three or four winning combinations are won as described above is notified, and control is performed so that the difference counter value is maintained at the current state.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one specified number. For example, it is assumed that the specified number for activating the instruction function is set to “3”. In this case, in the game of the specified number “2” or “3” in the AT, the game is started with the bet number “3”, and when the bell is pressed, the instruction function can be operated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the bet number “2”, the instruction function cannot be operated even when the pressing order bell is won.

The “game section” includes a “normal section (non-advantaged section)” and an “advantaged section”. At Unit 5.9, a “standby section” (a game section that was won in the advantageous section lottery but has not yet shifted to an advantageous section) was provided. Is not provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game section other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
The “normal section” is a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a pressing order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information capable of determining the correct answer pressing order) to be described later. ) Is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted, and does not affect the performance of the instruction function at all (does not execute the processing of the instruction function). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of the winning combination, it is possible to determine whether to shift to the advantageous section (lottery or the like).

  In the normal section, since the indicating function must not be operated, it is not possible to display the pressing order indicating information on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the indicating function is not provided. Is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80.

On the other hand, the “advantageous section” is a game section having the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). Specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction on the main control board 60 is performed. Only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (the operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified, it indicates a game section in which a signal relating to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be operated), that is, a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (or displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect contrary to the content of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the signal relating to the received instruction function.

Further, the advantageous section may be a game in which the operation result of the stop switch 42 gives an advantage / disadvantage to the game result, or the instruction function may not be operated.
On the other hand, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 gives an advantage / disadvantage to the game result during the advantageous section, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be displayed by always operating the instruction function.
AT (notification game state) is a game state in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game in which the operation result of the stop switch 42 gives an advantage / disadvantage to the game result. Therefore, the AT is always in the advantageous section, and the AT is not executed during the non-advantage section.

The AT may always (at 100%) notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a game in which the operation result of the stop switch 42 gives an advantage / disadvantage to the game result. Even in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantage / disadvantage due to the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be notified so as to keep the operation mode within the range defined by the rules.
For example, if the number of AT games approaches the upper limit value of the difference counter during the AT but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not temporarily notified from the viewpoint of extending the life of the AT. (It does not activate the indicating function).

  Further, the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT can be variously set. For example, first, there is a setting of “advantage section = AT”. In this case, winning in the advantageous section is equivalent to winning in the AT. Then, the AT is started from the first game in the advantageous section. AT ends with the end of the advantageous section.

Secondly, it is possible to set "AT @ advantageous section".
In this case, the start (execution) condition of the AT is not satisfied only by shifting to the advantageous section, and whether or not to execute the AT is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that the AT is in the advantageous section. When it is determined to execute, the AT may be executed until a predetermined termination condition of the AT is satisfied. In addition, when it is non-AT at the time of shifting to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to a normal section, a precursor, a CZ (chance zone (a period during which the player can easily win the AT)) or the like.

When a transition is made to the precursor after the transition to the advantageous section, the transition to the AT may be made after the predetermined number of game times of the precursor has been completed. Alternatively, at the time of transition to the advantageous section or after the transition to the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether to use the precursor or the gaseous precursor, and when the precursor is determined, the process may shift to the AT after the completion of the precursor. . In addition, when it is determined to be a gaseous sign, after the gaseous sign has ended, the advantageous section may be maintained, or a transition to a normal section may be made.
Furthermore, when the termination condition of the AT is satisfied, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated. Alternatively, when the AT ends, but the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when the AT is started simultaneously with the advantageous section.

Another example is that the number of games in the advantageous section is determined when the advantageous section is started, and during the advantageous section, a lottery or the like for the advantageous section is not executed.
Furthermore, when the advantageous section is started, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, it is determined whether the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section is added (added) (lottery or the like). It is mentioned.
Further, a predetermined ending condition is determined for the advantageous section, and when the predetermined ending condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or the remaining number of games in the AT) is present, To end the advantageous section.

  Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous section means that the difference number counter value to be described later has exceeded "2400 (D)" or the advantageous section clear counter (the number of games in the advantageous section) to be described later is "2400 (D)". 1500 (D) ". When any of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and the game shifts from the next game to the normal section (non-advantaged section). In this case, even if the final game is the AT, the AT ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous section.

In the advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as “section indicator”) 77 described later is turned on. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be always lit during the advantageous section, but may be lit when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section.
Here, the “predetermined lighting condition” is, for example, a time when the instruction function is activated in a gaming state that is an advantageous section and the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”. After the advantageous section display LED 77 is once turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.

The “section Sim (simulation) payout rate” means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even when the combination of “PB ≠ 1” is won, the symbol corresponding to the combination) When the combination is stopped and displayed, and when there are a plurality of types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the most advantageous symbol combination for the player (the highest paying bell which becomes the maximum payout when the pushing bell is won) is selected. This is the payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. The calculation of the section Sim payout rate does not include payouts (payout number) due to the accessory operation (1BB operation or the like). In the game won in the replay, when the bet number is “3”, the payout number is counted as “0”, and in the replay game based on the winning of the replay (the next game of the game won in the replay), the bet number is counted. It is calculated as “0” and the number of payouts “x” (“x” is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the payout number of the game won in the replay and the bet number of the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the “game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds“ 1 ”” includes an RT or main game state in which the section Sim payout rate is set to exceed “1”.
Here, the RT in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1” includes, for example, an RT set with a high replay winning probability.
Further, assuming that a CZ (chance zone), an AT, a withdrawal section, and the like are provided as the main game state, the main game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1” includes the AT.

  When the advantageous section is ended, more specifically, in the last game of the advantageous section, for example, during the game end check processing described later or during the game start set processing in the next game of the last game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. I do. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off by executing initialization processing of an advantageous section display LED flag described later in the subsequent interrupt processing.

The “processing relating to the advantageous section” includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Lottery (shift) of the advantageous section 2) Update (subtraction, clear) of the advantageous section clear counter
3) Update of difference counter (calculation, clear)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED 77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Further, the “processing related to the instruction function” includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of the number-of-games management type AT (specification of terminating the AT when the number of remaining games becomes "0"), updating (subtraction, additional addition, clearing) of the AT game number counter
4) In the case of the difference number management type AT (specification of terminating the AT when the remaining difference number becomes “0”), updating (subtraction, additional addition, clearing) of the AT difference number counter

Then, according to the rules at the present time, it is determined that the processing relating to the advantageous section and the processing relating to the instruction function can be executed by one specified number in one game state (RT) except for the following. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function can be executed with the specified number “3”, and the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed with the specified number “2”. And
However, during the advantageous section, the updating of the advantageous section clear counter and the updating of the difference number counter need to be executed regardless of the specified number.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning combination lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is “0” in FIGS. 26 and 58 described later), in other words, in the game when the condition device is not operated, It is determined that the process relating to the advantageous section (the advantageous section shift lottery) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process related to the advantageous section may be executed even if the winning lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the winning lottery result is non-winning, if the non-winning probability is equal to or more than a predetermined value (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, “1/17500” or more), the present embodiment relates to the instruction function. Processing (AT lottery processing) can be executed.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous section shift lottery (processing relating to the advantageous section), when the player wins the advantageous section shift lottery, an advantageous section starts from the next game. Accordingly, it is not possible to execute the advantageous section shift lottery (processing relating to the advantageous section) and to execute the notification of the correct answer pressing order (processing relating to the instruction function) in the game that has been won in the advantageous section.
However, the advantage section shift lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) may be performed in one game. Further, for example, when a specific combination lottery result is obtained, an advantageous section and an AT may be determined (without performing lottery).

  The management information display LED (also referred to as a “ratio monitor” or “ratio display”) 74 includes, for example, four LEDs as shown in FIG. It is composed of an LED that displays which of the items is a predetermined symbol or the like, and a 2-digit ratio seg (an LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratio of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.) Or the instructed bonus ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) The continuous bonus ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Character ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Percentage of continuous character (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Ratio of official goods (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, in the case of displaying the accessory ratio (total), when the ratio is “50”%, the symbol “7A.” Indicating the accessory ratio (total) is displayed on the identification segment, and “50” is displayed. Display on the ratio segment.
Here, “total” refers to the sum of numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, counting is performed until the number of games reaches at least “175000”. When the total is less than "175000" games, the ratio is displayed by blinking display, for example, and when the total is "175000" or more games, the ratio is displayed by lighting display. Even after the total number of games reaches “175000” or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit value) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
In addition, “6000 games” is the number of games in which one set is “400” games, and the 15 sets are totaled.

The “advantageous section ratio” indicates a ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all game sections (non-advantaged section + advantaged section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games in all the game sections is “1000” and the number of games in the advantageous section therebetween is “700”, the advantageous section ratio is “70%”.
Further, the "instruction-containing bonus ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts at the time of operating the accessory and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts. In a slot machine without a bonus, the “instruction-containing bonus ratio” is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-added accessory counter.

Further, the “number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated” is based on the operation of the stop switch 42 in accordance with the pressing order displayed by the activation of the instruction function, for example, a winning number “ When the 10 bells of "3" to "8" have won, "10" is added to the instruction-added accessory counter.
On the other hand, in the game in which the indicating function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from the displayed pressing order, when one bell in the example of FIG. Is added to "1".
Similarly, in the game in which the indicating function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from the displayed pressing order, when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won), the instructed bonus counter is included. Is not added to In other words, the count value in the previous game remains.

  In the example of FIG. 26 described later, when the common bell (winning number “3”) is won during the AT, the instruction function is activated in the same manner as when the pressing order bell is won, and the acquired number display LED 78 is pressed. There are cases where the order instruction information (dummy) is displayed and cases where the instruction function is not activated. Then, when the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the common bell, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-added accessory counter.

  On the other hand, if the instruction function is not activated when the common bell is won, the payout number of the game is not added to the instruction-incorporated bonus counter. However, it is added to the total payout number counter. In this case, the case where the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct answer pressing order by an image or a sound is also included.

The “continuous bonus ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of the operation of the first special bonus (RB) to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it indicates “the number of payouts during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of payouts”.
For example, when the total number of payouts in the number of games of “6000” is “2000”, and among them, the number of payouts when the “first-class special role (RB)” is activated is “500”, “continuous role The ratio (6000 games) "is" 25 (%) ".

Further, the “principal item ratio” indicates the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operating the bonus item to the total number of payouts. Here, the "casing" refers to a special-casing for the second kind (CB) or MB (also referred to as "2BB") in addition to the special-casing for the first-class. Are operated continuously.) And SB (single bonus) are included.
In the above-mentioned five items, in a gaming machine which does not have a function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is displayed as “−−−”.
For example, when "RB (Type 1 special special character)" is not provided, there is no continuous character ratio, and therefore, when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is changed to "----". Is lit.
As described above, five types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, which will be described later, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. I do.

In addition, the rule that the advantageous section ratio and the instructed accessory ratio should be 70% or less is specified. Further, it describes that the ratio of the accessory should be 70% or less, and specifies that the ratio of the continuous accessory should be 60% or less.
For this reason, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it can be confirmed whether or not the information is within the rule range.

Note that a gaming machine having a specification of an advantageous section ratio of 70% or less is referred to as a “7U” type, and a gaming machine having a specification of an instructed accessory ratio of 70% or less is referred to as a “7P” type. In a gaming machine having an advantageous section, it is either a "7U" type or a "7P" type. In the case of the “7U” type, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the “7P” type, the instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the “7U” type, the ratio of the advantageous section to all the game sections needs to be “70”% or less, but in the “7P” type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the accessory is total. The payout number may be set to 70% or less, and for example, the entire period or most of the game section may be an advantageous section.

For example, when shifting to a non-advantageous section, it is set so as to win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of 100%, and set so as to win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of almost 100% (for example, about 98%). Or setting to win the advantageous section lottery with a high probability (for example, 70%).
The “7U” type cannot perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery) with reference to the setting value itself, while the “7P” type performs processing related to the instruction function with reference to the setting value itself. It is possible.
In a twelfth embodiment to be described later, most of the inside of the BB2 is in the advantageous section, and a lottery is performed in the advantageous section to determine whether or not to execute the AT.

Further, the management information display LED 74 can be applied to a pachinko gaming machine as a performance display monitor.
The management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) in this case is composed of a two-digit identification seg and a two-digit ratio seg, as in the case of the slot machine (the spinning-type gaming machine). Then, a real-time (measuring) base value for each of the "60000" out-balls (the "base value" indicates the number of safe balls for 100 out-balls) and "60000" The base values before, once, twice, and three times before are individually displayed. For example, the identification seg of the base value in real time is displayed as “bL.”, The identification seg of the base value one time before is displayed as “b1.”, And the identification seg of the source value two times before is “b2.” Is displayed, and the identification seg of the base value three times before is displayed as “b3.”.
As described above, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko gaming machines.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
A main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (this does not mean that only the one shown in FIG. 1 is provided). The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in a second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 and a peripheral device for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection for inputting a signal from an operation switch or the like, and the output port 52 is a connection for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow whose signal from the peripheral device is directed to the main control board 50, and the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow directed from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC having an arithmetic function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, and the like. , And payout at the time of winning.

The MPU including the RWM 53, the ROM 54, the main CPU 55, and the registers is mounted on the main control board 50. It should be noted that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is also mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided externally, in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are sent to the inside of the medal selector.
The movement of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 in the medal selector will be described later with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44 (a pair of closing sensors 44a and 44b) are provided in the medal selector (but are not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are configured to be detected by the passage sensor 46 first.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is for permitting / non-permitting the insertion of medals. When the insertion of medals is not permitted, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 from the payout opening. I do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 to the hopper 35 is formed. The blocker 45 closes an opening formed in a part of a medal passage in the medal selector (an opening leading to a medal return opening) and forms a medal passage for guiding the medal to the hopper 35 side. And an actuator for driving the switching member.

  Here, during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reel 31 to the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when the reels 31 are stopped and the winning of the combination is completed) during the game, the insertion of the medal is not permitted. I do. That is, the blocker 45 permits medal insertion at least when a game is not played.

  In the medal selector, a throwing sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In the present embodiment, the insertion sensor 44 includes a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b disposed at a predetermined distance from each other, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal was detected by one of the insertion sensors 44a, the other input sensor 44b Is configured to be detected. Then, it is determined whether or not a correct medal has been inserted based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on / off.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes, as operation switches operated by the player, a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and The settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the “operation switch (or simply,“ switch ”)” switches on / off of an electric signal based on an operation of an operation body by a player (operator) (receiving an external force). Refers to a device (including an electric circuit and / or an electric component), and does not limit the shape of the operating body operated by the player.

  When the operation switch is off, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to be incident on the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is off). Then, when the (operation body of) the operation switch is operated by the player or the like, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electric signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and is turned on when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 has a lever (bar) shape (for this reason, it is also referred to as a “start lever (switch) 41”), a bet switch 40, a stop switch 42, and a settlement switch. The operation body 43 has a push button shape (for this reason, it is also referred to as a “bet button (switch) 40”, a “stop (stop) button (switch) 42”, and a “payment button (switch) 43”). In a fourth embodiment to be described later, the operation body of the stop switch 42 (the part pressed by the player) is referred to as a “stop button 42a”.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting unit) is provided on the operation body of the operation switch and / or around or near the operation body. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, the LED or the like corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation of the operation switch is not permitted, the operation of the operation switch is prohibited. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission / non-permission state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

  Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the operation of the stop switch 42 is in a receivable state, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to indicate that the operation is possible. Shown in When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. Thereafter, the remaining stop switch 42 becomes operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 whose stop is controlled is terminated and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 (fourth described later). After the embodiment is turned off. Therefore, during that time, all the LEDs of the stop switches 42 emit red light. Then, when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 turns on. The LED of the stop switch 42, which is still emitting red light but not yet operated, emits blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, prescribed number) medals are provided.
The present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

  Note that the prescribed number is predetermined in accordance with, for example, when the accessory is not operated / operated. More specifically, the number is set to three when the accessory is not in operation, at the time of SB operation, at the time of 1BB operation, two at the time of 2BB operation, and the like. By operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, two medals can be inserted, and by operating the bet switch 40a three times, three medals can be inserted. When the specified number is three, three medals can be inserted at a time by operating the three-bet switch 40b. When the specified number is two, the three-bet switch 40b is operated. Two medals can be inserted at a time. If the three-bet switch 40b is operated in a state where a bet less than the specified number has already been bet, bet processing is performed so that the number of bets becomes three.

The start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31 and are operation switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals that have been betted and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Note that a relay board is actually provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. In FIG. 1, illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, and may be connected via another separate board (such as a relay board). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

On the display board 75, a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 are mounted.
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED for displaying the number of medals stored (credit) in the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

Further, the acquired number display LED 78 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts (the number of acquired players) at the time of winning a winning combination, and is composed of two digits of an upper digit and a lower digit like the credit number display LED 76. .
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled so as to be turned off when there is no medal to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit may be turned off and only the lower digit may be displayed as “0”.

The acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the acquired number, but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays pressing order instruction information (informs an advantageous pressing order) in a game that notifies the pressing order during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves to display the acquired number, error content, and push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying the pressing order instruction information may be provided.
During the AT, the notification of the advantageous pressing order is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, a motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 of the symbol display device and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes a reel 31 (three in this embodiment) for displaying a symbol, a motor 32 for driving each of the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

  The motor 32 serves as a driving unit for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control unit 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. When the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and has an outer peripheral surface to which a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a symbol combination corresponding to a combination) are printed is attached.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index (may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether the reel 31 has made one revolution, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected. Further, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, how many pulses of the (stepping) motor 32 are driven, the number of symbols ahead from the symbol on the reference position is stopped on the effective line. Can be identified.

  A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35 from a payout opening, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. The sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cleaned and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal insertion slot 47 are formed to be stored in the hopper 35.
In the present embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance. When a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member (a movable piece 39a in FIG. 7 described later) is moved by the medal. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off by the movement of the predetermined moving member. Based on whether or not the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off within a predetermined time range, it is determined whether or not the medal has been correctly paid out.

For example, if the on of the pair of payout sensors 37 is not detected even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that medals have not been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output the ON signal, it is detected that the medal is clogged.
The details of these operations will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When starting the game, the player inserts a medal that has been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (reserved bet) or cares and inserts a medal from the medal slot 47 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated in a state where a predetermined number of medals of the game are bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, a reel control means 65 described later) performs a lottery by the role lottery means 61 and controls the driving of all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31. Control to rotate. As the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, the symbol on the reel 31 is moved and displayed in the display window at a predetermined speed in the vertical direction.

  Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, a reel control unit 65 described later) controls the drive of the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and the lottery result of the role lottery unit 61 (internal lottery). The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to correspond to the result determined by the means).

  Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning combination is won), payout of medals corresponding to the winning winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are exemplifications, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (decision, selection) of the winning number. Here, the "lottery of the winning number by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the rules of the law of the wind (rules on the recognition of gaming machines and the verification of model types, hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"). The lottery result by the role lottery means 61 is the same as the “result determined by internal lottery” in the rules. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as “internal lottery means 61” in an expression according to the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the role lottery means 61, a prize and replay condition device number and an accessory condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and a prize and replay condition device that can be operated in the game, In addition, the accessory condition apparatus is determined. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determining (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determining (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

  The role lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means (a hardware random number or the like) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. And a winning number determining means for determining a winning number.

  The random number generating means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number that is counted by a counter that counts one in 200 n (nano) seconds and keeps counting from one cycle of “0” to “65535” as long as the slot machine 10 is powered on. Keep counting.

  The random number extracting means extracts the random number generated by the random number generating means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determining means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means with a lottery table described later.

  The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of a winning flag corresponding to each winning based on the lottery result by the winning lottery means 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for every combination. Then, when any of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the lottery means 61, the winning flag of the winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). It should be noted that the winning of the combination includes a case where there is one winning combination (single winning) and a case where there are a plurality of winning combinations (overlapping winning).

The pressing order instruction number selecting means 63 selects a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct answer pressing order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (when a pressing order bell or a pressing order replay is won) ( Decision).
The “push order” of the push order instruction number selected here means an advantageous push order (correct answer order) for the player. For example, at the time of winning the pushing order bell, it indicates the pushing order (correct answering order) in which the higher order bell is won. In addition, at the time of replay overlap winning, it indicates a pushing order for promoting to a favorable RT or a pushing order for not falling down to a disadvantageous RT.

In the present embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique pressing order instruction number.
Then, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 causes the above-mentioned acquired number display LED 78 to display the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically, “ = * ”(“ * ”= 1, 2,...). The function of displaying the push order instruction information when the condition device having the advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an instruction function.
Further, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 starts the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined), the sub control board 50 A command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted to 80.
When receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 displays the correct answer pressing order on the image display device 23 as an image.

  The pressing order number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, even if the push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selecting means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. In the normal section, the pressing order instruction number does not have to be selected.

The effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number, which is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Here, the effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game. The number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The effect group number is different from the above pressing order instruction number, and is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

  Further, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives each game and the effect group number, it is possible to output the effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or the push order replay is won, since the correct answer push order cannot be determined from the effect group number, the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct answer push order based on the effect group number. . On the other hand, during the AT, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won, the push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

The reel control unit 65 controls to start the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when receiving the rotation start command of the reel 31, particularly, when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in the present embodiment. .
Further, after the winning number is determined by the winning lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off state of the winning flag in the current game, and determines a stop position determining table corresponding to the on / off state of the winning flag. And when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is operated. Drive control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control unit 65 enables a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (combination for which the winning flag is on) within a range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is controlled so as to be stoppable on the line, and the reel 31 is controlled so as not to stop the symbol combination corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (combination for which the winning flag is turned off) on the activated line.

Here, “within the range of the stop control of the reel 31” means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is actually stopped or the rotation amount of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)). Within the range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for the predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during the MB operation. Is set to Thus, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of symbols moved from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the stop of the reel 31 is set to four symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

  On the other hand, for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB operation, the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. Thereby, for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB operation, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the stop of the reel 31 is set to one symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated Then, the symbol is controlled so as to stop at a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol corresponding to the winning number does not stop on a predetermined activated line, the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so that the symbol corresponding to the winning number is stopped on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol combination of the hand not corresponding to the winning number stops on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so that the symbol combination of the hand not corresponding to the winning number is not stopped on the activated line (kick-off stop control).
Further, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations have been won (for example, when a pressing order bell is won), the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. In accordance with the predetermined priority, the control for stopping the drawing of the symbol related to the highest priority combination is performed.

The winning determination unit 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination of the reel 31 stopped on the activated line when the reel 31 is stopped is a symbol combination corresponding to one of the winning combinations.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the active line. Specifically, based on the condition device operated in the game and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination that stops on the activated line before the reel 31 actually stops is determined in advance. It is determined, or the symbol combination stopped on the activated line after the reel 31 has stopped is determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control command) required for the effect output from the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (only when a winning number having an AT and a correct pressing order is won). , Effect group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on a winning combination, and the like.

In FIG. 1, a sub control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during a game and during a game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (the control command transmitting means 71) transmits the effect to the sub-control board 80 in one direction by parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) required for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Further, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to the parallel communication, but may be the serial communication, and the serial communication and the parallel communication may be used together.

The sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like, like the main control board 50.
To the sub-control board 80, effect peripheral devices such as the effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. However, the peripheral devices for the effect are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores, as effect data, a program for performing a lottery relating to the effect, various data, and the like.

  The effect lamps 21 are made of, for example, LEDs or the like, and are turned on in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are satisfied. The effect lamp 21 is provided on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and is a back lamp for illuminating the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols vertically continuous from the display window) from behind. A fluorescent lamp that illuminates the design on the reel 31 from above, a frame lamp that is arranged on the front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and that blinks when a winning combination is won, and the like are included.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like. And game information (the number of games played, the number of acquired games, and the like, during the operation of the accessory and during the advantageous section (AT)).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a state until the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic diagram viewed from the front. FIG. 2 shows the inside of the medal selector so that it can be seen. The medals M indicate M1 to M4 according to their positions. The position of M1 indicates a state in which the medal M is placed in the medal holder 47b of the medal slot 47 (a state before being released). That is, at the position of M1, when viewed from the front, the lowermost point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal holder 47b are in contact.
In FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4 to be described later), the entire substantially square portion displayed as the input sensors 44a and 44b is the light receiving / emitting range (eye of the sensor) of the input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively. It is not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b.)

The position of M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer seen from the front. That is, at the position of M2, the uppermost point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal holder 47b overlap. For example, assuming that the player releases his / her hand from the medal M when the medal M is at the position of M1, the medal M falls from the position of M1. Therefore, at the position of M2, the player is released from the player's hand and is falling (moving) downstream.
The “upstream side” indicates the medal insertion slot 47 side, and the “downstream side” indicates the insertion sensor 44b side (hopper 35 side). Speaking of the position of the medal M, M1 → M2 → M3 → M4 from upstream to downstream.

In the example of FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M is detected by the passage sensor 46 when the medal M is located at M2.
Further, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (ON) when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. Further, the position of M4 indicates a position at the moment (off) when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

  The medal insertion slot 47 is a part for inserting a medal M into the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when a player bets or credits a medal M as a game medium. The medal insertion slot 47 includes a medal guard 47a and a medal holder 47b. The medal holder 47b has a substantially curved surface (curvature that is slightly larger than the periphery of the medal M) extending perpendicularly to the plane of the drawing so that a plurality of (up to about ten) superimposed medals M can be simultaneously placed. ).

The surface (the surface seen in FIG. 2) of the medal placing portion 47b where the medal M of the medal guard portion 47a comes into contact with the substantially curved surface is formed to intersect substantially vertically.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, a portion where the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a intersect has an opening through which one medal M can flow. When the two medals M are stacked, the medals M do not drop from the opening, but when the thickness of one medal M is thick, the medals M are formed to flow down from the opening. For this reason, for example, the player places a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placing portion 47b, and presses the medals M in the direction of the medal guard portion 47a while increasing the pressing force. By weakening, the medals M placed on the medal holder 47b can be dropped one by one from the opening into the medal selector.

  When a medal M is inserted (released downward) from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M flows down a passage in the medal selector. In the medal selector, a passage sensor 46, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided from the upstream side. Further, the blocker 45 described above is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a (in FIG. 2, below the input sensor 44a).

  When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided for determining the presence or absence of a medal clogging or goto action, and detects the medal M for a predetermined time (predetermined) from when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M, Further, when the medal M is no longer detected after the elapse of the predetermined time, it is determined that the medal M is normal. On the other hand, if the medal M continues to be detected after the passage of a predetermined time after the passage sensor 46 detects the medal, it is determined that a medal staying error has occurred. If the medal M is not detected before the predetermined time elapses after the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M, it is determined that the medal M is illegally passed.

  When the medal M flows down in the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side in the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the ON state (the output port of the output port 52 relating to the blocker 45 is ON), the blocker 45 forms a medal channel so that the medals M can be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it has a role of sending the medal M that has moved from the upstream side to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b without sending it out of the medal path.

  On the other hand, when the block is in the off state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is off), the blocker 45 moves in FIG. Thereby, an opening (a pit) is formed in the medal passage. As a result, when the blocker 45 is in the off state, the medal M falls from this opening just before reaching the M3 and is sent out of the medal path (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M dropped from this opening is returned to a medal return opening (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, when the prescribed number of the game has already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, no more medals can be bet and credits cannot be made, so the blocker 45 is controlled to be in the off state. Thereby, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 in that state, the medal M falls from the opening and returns to the medal return port.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, since the opening is closed by the blocker 45, the medals M flowing down in the medal passage pass over the blocker 45, and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b It can be moved to the side.

  In this embodiment, the blockers 45 are arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. The medal M can be detected by the passage sensor 46 regardless of the ON state / OFF state of the blocker 45, and when the blocker 45 is ON, the medal M can be guided to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and When the blocker 45 is in the off state, the medal M may be sent to the medal return port without being detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 may be located between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

  The passage sensor 46 may be located upstream of the blocker 45, and is located at a position where the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 can be detected even when the blocker 45 is in the off state. Just do it. Further, in FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so as to be able to detect the medal M when the medal M is located at M2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the medal M is further downstream than the position of M2. It is also possible to arrange the passage sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when moving to.

  The insertion sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting a medal M that has passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed at a predetermined distance from each other. First, when the medal M reaches the position of M3, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side can detect the medal M (turns on from off). When the medal M further flows, the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns from off to on). By determining the on / off timing of these two insertion sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal M is normal. When the medal M reaches the position of M4, it is no longer detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The medals M that have passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are sent to the hopper 35.

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, the position of the medal M at the position of M2, that is, from the moment when the medal M becomes invisible when the medal selector is viewed from the front, to the position of the medal M, that is, the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. (The moving trajectory is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is set as time T2. Note that this value is obtained when the user releases his / her hand (at the initial speed “0”) from the medal M when the medal M is located at M1 and releases it downward. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is located at M2 exceeds “0”.

Further, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position of M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal passage is bent from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with the impact member, the speed of the medal M is reduced, and the medal M is directed to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M3 (the moment when the insertion sensor 44a detects) to the moment when the medal M is located at the M4 (the moment when the detection is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b) is set as the time T3. .

<First Embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows voltage levels when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or when a power failure occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is defined as a supply level V0. In the state of the supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which the power supply is cut off at the time S11 (the event that the power supply is cut off occurs). In the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the voltage drops to the power failure detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from the occurrence of the power interruption (time S11; supply level V0) to the detection of the power interruption (time S12; power interruption detection level V1) is at least 20 interruptions (1 interruption time 2.235 ms × 20). (Interrupt = 44.7 ms) or more.
On the main control board 50, a voltage monitoring device (not shown) (power cutoff detection circuit) is provided. When the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power-off detection level V1 which is a predetermined value, a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and the power supply is detected by detecting whether or not the signal has been input. Detect disconnection.

When the voltage further decreases from the power-off detection level V1 and falls below the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
The example of FIG. 3 shows an example in which the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55 at time S13, and thereafter drops to Low. The main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes lower than the drive voltage limit V2. Therefore, when the power-off occurs at the time S11, the main-control board 50 can terminate the power-off process at least by the time S13. Is set to

The detection of the power-off is performed in the interrupt processing executed every 2.235 ms. However, when the power-off is detected for two consecutive interrupts, the power-off processing is executed in the next interrupt processing. Therefore, in FIG. 3, time S12 is a timing at which it is determined that the voltage is equal to or lower than the power-off detection level V1 in the interrupt processing for two consecutive times, and that power-off has been detected. Then, the power interruption processing is executed in the next interruption processing.
In the interruption processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the power-off is detected. When the power-off is detected, the process shifts to the power-off process (without shifting to the normal interrupt process). In the power-off processing, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The blocker 45 is turned off by the process of turning off the output port 52. Further, a stack pointer saving process, a power-off process completed flag (a flag for determining whether or not a normal power-off process has been performed), a RWM53 checksum execution process, a RWM53 write-inhibit process, and the like are performed. After the sequential execution, a reset wait state (loop processing state) is set. This reset waiting state is a state in which no processing is performed by design.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, in the interrupt process following the interrupt process (time S12) in which the power shutdown is detected, the power shutdown process is executed, and the blocker 45 is turned off.
The power-off processing is not limited to being performed in the interrupt processing subsequent to the interrupt processing in which the power-off is detected, and the power-off processing may be performed in the interrupt processing in which the power-off is detected. In this case, “T1 = S12−S11”.

  On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medal is inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player has released his / her hand from the medal M while the medal M is at the position of M1. In this case, the medal M falls at the initial speed “0”. Thereby, the medal M is released into the medal selector. Then, in FIG. 3, the time S11 at which the power supply is cut off and the time at which the medal M reaches the position of M2 are matched.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when the medal M is located at M4 is T2. Similarly, in FIG. 3, the time T2 elapses from the moment when the medal M is located at M2. Later, it is assumed that the medal M is located at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship of “T2> T1”.

  Therefore, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b does not detect the medal M. Therefore, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return opening (lower plate) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Thus, the medal M is swallowed, but after the power is turned off (after time S11), the process of adding “1” to the medal M (adding “1” to the bet or credit) is executed. Not done. This can eliminate the possibility that betting or credit processing will be executed after the occurrence of power interruption.

For example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the time T1 has elapsed (during power-off processing), when the medal M is located immediately before M4 in FIG. Is passed through the position of M3), the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Further, in the case where the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2, when the time T1 has elapsed (during power-off processing), the medal M is located on the upstream side of the position of the M3 in FIG. At that time, the power of the medal M is turned off without being detected by either the insertion sensor 44a or the insertion sensor 44b.

In FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when the medal M is located at M3 is defined as time T2 '.
In this case, it is preferable to design so as to satisfy the relationship of “T2 ′> T1”.
In a case where the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2 in the case where the design is made in the above relationship, when the medal M reaches the position M3, the blocker 45 is turned off by executing the power-off process. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a, and is sent to the medal return port.

Here, the difference between the related art and the first embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b when the power cut is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power-off, the medal “1” addition processing (bet processing or credit processing) has been executed. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after the power failure occurs. This is because all the processes related to the progress of the game should be stopped immediately after the power-off.
Therefore, with the configuration as in the first embodiment (A), even if the player inserts the medal M through the medal insertion slot 47 and the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after the insertion), Since the addition processing of the medals “1” is not executed, the function of the slot machine 10 can be enhanced.

<First Embodiment (B)>
In the first embodiment (B), the relationship between the closing sensors 44a and 44b and the power-off is determined.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing a process from when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the direction of the arrow indicates the traveling (flowing) direction of the medal M.
FIG. 4A shows a diagram at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the input sensor 44a is at the moment when it is turned on from off, and the input sensor 44b remains off. This position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 4 and reaches the state shown in FIG. 4B, the insertion sensor 44a remains in the state of detecting the medal M, and the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M. Become like Accordingly, in FIG. 4B, the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is at the moment when it is turned on from off.
In FIG. 4, even when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M overlap, both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown by solid lines, but the medal M and the insertion sensor 44a and It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged on the near side or the back side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.

When the medal M further advances and reaches the state shown in FIG. 4C, the medal M is detected by both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the input sensor 44a in this case is on, and the input sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 mm (so-called 25 pie (φ)) in the general specification and 30 mm (so-called 30 pie (φ)) in the special specification. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b so that the state shown in FIG. Here, as described later, it is determined whether or not the state shown in FIG. 4C, that is, the time during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are on (detecting the medal M) is within a predetermined range. Determines whether or not a medal insertion error is determined. Therefore, the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b differs depending on how to set the time during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b are on.

  When the medal M further advances from the state of FIG. 4C, as shown in FIG. 4D, the insertion sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M. In this case, the input sensor 44a is the moment when the input sensor 44a is turned off from on, and the input sensor 44b is kept on. When the medal M further advances, the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M as shown in FIG. Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b is at the moment when the input sensor 44b is turned off from on. Note that the position of the medal M in FIG. 4E corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a time chart showing ON / OFF of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off (the input sensor 44b remains off), and corresponds to the timing in FIG.
Next, the time at which the medal M is detected (turned from off to on) by the insertion sensor 44b (FIG. 4B) is defined as S22. Furthermore, the time (FIG. 4D) at the moment when the insertion sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M (turns from on to off) is set to S23. Further, the time (FIG. 4E) at the moment when the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M (turns from on to off) is defined as S24.

  Here, if the time Ta (from time S21 to S23) during which the insertion sensor 44a is detecting the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 1) The main control board 50 determines that a normal medal M has passed, and when it is out of this range, it determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

  Further, the time Tb (from time S22 to S23) during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are detecting the medal M is within a range of not less than 4.47 ms (2 interrupts) and less than 118.455 ms (53 interrupts). If this is the case (condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the medal has passed the normal medal M, and if it is out of this range, it determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (from time S22 to S24) during which the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3) The main control board 50 determines that the medal M is passing normally, and if the medal M is out of this range, a medal passing error is determined.
When all of the above conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, it is determined that the passing of the medal M is normal, and when at least one of the conditions is not satisfied, a medal passing error is determined.

As shown in FIG. 5, when both of the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), the input monitoring counter is decremented by "1".
Here, the insertion monitoring counter becomes “+1” when the above-described passage sensor 46 detects the medal M, and when the medal normally passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b (both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). The counter is incremented by "-1" when the state changes from "on" to "off" (at time S24). That is, in a normal state, “1” and “0” are repeated.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal, the insertion monitoring counter becomes “−1” and the main control board 50 determines that the medal has passed. I do.

When the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter = “+ 1”) and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, the passage sensor 46 further detects the medal M. When the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value equal to or greater than “2”, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error has occurred. For example, when the normal value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to “0” to “2”, when the insertion monitoring counter becomes “3” or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error has occurred. Can be
Note that the input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

  In FIG. 5, at time S24, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by “1”, and when it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 Execute processing (bet processing or credit processing). For example, if the bet number is less than the specified number at that time, "1" addition processing of the bet number is executed. Specifically, when the prescribed number in the game is "3" and the bet number at that time is "0", the bet number is increased from "0" by the "1" addition process of the bet number. Update to "1".

At that time, if the bet amount has already reached the specified number and the credit amount has not reached the maximum number of "50", the credit amount "1" addition process is executed. For example, if the credit amount at that time is “10”, the credit amount is updated to “11”.
When the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number “50”, the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. Thus, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in this case, even if the medal M is inserted, it is not detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In FIG. 5, in addition to ON / OFF of the input sensors 44a and 44b, the timing at the time of occurrence of power interruption and the timing of power interruption detection are displayed. FIG. 5 shows Example 1 and Example 2, both of which illustrate an example in which the power is cut off at the timing when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off (time S21).
Then, in Example 1, the power interruption is detected after a lapse of time T1 from the time S21 when the power interruption occurs. Here, in Example 1, “T1> T3” is set. Therefore, when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power is cut off, the power cut-off process is started after the process of adding “1” to the medal M is already performed.

Here, the time T3 from the time S21 to the time S24 can be represented by “Ta + Tc−Tb”. Therefore, the minimum time of the time T3 corresponds to 4 interrupts, and is “8.94 ms”.
The maximum time of the time T3 is equivalent to 113 interrupts, and is “252.555 ms”.
And in Example 1, it is set so that the power-off process is always executed after the elapse of the time S24. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power interruption (time S21) to execution of the power interruption processing is set to be 114 interrupts or more.

  With the above setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M (time S21), the power-off process is executed after the process of adding “1” of the medal M is performed. , The medal M is normally betted or credited. Therefore, swallowing of the medal M can be prevented.

Further, in Example 2, contrary to Example 1, the power-off process is executed before the process of adding “1” to the medal M is executed. That is, in Example 2, the setting is made so as to satisfy the relationship of “T1 <T3”.
The time T3 from the time S21 to the time S24 corresponds to four interrupts in the minimum time as described above. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship of “T1 <T3”, it is necessary to execute the power-off processing within three interrupts from the occurrence of the power-off. However, it is difficult to perform the power-off processing within three interrupts from the occurrence of the power-off, so the minimum time Tc is set to be longer than four interrupts. For example, setting the minimum time of the time Tc to 15 interrupts can be mentioned. If the time T1 from the occurrence of the power interruption (time S21) to the power interruption processing is set to about 10 interrupts, the power interruption processing is executed before the time S24 when the power interruption occurs at the time S21. It becomes possible.

  When the power-off process is performed, the “1” addition (bet or credit) process of the medal M is not performed thereafter. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the time S21 (when the power is turned off), the process of adding “1” to the medal M1 is not performed. As a result, there is a demerit that the medal M is swallowed. However, as described in the first embodiment (A), after the power is cut off, the “1” addition processing of the medal M is not performed. The power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<First Embodiment (C)>
In the first embodiment (C), the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and the power-off is determined.
When the medals to be paid out are added to the credits, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and the storage area of the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so as to be a number corresponding to the credit number stored in the storage area.

  Then, when paying out medals after the number of credits reaches the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out medals from the hopper 35 (discharge from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect on / off each time one medal is paid out. When the detection result of on / off by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M is determined. Is not paid out correctly, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

  FIG. 6 is a plan view illustrating an operation when the medal M is paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a hopper disk (substantially disk-shaped rotating disk) is attached to the bottom surface of the hopper 35, and the hopper disk is rotated by driving a hopper motor 36. In this hopper disk, a plurality of openings capable of holding the medals M are formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disk. The medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter the opening of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk rotates and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disk are discharged one by one. The medals M are discharged, and new medals M in the hopper 35 enter the vacated opening.

In FIG. 6, the medal M located at M1 is the one immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. Both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are components constituting a medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medal M is paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that reciprocates each time one medal M is paid out. In a no-load state, the movable shaft 38b is arranged at a position indicated by a solid line in the figure, and is fixed by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6; equivalent to a spring 39b in FIG. 7 described later). 38a. The medal M (M1) immediately after being discharged from the opening of the hopper disk comes into contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
In a state where the medal M is arranged at the position (M1) shown by a solid line in FIG. 6 and is in contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, the medal M is located between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. Narrower than diameter. Therefore, at this time, the medal M cannot pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

  A pushing force in the direction F1 in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M discharged from the opening of the hopper disk. When a pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M, the medal M can move in the F1 direction, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in the drawing. Note that the fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the direction F2 in the figure while maintaining the state of being in contact with the medal M. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b to a position where the medal M can pass. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is larger than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure.

  Thereby, the medal M passes through the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and is discharged in the F1 direction (medal payout opening side) in the drawing. The medal M at this time is indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is discharged, the force pressing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is returned to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 again by the force of the spring.

  FIG. 7 is a plan view illustrating the on (detection) / off (non-detection) state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medal M is paid out as described above in the medal payout device. FIG. 7 shows that the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) every time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7A shows a state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is located at a position (initial position) indicated by a solid line in FIG. The movable piece 39a is attached so as to be rotatable about a central axis in the figure, and is urged clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise in the figure, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is urged toward the fixed shaft 38a in the figure.
In a state where the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise in FIG. 7 by the spring 39b and no force other than the tension of the spring 39b is applied to the movable piece 39a, the movable piece 39a is fixed to a predetermined stopper (not shown). 7), it stops at the position shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7A, on the left side of the movable piece 39a in the figure, a payout sensor 37a (upper side in the figure) and 37b (lower side in the figure) are arranged. The movable piece 39a is formed to extend toward the payout sensors 37a and 37b. When the movable piece 39a is stopped at the position shown in FIG. ing.
In FIG. 7, each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b shows the housing of the sensor, and the illustration of the light emitting / receiving unit (the eyes of the sensor) is omitted. This point is different from the closing sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIGS.

Here, the payout sensor 37a is in an on state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is detected, and is in an off state (for example, FIG. 7B) when the movable piece 39a is no longer detected. It is set to be.
Similarly, the payout sensor 37b is in an off state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is not detected, and is turned on (for example, FIG. 7C) when the movable piece 39a is detected. Is set to
In the state of FIG. 7A, the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is in an on state, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is in an off state.

  As described with reference to FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the direction F1 in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts moving in the direction F2 in FIG. 7A, the movable piece 39a starts rotating counterclockwise against the urging force of the spring 39b. When the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a goes out of the inside of the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the payout sensor 37a does not detect the movable piece 39a, so that it is turned off. Even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7B, the payout sensor 37a is off, and the payout sensor 37b is off.

  In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b further moves in the F2 direction and reaches a position indicated by a two-dot chain line (a position where the medal M can pass through a gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b) in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise, and reaches the position shown in FIG. Thereby, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b detects the movable piece 39a. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7C, the payout sensor 37a is in the off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state.

  In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further ejected from the position of M2, there is no force for urging the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 in FIG. 6, so that the movable shaft 38b is moved to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. Return. The return force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. Thereby, in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7D shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7D, the payout sensor 37a is in an off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in an off state.

  When the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37a, and the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a. This returns to the state of FIG. 7A (initial state). In the state of FIG. 7A, as described above, the payout sensor 37a is on, and the payout sensor 37b is off. When returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a time chart showing ON / OFF of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the payout process of medals has been started and the hopper motor drive signal is in the ON state.
In FIG. 8, before the time S31, the state is as shown in FIG. At time S31, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is turned off). Next, when reaching time S32, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is Td.

  The payout sensor 37a is in the off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state until time S33. At the time S33, the payout sensor 37b is turned off. This state is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is Te. Then, when the time reaches S34, the state returns to the state (initial position) in FIG. 7A, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the on / off time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and determines that a medal payout error has occurred when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are not within a predetermined time range.
For example, in FIG. 8, the time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, when the payout sensor 37b is turned off by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a is turned off, it is determined that the payout sensor 37b is normal. If not, it is determined that a medal payout error has occurred.

  The time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on is set to be equal to or longer than 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) and shorter than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is turned off is monitored, and when the time Te is not within the above-mentioned predetermined time range, The main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

  Further, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf until the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts). ) And less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when the time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Tf is monitored until the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. When the time is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Also, in FIG. 8, similarly to FIGS. 3 and 5, the time from the occurrence of the power interruption to the power-off processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that a power interruption occurs at the timing of time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example in which power interruption is detected by 20 interrupts has been described. However, in the example of FIG. 8 (first embodiment (C)), at least after the time S34 has elapsed (the time from the time S31 has elapsed). At the time of T1), a setting is made so as to detect the power-off and execute the power-off processing.

  Here, the maximum time (normal operation) of the time “Td + Tf” is “12 + 27 = 39” interrupts. Therefore, the time T1 from power-off to execution of power-off processing is set to, for example, 40 interrupts (89.4 ms). Set. With this setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power cutoff processing can be started after the payout processing of one medal has been normally completed. That is, “(Td + Tf) <T1” can be set.

Conventionally, power interruption (power failure etc.) has occurred during the medal payout process. In this case, depending on the timing of the medal payout process and the power-off, it is determined that the medal has been paid out even though the medal has not been paid out, and there is a possibility that the player may lose money.
On the other hand, in the first embodiment (C), medals can be correctly paid out even if the power is cut off during the payout processing of medals.

  In particular, when the medal payout process is started, that is, even when the power is cut off at the timing of time S31 in FIG. 8, the power cutoff is detected after finishing one medal payout process, and the process proceeds to the power cutoff process. Therefore, for example, when the payout sensor 37a is turned off or when the payout sensor 37b is turned on, the power-off process is not executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the power-off process from being performed during the medal payout process and the medal payout process from being stopped before the (one) medal payout process ends normally.

  If the time T1 is set to be longer than necessary, the payout process of the next medal may be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is performed at least before the next medal payout process is performed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of one medal payout process is time T4 and that the payout sensor 37a is changed from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, "T1 <T4" is set.

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to a gate trace formed on a board case of a main control board 50.
In the related art, the shape, size, position, and the like of the gate mark of the substrate case are determined by a mold designer at the time of mold production, solely for the convenience of mold production.
However, since the gate trace is an uneven surface, even if a hole is made to aim at the gate trace, for example, there is a case where it cannot be visually recognized (not noticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is disposed immediately below the gate trace, a hole is made in the gate trace, and a wire is passed through the hole, thereby being accessed by the main CPU 55 (goto action is performed). Done). In particular, in the case where the gate mark has a shape that is thinner than other portions, holes are more easily formed than in other portions.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent the goto action from being performed using the gate trace of the substrate case.

FIG. 9 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58) in an exploded manner.
The board case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, and both are molded products (injection) made of transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is accommodated inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed from outside the board case 56.

On the main control board 50, electronic components such as the above-described main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED, also referred to as "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display"), and set value display LED 73 are provided. It is installed. Although many electronic components such as the above-described RWM 53 and ROM 54 are mounted on the main control board 50, they are not shown in FIG. Further, although not shown in FIG. 9, on the main control board 50, bet switches 40a and 40b, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and LEDs for checking the failure of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are mounted. Have been. Note that the failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is turned off when the start switch 41 is off, and when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects on). ) Is an LED that is turned on (lit).

  It should be noted that the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LED of other operation switches and sensors, which will be described later, are turned off when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects on), and when the operation switch is off. You may comprise so that it may light.

Further, two failure confirmation LEDs for the bet switches 40a and 40b are provided for the bet switches 40a and 40b, and are turned off when the bet switch 40 is not operated, and the bet switch 40 is operated. When the electric signal at that time is received, the LED is turned on.
Further, a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for the passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are provided for each sensor, and are turned off when no medal is detected, and turned on when a medal is detected. LED.
Then, the administrator operates, for example, the start switch 41 to check whether the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is turned on or off, thereby determining whether the start switch 41 has a failure (energization). Can be confirmed. The same applies to other switches and sensors.

  When the front door is opened during normal operation (when the setting is not being changed and the setting is not being checked), the failure checking LED may be turned on / off by operating the start switch 41 or the like. . Alternatively, the failure confirmation may be performed by opening the front door and performing a predetermined operation after a door open error occurs. Further, the light may be turned on / off by operating the start switch 41 or the like at all times (even during setting change or setting confirmation).

The model number of the board is displayed (printed or the like) on the main control board 50. Although not shown in FIG. 9, a model number and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surface of the RWM 53 and the ROM 54.
Furthermore, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed at four corners of the main control board 50.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at four inner corners on the lower surface of the lower cover 58. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw holes 50a and the bosses 58c overlap. can do.

  When the upper cover 57 is placed on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed into a shape that fits into each other (in FIG. 9, the specific shape of the fitting portion is not shown). Further, caulking portions 57a are provided on both left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the drawing. Similarly, caulking portions 58a are provided on the left and right rows in the drawing of the lower cover 58. In FIG. 9, illustration of the specific shape and the detailed shape of the caulked portions 57 a and 58 b is omitted.

When the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and caulking is performed using the caulking portions 57a and 58a, thereafter, at least a part of the caulking portions 57a and 58a must be destroyed (unless plastic deformation is performed). The cover 57 and the lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
Thus, security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 9, two gate marks 57b are provided on the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. In the board case 56 (in a state where the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted), the side where the main control board 50 is housed is referred to as “inside”, and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as “outside”. .
In FIG. 9, the gate trace 57b is provided in two places, but is not limited thereto, and may be provided in any place.

Here, the “gate” is a gate at the time of pouring resin (hot water) into a mold at the time of resin molding. is there.
When the board case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, it is low cost to use a mold that is vertically divided in FIG. When a multi-cavity mold is used, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of fluidity of resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide a gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed not on the side surface but on the upper surface in FIG.

Further, in consideration of the cutting of the protrusion of the gate mark at the time of molding, the gate mark is preferably provided outside.
From the above, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided outside the upper surface.
For the same reason as above, the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided outside the lower surface (the surface opposite to the visible surface in FIG. 9). In FIG. 9, the gate traces 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided at two places like the gate traces 57b of the upper cover 57, but may be provided at one place or at three or more places. Is also good.

  Further, when the resin (hot water) flows from the gate into the mold, if the spread of the resin (hot water) in the mold is not uniform and a cooling time difference occurs, the molded product may be warped and deformed. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the gate position of the molded product at a position where the spread of the resin (hot water) in the mold becomes uniform. Further, when the gate is provided at a plurality of locations, it is preferable that the distance from the end of the molded product to the gate and the distance between the gates are made as equal as possible.

  10A is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 of the board case 56 and the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58, and the main control board 50. FIG. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together). FIG. 2 is a plan view as viewed from above. Further, the main control board 50 is seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57.

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of the cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. (A), and (c) shows Example 2 of the cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Is shown. In these cross-sectional views, hatching is omitted from the viewpoint of the visibility of the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10A, when the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56, the two gate traces 57b extend vertically (on the main control board 50 side) (directly below) the upper cover 57 from the two gate traces 57b. The model number display, management information display LED 74, set value display LED 73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are set so as not to be located. As described above, the RWM 53, the ROM 54, and the LED for failure confirmation are also mounted on the main control board 50, but it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not positioned directly above these.

The gate traces 57 are arranged as described above for the following reasons.
Even after the slot machine 10 has been installed in the market, it is necessary for the main control board 50 to visually check whether any unauthorized modification or the like has been performed. In particular, it is necessary to check whether or not the main CPU 55 and the like (including the RWM 53 and the ROM 54; the same applies hereinafter), whether the main CPU 55 and the like have been altered by the goto action, and the like. Furthermore, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually check the main control board 50 from outside the board case 56. is there.
The board case 56 in which the main control board 50 is housed is attached to the inside of the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, inside the rear surface. This is for mounting at a position where the numerical values displayed by the set value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 are easy to see.

  Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 looks at the board case 56 (main control board 50) from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. That is, it is considered that the board case 56 (main control board 50) is visually observed as shown in FIG. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are arranged in the vertical direction (immediately below) the gate trace 57b, the visibility may be hindered by the gate trace 57. In particular, information displayed (printed or the like) on the upper surface of the main CPU 55 or the like can be visually observed without obstructing visibility.

  Since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from a transparent resin, the visibility is not completely impaired even immediately below the gate trace 57b. However, as shown in (b) and (c) in FIG. 10, the cross section of the gate trace 57b becomes an uneven surface, so that the visibility immediately below the gate trace 57b is reduced (it is worse than a plane). It is true. In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10B, since the upper end surface of the projection 57d is a cut surface, whitening may occur due to stress at the time of cutting the resin. Therefore, also in this case, the visibility immediately below the gate mark 57b is hindered.

In addition, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is a transparent surface having no irregularities except for the gate traces 57b, even if a hole is made by a goto action, the upper surface can be easily noticed visually.
On the other hand, the gate trace 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. For this reason, if a hole is formed in the gate hole 57b and then the hole is sealed with, for example, a resin material or the like, it may not be easy to visually determine whether or not the hole has been formed in the gate mark 57b. Therefore, there is a possibility that a goto action using the gate trace 57b is performed.

  On the other hand, when a hole is made in the gate trace 57b, if the main CPU 55 and the like are positioned in the vertical direction (immediately below) the gate trace 57b, the goto action is easily performed. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are not arranged in the vertical direction (immediately below) the gate trace 57b, it is difficult to access the main CPU 55 and the like, and it is possible to make the goto action difficult.

  The model number displayed (printed or the like) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information for checking whether there is any fraud. Therefore, the model number is displayed to make it easy to confirm (read) the model number. The gate trace 57b was not arranged directly above the region. Further, when a gate mark 57b is present immediately above the model number indication, a hole is made in the gate mark 57b to access the inside of the substrate case 56, and to prevent the model number indication from being tampered with. The gate trace 57b is not arranged directly above the model number display.

  Further, with respect to the set value display LED 73, it is necessary to see the displayed numerical value when changing the setting or when confirming the setting. Also, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to look at the displayed numerical value in order to confirm whether the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like are within appropriate ranges. Therefore, the gate trace 57b is not disposed directly above these LEDs. Further, similarly to the above, a hole is made in the gate trace 57b by using the gate trace 57b, and the LEDs in the substrate case 56 are accessed therefrom. The gate trace 57b is not arranged on the top.

  Also, regarding the above-described failure confirmation LED, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates the operation switch to confirm whether the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch is turned on, and thus the visibility is improved. For this reason, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above the failure confirmation LED. Similar to the above, the failure confirmation LED is not arranged in the vertical direction (immediately below) the gate trace 57b to make it difficult to perform the goto action.

In each of the cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in FIG. 10B and Example 2 shown in FIG. 10C, the outer shape of the gate trace 57b is the same. Then, in Example 1 of (b), the inside of the upper surface of the gate trace 57b remains a flat surface. On the other hand, in Example 2 of (c), the inside of the upper surface of the gate trace 57b is formed in a projection shape (thickness).
The outside of the gate trace 57b has a projection 57d at the center thereof, and has a recess 57c formed so as to sink into a cylindrical shape at the outer periphery thereof. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected at the time of molding, and this boundary is cut by a cutter when the molded product is separated from the mold. Therefore, the upper end surface of the projection 57d is a cut surface by the cutter. The boundary between the gate and the molded product can be cut by a method of automatically cutting at the time of injection by a molding machine, or a method of cutting in a later step.

  Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, it is costly to completely process the cut surface into a smooth surface, in other words, to make the height of the protrusion 57d almost “0”. High and difficult. Therefore, the recess 57c is formed so that the protrusion 57d does not protrude above the outer surface of the upper surface of the upper cover 57 even if the height remains slightly. Thus, when the assembling operator touches the upper cover 57, it is possible to prevent the projection 57d from being injured.

As shown in FIG. 10B, when the recess 57c is provided in the gate trace 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 is reduced by that much. As described above, if there is a thin part even in a part, there is a possibility that the gotting action of making a hole in the recess 57 c and accessing the inside of the substrate case 56 may be facilitated.
Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 10C, a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inner side) of the upper surface on which the gate mark 57b is provided to prevent the thickness of only the recess 57c from being reduced. I have. If the protrusion 57e is not provided and a portion where the wall thickness is reduced is not provided, it is possible to make it difficult to make a hole in the recess 57c.

  The protrusion 57e not only contributes to countermeasures against fraud by preventing a part of the thickness of the gate trace 57b from becoming thin, but also functions as a dimple (pool) during molding. In FIG. 10B, when the resin (hot water) is injected from the mold gate (a position corresponding to the protrusion 57d) and the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) is discharged. There is a possibility that the flow may change rapidly and the flow may not be stable. Therefore, by providing a dimple (water pool) at a position facing the tip of the gate, when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate, the flow of the resin (hot water) is less rapidly changed, and (Hot water) can flow stably. The protrusion 57e may have various shapes such as a quadrangular cross-section, a triangular cross-section, a trapezoidal cross-section (in the case of FIG. 10C), a dome cross-section, and the like. Any shape may be used as long as the shape can prevent the occurrence of the heat.

  Regarding the visibility in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate trace 57b, it is better that the lower side of the gate trace 57 is smoother than the uneven shape. Therefore, regarding the visibility just below the gate trace 57b, the shape of FIG. 10B is superior to the shape of FIG. 10C. In addition, the shape of FIG. 10B simplifies the shape of the mold because it is not necessary to form a portion corresponding to the protrusion 57e in the mold as compared with the shape of FIG. 10C. Lower costs).

Also, the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 is provided on the outside (the lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, the projection 57d and the recess 57c shown in FIG. 10B are formed on the outside. As described above, it is more convenient to provide the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c on the outside of the molded product in terms of the molding process.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58, the pin position of the main CPU 55 and the like of the main control board 50 is set so as not to be located in the vertical direction of the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58. This is because a hole is formed in the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 so that the pins of the main CPU 55 and the like cannot be accessed.
When the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 has the shape shown in FIG. 10C, the protrusion 57e in FIG. 10C faces the pin side of the main control board 50. It goes without saying that the pins projecting from the lower surface of the control board 50 and the projections 57e are formed so as not to interfere (contact) with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together, the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction. It is preferable to dispose (shift) them so that they do not match. In particular, when the gate traces 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10B are used, a part of the gate traces 57b and 58b (the recessed portion 57c) becomes thin, but the thinner part is the upper cover. By arranging the lower cover 58 and the lower cover 58 at positions that do not overlap each other, it is possible to prevent portions that are easily targeted from overlapping.
When the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 are overlapped in the vertical direction, the position of the gate trace of the other cover can be determined only by looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 are prevented from overlapping in the vertical direction.

<Third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, when communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection) Later, when communication is restored, or when communication fails due to the influence of noise, etc.).
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits commands such as the pressing order instruction number and information on the operated stop switch 42 to the sub-control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect based on the command received from the main control substrate 50, and updates the effect in accordance with the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are disconnected and communication becomes impossible. The causes include poor contact and radio waves. When the sub-control board 80 stops receiving the command from the main control board 50, the effect stops in the current state. Neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 determines whether there is a disconnection in the communication between them. For this reason, even if a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80, the main control board 50 proceeds with the game (operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42). Etc.), the command transmission processing to the sub-control board 80 is continued. On the other hand, when the sub control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, the effect state at that time is maintained.
Even when the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are disconnected, for example, during an AT, the main control board 50 causes the acquisition number display LED 78 to display the pressing order by operating the instruction function. Displays instruction information. Thereby, even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning normally, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct answering order by looking at the pushing order instruction information.
Further, the player can compare the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 with the effect contents (correct pressing order) displayed on the image display device 23 as images. When it is, it can be known that a problem has occurred in the image display by the sub-control board 80.

For example, when a disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game and communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game, the command transmitted from the main control board 50 can be received by the sub control board 80. Sometimes, the effect cannot be suddenly switched to the "N + 1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 determines that the “N + 1” game item has been started when the command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (the command notifying the start of the game) has not been received. This is because it cannot be determined. For this reason, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then returned, there is a possibility that the player may be misunderstood depending on the contents of the effect.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then returned, the effect is given as unnatural as possible while minimizing the misunderstanding of the player. Output an effect that does not exist.

FIG. 11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 in the third embodiment (referred to as “main operation” in FIG. 11) and the effect display by the sub-control board 80 (referred to as “sub-display” in FIG. 11). ), And shows five examples including pattern 1 (example 1) to pattern 5 (example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 all show an example in which communication is disabled in the course of the "N" game (disconnection occurs) and communication is restored in the course of the "N + 1" game.
In the main operation of FIG. 11, “bet” means that the bet switch 40 has been operated and a specified number of valid bets has been placed. Also, “start” means that the game has been started by operating the start switch 41 after the specified number has been bet. Furthermore, for example, “right stop” means that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 stops).

Further, in the sub-display, the “push order effect” means an effect in which, for example, in a game that has been won in the push order bell or the push order replay, the correct answer order is image-displayed. Specifically, for example, “right and left middle display” means an effect that informs that the correct answer pressing order is “right and left middle”. In addition, for example, “left center display” is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, and the stop switch operated second is the left stop switch 42 operated third. Means production to inform.
Furthermore, for example, the “right stop effect” means an effect that the right stop switch 42 was operated (the right reel 31 stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 was operated was received. means.

In the pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated in the “N” game, the main control board 50 performs a lottery of a winning combination as described above. In this game, “right and left middle” is an example in which a pressing order bell which is the correct answer pressing order is won. In this case, the main control board 50 transmits a pressing order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct pressing order “right and left middle” to the sub control board 80 during the AT. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 outputs to the image display device 23 a pressing order effect for displaying the correct pressing order of “right and left”.
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the correct pressing order “center right” on the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the right stop switch 42 as the first stop after seeing the correct answer pressing order (right stop). Thereby, the right reel 31 stops, and a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped), and displays the middle right and left display and the middle left display (other middle). Are displayed as "-middle left,""middleleft," etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection has occurred after the right reel 31 stopped, and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 has been disabled (sub disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication is disabled during the game.

  Even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disabled (even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning), the main control board 50 can proceed with the game. The example of the pattern 1 shows an example in which the left and middle stop switches 42 are operated (the left and middle reels 31 are stopped) after the occurrence of the disconnection in the “N” game eye (left middle stop). ).

  Next, it is assumed that a bet operation for the “N + 1” game eye is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the “N + 1” game item, similarly to the “N” game item, an example is shown in which “right and left middle” has won the push order bell (or push order replay), which is the correct answer order. In the case of the "N + 1" game, as in the case of the "N" game, an example in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle left and right pressing order is shown. Not limited to this, any result of the lottery may be used.

  Note that, when the player wins the push order bell (or the push order replay) having the correct answer push order in the “N + 1” game item, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, even when the correct push order is not displayed on the image display device 23, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct push order by the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Become.

In the “N + 1” game, an example in which the player first operates the right stop switch 42 is shown. Thereafter, it is assumed that communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is restored before the second left stop switch 42 is operated.
Thus, when the player operates the left stop switch 42, which is the second stop switch 42, the command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display so as to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub-control board 80 updates as the continuation of the effect already displayed, that is, the effect of the “N” game.

  Therefore, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the “N + 1” game is actually operated, but the sub-control board 80 sets the second stop switch 42 (left) of the “N” game. Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct push order in the “N” game is left, in this example, it is operated in the correct push order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (push order correct answer effect) and outputs an effect of the last middle display.

Then, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated in the “N + 1” game, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect corresponding to the third stop of the “N” game, that is, a middle stop effect.
In the case of the “N + 1” game, if the player wins the role having the correct answer pressing order and the correct answer pressing order is other than right and left, the effect is output as described above in the situation of the pattern 1. Is done. That is, in the “N + 1” game, when the pressing order operated by the player is right and left, even if the pressing order corresponds to the incorrect pressing order, a pressing order failure such as a pattern 2 described later occurs. The effect is not output.

  Furthermore, in the case of the "N + 1" game, if the player has won a role that does not have the correct answer pressing order, or even if the player has not won the role, if the pressing order operated by the player is the middle right and left, The same effect as is output. That is, even when the “N + 1” game item does not have the correct push order, the sub-control board 80 determines that the left stop switch 42 is operated after the communication is restored (in the example of the pattern 1). When a command is received, a left stop effect (push order correct answer effect) is output, and further, a middle display is output.

  Next, when a bet for the “N + 2” game is made and the start switch 41 is operated to start the “N + 2” game, the main control board 50 sends a “ A command corresponding to the start of the "N + 2" game is transmitted. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect at the start of the “N + 2” game eye. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, a command of the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving these commands, the sub-control board 80 performs a pressing order effect and displays a correct answering pressing order as in the start of the “N” game eyes.

As described above, in the pattern 1, until the third stop of the “N + 1” game, the sub-control board 80 performs the “N” game based on the command received from the main control board 50 (the “N + 1” game). Is continuously output, and when the “N + 2” game item is started, the effect is updated to the “N + 2” game item.
At the end of the game, the main control board 50 transmits a command for the acquired number to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 may display an image of the acquired number together with the AT. In such a case, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command of the acquired number at the end of the “N” game, that is, during the disconnection. "The acquired number at the end of the game item remains displayed. Then, when the communication is restored and the command of the acquired number at the end of the “N + 1” game is received, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display so as to be the acquired number at the end of the “N + 1” game. .

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. The timing of the disconnection is the same as that of the pattern 1, but the timing at which the communication is restored is different from that of the pattern 2. The pattern 2 is an example in which the communication is restored after the left stop which is the second stop in the “N + 1” game.
In the pattern 2, the main operation and the sub display in the “N” game are the same as those in the pattern 1, and the description is omitted.
Next, in the “N + 1” game, the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of right and left, and it is assumed that communication is restored after the second left stop.

  Immediately before the communication is restored, the sub control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect and the middle left display of the “N” game. In this state, the communication is restored, and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) during the “N + 1” game, the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the middle stop command while the middle left display is being performed, it determines that the order is the wrong answer pressing order, and outputs a pressing order failure effect. In the third embodiment, after the push order failure effect is output, the subsequent push order effect is not output.

In addition, when it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle left and right pushing order in the “N + 1” game, the communication is restored after the middle left stop, and then the right stop command is issued by the right stop command. Also when transmitted to the substrate 80, a push order failure effect is output in the same manner as described above. Since the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect and the middle left display, if the right stop command is received at this time, the same stop command is received twice in one game. . Even in such a case, the pressing order is processed as failure without performing error notification or the like, and the effect is output.
Then, as in the case of the pattern 1, when the “N + 2” game item is started, a command at the start of the “N + 2” game item is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 starts the effect of the “N + 2” game eyes.

In the pattern 3, the main operation and the sub display of the “N” game are the same as those in the pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which the communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop during the “N + 1” game item. Therefore, in the “N + 1” game, after the communication is restored, the left stop command, which is the third stop, is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Since the sub-control board 80 has output the "middle left display" of the "N" game, if it receives a command to stop left in this state, it determines that the correct answer is the pushing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (push order correct answer effect), and then outputs a middle display.

  However, on the main control board 50 side, the game ends for the “N + 1” th game at the left third stop. Next, the process proceeds to the “N + 2” game, and when the command at the start of the “N + 2” game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command, and the “N + 2” game Switch to the production at the start. Therefore, the left stop effect and the middle display that have been output until then are cancelled. Also, even if a command at the start of the “N + 2” game eye is received during the output of the middle display, an error notification or the like is not performed, and an effect at the start of the “N + 2” game eye is output in accordance with the received command. .

Pattern 4 is an example of displaying the number of remaining games in AT in the sub display. In pattern 4, the main operation, the disconnection timing, and the communication return timing are the same as in pattern 3.
The main control board 50 transmits a command of the remaining number of games of the AT to the sub-control board 80 at the start of each game or game. When receiving the command of the remaining number of games of the AT from the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 updates the display of the remaining number of games of the AT. During the AT, the display of the number of remaining games is not performed alone, but is output together with the pressing order effect of the pattern 3.

In pattern 4, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of a game), the main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games in the AT to the sub control board 80. Here, it is assumed that the remaining number of games in the AT is 10 games in the “N” game.
The sub control board 80 displays the remaining number of games in the AT (10 remaining games) based on the command received from the main control board 50 at the start of the “N” game eye.
Then, if the disconnection occurs in the course of the “N” game and the disconnection state continues at the start of the “N + 1” game, the main control board 50 starts the “N + 1” game at the start (at the start). Although the process for transmitting the command of the remaining number of games (9 games) in the AT to the control board 80 is executed, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to disconnection). For this reason, in the “N + 1” game eyes, “the remaining 10 games” of the “N” game eyes remain displayed.

  Then, when the communication is restored in the middle of the “N + 1” game (after the middle left stop) and the game shifts to the “N + 2” game, at the start of the “N + 2” game, the main control board 50 On the other hand, a command for the remaining number of games (8 games) in the AT is transmitted. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the display of the remaining 10 games to the display of the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is an example in which the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication return timing are the same as pattern 4, but the “N” game is the remaining one game of AT.
At the start of the “N” game (when the start switch 41 is operated), the main control board 50 transmits a command of the remaining number of games (one remaining game) in the AT to the sub control board 80. When receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the display of the remaining one game (from the display of the remaining two games until then).
When the disconnection occurs after the right stop of the “N” game, the main control board 50 determines that the remaining number of games in the AT is 0 at the start of the “N + 1” game (when the start switch 41 is operated). A command indicating that the game is a game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, but the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as the pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the “N + 1” game eye, the display indicating that the remaining one game of the AT is continued.

When ending the AT, the sub-control board 80 outputs an AT end effect. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on receiving a command indicating that the remaining number of games in the AT is 0 game (at the start of the game).
However, in the example of the pattern 5, the sub control board 80 does not receive the command indicating that the remaining number of games in the AT is 0 game, so that the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, at the end of the “N + 1” game, an effect indicating that there is one remaining game of the AT is output.

Then, when the “N + 1” game ends and shifts to the “N + 2” game, at the start of the “N + 2” game, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating a normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80. Send. Based on the reception of this command, the sub-control board 80 erases the display of "1 remaining game" and outputs a normal (non-AT) effect.
At the end of the AT, an image such as "Pachinko / pachislot is a game machine to be enjoyed moderately" is displayed in order to prevent immersion. However, in the case of the pattern 5, the image display cannot be performed because the sub-display has not returned to normal at the end of the “N + 1” game eye. Therefore, as a countermeasure, the game history is managed on the sub-control board 80 side, and when the game is shifted to the next game (in the example of FIG. 11, “N + 2” game) over the end of the AT, the game is The image display is performed at the start of the operation.

  In the above patterns 1 to 5, when a disconnection occurs in the “N” game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection in the “N” game until the communication is restored, and “N + 1” When the communication is restored in the middle of the "game", the continuation of the effect output as the "N" game is output based on the command received in the "N + 1" game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when the left stop command is received after the communication is restored at the “N + 1” game item, the correct answer is received regardless of whether the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct push order. A pressing order effect is output.

  On the other hand, in the pattern 1, for example, in the “N + 1” game item, if a middle stop command is received after the communication is restored, the pressing order of the effect output at that time, that is, the “N” game item Since the incorrect pressing order is displayed for the middle left display, a pressing order failure effect is output regardless of whether the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct pressing order. However, even if the push order failure effect is output in the “N + 1” game eye, if the player operates the stop switch 42 in the correct push order of the “N + 1” game eye, the pattern is advantageous to the player. Since the combination is stopped and displayed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

  As described above, when the communication is restored at the “N + 1” game item, at the “N + 1” game item, the effect that takes over the effect before the disconnection (“N” game item) is output, and the “N + 2” game item is output. Reset the effect at the start (return to the correct effect). Thereby, in any of the game in which the disconnection has occurred and the game in which the communication has been restored, the output of the unnatural effect can be minimized, and the player can be given as little misunderstanding as possible.

Also, in the example of FIG. 11, an example is shown in which the communication is restored to the “N + 1” game after the disconnection occurred in the “N” game, but the communication is restored when two or more games have elapsed after the disconnection occurred. This is the same as FIG.
For example, when a disconnection occurs in the “N” game and communication is restored to the “N + a” game (a = “2” or more), the “N” game is disconnected until the “N + a−1” game. The previous and previous effects continue to be output. Then, in the “N + a” game item where the communication is restored, the continuation of the effect of the “N” game that has been continuously output is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the “N + a + 1” game, the effect is updated to the effect at the start of the “N + a + 1” game (correct effect).

<Fourth embodiment>
The motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing when rotating and stopping the reel 31, and these are all in an excited state. When the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, a state is set in which a four-phase excitation is applied simultaneously for a predetermined time (time T11 described later) (hereinafter, referred to as a “four-phase excitation state”).
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 stops.
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. Note that hatching is omitted in FIG. 12 from the viewpoint of the legibility of the drawing. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that an actual product has a structure as shown in FIG. In FIG. 12, the process from when the stop button 42a is pressed until it returns to the original state is illustrated in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In the figure, the upper side is the player side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10. In the figure, the upper side than the front door 12 is the side seen from the player.
Further, a line at which the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. The moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d comes into contact with the dotted line is the moment when the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12A, a stop button 42a is an operating body of the stop switch 42, and is operated when the player turns on the stop switch 42 (pushed into the slot machine 10). The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged so as to protrude from the front door 12 provided on the front surface of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. This part has a substantially cylindrical shape when viewed from the front of the player. In the no-load state, the stop button 42a is urged in the F3 direction (outward direction, player direction) in FIG. 5A by the spring force of the (compression) coil spring 42c, and the stop button 42 is urged by this urging force. An end of the player side 42 a protrudes from the front door 12. In this state, the lower surface portion (hereinafter, referred to as a “flange-shaped portion”) of the stop button 42 a in the drawing is in contact with the front door 12.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the housing), and is in contact with the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pushed in, and prohibits further movement of the stop button 42a. It is.

  A moving piece 42d movable integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the lower surface side of the stop button 42a in the drawing. Further, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is disposed directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in FIG. 7A, in the state where the stop button 42a is urged toward the front door 12 by the urging force of the coil spring 42c, the tip (the lower end in the figure) of the moving piece 42d is It is arranged at a position distant from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state of (a) in the figure, the detection sensor 42e does not detect the moving piece 42d and is in the off state.

  Next, as shown in (b) in the figure, when stopping the rotation of the reel 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. Thus, the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing against the urging force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure, the moving piece 42d integral with the stop button 42a also moves downward in the figure. Thereby, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters the detection sensor 42e. When the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. FIG. 12B shows the position of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

  When the stop button 42a is further depressed from the state of FIG. 12B, as shown in FIG. 12C, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a contacts the stopper 42c. This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pressed. In the state of FIG. 12C, the state in which the tip of the moving piece 42d is detected by the detection sensor 42e is maintained, and the detection sensor 42e is in the ON state.

  When the player releases the pressing of the stop button 42a from the state of FIG. 12C (excluding the force in the direction F4 in FIG. 12C), the stop button 42a is pressed by the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c. A force to return to the initial position acts. Thereby, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a move upward in the drawing. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d does not contact the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12D).

FIG. 12D shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state. In the state of FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further returned from the state of FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a comes into contact with the flange-shaped portion front door 12, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state of FIG. 12A, in which the stop button 42a is not loaded.
It should be noted that the state of FIG. 12B, which indicates the timing at which the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state, and the state of FIG. 12D, which indicates the timing at which the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state, are generally Although they are the same, there is no particular problem even if slight deviation occurs.

FIGS. 13A and 13B are time charts showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excitation state of the motor 32 in the fourth embodiment, in which FIG. 13A shows Example 1 and FIG. Show.
13A, the stop button 42a is at the initial position in the no-load state (FIG. 12A), and the time at the moment when the pressing of the stop button 42a starts is S41. The time when the stop button 42a is pressed down and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. Further, the time when the stop button 42a is pressed down from that position and the stop button 42a reaches the deepest part (when the state shown in FIG. 12C is reached) is defined as S43. The above times S41, S42, and S43 depend on the pushing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed slowly, the time from the time S41 to S43 becomes longer, and if the stop button 42a is pushed earlier, the time from the time S41 to S43 becomes shorter.

Next, at time S44, the pressing of the stop button 42a is released. At time S44, the stop button 42a is located at the deepest part.
When the pressing of the stop button 42a is released, as described above, a force for returning the stop button 42a to the initial position is exerted by the spring force of the coil spring 42c. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment when the pressing of the stop button 42a is released.
Then, the time when the detection sensor 42e changes from on to off, that is, when the state of FIG. Here, the time from time S44 to S45 is T11.

  The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (movement distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed such that the time T11 becomes 100 ms.

  On the other hand, when the ON of the stop switch 42 (specifically, the ON of the detection sensor 42e) is detected (when the state of FIG. 12B is reached), the reel control unit 65 controls the reel corresponding to the stop switch 42. The stop control of the reel 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at the position corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means). As described above, the time from the start of the stop control of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 (after the detection of the detection sensor 42e is turned on) (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game) is as described above. The number of moving frames is set within 190 ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21 symbols, the number of moving frames is within 5 frames, and when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 20, the number of moving frames is within 4 frames). Accordingly, the time from the start of deceleration of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 is not constant, since it depends on the result of the lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Further, after moving the reel 31 to the predetermined position, the reel control unit 65 sets the motor 32 to the state where the four phases are simultaneously excited (brake is applied) for the predetermined time (the above-described four-phase excitation state). ).
Here, the motor 32 in the present embodiment is a four-phase stepping motor, and performs, for example, one- or two-phase excitation while the motor 32 (reel 31) is rotating (note that the motor is not limited to the one- and two-phase excitation). Absent). Therefore, even during the rotation of the motor 32, it is in one excitation state. When the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, the motor is set to the four-phase excitation state.
When the bound stop is performed after the reel 31 is moved to the predetermined position (when the reel 31 appears to vibrate at the stop position), for example, the three-phase excitation state is used instead of the four-phase excitation state. Is also possible.

  At the moment when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, there is a possibility that the motor 32 or the reel 31 may exceed the position to be stopped due to inertia at the time of rotation. Therefore, at the moment when the reel 31 is stopped at a predetermined position, the motor 32 is stopped. By setting a four-phase excitation state and generating a static torque, it is prevented from moving from the stop position by inertia. When the motor 32 is in the four-phase excitation state, operation acceptance of the next stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, the operation acceptance of the next stop switch 42 is permitted because the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 is changed from the on state to the off state (return to the state of FIG. 12D). ) And when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that has stopped rotating is completed.

Such control is performed for the following reason.
In order to hold the stop position of the reel 31, the motor 32 is controlled to the four-phase excitation state. However, when such control is performed, a larger load is applied than in the normal state. It gets bigger. In order to reduce the load, the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is completed.

  In the example 1 of FIG. 13A, when the combination lottery result by the combination lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means) is a predetermined result (for example, at the time of winning the pressing order bell), the four-phase excitation state is set. The excitation time T12 from the start to the end is set to 90 interrupts (2.235 × 90 = 201.15 ms). Here, the excitation time T12 in the four-phase excitation state is set to “90 interrupts” when the role lottery result is a predetermined result because the excitation time T12 is always constant regardless of the role lottery result. Not necessarily.

Therefore, in the first example of the fourth embodiment, “T11 <T12” is set.
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from the time point S42, the reel 31 stops within 190 ms. As described above, when the number of moving frames during stop control when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21" is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20" Since the number of moving frames at the time of the stop control is within four frames (minimum one frame), the reel 31 stops within approximately "40" to "190" ms from the time point S42.
On the other hand, the time (time from time S42 to S44) from the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state to the time when the stop button 42e reaches the deepest part and the pressing force of the stop button 42e is released is , “40” to “180” ms. For this reason, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the pressing of the stop button 42a is released are close times (substantially the same time).

Thus, in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing when the pressing of the stop button 42a is released (time S44), and after the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state (time S45), The motor 32 is designed so that the four-phase excitation state ends (time T12 elapses). For this reason, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is completed, it is possible to set so that the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted.
As described above, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off before the four-phase excitation state ends, the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the four-phase excitation state ends. . As a result, the game can proceed at a high speed.

  On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 13B, from the moment when the pressing of the stop button 42a reaching the deepest portion is released (time S44), the detection sensor 42e is turned from on to off (at time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until it reaches) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times that of Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
Then, in Example 2, similarly to Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is assumed to be started from the moment when the pressing of the stop button 42a reaching the deepest part is released (time S44). The design is such that the detection sensor 42e is turned off after the excitation state ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it can be set so that the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to be finished when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, the operation acceptance of the next stop button 42a is permitted when the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. As a result, the game can proceed at a high speed.
As described above, each of Example 1 and Example 2 has an advantage in control.
Note that examples 1 and 2 in FIG. 13 show examples in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, for example, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a fixed value, if "T11 <T12", the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the four-phase excitation state ends. Therefore, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game can be completed at a higher speed in Example 1.

<Fifth embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to a relationship between turning on / off a power supply and starting a program.
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing, in a time chart, an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating a state when power is cut off after the main program (program of the main control board 50) is started. The power supply is turned on at time S51, and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), the supply of power to both the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is started, and the main control board 50 and the The voltage level of the sub-control board 80 gradually increases, and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). In FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, the power-off detection level V1, and the drive voltage limit V2 are the same as those in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

  After the power is turned on at time S51, the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 reach the supply level V0 is defined as S52. Thereafter, at time S53 when time T22 has elapsed from time S52, the sub-program by the sub-control board 80 starts. Thereafter, at time S54 when time T23 (T23> T22) has elapsed from time S52, the main program by the main control board 50 starts. In this way, the sub-program is started first and then the main program is started because the main control board 50 transmits the first command after power-on to the sub-control board 80. This is because the sub-control board 80 is ready to receive the command.

Next, when the power supply is cut off at time S55 (the power switch 11 is turned off or the power failure occurs, etc.), the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level is reduced, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 can execute the power-off process if the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, when the power interruption occurs at time S55, the voltage becomes the power interruption detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interruptions) as in FIG. 3, and the power interruption is detected (time S56). Further, after the power-off is detected, the power-off process is executed, for example, after one interrupt, as in FIG. It is assumed that the power-off process ends at time S57.
Thereafter, when the time reaches S58, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2, and the program (process) cannot be executed. For this reason, control is performed so that the power-off process ends before the time S58 is reached.

When the main program is started at the time S54, the main CPU 55 is set, the RWM 53 is checked, whether or not the previous power-off was normal, the state of the setting key switch is checked, etc., and thereafter, the interrupt processing is started. . When the setting key switch is off, a power-off recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) is executed after the start of the interrupt process. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to the setting change process after the start of the interrupt process.
Then, as shown in FIG. 14A, when the power is turned off after the main program is started and the setting key switch is off, the power-off processing is executed after the power-off recovery processing is completed. I do. Thus, the program can be terminated normally.
On the other hand, when the power is turned off after the main program is started and the setting key switch is turned on, the power-off processing is executed without starting the setting change processing. This is because if the setting change process is performed after the power is turned off, a problem may occur.

Further, in order to execute the main program normally, the setting of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 are always executed even when the power-off is detected at the same time as the activation of the main program.
Furthermore, after the main program is started, even if the power is cut off after that, the program is always executed until the interrupt is started. This is for detecting power interruption in the interrupt processing. Note that, similarly to the first embodiment (A), for example, at the “N” th interrupt, a voltage drop (power-off detection level V1) at which it is determined that power-off has occurred is detected, and the next “N + 1” game item is detected. However, when the voltage drop is detected, power interruption is detected at the (N + 1) th interrupt (determined as power interruption). Then, the power-off process is executed from the “N + 2” interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14A, the main program starts at time S54, and the power is turned off at time S55. However, even if a power failure occurs at the same time as the time S54 (activation of the main program), the power failure processing is set to be completed before the voltage reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
In FIG. 14A, during the time T21 from when the power is turned on (time S51) to when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52), the voltage is changed to the low level from the occurrence of the power interruption (time S55). It is set so as to be shorter than the time T24 until it becomes.
The time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 to when the main program is started) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14B shows an example in which a power failure occurs before the main control board 50 starts the main program. In the example of FIG. 14B, the power is turned on at time S51, and the power is turned off at time S59. Here, the time S59 is before the time S54 in FIG. That is, after the power supply (supply level V0) required to start the main program is supplied, the power is cut off before the predetermined time (time T23) has elapsed (before reaching time S54), and the voltage has dropped. It is an example. In such a case, the main program does not start. Therefore, thereafter, the voltage gradually decreases, and finally the power supply goes to the low level.
In the example of FIG. 14B, when the power is turned on again, the apparatus can be started normally.
Although not shown in FIG. 14, it is conceivable that a power failure occurs immediately after the subprogram is started (after time S53) and before time S54 (before the main program starts). Can be
If a power failure occurs at the above timing, the subprogram executes a power-off process of the subprogram. Then, before the voltage supplied to the sub-control board 80 reaches the driving voltage limit V2, the power-off processing of the sub-program can be ended.
Further, since the power-off at the above timing is a power-off before the main program is started, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the present embodiment, the passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 increases the accuracy of the medal insertion determination and is also effective as a countermeasure against fraud. However, the passage sensor 46 need not be provided, and only the pair of input sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect the medals M that move in a substantially horizontal direction, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is falling substantially vertically downward, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b may detect the medal M.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is disposed on the lower surface side of the medal passage, but is not limited to this. Before the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, it is sufficient that the medal M has a function of sending the medal M out of the medal path.
Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b are illustrated so as to detect a position slightly higher than the center position of the medal M when viewed from the front. It does not mean. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any manner as long as they are arranged so as to reliably detect the passing medal M.

  (4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when the medal M is located at M4, but is not limited to this. For example, the time from when the medal M is at the position of M1 in FIG. 2 until it reaches M4 from the moment when the hand is released may be set to T2, and "T2> T1" may be set. Alternatively, the time from when the medal M reaches M4 from any one of the predetermined positions between M1 and M2 may be set to T2 and "T2> T1".

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2, the power-off process is executed until the medal M reaches the position M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power-off process may be executed until the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power-off processing.
Alternatively, when the power is turned off at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2, the power-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power-off process is executed.

(6) Further, in the first embodiment (A), a power supply interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at the position M2, and a time T1 until the power supply interruption is detected and the power supply interruption processing (blocker off) is executed. May be set to be shorter than the time from when the medal M reaches the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position of the medal M (this time is referred to as “T2 ′”). With this setting, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the medal M reaches the position of the blocker 45 from the position of M2, the blocker 45 is already turned off. Therefore, the medal can be prevented from passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
Note that, in the above description, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment when the hand is released at the position of M1, or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off process (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the power-off process (blocker off) may be set to be performed after the “2” to “5” interrupt processes, counting from the interrupt process that detects the power-off. Alternatively, the power-off process (blocker off) may be executed by an interrupt process that detects the power-off.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, when a power failure occurs, the time T0 until the voltage reaches the maintenance level V1 from the supply level V0 is set to 20 interrupts, but is not limited to this. Various settings can be made without depending on the performance of the power supply.

  (9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, when the medal M is paid out by the medal payout device, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the payout medal M itself. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the insertion sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the (paid out) medal M.

In the case where the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged as described above, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Payout sensor 37a on, payout sensor 37b off (time S31 ')
Payout sensor 37a ON, payout sensor 37b ON (time S32 ')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b on (time S33 ')
Dispensing sensor 37a off, dispensing sensor 37b off (time S34 ')
Follow the course of.
Then, the time from time S31 ′ to S34 ′ is set so as to be shorter than time T1 (time from the occurrence of power interruption to the execution of power interruption processing).

  (10) In the second embodiment, the gate trace 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the concave portion 57c are on the outside. Conversely, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the concave portion 57c are on the inside. It is also possible. The same applies to the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58. In this case, if the gate trace 57b is shaped as shown in FIG. 10B, the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 becomes a smooth surface. On the other hand, if the shape is as shown in FIG. 10C, a protrusion 57e is formed outside the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58.

  (11) In the second embodiment, an example in which the main control board 50 is housed as an example of the board case 56 has been described. However, the second embodiment can be applied not only to the main control board 50 but also to another control board for which fraud is to be prevented, for example, a board case of the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub control board 80 also includes the RWM 83, the ROM 54, the sub CPU 85, and the like. On the upper surface of the upper cover in the board case of the sub control board 80, at least the sub The CPU 85 may not be disposed, and the RWM 83 and the ROM 54 may not be disposed. Similarly, the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 may be prevented from overlapping in the vertical direction (immediately below) the gate mark.

(12) In the third embodiment, the pressing order effect during AT, the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31), and the number of remaining games during AT are taken as examples. The third embodiment can be applied to the case where the acquired number of games (BB games and the like) and the remaining number of obtainable games are displayed.
For example, the acquired number at the start of the “N” game item is “200”, the acquired number at the start of the “N + 1” game item is “209”, and the acquired number at the start of the “N + 2” game item is “ Assume that there were 218 "sheets. Further, the main control board 50 transmits a command relating to the acquired number to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game.
Then, as in the example illustrated in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a disconnection occurs in the middle of the “N” game, and communication is restored in the middle of the “N + 1” game.

  In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays “200” as the acquired number for the “N” game item. Also, at the start of the “N + 1” game eye, since the command relating to the acquired number is not received (due to disconnection), the “N + 1” game eye also maintains the display of the acquired number “200”. Next, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command related to the acquired number at the start of the “N + 2” game eye, it updates the display to the acquired number “218” based on the command.

  (13) FIG. 11 of the third embodiment shows an example in which the image display is returned to normal at the start of the “N + 2” game eye. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the image display may be returned to normal after all stops of the “N + 1” game or when a betting operation is performed thereafter. Alternatively, it is also possible to return the image display to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the time of a full stop or after the full stop.

  (14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of a disconnected “N + 1” game, there is a case where an additional (additional) lottery is won in the AT during the AT. In this case, since the “N + 1” game is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command based on the winning in the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the "N + 2" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the addition (addition) lottery, and at the start of the "N + 2" game, the sub-control board 80 To display the game information (acquirable number or the number of games) after the addition.

  (15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, a case in which the line is disconnected after the first right stop of the “N” game and the communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the “N + 1” game is operated Can be considered. Then, in the "N + 1" th game, it is assumed that the player has made the first right stop. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the command of the right first stop in the “N + 1” game item, it means that the sub-control board 80 has received the stop command of the stop switch 42 that has been already operated. Output. Then, the image display may be returned to a normal state at the time of the bet operation after the entire stop of the “N + 1” game or at the start of the “N + 2” game.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when displaying the acquired number of images during the AT, the following method can be used as the update processing of the image display of the acquired number of images before and after the disconnection.
When the payout processing is performed, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the acquired number to the sub control board 80. Here, when the disconnection occurs in the middle of the “N” game eye, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the acquired number of “N” game eyes. Immediately before the disconnection of the “N” game, the sub-control board 80 displays “100” as the acquired number during the AT. Also, it is assumed that the “N” game item and the “N + 1” game item in the AT each acquire 10 cards.
In this case, the acquired number of cards during the AT at the end of the “N” game eye should be “110”, but remains “100” (because of the disconnection). Then, it is assumed that the communication is restored in the course of the “N + 1” game. This allows the sub-control board 80 to return the acquired number during AT to a normal value based on the acquired number command received during the payout process for the “N + 1” game. Here, the value may be returned to a normal value at the time of the payout process of the “N + 1” game, or may be returned to a normal value at the start of the “N + 2” game, as in the example of FIG. Furthermore, it may be updated to "110" at the time of the payout process of the "N + 1" game, and may be updated to "120" at the start of the "N + 2" game.

  (17) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is applicable to, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. In pachinko gaming machines, the starting port (the winning opening which starts the symbol change by the symbol change display device and triggers the acquisition of random numbers for the jackpot lottery), the electric chew winning opening (when the game ball wins, the next winning A winning opening provided with an accessory that opens for a certain period of time and then closes to make it easier.Electric chute is not limited to a tulip shape.) Provided. The first embodiment (B) can be applied to these winning ports.

Specifically, for example, a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball winning the starting port) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects a game ball after being detected by the winning sensor) are provided at the starting port. Is provided. The attacker is provided with a V winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball that has won the attacker) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects a game ball after being detected by the V winning sensor). .
For example, in the case of the starting port, if a power failure occurs at the moment when a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, a setting is made so that the discharge sensor can detect the game ball before the power-off process is executed. Thereby, even if a power failure occurs at the moment when the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the prize ball can be correctly counted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a prize ball from not being paid out even when a game ball has won a prize hole. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and discharge sensor.

  (18) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of one of the gaming machines. However, the slot machine 10 is installed in a fourth branch that is subject to the Wind Management Law. The present invention is not limited to a so-called “pachislot gaming machine”, and can be applied to, for example, a casino machine and an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) that does not use medals to be used for a game as a game medium.

Here, the enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) can eliminate the medal payout device (unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37) in FIG. 1, for example. Further, the medal insertion slot 47 and the medal selector can be made unnecessary. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) awarded by winning the winning combination are stored in the credit number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the credit number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (a maximum of “99,999” electronic medals can be stored).
The present invention can be applied to all of the above-described embodiments and the following embodiments, except for the first embodiment, even in such a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine).

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to the control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the medal, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
FIG. 15A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state before the last discharged medal contacts the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing a state before rotation of the hopper disk 101 is advanced from FIG.

Further, FIG. 16A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state where the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. It is a top view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the movable shaft 38b has been moved by being pushed.
Further, FIG. 17A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit, and FIG. 17B is a hopper after ejecting the last ejected medal. FIG. 9 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the rotation of the disk has stopped.

  In the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. Further, the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 as in the first embodiment. Then, the main control board 50 controls the driving of the hopper motor 36.

As shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape, and the hopper disk 101 has a holding portion which is an opening capable of holding medals stored in the hopper. Eighths 102 are provided along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101.
Furthermore, each holding part 102 is formed in a circular hole shape penetrating from the upper surface to the lower surface of the hopper disk 101. The medals stored in the hopper 35 enter the respective holding units 102 from the upper openings of the respective holding units 102 and are formed so as to be held by the respective holding units 102 respectively.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disk 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held in the respective holders 102 move in a clockwise arc together with the hopper disk 101, and are sequentially discharged from the discharge unit 103.
When a medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103, the holding unit 102 holding the medal becomes empty. Then, another medal stored in the hopper 35 newly enters the empty holding unit 102.

In addition, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 includes the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In the sixth embodiment, a portion between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is a discharge portion 103 from which medals are discharged.
As shown in FIG. 16B, when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, and when the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes larger than the diameter of the medal, the medal becomes the fixed shaft 38a. And the movable shaft 38b. At this time, medals are discharged from the discharge unit 103.
At the moment when the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103. It is a moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medal has been discharged from the discharge unit 103.

In one payout process, the medal finally discharged from the discharge unit 103 is referred to as “final discharge medal”, and in the next payout process, the medal first discharged from the discharge unit 103 is referred to as “first medal”. This will be referred to as “emission medal”.
15 to 17, medals are indicated by two-dot chain lines. The medal with the letter "A" is the last ejected medal in one payout process, and the medal with the letter "B" is the first ejected medal in the next payout process.

In addition, the position of the holding unit 102 where the last ejected medal was held at the moment when the last ejected medal was ejected from the ejecting unit 103 in one payout process is referred to as a “first position”, and one payout is performed. The position of the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 in the process is referred to as a “second position”.
FIG. 17A shows the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 (the hopper disk 101, each holding unit 102, each medal with letters “A” to “D”, the fixed shaft 38a). , And the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). In FIG. 17A, the position of the holding unit 102 where the medal with the letter “A” is held is the first position, and the medal with the letter “B” is held. The position of the holding unit 102 is the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, when ending one payout process, the main control board 50 moves the holding unit 102 holding the first discharge medal in the next payout process to the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 stops in the state between the two.
FIG. 17B illustrates a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 has stopped after the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting unit 103. In FIG. 17B, the first position and the second position are indicated by broken lines. In FIG. 17B, the medal with the letter “B” is the first medal to be discharged in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17B, the hopper disk 101 is held in a state where the holding unit 102 holding the medal with the letter “B” is located between the first position and the second position. Has stopped rotating.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as the hopper motor 36.
For this reason, at the end of the payout process, the drive of the hopper motor 36 is suddenly stopped by flowing a current from the main control board 50 to the hopper motor 36 in a direction opposite to the direction in which the medals are discharged. Can be stopped suddenly.

Further, as described above, when the medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, that effect is detected by the payout sensor 37.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting unit 103, a current in a direction opposite to the direction in which the medal is ejected is supplied to the hopper motor 36 to rotate the hopper disk 101. When the abrupt stop is performed, the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharge medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

Further, by supplying a current in a direction opposite to the direction of discharging the medals to the hopper motor 36, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the reverse direction to rotate the hopper disk 101 in the reverse direction (counterclockwise rotation). .
For this reason, at the end of the payout process, even if the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process has passed the second position, the hopper supplies a current in the opposite direction to the direction in which the medal is ejected. The hopper disk 101 can be returned to the second position by rotating the hopper disk 101 in the reverse direction by flowing the hopper disk 101 to the motor 36.
Then, by returning the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medals to the second position, the first ejected medals can start moving from the same second position every time. Thus, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first discharged medal can be stably discharged.

Here, the DC motor as the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates from a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped when a constant current flows, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart illustrating a relationship between a driving signal of the hopper motor 36, a driving state of the hopper motor 36, and a medal discharge state from the discharge unit 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18, an upper line indicates a drive signal of the hopper motor 36, a middle line indicates a drive state of the hopper motor 36, and a lower line indicates a state of medal discharge from the discharge unit 103.

The drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal output from a predetermined output port of the main control board 50. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, a constant current is supplied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 changes from ON to OFF, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes “0”.
Further, in FIG. 18, “stop” in the driving state of the hopper motor 36 indicates a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and “constant speed” in the driving state of the hopper motor 36 indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft is at a constant speed. (Constant speed) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 changes from off to on, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stop", and thereafter, reaches "constant speed".
Further, a portion where the line indicating the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is obliquely upward and to the right indicates that the rotation of the driving shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated.

As described above, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor is gradually accelerated when the drive signal is turned on from off.
Therefore, when the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medals is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated until the holding unit 102 reaches the first position. It takes a longer time than the medal discharge interval at the time of constant speed.
That is, if the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medals is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving of the hopper motor 36 to the ejection of the first ejected medals from the ejecting unit 103 becomes longer. It is longer than the medal discharge interval when the drive shaft 36 is rotating at a constant speed.
As a result, there is a possibility that the player feels that the discharge of the first (first) medal has been delayed.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the end of one payout process, the main control board 50 causes the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal in the next payout process to move between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 stops in the position.
When the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medals is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position is shorter than when stopped at the second position. . As a result, the time required to reach the first position is shorter than when the motor is stopped at the second position. Therefore, even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated, the first (first) medal is obtained. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the game is delayed.

Further, when the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medals is stopped between the first position and the second position, as shown in FIG. Is located in front of the discharge unit 103.
As a result, an illegal device such as a wire is inserted from a medal payout opening provided at the lower front part of the front door 12, and an illegal operation (goto operation) of trying to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101 with the unauthorized device is performed. Even if it does, the portion of the hopper disk 101 corresponding to between the two adjacent holding portions 102 serves as a barrier, and it is possible to prevent an unauthorized device from accessing the holding portion 102.

When the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is “constant speed”, the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held in each holding unit 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharge unit 103 at equal intervals.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is changed from on to off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from “constant speed”, and then reaches “stop”.
In FIG. 18, the portion of the line indicating the driving state of the hopper motor 36 that is obliquely downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the driving shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases.

As described above, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor is gradually reduced when the drive signal is turned off from on.
Then, the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 by passing between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (the ejecting unit 103) and returning the movable shaft 38b to the original position. When this is detected by the payout sensor 37, the main control board 50 changes the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from on to off.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases, and the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharge medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. Then, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 stops.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80 thereafter. This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started payout processing.
On the other hand, upon receiving the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 starts processing related to the output of the payout sound. After that, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off from on, the main control board 50 transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80 thereafter. This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has finished the payout processing.
On the other hand, upon receiving the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the processing related to the output of the payout sound. Thus, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.

Here, the “payout sound” means a sound output from the sub-control board 80 in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as “purururu” can be output from the speaker 22.
In addition, the “process related to output of payout sound” includes a series of processes such as a process of selecting a sound to be output, a process of selecting a channel to output the selected sound, and a process of outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. Is what it means. By executing this series of processes, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22.

  Then, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 performs processing related to output of payout sound. Is started, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started before the first discharge medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103.

Further, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the main control board 50 transmits a payout end command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, Is completed, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be ended when the discharge of the medal from the discharge unit 103 is stopped.
Thereby, it is possible to give the player an impression that the payout of the medals and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a relationship among the operation of the main control board 50, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, the detection states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the timing of discharging medals from the discharging unit 103.
When the winning combination is won, the main control board 50 sets the number-of-payouts data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
For example, when a winning combination of 10 wins and payout of 10 medals, “10” is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
That is, when paying out “N” medals (N ≧ 1), “N” is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Further, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 starts up (starts driving) from the “stopped” state, reaches “constant speed” through “acceleration”.
At the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position. At the start of the operation, the hopper motor 36 reaches "constant speed" by the time the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medals reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medals is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches “constant speed” before the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medals reaches the first position. are doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 reaches the “constant speed” from the “stop” through the “acceleration”, the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal reaches the first position, so that the first ejecting medal is started. The medals are surely discharged from the discharge unit 103.
Furthermore, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are off.
The timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37a is set so that the state where the movable piece 39a is detected is turned off, and the state where the movable piece 39a is not detected is turned on.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to high active similarly to the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37b is set so that the state where the movable piece 39a is not detected is turned off, and the state where the movable piece 39a is detected is turned on.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off.
In the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active and the payout sensor 37b is set to high active, respectively. Therefore, FIG. 8 in the first embodiment (C) differs from FIG. Waveforms are reversed on and off.

At the timing (b) in FIG. 19, the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b to move the movable shaft 38b, so that the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off.
The state (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Further, at the timing (c) in FIG. 19, the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the medal diameter, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned on. Become. At this time, medals are discharged from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharge unit 103).
The state (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, at the timing (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is being urged by the spring 39b and is in the process of returning to the original position, and the payout sensor 37a is on and the payout sensor 37b is off. Becomes
The state (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
At the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b to return to the original position, and both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been discharged, and updates the payout number data.
The state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When paying out the "N" medals, (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N" medals have been discharged.
Then, when determining that the “N” th medal has been discharged, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
Further, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 reaches “stop” through “deceleration”.
Thus, the payout process for the “N” medals is completed.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, in step S101, payout number data is set. This process is a process of storing the number-of-payouts data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50. For example, when paying out “N” medals (N ≧ 1), “N” is stored as payout number data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S102.

In step S102, the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 starts. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state in which the movable shaft 38b is pushed by the medal and moves) is turned on. It is set to be.

If "Yes" in step S103, the process proceeds to the next step S104, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. If “Yes” in step S104, the process proceeds to the next step S105. On the other hand, if “No” in the step S104, an error occurs.
Here, if the payout sensor 37b is already on when the payout sensor 37a is turned on from off, "No" is determined in step S104. In this case, it is conceivable that medals are jammed in the ejection unit 103 (medal jam error). When a medal clogging error occurs, the medal clogging is removed (the cause of the error is removed) and the error continues until the reset switch is operated. Then, when the jammed medals are removed and the reset switch is operated, the error is released.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if “No” continues for a predetermined time (the predetermined time has elapsed with “No”) in step S103, an error occurs. In this case, the medals in the hopper 35 may be empty (hopper empty error). When a hopper empty error occurs, medals are replenished in the hopper 35 (the cause of the error is removed), and the error continues until the reset switch is operated. Then, when medals are replenished in the hopper 35 and the reset switch is operated, the error is released.
In step S105, the main control board 50 determines again whether the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if “Yes” in the step S105, the process proceeds to the next step S106. On the other hand, if "No" in step S105, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104.

  In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37b is on. If “Yes” is determined in step S106, the process proceeds to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 determines again whether the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if “Yes” in the step S107, the process proceeds to the next step S108. On the other hand, if "No" in step S107, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104 or S105.

In step S108, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. If "Yes" is determined in step S108, the process proceeds to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is off. If “Yes” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37b is off.
If “Yes” in the step S110, the process proceeds to the next step S111. On the other hand, if “No” in step S110, an error occurs as in the case of “No” in step S104, S105, or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the payout number data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and storing the subtracted data as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout amount data is “0”. Here, if “Yes” in the step S112, the process proceeds to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if “No” in the step S112, the process returns to the step S103. Thereby, the next medal will be paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout amount data becomes “0”.

Here, the medals discharged from the discharge unit 103 are usually guided to a medal tray through a passage called a medal shoot.
However, in rare cases, the medals discharged from the discharge unit 103 may hit the inner wall of the medal chute, bounce off, and return to the discharge unit 103. At this time, the bounced medals may hit the next medal to be ejected from the ejection unit 103, and push back the medal to be ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is repeatedly determined in the order of “payout sensor 37a” → “payout sensor 37b” as in steps S103 to S110 in the flow chart of the payout processing in FIG. I do.
As a result, it is possible to detect an error such that a medal to be discharged from the discharge unit 103 is pushed back.

For example, it is assumed that one medal is about to be ejected, and that the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, thereby moving the movable shaft 38b, so that the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off. (Timing (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that a medal paid out before this medal bounces back and hits this medal, this medal is pushed back, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is obtained in step S105 in FIG. 20, and an error occurs.
Further, for example, it is assumed that the medal is pushed back at the timing of (c) in FIG. 19 and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, “No” is obtained in step S107 in FIG. 20, and an error occurs.

<Modification of the sixth embodiment>
As described above, the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and for example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with the eight holding portions 102, but the number of the holding portions is not limited to eight, and may be, for example, five, six, ten, or the like. It can be set appropriately according to the degree.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hopper disk 101 may be formed in a sprocket shape. That is, the holding unit 102 is not limited to a circular hole as long as it can hold a medal.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotation direction of the hopper disk 101 during the medal payout process is clockwise. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hopper disk 101 rotates counterclockwise and May be sequentially discharged from the discharge unit 103.
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as the hopper motor 36, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a stepping motor may be used as the hopper motor 36.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, but may be, for example, the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. Even with such a flow of the payout process, the discharge of the medals can be detected. However, in such a flow of the payout process, it is not possible to detect an error such that a medal to be ejected next is pushed back by a medal that has bounced off the inner wall of the medal shoot.
20 and FIG. 21, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents.
(6) The first to sixth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Seventh embodiment>
It relates to the arrangement of a main control board 50 attached inside the cabinet 13 and a sub control board 80 attached to the back surface of the front door 12.
FIG. 22 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 in a state where the front door 12 is closed, and is a view for explaining a positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 having an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached to the cabinet 13 so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.
The cabinet 13 is formed in a box shape with an open front side by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a right plate, a left plate, a top plate, and the like.
Further, a medal payout device 15 is disposed below the inside of the cabinet 13 (on the bottom plate 13a). The medal payout device 15 is for paying out medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. Have.

Further, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by a back plate 13b, a right plate, and a left plate is provided above the medal payout device 15 inside the cabinet 13, and a symbol is provided on the reel base 110. A display device 14 is provided.
Further, the symbol display device 14 includes a rectangular frame-shaped reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged inside the reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by a reel frame 14a.
Further, a transparent reel substrate case 121 is disposed on the reel frame 14a, and a reel control substrate 120 is accommodated in the reel substrate case 121. The reel control board 120 controls the driving of the three motors 32.

A transparent main board case 56 is arranged inside the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14. More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed to a position on the front side (the inner side of the housing) of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 corresponding to a position above the symbol display device 14. The main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 56.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 has a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a medal payout device 15, a reel control board 120, a sub control board via an input port 51 or an output port 52. 80 and the like are electrically connected.

  The front door 12 is attached so as to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed. More specifically, the left side of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. When the front door 12 rotates about the hinge, the front opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.

A transparent display window is provided at the center of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Then, the player can visually recognize the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
A bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, and the like are disposed on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window. .

Furthermore, a medal payout opening, which is an opening through which the medal paid out from the medal payout device 15 passes, and a medal paid out from the medal payout opening are received at a lower portion on the front side (player side) of the front door 12. A medal tray is arranged.
Further, at an upper portion on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, and the like are arranged.

In addition, a transparent sub-board case 87 is disposed on the upper portion of the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed to a position on the back side of the front door 12 (the inner side of the housing), above the symbol display device 14 and on the back side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub-control board 80 is housed in the sub-board case 87.
The sub-control board 80 controls an effect, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. The effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, and the like are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Then, the sub-control board 80 determines what kind of effect to output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50, and according to the determination, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, The output of the image display device 23 is controlled.

As described above, the main board case 56 is disposed above the symbol display device 14 inside the cabinet 13, and the main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 56.
A sub-board case 87 is disposed above the symbol display device 14 on the back surface of the front door 12, and a sub-control board 80 is accommodated in the sub-board case 87.
Then, as shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are arranged to face each other.
Further, the distance between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 when the front door 12 is closed is set to be wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

  Here, on the sub-control board 80, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for power storage is arranged. The electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 ruptures due to a failure, the filled electrolyte may be scattered. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position opposite to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a problem, the scattered electrolytic solution is removed. There is a possibility that the main CPU 55 adheres to the main CPU 55 and malfunctions. In addition, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 may be damaged by an impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the sub control board 80.
Thus, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured due to a problem and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, so that the main CPU 55 does not malfunction. be able to. Further, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from being damaged by an impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures.
If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, the main CPU 55 may malfunction due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. By disposing the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. Can be.

FIG. 23A shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure showing Example 1.
In FIG. 23A, a circle shown by a broken line is a projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 on the main control board 50.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23A, the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, and the electrolytic capacitor 86 is disposed above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction, It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50.
Thus, by disposing the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 at a different position in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, The position of the electrolytic capacitor 86 can be a position on the main control board 50 other than the position facing the main CPU 55.

<Modification of the seventh embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, but may be two, for example, as shown in FIG.
FIG. 23B shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure showing Example 2.

In FIG. 23B, similarly to FIG. 23A, a projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 on the main control board 50 is indicated by a broken line.
In FIG. 23B, the upper left electrolytic capacitor 86 and the lower right electrolytic capacitor 86 are both located at different positions in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Thus, also in Example 2 of FIG. 23B, the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 are arranged at positions other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(2) The number of the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be, for example, four as shown in FIG.
FIG. 24C shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure showing Example 3.
The fact that the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is projected on the main control board 50 and is indicated by a dashed circle is the same as in FIGS. 23A and 23B.

In FIG. 24C, the sub-control board 80 includes four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are different from the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical and horizontal directions. Are located. Further, the remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction, while being different from the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the horizontal direction.
Even in such an arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are located at positions other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position off the main control board 50, for example.
FIG. 24D shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows Example 4.
The electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are projected and indicated by broken-line circles, as in FIGS. 23A, 23B and 24C.

In FIG. 24D, the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, as in FIG. 23A. However, unlike FIG. 86 is arranged at a position off the main control board 50.
Thus, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position deviated from the main control board 50, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Will be.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a), 23 (b), 24 (c) and 24 (d), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is set at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. In this case, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a problem and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 can malfunction. Can be prevented from waking up.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also referred to as a “role ratio monitor”) is arranged on the main control board 50. The management information display LED 74 displays management information such as an advantageous section ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a character ratio.
Further, the “advantageous section ratio” means the ratio of the advantageous section to the entire game section (normal section + standby section + advantaged section), and the “continuous bonus ratio” is the first to the total medal acquisition number. The ratio of the number of obtained medals when the special special role (RB) is activated means the ratio of the number of medals obtained during the operation of the special feature with respect to the total number of obtained medals.

Then, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74. Good.
Thus, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a problem and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74, and the management displayed on the management information display LED 74. Information can be prevented from becoming unrecognizable.
Further, it is possible to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being damaged by an impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured.
(5) The first to seventh embodiments and the various modifications described in the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Eighth embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to a gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front part (A in FIG. 22) of the slot machine 10 in a state where the front door 12 is closed. A gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 will be described. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, a lower part of the cabinet 13 is provided with a first closing part 13c that projects toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-like projecting portion that projects forward from the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and when the front door 12 is closed, the projecting direction of the first closing portion 13c. Are directed to the front door 12.
The first closing portion 13c is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to a front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position below the first closing portion 13 c at a lower portion of the front door 12, a second closing portion 12 a protruding toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-shaped projecting portion that projects rearward from the lower rear surface of the front door 12, and in a state where the front door 12 is closed, the projecting direction of the second closing portion 12a is The direction is the cabinet 13 direction.

Further, the second closing portion 12a is arranged at a position below the first closing portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second closing portion 12a is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the lower rear portion of the front door 12.
Further, similarly to the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a is also formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to a lower portion of the rear surface of the front door 12 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position above the first closing portion 13c at a lower portion of the front door 12, a third closing portion 12b protruding toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, similarly to the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is a plate-shaped protruding portion projecting rearward from the lower rear portion of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the third closing portion 12b is in the second position. The projecting direction of the three closing portions 12b is the direction of the cabinet 13.

Similarly to the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the lower rear portion of the front door 12.
Furthermore, unlike the second closing part 12a, the third closing part 12b is arranged at a position above the first closing part 13c.
Further, the third closing portion 12b is also formed of a sheet metal, similarly to the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, and is fixed to a lower portion of the rear surface of the front door 12 with screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the lower part of the housing is bent as shown in FIG. Shape. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act (goto act) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 to the inside of the housing.

Further, a door sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. The door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving / emitting unit, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Further, on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, there is provided a detection piece that is movable in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece is urged by a spring to jump forward.

Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the detecting piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in the state of detecting the detection piece and is in the off state. That is, the door sensor is set to low active.
On the other hand, in a state where the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece jumps forward by being urged by the spring, and goes out of the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor does not detect the detection piece, and is turned on.

Then, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is off, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is on.
As described above, the detection piece moves in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12, and the opening / closing of the front door 12 is detected by turning on / off the door sensor.

When the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the pushed state, goes out of the state into the door sensor, goes out, and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 is referred to as a “detection start position”.
Further, the time when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door 12 for the first time means the moment when the door sensor changes from the OFF state to the ON state.

In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not only placed in the closed state but also in the state where the front door 12 is in the detection start position. 13c is formed.
That is, even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor is turned on from the off state, the first closing part 13c is disposed between the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b. It is formed as follows.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the door sensor is first turned from the off state to the on state, and then the first closing part 13c comes out from between the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b. Will be.
When the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in the open state, and transmits a door open command to the sub control board 80. Is received, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 inform the user that the front door 12 is open. Thereby, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall that the front door 12 is open.

  Therefore, before the notification that the front door 12 is open is started, the first closing portion 13c does not come out from between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b, and the front door 12 is opened. Also, at the position where the notification of the start is made, since the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 has a bent shape, a wire is inserted into the housing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent an illegal act (going act) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing through.

  In the sixth embodiment, by stopping the holding unit 102 for holding the first ejected medal between the first position and the second position, the holding unit 102 between the two adjacent holding units 102 on the hopper disk 101 is stopped. The corresponding portion can be located in front of the discharge unit 103, and thereby, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of accessing the holding unit 102 of the hopper disk 101 by inserting a wire or the like from the medal payout opening. As described above, by providing the configurations of both the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent an unauthorized act of accessing the medal payout device 15 by inserting a wire or the like.

Here, the distance between the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a is "h1", the distance between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b is "h2", and the second closing part 12a The distance from the third closing portion 12b is “h3”, and the projection width (depth) of the second closing portion 12a is “w”.
The diameter of the medal is "d", and the thickness of the medal is "t".
Note that the size of a general medal is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness “t” of the medal is set so as to satisfy “h2> t”. ing.

Here, when a store clerk in the hall opens the front door 12 and refills the hopper 35 with medals, the medals may be dropped on the bottom plate 13 a of the cabinet 13.
In particular, there is a case where medals are dropped near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closing portion 13c in order to replenish medals to the hopper 35 from the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13.

  At this time, if the setting is made so as to satisfy “h2> t”, even if the front door 12 is closed with the medal falling near the first closing portion 13c, the medal falling near the first closing portion 13c , Between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. Further, there is no possibility that the medal is caught between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, and the front door 12 does not close.

In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the projection width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d” is set so as to satisfy “w <(d / 2)”. Have been.
By setting so as to satisfy “w <(d / 2)”, it is possible to prevent a medal from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed in a state where a medal is placed on the second closing portion 12a. 12 and the cabinet 13 can be prevented from being damaged.

<Modification of the eighth embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting / receiving unit, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured using, for example, a proximity sensor.
When the door sensor is configured using the proximity sensor, not only the state where the front door 12 is closed but also the state where the front door 12 is in the detection start position, the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b It is configured such that the first closing portion 13c is disposed therebetween.

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece movable in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece is urged forward by a spring. To get out of the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor that detects opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided on the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the door sensor. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 goes out of the door sensor. It may be.

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the door sensor may be provided on the front door 12 side.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is turned off when the detection piece is detected, and is turned on when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor was set to low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be turned on when the detection piece is detected, and may be turned off when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor may be set to high active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off. The configuration is as follows.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. Further, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the lower portion of the back surface of the front door 12. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closing portion 13c may be composed of a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a. It may be composed of the three members described above.
Similarly to the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be formed of two members or may be formed of three members.
As described above, the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a, and the third closing portion 12b are not limited to the case where one member is used, but may be formed of a plurality of members.

Further, the first closing portion 13c does not extend from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and the first closing portion 13c is provided, for example, near the right end or the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. It may have some parts that are not present.
Similarly, a lower portion of the rear surface of the front door 12 may partially include a portion where the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not provided.
As described above, even if the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a, and the third closing portion 12b partially have a portion where the third closing portion 12b is not provided, the space between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 can be inserted into the housing. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like through a wire or the like.
Further, the first closing portion 13c may be a part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be a part of the front door 12 or may be separate members from the front door 12.

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is formed between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, or the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, or the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
Further, the entire first closing portion 13c may be arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b, or a portion of the first closing portion 13c may be arranged. Is also good.

Furthermore, with the front door 12 closed, the first closing portion 13c may be in contact with a position corresponding to a position between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b on the back surface of the front door 12. .
Further, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first closing portion 13c protruding from the lower rear portion of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13 is provided. A second closing portion 12a that projects may be provided, and a third closing portion 12b that projects toward the front door 12 from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 may be provided.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness “t” of the medal is set so as to satisfy “h2> t”. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be set so as to satisfy “h2 <t”.
When setting so as to satisfy “h2> t”, when the front door 12 is closed in a state where the medals fall near the first closing portion 13c, the medals falling near the first closing portion 13c are removed from the third closing portion 13c. It hits the rear end of 12 b and is pushed into the cabinet 13. Thus, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. Further, there is no possibility that the medal is caught between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, and the front door 12 does not close.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d” is set so as to satisfy “w <(d / 2)”. did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy, for example, “(d / 2) <w <d”.
By satisfying "(d / 2) <w", medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying “w <d”, even if the front door 12 is to be closed with a medal placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front door 12 is closed before the front door 12 closes. Since the placed medals hit the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medal is placed on the second closed portion 12a, and thus the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a to the hall clerk. The door can be removed and the front door 12 can be closed.

(9) The relationship between the projection width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter of the medal “d”, and the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal of the medal The relationship with the thickness “t” may be set so as to satisfy “(d / 2) <w” and “h1 <t”.
As described above, by satisfying “(d / 2) <w”, a medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying “h1 <t”, even if the front door 12 is to be closed with the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front door 12 is closed before the front door 12 closes. Since the placed medals hit the front end of the first closing portion 13c, the front door 12 does not close.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medal is placed on the second closed portion 12a, and thus the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a to the hall clerk. The door can be removed and the front door 12 can be closed.

(10) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter of the medal “d”, and the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal of the medal The relationship with the thickness “t” may be set so as to satisfy “d <w” and “h1> t”.
By satisfying “d <w”, the entire medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. That is, the medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a without a part of the medals protruding from the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying “h1> t”, a medal can be inserted between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with a medal placed on the second closing part 12a, the front door 12 closes with the medal settled between the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a. Will be. Thus, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. Further, the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a does not hit the first closing portion 13c or the front end of the cabinet 13, so that the front door 12 cannot be closed.
(11) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications described in the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Ninth embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to the control of stopping the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side and the control of the effect output on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26 (a) is a diagram showing types of special combinations (gears) and termination conditions, and FIG. 26 (b) is a diagram showing types of gaming states and a prescribed number of each gaming state. (C) is a figure which shows the number table of the internal drawing in the setting 1, and the advantageous section drawing.

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the ninth embodiment, BB (first-class accessory continuous operating device; first-class big bonus) and RB (first-class special bonus) are used as special roles (casings). Regular bonus), and MB (second-type accessory continuous operation device; second-type big bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is continuously executed. During the RB game, the winning probability of the small role is increased. Furthermore, when the payout number of medals during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Further, when the payout number of medals during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

  The MB is a device capable of continuously operating a CB (second type special accessory). That is, during the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the role lottery means 61, all the small wins are in a state of being repeatedly won, and the stop switch 42 is operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the moment when the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is one). Further, the CB game ends in one game, and when the number of paid out medals in the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

As shown in FIG. 26 (b), in the ninth embodiment, the game state includes seven non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB game, BB game, and MB game. I have. Then, the main control board 50 controls the transition of these game states.
Here, the “specified number” means the number of inserted medals for which the start switch 41 can be operated (game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the specified number in the MB is set to “1”, and the specified number in a game state other than the MB is set to “3”.

Further, “RT” means that the type (number) of the condition device (combination, replay, small combination) to be drawn and the winning probability are in a unique drawing state.
Furthermore, the term “non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but means that the type of the condition device to be drawn and its winning probability are different from RT.
In any game state, if the start condition of RT is satisfied, the next game is shifted to RT, and if the end condition of RT is satisfied in RT, the next game is shifted to non-RT.

Further, when the special combination is won, the special combination winning information is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the selected special combination stops on the activated line.
Then, a game that has not been won as a special role is called “non-internal”, and has been won as a special role, but the symbol combination corresponding to the selected special role is not stopped on the active line, that is, the special role is won. Games that carry information are called "inside".

In addition, the probability that a desired symbol to be stopped and displayed on the activated line can be stopped on the activated line between the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated and the time when the reel 31 is stopped (maximum number of moving frames) is set to “pull-in”. Rate (PB). "
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the active line (effective). It is referred to as “PB # 1” if the line cannot be drawn).
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled) to the active line. Called "PB = 1".

When the player wins the BB and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on the activated line (BB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the BB game starts from the next game. During the BB game, the RB game is continuously executed, so that the winning probability of the small role is increased. When the payout number of medals during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends, and the game state returns to the game state before shifting to the BB game from the next game.
Furthermore, if the BB is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on the active line. The game state in which the winning information of BB is carried over is referred to as “BB inside”.
The transition timing to the inside of the BB can be appropriately set. For example, in the game having won the BB, the game may be transferred to the inside of the BB after stopping all the reels 31. In the game having won the BB, the game may not be transferred to the inside of the BB, It may be shifted inside.

Further, when the player wins the RB and the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on the activated line (RB wins), there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the RB game is started from the next game. During the RB game, the winning probability of the small role increases. When the payout number of medals during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game is terminated, and the game state returns to the game state before shifting to the RB game from the next game.
Furthermore, if the symbol combination corresponding to the RB is not stopped at the activated line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB is stopped at the activated line. The game state in which the winning information of the RB is carried over is referred to as “inside the RB”.
Note that the transition timing to the inside of the RB can be appropriately set similarly to the transition timing to the inside of the BB. For example, in the game that has won the RB, the game may be transferred to the inside of the RB after stopping all the reels 31. In the game that has won the RB, the game may not be transferred to the inside of the RB. It may be shifted inside.

  Further, when the player wins the MB and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the activated line (the MB wins), there is no medal payout in the current game, but the MB game starts from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. When the payout number of medals during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game is terminated, and the game state returns from the next game to the game state before shifting to the MB game.

Furthermore, if the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is not stopped at the activated line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is stopped at the activated line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is referred to as “MB inside”.
In the ninth embodiment, since the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is set to “PB = 1”, if the player wins the MB, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB always stops at the active line in the current game. , MB inside.

Further, the condition device (role) of the ninth embodiment is roughly divided into a special role (role), a replay (re-game), and a small role.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles, BB, RB, and MB, and two types of replays, replay 1 and replay 2. , Right correct answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2.
Note that the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell are collectively referred to as a “push order bell”.
Further, the "condition device" is operated in accordance with the winning number determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61. When one winning number is determined, one or more condition devices corresponding to the winning number are activated, and a winning flag corresponding to the activated condition device is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the ninth embodiment, one of the winning numbers from “0” to “16” is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, and the winning number corresponds to the determined winning number. One of the condition devices from the non-winning to the MB is activated.
Each of the two types of replays wins independently, and does not win over other condition devices (roles).
In addition, there are four types of bells: a common bell, a left correct bell, a middle correct bell, and a right correct bell, all of which are independently elected and do not overlap with other roles.

Furthermore, there are a case where the watermelon is won alone and a case where the watermelon is overlapped with BB.
Further, the cherry 1 has a case of winning alone and a case of overlapping winning with the BB, and the cherry 2 has a case of winning alone, a case of overlapping winning with RB, and a case of overlapping winning with BB. .
In addition, BB has a case where it wins alone and a case where it overlaps with watermelon, cherry 1 or cherry 2, but the RB does not win alone, it only overlaps with cherry 2 and MB. Will win only, and will not win with other roles.

The “payout” means the number of paid out medals when the symbol combination corresponding to each condition device is stopped (the winning combination).
In the ninth embodiment, for the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell, the payout is different between the specified number 3 (game state other than during MB) and the specified number 1 (MB), but otherwise, The payout is the same for the prescribed number 3 and the prescribed number 1.

Note that the left correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the first left stop is in the correct answer order and the other than the first left stop is an incorrect push order. Then, one medal is paid out in the incorrect pushing order, and when the specified number is 1, 14 medals are paid out in the correct pushing order, and 15 medals are paid out in the incorrect pushing order.
Similarly, the middle correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the middle first stop is in the correct answer order and the other than the middle first stop is an incorrect push order, and the right correct bell is in the right first stop in the correct push order. , The push order bell other than the right first stop is the incorrect answer push order.
The common bell is a bell for paying out eight medals in any order.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). The role lottery means 61 performs lottery of a winning number. When the winning number is determined by the lottery means 61, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
The lottery of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as "internal lottery".
As shown in FIG. 26C, in the ninth embodiment, one of the winning numbers “0” to “15” is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61. The winning numbers “0” to “15” respectively correspond to the condition devices of “non-winning” to “MB”. When the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.

For example, when the winning number “1” is determined, the condition device of “Replay 1” corresponding to the winning number “1” operates. When the winning number “8” is determined, the condition device of “watermelon + BB” corresponding to the winning number “8” operates.
As described in the first embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 is based on the random number generation means, the random number extraction means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generation means, and the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means. A winning number determining means for determining a winning number; when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is operated.
For example, the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means is the same between the non-internal and internal states, and the condition device that operates is sometimes the same. The condition device used may be different.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the winning flag control means 62. The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of a winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result of the winning number by the winning lottery means 61.
In the ninth embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all combinations. Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the role included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets the winning flag). .

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number “1” is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, the winning flag of “Replay 1” included in the condition device of “Replay 1” corresponding to the winning number “1” is set. It turns on, and the other winning flags turn off.
Similarly, in the non-RT, when the winning number “10” is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, “Cherry 1” and “BB” included in the condition device of “Cherry 1 + BB” corresponding to the winning number “10” Are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, since the winning information of the role other than the special role (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, even if the role which does not carry the winning information in the game this time is won and the winning flag of the role is turned on, the role is not carried out. Regardless of whether or not a win is made, the winning flag is turned off at the end of the current game.
On the other hand, since the winning information of the special role (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, when the special role is won in the game this time, and the winning flag of the special role is once turned on, the special role is not turned on. The winning flag is kept on until a prize is won, and when the special role is won, the winning flag is turned off.

  For example, in the non-RT, when the winning number “10” is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, “Cherry 1” and “BB” included in the condition device of “Cherry 1 + BB” corresponding to the winning number “10” Are turned on, but if "BB" does not win in this game, regardless of whether "Cherry 1" has won in this game, "Cherry 1" will be displayed at the end of this game. The winning flag of "1" is turned off, and the winning flag of "BB" is kept on. In this case, the process moves from the next game to inside the BB.

Further, for example, when the winning number “9” is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 inside the BB, the “cherry” corresponding to the winning number “9” is added to the winning flag of “BB” carried over. The winning flag of “Cherry 1” included in the condition device of “1” is turned on. That is, the two winning flags “Cherry 1” and “BB” are turned on.
For this reason, in the non-RT, when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 determines the winning number “10” (duplicate winning of “Cherry 1 + BB”), and inside the BB, the lottery by the role lottery means 61 determines the winning number “9”. "(The single winning of" Cherry 1 ") is the same as the ON / OFF state of the winning flag.

During the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 sets the winning flags of all the small combinations (seven of common bell, left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2). turn on. For this reason, although it is not the one won by the lottery by the lottery means 61, the state is the same as that of winning all the small wins.
For example, during the MB game, when the winning number “0” is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, the “non-winning” corresponding to the winning number “0” does not include any of the roles. The winning flag of the small win (the above seven small wins) is turned on.
For example, during the MB game, when the winning lottery means 61 determines the winning number “1” by the lottery, the “replay 1” included in the condition device of the “replay 1” corresponding to the winning number “1”. In addition to the winning flags, the winning flags of all the small wins (the above seven small wins) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the reel control means 65, and the reel control means 65 includes a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to ON / OFF of the winning flag. Is provided. Further, each stop position determination table defines a stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.
When the winning number is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61 and the on / off control of the winning flag of the role included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is performed by the winning flag control means 62, the reel control means 65 selects a stop position determination table corresponding to the ON / OFF of the winning flag.

When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The reel 31 is determined and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.
Further, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of replay 1 is on and the winning flags other than replay 1 are off is such that the symbol combination corresponding to replay 1 stops on the active line, and The stop position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than Replay 1 does not stop on the activated line.

  Furthermore, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on and the winning flags other than the left correct answer bell are off indicates that the stop switch 42 is operated in the first left stop. When the symbol combination for paying out eight medals stops on the active line and the stop switch 42 is operated in a mode other than the first left stop, the symbol combination for paying out one medal stops on the active line. Thus, the stop position of each reel 31 is determined.

In addition, the column of “number of internal lotteries” in FIG. 26C shows the number of each winning number in each game state. When the number of internal lotteries is divided by "65536", the winning probability is obtained.
For example, since the entry number of the winning number “4” in the non-RT is “3000”, the winning number “4” is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT, and the “left” corresponding to the winning number “4” is determined. The probability that the condition device of the “correct answer bell” will operate is “3000/65536”.

In the column of “number of internal drawing” in FIG. 26C, “*” indicates that the advantageous section drawing is executable.
Here, the “advantageous section” means a game section having performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated).
The “instruction function” refers to a function of displaying (notifying) the “advantageous operation mode” to the player.
Further, the “operation of the instruction function” includes displaying the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won.

Furthermore, “advantageous section drawing” means a lottery that determines whether or not to shift to an advantageous section.
Then, when the player wins in the advantageous section drawing and shifts to the advantageous section, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function, and it is possible to inform the correct pushing order when the pushing order bell is won.
For example, the number “8000” of the winning number “3” (“common bell”) in non-RT is marked with “*”, which means that in non-RT, the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). Is determined to be the winning number “3” (“common bell”) by lottery, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in non-RT, when the winning number is determined to be “0” (non-winning), and when the winning numbers “4” to “6” (“left correct bell”, “ When it is determined to be "medium correct bell" or "right correct bell"), the advantageous section extraction is not executed, but otherwise, the advantageous section extraction can be executed.
Further, in the RT, the inside of the RB, and the inside of the BB, when the winning number is determined to be “4” to “6” (“left correct bell”, “middle correct bell”, or “right correct bell”). Except for the non-RT, when the number is determined to be the same as the winning number, the advantageous section extraction can be executed.

In addition, since the winning information of the BB is carried over inside the BB, when the winning number “9” (single winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined inside the BB, and when the non-RT (non-internal), When the winning number is determined to be "10" (overlap winning of "Cherry 1 + BB"), the on / off state of the winning flag is the same.
In addition, the numbers of the winning number “10” (non-internal), the winning number “10” (duplicate winning of “Cherry 1 + BB”), and the number of the winning number “9” (independent winning of “Cherry 1”) inside the BB Is set to the same “200”.
For this reason, when the winning number “9” (single winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined inside the BB, the advantageous section drawing can be executed.

When the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined in the RB, the winning flag of "Cherry 1" and the winning flag of "RB" carried over are turned on. .
Further, "BB" and "RB" are identical in that they are both special roles (casings), and the winning number "10" (duplicate winning of "Cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal). The entry number and the entry number of the winning number “9” (independent winning of “Cherry 1”) in the RB are set to the same “200”.
Therefore, even when the winning number “9” (single winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined in the RB, the advantageous section drawing can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number is determined to be "12" (duplicate winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") or the winning number "13" (duplicate winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") in the non-RT, the winning is made inside the RB or inside the BB. The case where the number is determined to be "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") coincides in that the winning flag of "Cherry 2" and the winning flag of the special combination (gear) are turned on.
Furthermore, when the numbers of the winning number “12” (duplicate winning of “Cherry 2 + RB”) and the winning number “13” (duplicate winning of “Cherry 2 + BB”) in the non-RT are added up, it becomes “300”, which is inside the RB and BB This matches the number "300" of the winning number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") in the inside.
Therefore, even when the winning number “11” (single winning of “Cherry 2”) is determined in the inside of the RB and the inside of the BB, the advantageous section drawing can be executed.

The column of “number of advantageous section lots” in FIG. 26 (c) indicates the number of each winning number. The winning probability is obtained by dividing the number of the advantageous section drawn by “16384”.
For example, in a non-RT, RB, or BB, when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is determined to be the winning number “1” (“Replay 1” alone), the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is as follows. "20/16384".
In addition, for example, in the non-RT or RT, when the lottery by the lottery means 61 determines the winning number “8” (duplicate winning of “watermelon + BB”), the probability of winning in the advantageous section drawing is “10000/16384”. ".

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to “PB = 1”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the lottery of the MB is performed in the non-RT and the RT, but when the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB in the current game always stops at the active line. The game is shifted from the next game to the MB game without being in the inside.
Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), during the MB game, the lottery of Replay 1 or Replay 2 is performed, and regardless of the lottery result by the role lottery means 61, all the small wins are repeatedly won. Become.

Therefore, when the winning number “1” (single winning of “Replay 1”) is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of “Replay 1” and all small roles (common bell, left correct bell, middle The winning flag of the correct answer bell, right correct answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2) is turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number “2” (single winning of “Replay 2”) is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of “Replay 2” and the winning flags of all small wins are turned on.

Then, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game, that is, when the winning flag of "Replay 1" and the winning flags of all small roles are turned on. Means that the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is ON is selected. However, during the MB game, the prescribed number is 1 (one coin is inserted), the payout is different from non-RT and the like, and 14 or 15 coins are paid out.
With this, when the winning number “1” (single winning of “Replay 1”) is determined during the MB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left stop (when the push order is correct), 14 When the symbol combination for paying out the medals stops on the active line and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the first left stop (when the push order is incorrect), the symbol combination for paying out 15 medals is changed. Stop at the active line.

Similarly, when the winning number “2” (single winning of “Replay 2”) is determined during the MB game, the same stop position determining table as when only the right flag of the right correct answer bell is ON is selected, and At the time of the first stop (when the pushing order is correct), 14 cards are paid out, and when other than the right first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), 15 cards are paid out.
Then, in the first game during the MB game, the push order for paying out 14 cards is reported, and in the second game during the MB game, the push order for paying out 15 cards is reported.
As described above, the ending condition of the MB game is set so that the number of paid out medals exceeds 14, and by performing such notification, 29 medals are paid out during the MB game. You can do so. In addition, since the specified number is set to “1” during the MB game, the player can acquire 27 medals obtained by subtracting the inserted number “2” from the payout number “29”.

In addition, in order to inform the player of the pushing order that is advantageous during the MB game, it is necessary to shift to an advantageous section.
For this reason, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the non-RT or RT, the winning of the advantageous section lottery when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is determined to the winning number “15” (the single winning of “MB”). The probability is set to “16384/16384”, that is, “100%”.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the effect group number selecting means 64. The effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number, which is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
As shown in FIG. 26 (c), the effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Specifically, the effect group numbers "0" to "3" are determined corresponding to the winning numbers "0" to "3", and the effect group numbers "4" to "6" corresponding to the winning numbers "4" to "6". And the effect group numbers "5" to "13" are determined corresponding to the winning numbers "7" to "15".
Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

  Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the pressing order instruction number selecting means 63. When the winning number corresponding to the pushing order bell (left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell) is determined in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the determined winning number is determined. Is selected to select a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct pressing order) corresponding to.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the control command transmitting unit 71. The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control command) output to the sub-control board 80 and required for the effect to the sub-control board 80.
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting unit 71 outputs, as the control command, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (during AT, correct answer pressing). Only when the winning number corresponding to the condition device having the order is determined), the effect group number, the information when the stop switch 42 is operated, the information on the winning combination, and the like, and the gaming state (non-RT, RT) , Inside the RB, inside the BB, during the RB, during the BB, during the MB), the effect group number, and the like, to the sub-control board 80.

As a result, the sub control board 80 determines the game state of the main control board 50 and the condition devices (excluding the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell) operated by the combination lottery means 61. be able to.
On the sub-control board 80 side, it is possible to judge that one of the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell has been won by the effect group number, but the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, or the right correct bell. It is not possible to judge which of them has been won (the order of correct answers).
Also, during the AT, it is possible to notify the correct push order by the push order instruction number.

The sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects during the game and during the game standby.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (the control command transmitting means 71) unidirectionally transmits the information ( Control command).
The sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like, like the main control board 50.
The effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82.

Further, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control unit 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect determination table and the like.
Further, the effect determination table defines the effect to be output, and a plurality of effect output control means 91 determine the effect to be output using any of the effect determination tables, and determine the determined effect. Is controlled to be output.
That is, the effect output control means 91 determines what effect is to be output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and one of the effect determination tables. , The output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 are controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an effect determination table commonly used for non-RT (in non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and FIG. 28 is an effect determination table commonly used in RB and BB. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, 18 types of effect patterns from “no effect” to “continuous effect” are provided. In addition, each production pattern from “character production (buzzing)” to “continuous production” defines productions with different contents.
For example, the “confirmed effect” is an effect of which the player knows that the special role has been won, and the “notification effect after the first stop” is the effect after the first stop (after the first stop switch 42 is operated). The effect is output at the timing, "Left first stop effect" is an effect of the content instructing that the left stop switch 42 should be operated first, and "Continuous effect" is continuous for a plurality of games. This is the effect that is output.

The column of “number of effect pattern allocations” in FIG. 27 indicates the number of allocations of each effect pattern when each effect group number is received. Dividing the number of effect pattern allocations by "256" gives the selection probability of each effect pattern. In FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding condition device is described below each effect group number.
For example, in the non-RT, the lottery by the role lottery means 61 determines the winning number “1” (single win of “Replay 1”), and the selection probability of “no effect” when the effect group number “1” is transmitted is “128/256”, the selection probability of “character production (buzzing)” is “20/256”, the selection probability of “conversation production (buzzing)” is also “20/256”, and “cut-in production” (Strong effect) ”is“ 0/256 ”.

As described above, the control command transmitting unit 71 sends information indicating the gaming state (non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB, BB, MB) to the sub control board 80, and Send the production group number.
Then, the effect output control means 91 of the sub control board 80 selects an effect determination table corresponding to the game state based on the information indicating the game state received from the main control substrate 50, and selects the selected effect determination table and the main Based on the effect group number received from the control board 50, it is determined which of the effect patterns to output, and the outputs of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 are controlled in accordance with the determination.

  Here, in the non-RT (during non-internal), if the winning number “14” (single winning of “BB”) is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61 and the effect group number “12” is transmitted, the effect output is performed. The control means 91 selects the effect determination table used in common for non-RT and RT (non-AT) shown in FIG. 27, and places the effect group number “12” (single winning of “BB”) in the effect determination table. Using the numbers, it is determined which of the effect patterns is to be output. As shown in FIG. 27, when “BB” alone is won in non-RT, “continuous effect” is selected with a probability of “40/256”, for example.

On the other hand, in the BB, when the winning number “0” (“non-winning”) is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61 and the effect group number “0” is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 An effect determination table used commonly in the RB and BB shown in FIG. 28 is selected, and any of the effects is determined by using the numbers in the column of the effect group number “0” (“non-winning”) in the effect determination table. Decide whether to output the effect of the pattern. As shown in FIG. 28, at the time of “non-winning” in the BB, for example, “determined effect” is selected with a probability of “80/256”.
In this way, the effect output control means 91 becomes a game which has been independently won as “BB” by the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT (during non-inside), and has become “non-winned” in the role lottery means 61 during the inside of the BB. The effect to be output is determined using different effect determination tables for the game. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.

  Further, in the non-RT, when the winning number “14” (single win of “BB”) is determined by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 sets the winning number “14”. The winning flag of “BB” included in the condition device of “BB” corresponding to “” is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control unit 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of “BB” is on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a “BB-only stop position determination table”.

The “BB independent stop position determination table” is used to stop each reel 31 so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line, and the symbol combination corresponding to a combination other than BB does not stop on the active line. Determine the position.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the stop switch 42 based on the “BB-only stop position determination table” and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

Further, when the winning number “0” (“non-winning”) is obtained by the lottery by the lottery means 61 inside the BB, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 carries over the “BB” carried over. Are kept on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control unit 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of “BB” is on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same "BB independent stop position determination table" as when the "BB" is solely won by the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT is selected.
For this reason, when the winning lottery means 61 becomes "non-winning" in the inside of BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when the winning lottery means 61 alone wins "BB" in the non-RT. Further, "the stop control of the same reel 31 is performed" means that when each stop switch 42 is operated in the same mode (the pressing order and the operation timing), each reel 31 stops at the same position and This means that a stop roll is displayed.

As described above, the main control board 50 side has the same condition when the winning lottery means 61 alone wins the "BB" in the non-RT and when the winning lottery means 61 becomes "non-winning" inside the BB. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the stop position determination table described above, but the sub-control board 80 determines an effect to be output using a different effect determination table. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub-control board 80 side, and the effects can be diversified.
In addition, even if the same reel 31 is stopped on the main control board 50 side and the same stop number is displayed, different effects are output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the special role is won. (Inside) can be guessed to the player.

Furthermore, by selecting a different effect determination table on the sub-control board 80 side when the non-RT “BB” alone is won and when “non-winning” inside the BB, the “BB” alone during the non-RT is selected. At the time of winning, an effect determination table that has a low selection probability of a defined effect (an effect that the player knows that the player has won the BB) is selected. A decision table can be selected.
This makes it difficult for the player to know that the player has won "BB" in the game having won "BB", and that the player has won "BB" inside the BB. By making it easy for the player to understand, the player can aim for the prize of "BB", and the inside of the BB does not continue forever, so that it is not disadvantageous for the player.

  In addition, in the non-RT, when the winning number “8” (duplicate winning of “watermelon + BB”) is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61 and the effect group number “6” is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 An effect determination table used for both non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal) shown in FIG. 27 is selected, and the effect group number “6” (“watermelon + BB” is repeatedly won in this effect determination table) ) Is used to determine which effect pattern effect to output. As shown in FIG. 27, at the time of “Watermelon + BB” overlapping winning in a non-RT, for example, with a probability of “50/256”, “character production (buzzing)”, “conversation production (buzzing)”, or “cut-in production ( "Strong production)" and "continuous production" with a probability of "30/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of BB, when the winning number “7” is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61 (independently won of “watermelon”) and the effect group number “5” is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 Selects the effect determination table commonly used in the RB and BB shown in FIG. 28, and uses the numbers in the column of the effect group number “5” (single win of “watermelon”) in the effect determination table. , Which of the effect patterns is to be output. As shown in FIG. 28, when “watermelon” alone in the BB is elected, for example, “character production (lively)” or “conversation production (lively)” is selected with a probability of “73/256”, and “20” is selected. / 256 ”with the probability of“ / 256 ”.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 is a non-RT (non-inside) game in which the role lottery means 61 repeatedly wins “watermelon + BB” in the role lottery means 61 and the role lottery means 61 wins “watermelon” alone in the BB inside. The effect to be output is determined by using a different effect determination table for the game. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.

In addition, during non-internal, the continuous production in the case of "watermelon + BB" overlapping winning is shown by showing the player a continuous performance over a plurality of games to keep the player's expectation for "BB" winning long. The probability is set high.
On the other hand, during the BB, if the player shows a continuous performance that spans a plurality of games, the "BB" prize is delayed and the medal of the player decreases, so that "watermelon" alone wins The selection probability of the continuous effect at the time is set low, and the selection probability of the fixed effect at the time of "non-winning" is set high in order to prompt the player to win the "BB" prize.
Note that the winning probability of each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning may be set so that the medal of the player does not decrease in the BB, and the selection probability of the continuous effect may be set high.

  In addition, when the winning number “8” (duplicate winning of “watermelon + BB”) is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-internal), the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side Then, the two winning flags “watermelon” and “BB” included in the condition device of “watermelon + BB” corresponding to the winning number “8” are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of “watermelon” and “BB” are on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as “watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table”.

The “watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table” is set so that the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon or BB can be stopped at the activated line, and the symbol combination corresponding to a combination other than the watermelon and BB does not stop at the activated line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the stop switch based on the “watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table” and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. A stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  Further, when the winning number “7” (single “watermelon” winning) is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61 inside the BB, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 carries over “ While keeping the winning flag of “BB” on, in addition, the winning flag of “watermelon” included in the condition device of “watermelon” corresponding to the winning number “7” is turned on, and “watermelon” and “BB” are turned on. Are turned off. Thereby, the two winning flags “watermelon” and “BB” are turned on. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of “watermelon” and “BB” are on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same “watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table” as when the “watermelon + BB” is won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT is selected.

For this reason, when “watermelon” is independently won by the role lottery means 61 inside the BB, the same reel 31 stop control as when “watermelon + BB” is repeatedly won by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT is performed. .
As described above, the main control board 50 side determines whether “watermelon + BB” is won by the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT mode and “watermelon” is independently won by the role lottery means 61 inside the BB. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table, but the sub-control board 80 determines an effect to be output using a different effect determination table. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.

  In addition, when "Cherry 1 + BB" is non-RT and non-RT, and "Cherry 1" alone is selected inside the BB, when "watermelon + BB" is non-RT and double-selected, and during BB In the same manner as when “watermelon” is won alone, the main control board 50 determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub control board 80 determines a different effect determination table. Use to determine the effect to output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.

Furthermore, when "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" is non-RT and non-RT, and "Cherry 2" alone is selected inside the BB or RB, non-RT is "Watermelon + BB". The main control board 50 determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, as in the case of the double win and the single win of “watermelon” inside the BB. On the substrate 80 side, the effect to be output is determined using different effect determination tables. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub-control board 80 side, so that the effects can be diversified.

As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, when the “watermelon” is won alone in the non-RT and when the “watermelon” is independently won inside the BB, the number of arrangements of each effect pattern is the same. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each effect pattern are the same.
However, when a single "watermelon" is won by non-RT, the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the winning flag of "watermelon" is on and the other winning flags are off. When "watermelon" alone is won in the BB, the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. I do. Therefore, the stop control of the reel 31 is different between when a single "watermelon" is won by non-RT and when a single "watermelon" is won inside the BB.
As described above, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same on the sub-control board 80 side when “watermelon” is independently won in non-RT and when “watermelon” is independently won in the BB. The stop control of the reel 31 is different on the main control board 50 side.

  As described above, in a plurality of gaming states, the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means of the role lottery means 61 is the same, and the winning number determined by the winning number determining means of the role lottery means 61 is the same. When the same condition device is operated, the stop control of the reels 31 for each game state (the selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (the selected effect determination table). ) May be different.

  In a plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extracting means of the role lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the role lottery means 61 are the same, and the same condition is applied. When the device operates, the stop control of the reels 31 for each game state (the selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (the selected effect determination table) is different. .

  Furthermore, in a plurality of game states, the random number values extracted by the random number extracting means of the role lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the role lottery means 61 are different, and the same condition device is used. , The stop control of the reels 31 for each game state (the selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (the selected effect determination table) may be different.

<Modification of Ninth Embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) Type of combination, type of condition device, type of game state, prescribed number in each game state, payout at the time of winning of each combination, allocation of the number of internal drawing, advantageous section drawing described in the ninth embodiment The allocation of the numbers, the types of the effect patterns, the allocation of the allocation numbers of the effect patterns, and the like are merely examples, and can be appropriately set according to the game content.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number table of the internal drawing and the advantageous section drawing in the setting 1 is shown. However, six levels from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided as setting values, and different internal values are set for each setting value. A drawing table for the drawing and the advantageous section drawing can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the game state and the effect group number to the sub-control board 80. Thus, the sub control board 80 determines the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects an effect pattern with a probability according to the game state and the condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting unit 71 may transmit the winning number determined by the internal drawing to the sub-control board 80, and may transmit information indicating the condition device corresponding to the winning number determined by the internal drawing. Is also good. Then, the sub control board 80 may determine the condition apparatus on the main control board 50 based on the received winning number and the information indicating the condition apparatus.

Further, for example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the condition device determined by the internal drawing and information on the winning combination to the sub-control board 80. Then, the sub control board 80 may determine the game state of the main control board 50 based on the information indicating the condition device and the information of the winning combination.
Further, for example, the sub control board 80 receives the information indicating that “BB” has been won, but if the information indicating that “BB” has won is not received, the game state of the main control board 50 will be changed. It can be determined that it is inside the BB.
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the information indicating the effect group number, the winning number and the condition device received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 side An effect pattern may be selected.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits, to the sub-control board 80, information indicating ON / OFF of a winning flag corresponding to each winning combination and information of a winning combination. Then, on the sub control board 80 side, the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating on / off of the winning flag and the information of the winning combination.
For example, if the information indicating that the winning flag of “BB” is ON is received, but the information indicating that “BB” has won is not received, the game state of the main control board 50 is in BB inside. Can be determined.

In addition, since the lottery of “BB” is not performed in the inside of the BB, when information indicating that only the winning flag of “BB” is ON is received in the BB, the internal lottery in the main control board 50 side is performed. Can be determined as the winning number “0” (“non-winning”).
The effect pattern on the sub-control board 80 side based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub-control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side also determined on the sub-control board 80 side. May be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, the term “single winning” is used to mean that only a role other than the special role is won, and the special role is not won at the same time. , Meaning that a special role and another role other than the special role are simultaneously elected.
For example, the election of “watermelon + controller 1” in the BB is a double election in the sense that multiple types of electors are elected at the same time. Since no prize has been won at the same time, in the sense of the ninth embodiment, a single prize is won.

In addition, when the “watermelon + controller 1 + BB” in the non-inside is won (overlap winning) and when the “watermelon + controller 1” in the BB is won (independent win), the main control board 50 side Since the on / off state of the winning flag is the same, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table. However, since the winning number and the effect group number are different, the sub-control board 80 side The effect to be output is determined using different effect determination tables.
The "control hand" is a hand for making the stop position determination table to be selected different by changing the on / off state of the winning flag, thereby making the stop control of the reel 31 different, and a winning is achieved. It is not a role.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number “11” (independent winning of “Cherry 2”) is determined inside the RB and inside the BB, the advantageous section extraction can be executed. Advantageous section drawing may not be performed when a winning combination that is duplicated with a special combination is won.
(7) The various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments and the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being carried out alone, but can be carried out in appropriate combinations.

<Tenth embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to control of display of the management information display LED 74.
The main CPU 55 sets a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress), a setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on (for example, power-on, first interrupt processing activation, program activation, etc.). In the RWM abnormality error state (setting check mode, setting check is being performed), control is performed so that all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
As described in the second embodiment, since the management information display LED 74 is configured by a four-digit LED, “8888” is displayed when all the LEDs are turned on. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the LED of the management information display LED 74 has a defect.

If the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to a setting change state in which the set value can be changed. Further, when the state shifts to the setting change state, all the management information display LEDs 74 are turned on.
Then, 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to a time longer than the time required from the power-on to the transition to the setting change state when the setting key switch is on at the time of power-on. I have.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that the lighting period of all the management information display LEDs 74 from a predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to a time shorter than the time required from the power-on to the transition to the setting change state. In this case, first, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on, then the management information is temporarily displayed on the management information display LED 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on again. For this reason, there is a possibility that the manager (the clerk of the hall) suspects that the gaming machine has some trouble.

Therefore, the lighting period of all the management information display LEDs 74 from a predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to 5 seconds.
The lighting period of all the management information display LEDs 74 from a predetermined timing based on the power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, but may be any time longer than the time required from the power-on to the transition to the setting change state. May be set.

Hereinafter, the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be described.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are referred to as “digit 6”, “digit 7”, “digit 8”, and “digit 9” in order from the left.
Further, among the four-digit LEDs included in the management information display LED 74, the left two LEDs (digits 6 and 7) are referred to as “identification segments”, and the two right LEDs (digits 8 and 9) are referred to as “ratio”. Seg ".

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Upper digit of identification segment. Digit 7: Lower digit of identification segment. Digit 8: Upper digit of ratio segment. Digit 9: Lower digit of ratio segment.
Further, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED including segments A to G and segment DP.

The display of the test pattern of the management information display LED 74 is performed to confirm whether all the segments (segments A to G and DP) are correctly turned on and off. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, all the segments are set to have the ON state and the OFF state.
When a test pattern is displayed on the management information display LED 74, the test pattern is displayed at one of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on (2) Within 5 seconds from setting change start processing (3) During setting change (mode) (4) During setting check (mode) (5) During RWM error error

As a test pattern, first, a predetermined display is switched every 1 second and displayed for 5 seconds. Note that the time for maintaining one display is not limited to one second, and the display time of the test pattern is not limited to five seconds (other than five seconds).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs have a light-on state and a light-off state during 5 seconds, which is the display time of the test pattern.
Second, as a test pattern, all segments of all LEDs are made to blink. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off with one blink (lighting and turning off).

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a first example of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In the test pattern display of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, which will be described later, segments that are turned on are indicated by solid lines, and segments that are turned off are indicated by dotted lines. In the segment DP, the lighting state is indicated by a black circle, and the light-off response is indicated by a white circle.
In the following description, “.” Indicates that the segment DP is in a lighting state, and “.” Indicates that the segment DP is in a non-lighting state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display of each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern displaying “0.”. More specifically, this is a pattern in which segments A to F and DP are turned on and segment G is turned off.
The other is a pattern for displaying "-." More specifically, the pattern is such that the segment G is turned on and the segments A to F and DP are turned off.
Therefore, “0.” and “−.” Have the opposite relationship between the lit and unlit segments, respectively.

In the state shown in FIG. 29A, “0.” is displayed in the upper digit of the identification segment and the upper digit of the ratio segment, and “−.” Is displayed in the lower digit of the identification segment and the lower digit of the ratio segment.
Further, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29A is maintained for one second. It should be noted that counting for one second may be measured by the number of interrupt processes. For example, when the display of FIG. 29A is started, “447 (D)” is set in the counter, and “1” is subtracted by each interruption processing. Ending the display of a). Thereby, the display of FIG. 29A can be maintained for “2.235 × 447 = 999.045 ms”.

When the display for about one second in FIG. 29A is completed, the display shifts to the display in FIG. 29B.
The display of FIG. 29B is obtained by replacing the display of FIG. 29A with the LED displaying “0.” and the LED displaying “−.”. That is, in the display of FIG. 29 (b), in contrast to the display of FIG. 29 (a), "-." Indicates “0.”.
Further, similarly to the case of FIG. 29A, the display state shown in FIG. 29B is continued for one second (447 interruption).

The display contents of FIG. 29A and FIG. 29B are switched and displayed every second and are executed for five seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) have the same display content as (a), and (d) has the same display content as (b).
When the display of the test pattern (5 seconds) is completed, the display shifts to the normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which “7.U.5.0.” And the advantageous section ratio are displayed. In addition, an accessory ratio may be displayed instead of the advantageous section ratio.

As described above, when “0.” and “−.” Are displayed on the LED, a lighting state and a light-off state can be created for all the segments (A to G and DP). Cannot be turned off or cannot be turned off).
In addition, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as “0.−.” Or “−.0.”. Therefore, there is no possibility of confusing the test pattern with the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a second example of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In Example 1 of FIG. 29, the display content is changed every second, and the test pattern is displayed for five seconds. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for displaying within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on turning on the power or within 5 seconds from the setting change start processing.
In contrast, Example 2 of the test pattern display shown in FIG. 30 is suitable for displaying a test pattern until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, such as during a setting change, a setting check, or an RWM abnormality error. .
Of course, the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used when displaying until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
Similarly, it goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may be used when the test pattern display start condition is satisfied within a predetermined period of time.

In Example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." Is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned on, and "*" is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned off. *. *. *. "(" * "Indicates that the segments A to G are off). In other words, it is a pattern in which “8.8.8.8.” Blinks.
In Example 2 of FIG. 30, the lighting state of all the segments shown in FIG. 30A is maintained for 0.3 seconds, and then the lighting state of all the segments shown in FIG. 30B is maintained for 0.3 seconds. Then, the lighting state shown in FIG. 30A and the light-off state shown in FIG.

  In the tenth embodiment, the blink interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, “134 (D)” is set as the initial value of the timer, and the timer value is decremented by “1” every 2.235 ms interrupt processing. When the timer value becomes “0”, the lighting time or It is determined that the light-off time has elapsed. Thus, by counting the number of interrupts “134”, “299.49” ms can be counted.

In the test pattern display example 2 of FIG. 30 as well, the lighting state and the light-off state can be created for all the segments by “8.” and “*.”. Therefore, a segment defect (cannot be turned on or cannot be turned off) can be easily determined visually.
When displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as “8.8.”. For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display blinks regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." Is displayed and the segment DP does not light. On the other hand, in the display of "8.8.", Since the segment DP is also lit, the two are not confused.

  Each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all reels 31 have stopped and the payout process has been completed). Then, in the subsequent interrupt processing, the updated ratio is displayed. Here, when a power failure occurs immediately before the update of the ratio and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power is restored, the update (calculation) process of the ratio is performed during the 5 seconds during which the test pattern is displayed. Execute Then, when the display of the test pattern is finished and the ratio display is started, the ratio updated after the return from the power-off is displayed.

<Eleventh embodiment>
FIG. 31A is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31B is a diagram showing management information display LEDs 74 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 17C is a diagram showing the set value display LED 73 in the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31A, the credit display LED 76 includes a digit 1a (upper digit) and a digit 2a (lower digit). The acquired number display LED 78 is composed of a digit 3a (upper digit) and a digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, the “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, is particularly configured by a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment).
Each of these digits 1a to 4a is a 7-segment display having a dot segment (segment P). In particular, the segment P of the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77.

Digit 5a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as status display LED 79. Although FIG. 1 shows the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78, the state display LED 79 is not shown. However, in actuality, as shown in FIG. 31A, a credit number display LED 76, an acquisition number display LED 78, and a state display LED 79 are mounted on the display substrate 75.
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only one bet display LED 79a is lit. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are turned on. When three medals are bet, all of the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are turned on.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 can be operated. Therefore, it does not light in a state where a medal has not been bet (or a replay has not been automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights when a medal can be inserted. That is, the light is turned on before the game is completed and medals for shifting to the next game are inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Even when the replay is activated, the light is turned on when a bet can be made in accordance with the number of credits. When the number of bets is the maximum (when no more bets can be made), the insertion display LED 79e is turned off.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that is lit when a replay is won. When an automatic bet is made based on the replay winning, the replay display LED 79f is turned on to notify the player that the player is in an automatic bet state.
As the status display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31 (A), for example, a payment display LED (LED lit during the payment processing) can be mentioned, but is not shown in FIG. 31 (A).

In FIG. 31B, the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29 and 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b to 4b are 7-segment displays provided with dot segments (segments P), like the above-mentioned digits 1a to 4a. Digits 1b to 4b indicate information type upper, information type lower, numerical upper, and numerical lower, respectively.
The segment P of the digit 2b (lower information type) functions as a digit-separated display LED. The digit division display LED is used to clarify the division between the information type and the numerical value.

The segments P of the digits 1b to 4b can be turned on when a test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS.
Further, in FIG. 31 (C), the set value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. 10, and displays the current set value during setting change and setting confirmation. ) Digit 5b.
As shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b and the segments A to G and P in the present embodiment.
The 7-segment digit is a 7-segment composed of seven bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment P. Note that an LED including the segments A to G without the segment P may be referred to as “7 seg”, and an LED including eight segments including the segment P may be referred to as “8 seg”. In the book, it is referred to as "7-segment" including the LED composed of eight segments.

As shown in FIG. 32, for example, of the digit 1a, the segments A to G constitute the upper 7-segment of the credit number display LED 76, and the segment P is unused. Similarly, each of the segments A to G of the digits 2a and 3a constitutes the 7-segment of the lower digit of the credit number display LED and the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.
The segments A to G of the digit 4a constitute the lower seven digits of the acquired number display LED 78, and the segment P constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.

  The digit 5a is an LED constituting the status display LED 79. As shown in FIG. 32, segment A of digit 5a corresponds to 1-bet display LED 79a, segment B corresponds to 2-bet display LED 79b,..., Segment F corresponds to replay display LED 79f. Also, the segments G and P of the digit 5a are not provided.

  Digits 1b to 4b constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 1b and 2b display information types of the management information. The segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in the segments 1b and 2b in the management information. The segments P of the digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally turned off, but are turned on when the test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS. The segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit-separating display LED for clarifying the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value and facilitating confirmation. During the display of the test pattern described above, the digit-separated display LED may be repeatedly turned on and off as in the case of the segment P of other digits, or may be lit all the time.

  In the digit 5b, the segments A to G compose the 7-segment of the set value display LED 73, and the segment P is an LED that is lit during the setting change. That is, among the set value display LEDs 73, when the segment P is off, the setting is being confirmed, and when the segment P is on, the setting is being changed. Note that the segment P of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment P of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that is turned on when the set value is determined during the setting change.

FIG. 32 shows the configuration of segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data. The D0 bit corresponds to the segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to the segment B,..., The D7 bit corresponds to the segment P.
For example, when "0" is displayed on the digit 1a, the segments A to F are turned on, and the segments G and P are turned off, so that the segment data is "00111111 (B)".

When "1" is displayed on the digit 4a and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the segments B, C, and P are turned on, so that the segment data is "100000110 (B)".
Furthermore, before the game is started, three medals are bet and if the game can be started, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are turned on, so that the digit is displayed. The segment data of 5a is “000011111 (B)”.

FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating the output port 52 according to the eleventh embodiment. Note that the types of output ports are not limited to those shown in FIG.
As the output port 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port for transmitting a digit signal (output port 2) and two output ports for transmitting a segment signal (output ports 3 and 4) are provided. .
The output port 3 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
The output port 4 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73.

  Digits 1 to 5 are assigned to the output port 2 for bits D0 to D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digit 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a signal of "1" is output from the D0 bit of the output port 2, both the digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and the digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (upper information type)) are output. A drive signal is provided.

In the output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
The output port 3 is an output port for the segments A to P of the digits 1a to 5a, and the segments A to P are respectively assigned to the D0 to D7 bits.
Similarly, the output port 4 is an output port for the segment A to P signals of the digits 1b to 5b, and the segment A to P signals are assigned to the D0 to D7 bits, respectively.
Further, the output port 5 outputs external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal.

  Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as the hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in the hall) via the external centralized terminal board 100. More specifically, for example, an advantageous section, an AT, a specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is in operation, an external signal 4 indicating an error occurring in the slot machine 10 or occurrence of power interruption, and the like. , An external signal 5 indicating that the front door of the slot machine 10 is open.

The data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving the data strobe signal, the sub-control board 80 controls the sub-control data signal to be acquired from a buffer provided on the sub-control board 80 based on the rise of the data strobe signal.
Output ports (not shown) other than the output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. 33 include, for example, a signal of the motor 32, a signal of the blocker 45, a drive signal of the hopper motor 36, and a condition device signal (so-called winning number). , A sub-control data signal, a test signal, and the like.

FIG. 34A is a diagram illustrating a relationship among an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal, and a segment signal in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag.
In the present embodiment, as a process of the main control board 50, a main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41 described later) performed for each game, and an interrupt process (every 2.235 ms) in parallel with the main process I_INTR) (FIG. 53 described later) is executed.

  The LED display counter is 1-byte data, and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which one of the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) to light. As for each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to a digit 1 signal, the D1 bit is assigned to a digit 2 signal,..., The D4 bit is assigned to a digit 5 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, the dynamic lighting of the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to “1” in the LED display counter is turned on.

  The LED display counter of this embodiment takes a value of “00010000 (B)” as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter updates the bit “1” of the LED display counter value by one digit to the right as the interrupt “1” → “2” →... (For each interrupt). In FIG. 34, in the interrupt following the interrupt “5”, the LED display counter is shifted to “00000000 (B)” by one digit right shift. At the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter is initialized. The LED display counter is set to "00010000 (B)". Thus, the LED display counter repeats the value of “5” → “4” →... → “1” → “5” → “4” →... That is, one cycle is generated by five interrupts.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N + 1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N + 2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N + 3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N + 4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
“N + 5” interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as “N” interrupt)
"N + 6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
Becomes

  In the eleventh embodiment, one cycle of five interrupts turns on the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b. Specifically, in FIG. 34 (A), for example, when an interrupt is “1”, that is, when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, a digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, the digits 5a and 5b can be turned on. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the time of the next interrupt “2”, the LED display counter becomes “00001000 (B)”, a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED D78 and the lower digit of the management information display LED 74 can be turned on. .

FIG. 34B shows the data structure of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted. As shown in FIG. 34B, the LED display request flag is 8-bit data corresponding to a digit 1 signal in the D0 bit, a digit 2 signal in the D1 bit,..., And a D4 bit corresponding to the digit 5 signal. is there. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bit of the output port 2.
As shown in FIG. 34 (B), digits 1 to 5 can be turned on during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be turned on during setting change, and digits 1 to 5 can be turned on during setting confirmation. is there. In addition. “Normal” refers to waiting for a game and during a game.

In the interrupt processing, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter and the LED display request flag, and the digit corresponding to the bit set to “1” becomes the digit to be turned on in the current interrupt processing.
For example, if the LED display counter is “00010000 (B)” and the LED display request flag is “00011111 (B) (normal)”, AND operation of both results in “00010000 (B)”, and digit 5 Only the signal becomes “1”. However, during normal times (during game standby and during games), a segment signal is output from the output port 3 to enable the status display LED 79 to be lit, but the segment signal is not output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 is output. (Digit 5b) is controlled not to light up.

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at an interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is “00010000 (B)”), a segment signal is output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is turned on. Can be turned on.
During the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is “00000100 (B)” or “00001000 (B)”), the digit 3 signal (the acquired number display LED 78 An upper digit and a digit 4 signal (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) are output, and the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88" (contents indicating that the setting is being changed).

  Furthermore, at the interrupt timing of the LED display counter of “00001000 (B)” (interrupt “2” in FIG. 34), when generating the segment signal of the output port 3, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. It is done by doing. Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is ON, a value obtained by performing an OR operation on the generated segment signal and “10000000 (B)” is output from the output port 3 as a segment signal. Thereby, the segment P (the advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be turned on.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, byte counts, names and contents of data stored in the RWM 53.
The data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in the description of the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The address “F000 (H)” is a storage area for the setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the set value is “N”, “N−1” is stored as the set value data. In the present embodiment, there are set values “1” to “6”. Therefore, any value from “0 (H)” to “5 (H)” is stored as the set value data.
The set value display LED 73 displays “N” obtained by adding “1” to the set value data as the set value.

The address “F010 (H)” is a storage area for the credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In the present embodiment, any value of “0” to “50 (D)” is stored as the credit amount data.
Here, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by converting a credit number into a decimal number is stored as the credit number data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is “29”, the value “29 (H)” is stored. In other words, “00101001 (B)” is stored in the address “F010 (H)”. Thus, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address “F010 (H)” are data for displaying the lower digit (“9” in this example) of the credit amount, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are , Data for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits (“2” in this example). In this embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of credits is “50 (D)”, the stored data value is in the range of “0” to “50”.
In the present embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as the display data of the credit number display LED 76.

The address “F011 (H)” is a storage area for the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquired number data is data to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In the acquired number data, similarly to the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are for displaying upper digits. Data.
In the present embodiment, at the time of winning a small win, the payout number corresponding to the winning small win is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, so the payout number data corresponding to the winning small win is stored as the acquired number data. More specifically, when the small role wins and the medal is paid out, the acquired number data is added with the payout of the medal, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when “1 (H)” is stored as the acquired number data, “01” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address “F040 (H)” to be described later, for example, “8 (H)” is stored when the eight-copies wins. (Including addition to credits), the number is decremented by "1" according to the number of payouts, such as "8" → "7" → ... → "0".
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored at the address “F011 (H)” is, for example, “0” → “1” → “2” →. As described above, every time one medal is paid out, “1” is added. Therefore, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up as “0” → “1” → “2” →... → “8”.

  In this embodiment, “88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change. For this reason, during the setting change, the setting change display data for displaying “88” is stored as the acquisition number data. By displaying "88" on the acquired number display LED 78, it is possible to identify that the setting is being changed from the front side of the gaming machine. Further, by lighting “88” and all the segments, it is possible to confirm that there is no segment defect (there is no segment that cannot be turned on). Since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out is 15, it can be understood that when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the number of medals is not displayed.

  Furthermore, in a twelfth embodiment to be described later, when a condition for instructing a specified number (the number of medals to be bet in the current game) is satisfied, the game is not started (betting is possible or the start switch 41 is operated) ), The specified number is indicated (displayed and notified) to the acquired number display LED 78. In the present embodiment, “0A” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 in order to indicate the specified number “2”. Therefore, when the specified number is designated, designated designated number display data for displaying “0A” is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the specified instruction number display data for displaying “0A” is “0B (H)”.

  Further, at the time of winning the push order bell or the like during the AT, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The pressing order instruction information corresponding to the winning numbers “3” to “8” shown in FIG. 58 described below are “= 1” to “= 6”, respectively. Therefore, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data. Although details will be described later, the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the push order instruction information “= 1” to “= 6” are “A1 (H)” to “A6 (H)”, respectively. For example, when displaying the pressing order instruction information in the game having won the winning number “3”, the pressing order instruction number “A1 (H)” is stored as the acquired number data. As a result, the push order instruction information “= 1” corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

  When a predetermined error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as the acquired number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is “HP”, error number display data for displaying “HP” is stored as acquired number data.

The address “F030 (H)” is a storage area for the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not the replay and the accessory are operated. For example, during the operation of 1BB, the D2 bit of the operation state flag is set to "1".
This operation state flag is updated in a game start set process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 in FIG. 42, the D0 bit of a symbol combination display flag described later is read, and when it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed, and the operating state is determined. The D0 bit of the flag is set to “1”.
The replay operation state flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S413 of FIG. 50 (game end check processing) described later.
The operating state flag of the accessory is also cleared by the game end check processing (not shown in FIG. 50).

The address “F031 (H)” is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for determining the symbol combination stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. Therefore, the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned by the operation state flag are assigned the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag, respectively.
During the main process of FIG. 41, in step S291, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the symbol combination stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination has been stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically, in step S279 (start switch receiving process) during the main process of FIG.

  The address “F040 (H)” is a storage area for the payout amount data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data is data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when the small win is won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When the small winning combination is won, the payout number data corresponding to the small winning combination is stored, and the medal payout process is executed. Here, the payout number data is decremented by "1" for each payout of one medal (addition of "1" to the number of credits or payout of one actual medal (from the hopper 35)). That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. Thereby, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes “0”.

  The address “F041 (H)” is a storage area of the payout amount data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). The payout amount data buffer is data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when the small win wins in the game and the payout number is determined, similarly to the payout number data. Here, unlike the number-of-payouts data, the number-of-payouts data buffer is not subtracted every time one medal is paid out, and the value stored first is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the medal payout number update processing of the next game (step S293 in FIG. 41). For example, when the small payout of eight payouts wins in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game, when the payout does not win, the payout number data buffer is used. “0” is overwritten.

The address “F042 (H)” is a storage area for the automatic bet amount data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet at the time of the replay winning, and in the present embodiment, “2” or “3” is stored.
The automatic bet amount data is set in step S325 during the game start set processing of FIG.
The address “F043 (H)” is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in the present embodiment, any one of “0” to “3” is stored. The bet number data is performed in the medal management processing (detecting inserted medals and performing betting processing and credit adding processing) in step S276 during the main processing in FIG.

The address “F051 (H)” is a storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is as shown in FIG. 34 (A), and is updated each time the interruption process is performed, as described above.
The address “F052 (H)” is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is as shown in FIG. 34 (B), and takes a value corresponding to normal, setting change, or setting confirmation.

The address “F061 (H)” is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores “00000000 (B)” when the section is a normal section, and sets the D0 bit to “1” when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The address “F062 (H)” is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes “0”, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes “1”.
Note that the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on any time after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on simultaneously with the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not have to be turned on.
Specifically, firstly, when shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on, but may be turned on later (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, when shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on, and when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied before the condition for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is never turned on. The advantageous section may be ended without being turned on.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct answer pressing order is notified) in the gaming state in which the section is an advantageous section and the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”, the advantageous section is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on.
Further, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
Further, at the time of the game end check processing in the last game of the advantageous section, a processing for turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed. Specifically, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the processing of initializing the advantageous section display LED flag storage area (clearing the advantageous section display LED flag) is executed. Thereby, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the rotation of the reel 31 is started, Until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in the constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating,
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 are stopped (the game ends), before the next game is started, before the settlement switch 43 becomes operable.

However, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game that activates the instruction function, the winning combination in the game needs to be determined, and therefore, the operation before the start switch 41 is operated (before the lottery) is excluded. .
When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game that activates the instruction function, the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery of the winning combination is executed. Therefore, after the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the rotation of the reel 31 is stopped. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until the vehicle reaches the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

  The address “F063 (H)” is a storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games in the advantageous section. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and "1500 (D)" is set as an initial value when shifting to the advantageous section. In addition, the advantageous section clear counter is set so that “1” is decremented per game, not only during the advantageous section but also during the normal section. However, the minimum value is “0”. For this reason, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is “0”, a counter is used in which the value after subtraction is “0” even if “1” is subtracted. Therefore, during the normal section, “1” is subtracted for each game, but “0” is maintained. In other words, when “0” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non- advantageous section).

Also, when shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so that in the next game, the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)".
The advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at the maximum, and is therefore composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than “0” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

The address “F065 (H)” is a storage area of the difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference number counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the accumulated value of the difference number in the advantageous section, and is also referred to as an “MY counter”.
The difference number counter does not simply store the accumulated value of the difference number itself, but stores a “corresponding value” to the accumulated value of the difference number. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to minus, the value is corrected to “0 (H)”. Therefore, “accumulated value of difference sheet ≠ difference counter value”.
The difference number counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the accumulated value of the difference number in the advantageous section has exceeded “2400 (D)”. For this reason, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

The difference number counter only needs to count at least the accumulated value of the difference number in the advantageous section, and need not count in the non- advantageous section (normal section).
Here, when the difference counter value is updated on the condition that the game is an advantageous section, a process for determining whether or not the game is an advantageous section is required for each game. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the difference number counter value is updated even during the non-advantaged section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not each game is a profitable section, so that the processing can be simplified.

  Further, the difference counter value is updated even when the difference number becomes minus in the current game and the value corresponding to the accumulated value of the difference number becomes the data of the carry-down. However, if the result of the calculation indicates that the difference number counter is data going down, correction is performed to set the difference number counter value to “0”.

If a specific example is given (the difference counter value at the start of the first game is set to “0 (H)”),
First game: When the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “0”, the difference counter after calculation is “FFFD (H)” and the difference counter after correction is “0 (H)”
Second game: bet number “3”, payout number “9”, difference counter after calculation “0006 (H)” (no correction)
Third game: number of bets “3”, number of payouts “0”, difference counter after calculation “0003 (H)” (no correction)
Fourth game: Bet number “3”, payout number “1”, difference counter after calculation “0001 (H)” (no correction)
Fifth game: bet number “3”, payout number “0”, difference counter after calculation “FFFE (H)”, difference counter after correction “0 (H)”
Will be updated as follows.
Even if the difference counter of the previous game is “0 (H)” and the difference counter of the current game is “0 (H)”, the difference counter value reflecting the difference of the game is renewed. Since this is a calculated result, such a case also corresponds to “update” of the difference number counter.

As described above, when the difference number counter value after the calculation is a value with a carry-down, the difference number counter value is corrected to “0” (initial value “0” is set). A method of determining whether a borrow has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value as described above, for example, when the payout number is larger than the bet number, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal section, the difference counter value is increased by the number of payouts when the payout based on the winning of the small role is performed. If the number is below the bet number, it will eventually become “0”.

36A and 36B are diagrams (slump graphs) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value. FIG. 36A shows Example 1 and FIG. 36B shows Example 2. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games, and the vertical axis is the difference number.
Example 1 shows an example in which the difference number first progresses in the negative direction with the progress of the game, but the difference number starts to rise from the middle, for example, due to the start of the AT. Then, the difference counter is counted as "0" when the difference becomes the minimum value in the course of the game, so that the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference counter as an increase in the difference. Is done. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, the advantageous section ends (the next game is controlled to be a game in the normal section).

When the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)”, the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. For example, when the difference counter is exactly “2400 (D)” at the end of the current game, Then, the termination condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied.
Then, in the next game, assuming that the maximum difference number in the gaming machine is obtained, since the bet number is “1” and the payout number is “15”, the difference number in the next game is “+14”, The difference counter value at the end of the next game is “2414 (D)”. When the difference counter is “2414 (D)”, it is determined that the condition for terminating the advantageous section is satisfied.
Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is “2414 (D)”.

The determination as to whether or not the difference counter has exceeded “2400 (D)” is not limited to reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53, and may be temporarily stored in a register for updating or the like. Judgment of the difference counter value is performed (the same applies hereinafter).
When it is determined whether or not “2400 (D)” has been exceeded based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, when it is determined that “2400 (D)” has not been exceeded, The difference counter value of the register is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, control is performed so that the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is not stored in the RWM 53 and the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared. It is also possible.

  Further, Example 2 shows an example in which the difference number progresses in the minus direction with the progress of the game, as in Example 1, but the difference number started to increase from the middle, for example, due to the start of AT. . In Example 2, when the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)”, the cumulative value of the difference is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section ends. That is, regardless of the accumulated value of the difference number accompanying the progress of the game up to that point, if the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, counting from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value, the advantageous section (The next game is controlled to be a game in the normal section).

When the difference counter is updated during the normal section, the difference counter may exceed “2400 (D)” even during the normal section. For example, if a special role is won many times and a special game is repeated, such a situation may occur. In such a case,
1) a method of updating the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts,
2) When the value exceeds "2400 (D)", a method of temporarily resetting the difference number counter value to "0" at that time is cited.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the advantageous section, the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous section. If the difference number counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the normal interval, the process is cleared.

On the other hand, if the process of clearing the difference counter is a process unique to the advantageous section, the difference counter is not cleared even if the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the normal section.
When the advantageous section is started (first game in the advantageous section), the difference number counter is cleared (initial value “0” is set. Step S354 in FIG. 45 described later). Therefore, there is no problem regardless of the number of difference counters before the start of the advantageous section.
And
1) When the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the advantageous section,
2) When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games,
Satisfies the condition for terminating the advantageous section.
When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference number counter is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference number counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section is to prevent the data (value) relating to the advantageous section from being carried over to the normal section when the advantageous section ends and the normal section is started. Clearing of the difference number counter is executed in step S435 in FIG. 51 described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference number counter value and the advantageous section, where (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the difference number decreases with the progress of the game, and the difference number further decreases from the time when the advantageous section is started (“A” in the figure) to the time that the game proceeds to “B” in the figure. An example is shown. Note that the AT is not started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and the CZ, the precursor, and the AT are being prepared at the beginning of the advantageous section (for example, when the RT state is the low probability state, the RT state is shifted from the low probability state to the high probability state). In the case of a specification that starts from the midway of waiting for the replay to win), the difference number may decrease even after the advantageous section is started. Also, even when the AT is started, the difference number may decrease if a situation in which the order of the bell in the pushing order does not win is continued.

Since the difference number counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is "0" at the time of "A" in the figure. Further, as described above, the difference counter value is maintained at “0” in a situation where the difference number is decreasing. Therefore, in the figure, the difference number counter value remains “0” from the point “A” to the point “B”.
Also, an example is shown in which the difference number has started to increase from the point “B”. As a result, the difference counter value also increases. When it is determined that the difference number counter value has exceeded “2400 (D)” (when the point “C” is reached in the figure), it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the advantageous section is ended. (Move to normal section).

  In this way, instead of the difference number from the start of the advantageous section, positive counting by the difference number counter is started from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value (“B”) after the start of the advantageous section. The medal is not given to the player beyond the range where the number of balls has increased (the range from “B” to “C” in FIG. 37A). As a result, it is possible to prevent the gambling of the player from being upset.

The above points will be described more specifically with numerical values as examples.
For example, if the AT is started by lottery after the start of the advantageous section, the difference may decrease with the progress of the game if the AT is an advantageous section and non-AT.
For example, suppose that the player X wins the advantageous section and the advantageous section is started, but the AT is not started and the game is stopped when the difference number becomes “−200”.

Next, it is assumed that when the player Y starts a game with the gaming machine, the AT is won when the difference number becomes “−50”, and the AT is started. Then, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued until the difference number exceeds “+2400” after the start of the advantageous section, the player Y can acquire a medal of “2400 + 250 = 2650”. .
Therefore, as described above, after the advantageous section is started, by setting the end condition as “from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value to exceeding“ +2400 ””, for example, the other player's fit To prevent them from being able to get them, so as not to frustrate their ambitions.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 37B shows an example in which the number of differences decreases in the normal section, the point “D” in the middle turns positive, and the advantageous section starts from the point “E”. In such a case, as described above, when the difference number counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference number counter value is positive at the point “E” in the drawing. However, at the start of the advantageous section ("E" in the figure), the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, that is, updated to "0").
Therefore, the increase before the advantageous section (the increase from “D” to “E”) is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be counted up from the point "E", and the advantageous section ends when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)".

The description returns to FIG.
The address “F067 (H)” is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not an AT is being performed, and is set to “0” during a non-AT and is set to “1” during an AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when an AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 in FIG. 46 described later. The AT flag is turned off at the time of the end of the game in the final game of the AT, and is executed, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50) described later. Note that the data that is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes the AT flag.

The address “F068 (H)” is a storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games during AT (including ART). When the AT game number counter becomes “0”, unlike the advantageous section clear counter, counting (subtraction) thereafter is stopped.
The AT game number counter is updated (subtracted) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main processing (step S281 in FIG. 41 described later).

Further, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed “255 (D)”, the AT game number counter is constituted by a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is equal to or less than "255 (D)" at the maximum, the AT game number counter may be constituted by a 1-byte counter.
When starting the AT (or when shifting to during AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game number counter. The initial value may be a fixed value or may be determined by lottery or the like at the time of winning the AT. After the initial value is determined, the number of AT games may be updated to “0” without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the number of AT games may be increased when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT, and the number of AT games may be increased when an additional lottery is won. In this case, the increase is added to the AT game number counter.
This AT game number counter is also included in the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

  In this embodiment, since the game number management type AT is exemplified, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of the AT, an initial value of the difference number that can be obtained is set. In addition, when the player wins the additional game, the number of additional games is added. Then, every time there is a payout, the difference number of the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes “0”, the AT ends.

Subsequently, each process during the game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50. When the power is turned on, the processing is started from the program start processing in FIG.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, in next step S202, the main control board 50 initializes a register. Specific processing includes, for example, setting of a communication speed of a serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting of an interrupt type (for example, setting to a maskable interrupt, etc.), and a parity bit to be added to a control command to be transmitted. (For example, setting to even parity). In other words, the initial values required for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

  Next, proceeding to step S203, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, a power-off processing completed flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54 described later). The power-off processing completed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. When it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the flag is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. More specifically, a checksum calculation is performed for the same range (for example, a work area, an unused area, and a stack area used by the program) as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed during the power-off processing.
In step S205, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is designated from the address of the RWM 53 for which the checksum has been calculated at the present time, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for calculating the checksum. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S204 to continue the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S206.

Also, in the following processing, when data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 is initialized, in the present embodiment, similar processing is executed in the designated range of the RWM 53.
If it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without performing the checksum calculation of the RWM 53.

  In step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, a B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and that the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 has been normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value (when “No” in step S203), or when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the checksum calculation (all ranges) of the RWM 53 in step S204, the power-off processing is performed. An abnormal value is stored as return data.

  In the next step S207, the level data of the predetermined input port 51 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). Next, proceeding to step S208, it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51. In this embodiment, the “designated switch” is a signal of a door switch (a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 (housing) is opened) among the predetermined input ports 51, and a setting door switch. (The door provided on the setting key switch. The setting door may be omitted.) The signal of the setting key switch (the switch which is turned on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a predetermined direction) There are three.

Then, the signal of the door switch is ON (the front door 12 is open), the signal of the setting door switch is ON (the setting door is open), and the signal of the setting key switch is ON. Only allow changes in settings. When all three designation switches are on, the process can proceed to the setting change process of step S212. However, when at least one designation switch is not on, it is not permitted to proceed to the setting change process of step S212. .
That is, regardless of whether the signal of the door switch is off (the front door 12 is closed) or the signal of the setting door switch is off (the setting door is closed), the signal of the setting key switch is set. Cannot be turned on, and there is a high possibility of fraud.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S208 that all the designation switches are on, the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that all the switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is abnormal. The power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212, and when it is determined that the data is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether the setting change disable flag is on. Here, the setting change disable flag is one of data stored in the RWM 53, and is disabled during a start switch receiving process (step S279) to a game end check process (step S301) in FIG. 41 described later. Is a flag to be executed. When the setting change disable flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S211. When the flag is not ON, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212.
In the present embodiment, the setting change disable flag is provided. However, if the setting can be changed at all times, the setting change disable flag may not be provided. In that case, the processing corresponding to step S210 becomes unnecessary.

  In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This processing is equivalent to the processing in step S209. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S213 to perform power-return processing (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S214 to perform a non-recoverable error process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG.
First, in step S221, a “predetermined range” is stored in a register as an initialization range in the use area of the RWM 53. Here, “in use area” refers to an area for storing data related to the progress of the game in the storage area of the RWM 53. The range shown in FIG. 35 is all within the use area. On the other hand, “out of use area” described later refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data unrelated to the progress of the game. Specifically, a storage area for storing data related to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is given.

The “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and includes set value data (address “F000 (H)”), a gaming state (for example, an RT state), and a winning state. Is defined as a “predetermined range” in which the flag of the special combination having “” is not initialized.
Therefore, in a twelfth embodiment to be described later, when the power is turned off and the BB2 is in the inside (when the winning flag of BB2 is on) and the power is turned off normally, the setting change process is executed. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the “predetermined range” does not include data relating to the advantageous section and the AT. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the addresses “F061 (H)” to “F068 (H)” are to be initialized here.

Next, proceeding to step S222, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S224, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S222 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S223.
In step S223, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range in the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and is the entire range within the use area including the set value data (address “F000 (H)”).

  Then, the process proceeds to step S224, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 (within the use area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S224 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S226.

  In step S226, the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved. Note that the purpose of saving the AF register is to originally save the F (flag) register here, but the AF register is saved for the sake of instruction. Then, the process proceeds to step S227, where a predetermined range outside the used area is stored as the initialization range of the RWM 53. The “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S230, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S228 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S229.
In step S229, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and is the entire range including a ring buffer storing the number of games and the number of payouts for performing the ratio display.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, and the initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S230 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S232.
In step S232, the AF register saved in step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, activation setting of interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing specified in step S202 are set. In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process is used as the interrupt process, and therefore, a process for setting a timer interrupt cycle (“2.235 ms” in the present embodiment) is included. Then, after the process of step S233, an interrupt process is executed. In other words, the configuration is such that interrupt processing is not executed before “interruption activation”.
In the next step S234, an output request set at the start of the setting change is performed. In this process, a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is set (stored) in a register in order to notify the sub-control board 80 of the start of the setting change process.

The “output request set” means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80. Further, the control command here does not mean only a command to be actually transmitted, but also means a command that is a source of a command to be actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S235, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

  Next, proceeding to step S236, the main control board 50 executes a wait process (wait process) for 2 bytes for starting the setting change. In the present embodiment, the process waits until the number of interrupts “224” is counted (“1” is subtracted for each number of interrupts and the set number of interrupts becomes “0”). This standby is also called a delay process or a standby process because the main process does not proceed. During the waiting time (during the 2-byte time waiting process), the main process is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt process is executed.

  As described above, the wait process (wait process) for 2 bytes in step S236 is performed because the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, while the sub control board 80 side Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes time, the main control board 50 executes a waiting process for two bytes. In particular, this is because the main control board 50 cannot know whether or not the initialization processing has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, when the sub-control board 80 is still performing the initialization processing, the main control board 50 has already completed the initialization, and the processing further proceeds. It can be prevented that the progress of the control processing of 80 is not synchronized.
After execution of the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts the initialization of the RWM 83, and a time sufficient for completing the initialization of the RWM 83 is set as a wait time. I do. As a result, after the sub-control board 80 has completed the initialization processing of the RWM 83, the main control board 50 proceeds to the processing after step S238.

  The control command at the start of setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the waiting process for the 2-byte time is being executed in step S236, the process does not proceed to the processes after step S237 (the main process does not proceed).

  After the end of the waiting process for two bytes in step S236, the process proceeds to step S237, where the setting change display data is stored as the acquisition number data. Next, the process proceeds to step S238, and the value “00011100 (B)” corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag.

By the processing of steps S237 and S238, when the interrupt processing is executed after these processings, the digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (the acquired number display LED 78 and the set value display LED 73) can be turned on.
Specifically, in the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S238, "8" can be displayed on each of the digits 3a and 4a ("88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), and the digit b5 (set value display) is displayed. The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Since the acquired number data and the LED display request flag have been initialized by the initialization process in the use area of the RWM 53 in step S224, the values before step S237 are “0”.

Next, the process proceeds to step S239 to execute an interrupt waiting process. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. After one elapse of the interruption time, the process proceeds to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether an operation of a setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the setting change switch has been turned on by determining the rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch. If it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241. If it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the set value data (address “F000 (H)”) of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When the interrupt processing is executed after the set value data is updated, the set value display LED 73 displays the updated value.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (interrupt wait) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, when the process in step S239 is not provided, if it is determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on, the set value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned on in the next step S242. If not, the process proceeds to step S240, and it is determined whether the rising data of the setting change switch is on.

  If it is determined in step S240 that the switch is on, if at least one interrupt process is executed, the rising data of the setting change switch is turned off. However, until the interrupt processing is executed, it is determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is ON. As a result, the set value data continues to increase by “2” or more by operating the setting change switch only once. Thus, in step S239, an interrupt waiting process is executed.

  In step S243, it is determined whether a setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S244, and the acquired number data is cleared (set to "0"). This is for deleting the display of “88” indicating that the setting is being changed. Next, the process proceeds to step S245, and the value “00011111 (B)” corresponding to the normal status is stored in the LED display request flag.

The display of the digits 3a and 4a (the acquired number display LED 78) is changed from "88" to "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S244.
In addition, “0” is displayed on each of the digits 1a and 2a (“00” is displayed on the credit number display LED 76) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S245. Since the bit corresponding to digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be turned on. On the other hand, digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) is not lit because the setting is not being changed or the setting is not being checked.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S246, and an output request set at the time of completion of the setting change is performed as in step S234. In this process, the setting change process is terminated, and data corresponding to the determined set value (specifically, the set value data stored in the address “F000 (H)”) is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 side. Is a process of setting a control command to be notified to the user. Next, the process proceeds to step S247, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S235. Then, the process proceeds to step S248 to shift to a main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power return process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, and the like) at the time of power failure when power failure occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the set value data is read, and whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether within the range of set value 1 to set value 6), in other words, “F000 (H)” It is determined whether or not the set value data is within the range of “0 (H)” to “5 (H)”. If it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253. If it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an “E6” error occurs, the process proceeds to step S264, and the process returns to the non-recoverable error process. .

In step S253, an unused area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register as an initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, the RWM 53 in the range set in step S253 is initialized. Here, the value may be stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. If a value is stored in the unused area, the unused area may lead to a bad act such as fraud. Therefore, the unused area is initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). I have.
In the next step S255, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (an unused area in the used area) has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S256.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This processing is the same as the processing in step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, the RWM 53 in the range set in step S257 is initialized.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (an unused area outside the used area) has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S260. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This processing is the same as the processing in step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, a predetermined input port 51 is read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before the power is turned off to the latest data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S262 to activate an interrupt. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and is similar to the above-described step S233.
Next, the process proceeds to step S263, where the power-off processing completed flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power return processing,
1) In the program start processing of FIG. 38, if it is determined “No” in step S203 (when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value), or if there is an abnormality during the checksum calculation in step S204, In S206, an abnormal value is stored as the return data after the power is turned off. In this case, since “Yes” is determined in step S209, the process proceeds to the setting change process (FIG. 39) in step S212.
In the setting change process of FIG. 39, “No” is determined in steps S222 and S228, so that the entire range inside and outside the use area of the RWM 53 is initialized, that is, after “F000 (H)”. All data is initialized.

  2) In the program start processing, when the power-off processing completed flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is normally performed, and when the processing proceeds to the setting change processing, the process proceeds to steps S222 and S222 in FIG. Since “Yes” is determined in S228, the process proceeds to steps S224 and S230, respectively, and the designated range of the RWM 53 (within and outside of the use area) is initialized.

  3) In the program start processing, when the power-off processing completed flag is determined to be a normal value, and the checksum calculation is normally performed, and when the setting change processing is not performed, the power return processing in step S213 ( The process moves to (FIG. 40). In this case, in FIG. 40, if the set value is normal in step S252, the initialization of the RWM 53 (in the used area and outside the used area) at the time of normal power-on is executed. This initialization is a process of initializing an unused area of the RWM 53 as described above.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the present embodiment. The main process is a process of one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated for each game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. As described above, the stack pointer indicates an area of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, a register value, an instruction process of a main process before an interrupt process, and the like) at the time of a power failure when a power failure occurs, The setting of the stack pointer is a process of setting a register value to an initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, a game start set process (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42 to be described later, and is a process such as generation, update, and storage of an operation state flag.
In the next step S273, a bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet at the present time, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, the presence or absence of a bet medal is determined based on the number of bets read in step S273.

If it is determined in step S274 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S276. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on.
In step S276, a management process of the inserted medals is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has been cleaned, determining whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, and the like.

  In the next step S277, a process of updating the soft random numbers is performed. This process is a process of updating (adding, for example, "1") a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the role lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range from “0” to “65535 (D)”. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to a value before the update may be executed.

  In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the bet number has not reached the specified number of the game, "No" is determined in the step S278.

In step S279, the process at the time of receiving the start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting change disable flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reel 31, setting the number of outputs for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like, and the like. .
In the next step S280, the acquired number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the designated prescribed number display data or the payout number data is stored as the acquired number data before that, it is cleared.
Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, a specified number may be instructed (displayed) on the acquired number display LED 78 before the game starts. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the designated prescribed number display data may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, a process of clearing the acquired number data and displaying (or turning off) “00” on the acquired number display LED 78 is executed.
If the payout number data of the previous game is stored as the acquired number data at the time of step S280, the payout number data is cleared in this step S280.

Next, proceeding to step S281, the main control board 50 executes an updating process of the number of AT games. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43 to be described later, and is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when an AT is being performed and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
In addition, whether or not to increase the number of AT games during the AT is determined based on the result of the role lottery performed by the role lottery process in step S282. For example, when the rare role is won, the number of additional games to be added to the AT is determined. Therefore, when the number of AT games is added and the added amount is added to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the processing of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 41).
Note that, after the start switch is received (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281, but the present invention is not limited to this. The AT game number counter may be updated.
In the specification of the difference number management type AT, when an AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is set after all the reels 31 are stopped and after the medal payout process due to winning (after step S300). To update.

  In step S282, the combination lottery means 61 executes a lottery of a combination (corresponding to the above-mentioned "internal lottery") at a timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when an operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number value at the time of the lottery is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether or not the obtained random number value is a random number value corresponding to any of the winning combinations, by using the role lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section shift lottery process. This processing is the processing of FIG. 44 described later. In the present embodiment, the AT lottery is executed together with the advantageous section shift lottery. As shown in FIG. 44 described later, when the vehicle is in the advantageous section but is not in the AT (for example, when the main game state is CZ), the AT lottery process is executed in step S348 in FIG.
Next, the flow proceeds to step S284, where a pressing order instruction number is set (M_ORD_INF). This processing is the processing shown in FIG. 48. When the instruction function is operated in the game during the AT (display of the push order instruction number on the acquisition number display LED 78), the push order instruction number is generated. This is processing for displaying push order instruction information and the like.

In the next step S285, a reel rotation start preparation process is executed. In this process, a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed is performed, and if the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is “1834 (D) (2.235 ms × 1834 ≒ 4099 ms)”. It is. If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum game time is "0", an initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum game time (timer value). Then, the minimum game time is decremented by "1" for each interruption process. In step S285 of the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is “0”. When it is determined that the minimum game time is “0”, the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control unit 65 controls the drive of the motor 32 and starts the rotation of the reel 31. When the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the result of the lottery of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31. Is stopped, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290. If it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. .

In step S290, the acquired number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, when the indicating function is activated during the AT, pressing order indicating information (for example, “= 1”) may be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes “00” due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
Note that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, “00010011 (B)” may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off light may be provided as segment data, and the data may be output.

In step S291, the display of the symbol is determined. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304. If it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol that should not be originally displayed (a kicking symbol) is displayed on the activated line, it is determined that the symbol is abnormal ("E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Executes non-recoverable error processing.

If it is determined in step S292 that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293, where the payout number is updated. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the number-of-payouts data and the number-of-payouts data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out a medal corresponding to the winning combination (M_WIN_PAY). This process is a process shown in FIG. 49 described later. Next, the process proceeds to step S295, where an interrupt waiting process is performed. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. By the processing in steps S295 and S296, the interruption is prohibited immediately after the interruption.

  In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This processing is the same as the processing in step S256 in FIG. Next, the process proceeds to step S298 to execute a ratio setting process. The "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, and the like in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (composition ratio monitor). Then, when the process proceeds to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and an interrupt is permitted (restarted) in the next step S300. In this way, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved, and the interrupt process is prohibited before the execution.

  Note that the interrupt processing is prohibited during the execution of the ratio setting processing, in which the ratio setting processing is processing using a program stored outside the used area, and is executed when a program outside the used area is executed in the main processing. This is because, if an interrupt process is entered in the program, programs in the used area and programs outside the used area are mixed, and the processing becomes complicated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301, in which a game end check process (_M_GAME_CHK) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 50 to be described later, and performs a condition device (winning combination) flag clearing process and the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, in which the output request set at the time of the end of the game and the control command set 1 in the next step S303 are performed. These processes are for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has been completed.
When the process of step S303 is completed, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). Since the game standby display time of the present embodiment is set to the “26846” interrupt ($ 60000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), “26846” is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, the value is decremented by "1" for each interruption process from this point.

When the game standby display time becomes "0", the acquired number data is cleared in step S275 (medal insertion wait) in FIG. As a result, “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out for the previous game is "8" and the player has settled the game by operating the adjustment switch 43 and ended the game, "00" is displayed about one minute later. Is done. This has an effect that the number of empty spaces can be reduced because the clerk of the hall or another player can recognize them as empty spaces.
It is to be noted that the acquisition number display LED 78 is not limited to displaying “00”, and the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digit and lower digit) may be turned off, or the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off and the lower digit May be displayed as "0". In any case, a display may be executed so that the clerk in the hall or another player can recognize the vacant stand.

Next, the process proceeds to step S312, in which a pressing order instruction number is initialized. This process is a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S313, data of the symbol combination display flag is obtained. In the next step S314, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, if the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the symbol combination display flag data is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and if it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the obtainable number at the time of 1BB operation (at the time of 1BB game) is stored. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of obtainable 1BB games in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S316.
In step S316, an operation state flag is generated. This process is a process of generating the value of the operation state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
In the next step S317, the operation state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operation state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operation state flag (at this time, for example, stored in the A register) at the address “F030 (H)” of the RWM 53. As a result, the information on the operating state flag up to that time is replaced with the information on the operating state flag updated in step S317.
For example, when the symbol combination of 1BB is displayed (at the time of winning 1BB), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from “0” to “1”.

  In the next step S319, it is determined whether the RB operation has started. In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the two games (or at the time of winning twice), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied ( When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag is "1"), it is set to "1" in this game start set processing. If it is determined in step S319 that the RB operation has started, the process proceeds to step S320. If it is determined that the RB operation has not started, the process proceeds to step S321.

  In step S320, the number of games and the number of winnings at the time of RB operation are stored. In this process, “2 (H)” is stored (stored) in a game frequency counter (not shown in FIG. 35) provided at the time of RB operation provided at the RWM 53, and at the time of RB operation provided at the RWM 53. This is processing for storing (storing) “2 (H)” in a winning number counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process proceeds to step S321.

  Note that both the number-of-games counter at the time of RB operation and the number-of-wins counter at the time of RB operation are both set to “2 (H)” as initial values. Is a counter that is decremented by "1". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial values of these counter values are set to “0”, and each time the number of games or winnings increases by “1”, the counter value is incremented by “1”, and these counter values are set to “2 ( H) ”may be determined.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether or not a condition indicating a specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where the specified number is specified. However, in the twelfth embodiment to be described later, a specified number may be instructed at the start of the game, and therefore, this processing is included in this flowchart. When it is determined that the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and when it is determined that the condition for instructing the specified number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, the designated prescribed number display data is stored as the acquired number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the specified number “2” is specified. When the specified number “2” is specified, “0A” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The designated display number display data for displaying “0A” is defined as “0B (H)” (details will be described later), and in this step S322, “0B (H)” is obtained as the acquired number data. Is stored.
The reason why “0A” is displayed instead of “02” when displaying the prescribed number “2” is to avoid confusion with the payout number, error number, and pressing order instruction information.
The display of the number of payouts is any one of "01" to "15", and "A" is not displayed in the lower digit. Also, "A" is not displayed in the lower digit of the error number.

Here, the error numbers (numbers displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in the present embodiment are as follows.
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (No medal in hopper 35)
H0: Abnormality of payout sensor 37 CE: Medal stay error CP: Invalid medal passing error CH: Abnormality of passage sensor 46 C0: Abnormality of insertion sensor 44 C1: Abnormal injection error of FE: Sub tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Opening of the front door E1: Power-off recovery error E5: Display judgment error E6: Setting value error E7: Random number error

Note that the type of error is not limited to the above. An error in which the upper digit of the error number is “E” means an unrecoverable error.
As described above, there is no case where “A” is displayed in the lower digit of the error number, so that the error number and the specified instruction number are not confused.
The pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is “= 1” to “= 6”. Therefore, the pressing order instruction information and the specified instruction number are not confused.

  In addition, in step S322, there is a case where the payout number data in the previous game is stored as the acquired number data before the designated prescribed number display data is stored as the acquired number data (in the case where the small role has won in the previous game). ). The payout amount data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process for winning (FIG. 49 described later). Therefore, when storing the designated prescribed number display data, the payout number data may be overwritten. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process of clearing the acquired number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

  In the next step S323, it is determined based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313 whether or not the replay symbol combination has been stopped and displayed. If it is determined that the replay symbol combination has been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S324. If it is determined that the replay symbol combination has not been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads a bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals (bet number data) betted in the previous game. Next, the process proceeds to step S325, in which automatic bet amount data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S326, in which an output request for an operating state is set. In a next step S327, the control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that the replay has been activated or that the 1BB has been activated is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

It should be noted that before (meaning before the filing of the present application, and not meaning "known"; the same applies hereinafter), at the time of the bet number addition processing, specifically, during the main processing of FIG. In the medal management process, the clearing process of the acquired number data was performed. As a result, even if the small win has been won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of the small win has been stored as the acquired number data, the acquired number data has been cleared during the bet number adding process.
However, in the present embodiment, before the medal management process is executed, if the condition for specifying the specified number is satisfied, the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
When the specified number is designated, it is necessary to prevent the designated number display data from being cleared during the betting process. In the present embodiment, when the specified number is specified, the state in which the specified number is specified is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the medal management process, the acquired number data is not cleared, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared in step S280 in FIG.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the specified number is designated, the designated designated number display data is cleared after the start switch 41 is operated. The acquired number data may be cleared (in the medal management process). In this case, for example, in the addition processing of the bet number, before executing the clear processing of the acquired number data, it is determined whether or not the specified number has been designated in the current game, and it is determined that the specified number has been designated. Means that the acquired number data is not cleared, and when it is determined that the specified number is not designated, the acquired number data is cleared.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether the AT flag is on ("1"). When it is determined that the AT flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not ON, the process according to this flowchart ends. That is, unless the AT is in progress, the AT game number counter is not updated.

In step S332, it is determined whether the bet number is “3”. In this process, the bet amount data or the automatic bet amount data of the RWM 53 is read, and it is determined whether or not the bet amount of the game is “3”. When the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S333, and when the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart ends. In the present embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated (the processing relating to the instruction function is executed) only when the game is played with the bet number (specified number) “3” during the AT. In other words, even during the AT, if the game is started with the bet number (specified number) “2”, the AT game number counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as described later, the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter are updated regardless of the bet number.

In step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts “1” from the value of the AT game number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, similarly, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not decremented (updated) if the bet number is not “3” even during the AT.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section shift lottery process in step S283 in FIG.
In the present embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous section shift lottery process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section shift lottery process and the AT lottery process are executed independently. You may. For example, in FIG. 41, step S283 may be set to only the advantageous section shift lottery process, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the bet number (specified number) of the current game is “3”. When it is determined that the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S342, and when it is determined that the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, when the number of bets (specified number) is “3”, it is possible to execute an advantageous section shift lottery in step S345 and an advantageous section shift process (process related to an advantageous section) in step S347, and to execute step S348. AT lottery process (process related to the instruction function) can be executed. However, when the bet number (specified number) is not “3”, these processes are not executed.

  In step S342, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “0”. When it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is “0” (non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is “1” (it is an advantageous section), step S348 is performed. Proceed to. When the advantageous section type flag is “1” (when the section is already in the advantageous section), the advantageous section shift lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery result in the current game is the target lottery result, that is, whether or not the winning combination to be selected in the advantageous section has been won. Here, although detailed description is omitted, for example, when the special role is won alone, when the special role and the small role are repeatedly won, and when the small role (rare small role) is won, the target lottery result is determined. to decide. The target lottery result does not include non-winning. This is because a process related to an advantageous section is not executed in a game in which a role is not won (a game in which the condition device is not activated).
When it is determined in step S343 that the result is the target lottery result, the process proceeds to step S344, and when it is determined that the result is not the target lottery result, the process according to the flowchart is terminated (that is, the advantageous section lottery is not performed or the advantageous section lottery is not performed). Win).

In step S344, it is determined whether or not the target lottery result is a specific lottery result. Here, although detailed description is omitted, for example, among the roles to be drawn, the middle tier cherry (single winning or overlapping winning with the special role) is set as the determined role (the role to be always won) in the advantageous section shift lottery. When the middle cherry is won, it may be determined that the result is a specific lottery result.
If it is determined in step S344 that the result is the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347. If it is determined that the result is not the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, when the result is not the specific lottery result, the advantageous section shift lottery is performed, and when the result is the specific lottery result, the advantageous section shift processing (step S347) is executed without performing the advantageous section shift lottery (be sure to shift to the advantageous section). Do). In addition, it is also possible to set so that even if it is a specific lottery result, an advantage area transfer lottery is executed and an advantage section transfer lottery is won with a 100% probability.

In step S345, an advantageous section shift lottery is performed. The advantage section shift lottery includes, for example, performing a lottery in the same manner as the role lottery or the like, using a lottery table in which the numbers according to the result of the role lottery are predetermined. For example, when the winning number is "A", the advantageous section is won with a probability of 35%, and when the winning number is "B", the advantageous section is won with a probability of 60%, and so on. Is mentioned.
If the result of the lottery is not the lottery target of the advantageous section, the result is “No” in step S343. Therefore, if “Yes” in step S343, that is, the result of the lottery to be the advantage section shift lottery. At the time, in the advantageous section shift lottery, a lottery is performed by a lottery table having a number of at least “1” or more. However, the winning probability of the advantageous section shift lottery is set to “1/17500” or more.

Next, the process proceeds to step S346, and it is determined whether or not an advantageous section has been won in the lottery in step S345. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S347, an advantageous section shift process is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 45, and is a process of setting a flag and a counter based on winning of an advantageous section.
In the next step S348, an AT lottery is performed. This processing is the processing shown in FIG. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Not limited to the example of the present embodiment, the AT may always be started (without performing the AT lottery) when shifting to the advantageous section. Alternatively, a non-AT may always be set when shifting to the advantageous section, and after shifting to the advantageous section (for example, after a predetermined number of games have been exhausted), it may be determined by lot whether or not to execute the AT.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section shift processing in step S347 of FIG.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on the advantageous section type flag ("1"). Next, proceeding to step S352, the main control board 50 sets an advantageous section clear game counter to an initial value of the number of games in the advantageous section “1500 (D)”.

In the next step S353, “0” is set in the difference counter. The difference counter is kept updated during the normal section (non-advantage section), and when it is not the advantageous section, the process of step S353 is unnecessary when always setting “0” at the end of the game. However, the initial value “0” may be set for noise prevention or the like.
At the end of the advantageous section, the initialization process including the difference counter is executed, so that the difference counter is "0" at the start of the normal section. Therefore, in the case of the specification in which the difference counter is updated only during the advantageous section, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous section is “0”, and thus the processing in step S353 can be omitted. .
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, when the difference number counter is continuously updated even during the non-advantaged section, the difference number counter may be positive even immediately before shifting to the advantageous section. Therefore, "0" is set to the difference counter in step S353. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, an AT lottery is executed based on the winning combination lottery result. In this lottery, as in step S345, the AT lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning number is determined for each winning lottery result.
Note that the AT lottery need not always be executed, and for example, a role lottery result that is not determined by the AT and a role lottery result that is always determined by the AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not an AT has been won in the AT lottery in step S361. If it is determined that the AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363. If it is determined that the AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes an AT initial game number determination process. This process is a process shown in FIG. 47 described later. Next, proceeding to step S364, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Here, the main game state of the present embodiment includes normal (non-advantaged section), CZ (advantaged section and non-AT), AT, 1BB operation. It is also possible to provide a precursor as the main game state after the AT win and before the start of the AT, but in the present embodiment, for simplicity of explanation, when the AT is won, the AT is started immediately. And In addition, information of the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that the AT has not been won, and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to CZ. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the AT initial game frequency determination processing in step S363 in FIG.
In FIG. 47, in a step S371, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in the current game is the winning of the determined combination. As described above, a rare combination such as a middle cherry is set as the fixed combination. When it is determined that the fixed combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the fixed combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to “100 (D)” and stored in the AT game number counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to “30 (D)” and stored in the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to the flowchart is ended.

Note that, in the example of FIG. 47, the specification is such that the initial number of games of the AT is distributed according to whether or not the winning combination is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A lottery may be executed. In other words, any one of the plurality of game times may be selected even if it is one winning combination lottery result.
Also, during the AT, the AT game frequency determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed as an additional lottery for the AT game frequency. When the additional lottery is won in the AT game number, the determined additional number is added to the AT game number counter.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the pressing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether or not an instruction condition (a condition for operating an instruction function) is satisfied. If the game is an AT and a winning combination having an advantageous pushing order such as a pushing order bell is won, it is determined that the instruction condition is satisfied.
In addition, when the player wins the advantageous section in this game ("Yes" in step S346 in FIG. 44) and wins the AT (when "Yes" in step S362 in FIG. 46), the advantageous section starts in the next game. This time, the game is not an advantageous section. Therefore, the instruction function cannot be operated in the current game, so that “No” is determined in step S381.
If it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382. If it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is “3”. In this process, by reading the bet amount data or the automatic bet amount data of the RWM 53, it is determined whether or not the bet amount is “3”.
When it is determined that the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for activating the instruction function (performing the processing relating to the instruction function) is set to the bet number “3” (one specified number). For this reason, for example, even when a game is started with the bet number “2” during the AT and a role having an advantageous pushing order (for example, a pushing order bell) is won, the indicating function does not operate (the correct answering order is Not announced).

In a next step S383, a winning number (condition device number) is set. The winning number (condition device number) determined in the role lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the flow advances to step S384 to set a pressing order instruction number table (not shown). Here, the head address of the pressing order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S385.

In step S385, the designated address data is set. In this process, a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as the offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the top address of the pressing order instruction number table is obtained. As a result, the A register stores the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (the push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area (an area for storing the push order instruction number; not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
In the next step S387, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored as the acquired number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, it is assumed that the winning combinations are the same as those in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment) described later. Then, when the winning numbers "3" to "8" are won during the AT, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the acquired number data is as follows.
Winning number "3": Push order instruction number "A1 (H)"
Winning number "4": Push order instruction number "A2 (H)"
Winning number "5": Push order instruction number "A3 (H)"
Winning number "6": Push order instruction number "A4 (H)"
Winning number "7": Push order instruction number "A5 (H)"
Winning number "8": Push order instruction number "A6 (H)"

  For example, when the winning number "3" is won during the AT, the pushing order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquired number data by the pushing order instruction number setting process of FIG. As a result, the pressing order instruction information “= 1” corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A1 (H)” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG.

After step S387, the process proceeds to step S388, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section display LED flag is ON (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is ON, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether or not the game state (RT or main game state) of the current game is a game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”. It is to be noted that whether or not the game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1” is set in advance, and here, it is determined whether or not the game state is set in advance. Specifically, the data of the current RT and the main game state are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and by reading this data, the game state of the current game exceeds the section Sim payout rate “1”. Is determined. If it is determined that the game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1” is determined to be in a gaming state, the process proceeds to step S390. I do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the interrupt processing executed after step S390. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the game in which the instruction function is operated, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit yet and the section Sim payout rate is more than “1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is displayed. Since the condition to be turned on is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a win is made in the advantageous section shift lottery, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the start of the game of the next game. Alternatively, even after shifting to the advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or in a gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”, at an arbitrary timing (when an arbitrarily set lighting condition is satisfied) ), The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process by winning (MS_WIN_PAY) in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout number data. In this process, the value of the number-of-payouts data is stored in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S392, where it is determined whether or not medals are paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number-of-payouts data (A register value) is “0”. Then, when it is determined that the value is "0", that is, when it is determined that there is no payout of medals, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that there is a payout of medals, the process proceeds to step S393.

In step S393, the value of the credit amount data is obtained.
Next, the process proceeds to step S394, and it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached a limit value. Specifically, when the credit amount data acquired in step S393 is “50 (D)”, it is determined that the credit amount has reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S398, where the acquired credit amount data is “50 (D)”. (D) ", it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the flow proceeds to step S395.

In step S395, a standby time at the time of credit addition is set. In the present embodiment, the number of interrupt processes “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) is set to set about 100 ms as the standby time. Specifically, “00000000 (B)” is set as the B register value, and “00101110 (B)” is set as the C register value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S396, where a waiting process for a 2-byte time is executed. In this process, the value of the BC register is subtracted for each interrupt process, and the process waits until the value becomes "0".

  When the 2-byte waiting process in step S396 is completed, the process advances to step S397 to add “1” to the value of the credit amount data. As a result, the display of the credit amount display LED 76 becomes “+1” due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S397. For example, the display of the credit amount display LED 76 changes from “08” to “09”. After the processing in step S397, the process proceeds to step S399.

When the process proceeds from step S394 to step S398, one medal payout process (process of paying out actual medals to the player from the hopper 35) is executed. In this process, when the hopper motor 36 is driven and one of the medals is correctly paid out when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off at a predetermined timing as shown in FIGS. to decide.
According to the above processing, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the limit value, and when the number of credits is at the limit, processing of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, “1” is added to the acquired number data. Thereby, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes “+1”. For example, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 changes from “02” to “03”.
In the next step S400, “1” is subtracted from the payout number data. In this step S400, only the number-of-payouts data is updated, and the value of the number-of-payouts data buffer is not updated.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S401, and it is determined whether or not the medal payout is completed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the updated number-of-payouts data has become “0”. When it is determined that the number-of-payouts data is “0”, the process according to this flowchart ends, and when it is determined that the number-of-payouts data is not “0”, the process returns to step S393 and continues.

In the above payout process, when performing the payout process of adding “1” to the number of credits, a standby time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. Thereby, it is possible to show the player that the display of the credit number display LED 76 is counting up. For example, when the display of the credit number display LED 76 before credit addition is "08" and eight medals are added thereto, "display" 08 "→ 100 ms standby processing → display" 09 "→ 100 ms Standby processing →... → 100 ms standby processing → display “16”. On the other hand, if the standby time is not provided when adding the number of credits “1”, it looks as if the display changed instantaneously from “08” to “16”.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of credits, by executing a waiting process for two bytes for each "1" addition, the payout sound ("Plururu ...") output from the sub-control board 80 side is executed. )) And the count up of the number of credits can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number of "50 (D)" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the waiting process of two bytes in steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven and paid out, so that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a waiting process for a 2-byte time.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game end check processing (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 in FIG.
First, in step S411, a process of clearing a flag of the condition device (also referred to as winning information; stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) is performed. This process is a process of clearing the condition device other than the special combination, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the activated line, the process of clearing the condition device of the special combination is also executed. In the next step S412, a process of turning off the replay display LED 79f is performed. This process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to “0”. Next, the process proceeds to step S413, where the replay operation flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operation state flag to “0”.

In the next step S414, it is determined whether or not the AT game number counter has become “0”. Here, the AT game number counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main processing of FIG. 41, as described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated after the start switch receiving process (step S279 in FIG. 41). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in FIG. It may be executed before the check process) or in the process of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Further, in the present embodiment, an example of the game number management type AT for updating the AT game number counter is shown. However, in the case of the difference number management type AT, in step S414, the AT difference number counter is set to “0”. It is determined whether or not it has become. The AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process for winning (step S294 in FIG. 41).
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S415, and when it is determined that the counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S416. In step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process proceeds to step S416 to execute advantageous section counter management. This process is a process of executing updating of the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter, and is a process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52 described later. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIGS. 51 and 52 are flowcharts showing the advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. FIG. 51 shows Example 1, and FIG. 52 shows Example 2.
In the advantageous section counter management, the following processing is executed.
1) Updating the advantageous section clear counter 2) Updating the difference number counter 3) Judgment as to whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied 4) When satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section, initialization (clearing) of data relating to the advantageous section )
The advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of the bet number (specified number).
In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the advantageous section counter management is executed irrespective of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non- advantageous section (normal section). However, it may be configured to determine whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section and to execute the advantageous section counter management only during the advantageous section.

In the example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, “F063 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, “1” is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is, for example, as follows.
“0010 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “000F (H)”
“0001 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)” (zero flag = 1)
“0000 (H)” → subtraction of “1” → “0000 (H)” (carry flag = 1)

  As described above, even if “1” is subtracted from “0000 (H)”, no digit drop occurs, and “0000 (H)” is maintained. As described above, no matter what the value before the subtraction is, since it is only one instruction (one step) for subtracting “1”, it is determined whether or not the count value before the update is “0”. Is unnecessary, and the process of adding the value of the carry flag after the subtraction is also unnecessary. Therefore, the time required for updating the count value can be significantly reduced. Further, with such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section from the value of the advantageous section clear counter, and whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, the game in the advantageous section is 1500). It is not necessary to determine whether or not the game has been executed or whether or not an arbitrary end condition has been satisfied.

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value before the subtraction was “0”. This processing is determined based on whether or not the carry flag has become “1” in the subtraction processing in step S422.
When the carry flag is “1” (when the value before subtraction is “0”), the process proceeds to step S436. When the carry flag is not “1” (when the value before subtraction is not “0”), Proceed to step S424. Note that when the carry flag becomes “1” (when the value before the subtraction is “0”), the current game is not a game in an advantageous section (a game in a non-advantage section (normal section) in the current game). ).

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the subtraction result (after subtraction) in step S422 is “0”. This processing is determined based on whether or not the zero flag has become “1” in the subtraction processing in step S422. That is, it is determined whether the value before the subtraction is “1”.
When the zero flag is “1”, the process proceeds to step S435, and when the zero flag is not “1” (when the subtraction result is not “0”), the process proceeds to step S425. Note that when the zero flag becomes “1” (when the subtraction result is “0”), the game in the advantageous section is ended in the current game (the next game is a game in the non-advantage section (normal section)). That means).

In step S425, the value of the difference counter is obtained. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference counter and storing the value in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S426, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a replay operation symbol is displayed in the current game (whether or not a replay has won). In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1", and when it is "1", it is determined that the re-game operation symbol has been displayed. When it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S434, and when it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S427.

In step S427, the number-of-payouts data buffer is acquired. This process is a process of reading the number-of-payouts data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the payout number to the difference counter is executed. In this process, the A register value (payout number data buffer value) is added to the HL register value (difference counter), and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S429 to acquire the value of the bet amount data. This process is a process of reading the bet amount data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter. In this process, the A register value is subtracted from the HL register value, and the subtraction result is stored in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value becomes less than “0”, the carry flag becomes “1”.

  In the next step S431, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction in step S430 is less than “0”. This processing determines whether the carry flag has become “1” by the subtraction in step S430, and if the carry flag is “1”, determines that the subtraction result has become less than “0”, and proceeds to step S432. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not “1” (when the subtraction result is not less than “0”), the process proceeds to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing (setting to "0") the HL register value is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference number counter value is stored. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference counter. Accordingly, when the process proceeds to step S433 via step S432, the difference counter becomes “0”.
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference number counter has exceeded the upper limit value. The upper limit of the difference counter is set to “2400 (D)”. In this process, a comparison operation is performed between the HL register value and “2401 (D)”. In this comparison operation, when the HL register value is larger, the carry flag is "0", and when the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag is "1". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the value of the HL register is smaller), it is determined that the value does not exceed the upper limit value, and the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value exceeds the upper limit (when the carry flag is “0”), the process proceeds to step S435. When the difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value, the condition for terminating the advantageous section is satisfied.
In step S435, the RWM 53 initializes the storage area relating to the advantageous section (clears the data relating to the advantageous section). The data relating to the advantageous section includes an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section type flag, a difference number counter, an advantageous section display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game number counter, and the like. Further, there is information on a main game state. The information on the advantageous section does not include the RT state number, the LED display counter, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, “F000 (H)” to “F052 (H)” are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Here, it is assumed that the LED display counter is cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes “0” when the advantageous section ends. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized when the LED display counter is “00000010 (B)”, the LED display counter is normally updated to “00000001 (B)” in the next interrupt processing, and the LED display counter is initialized. Although the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be turned on, the LED display counter becomes "00010000 (B)". Therefore, the display of the LED corresponding to “00000001 (B)” of the LED display counter is delayed, so that the LED may seem to be turned off for a moment.

Further, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (total game counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value of minimum game time (4.1 seconds) (set in step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Information of the input port 51 6) Data of the control command buffer 7) Data of the stack area 8) Information of the external signal Note that the above is an example of typical data, and the data that is not cleared is limited to the above data. It does not mean that you can be.

  Next, proceeding to step S436, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “0” (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not “0”, particularly when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is “1” (advantaged section) in the present embodiment, the process proceeds to step S437. At this point, the advantageous section type flag is set to “1” because the winning lottery is selected in the present game, and the advantageous section type flag is set to “1” in step S351 in FIG. In such a case, a case where “Yes” is determined in step S423 and the process proceeds to step S436 is exemplified. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S436 via step S435, the advantageous section type flag has been cleared in step S435, and therefore, it is not determined to be “No” in step S436.

  In step S437, an initial value is set in the advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting “1500 (D)” in the advantageous section clear counter. Here, “1500 (D)” is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that “F063 (H)” is set in the HL register in step S421. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the advantageous section counter management described above, when updating the difference number counter, the payout number is first added (step S428), and thereafter, the bet number is subtracted (step S430). Such processing is performed for the following reason.
For example, when the difference counter is “2 (D)”, it is assumed that the bet number is “3 (D)” and the payout number is “9 (D)”.
Here, when the bet number is first subtracted from the difference counter, it becomes "-1 (D) (actually," FFFF (H) ")", and the carry flag becomes "1". When the number of payouts is added, "9 (D)" is added to "-1 (D)", so that "8 (D)" is obtained and the carry flag is set to "1" (carry increases. To indicate that this occurs).

  Since the difference number of the game this time is “+6”, the carry flag becomes “1” just by adding the difference number “+6” to the difference number counter “2 (D)” before updating, and the irregularity is irregular. A situation arises. In other words, the process in step S431 (whether the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined based on whether the carry flag is "1". If the determination is made based on whether the carry flag is "1", "Yes" is determined in step S431 even though no carry-down has occurred, and the difference counter is initialized in step S432. You will set the value. Note that the carry flag is a flag that is set to “1” in any case where a carry or a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is "2 (D)" and the payout number "9 (D)" is first added, the difference counter becomes "11 (D)" at that time, and thereafter the bet is placed. When the number is subtracted, it becomes "8 (D)". In this case, no carry occurs, so the carry flag is “0”.
For the above reason, when the difference counter is updated, the payout number is first added, and then the bet number is subtracted, so that the determination process in step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

  In the advantageous section counter management of the present embodiment, first, the subtraction processing of the advantageous section counter (step S422) is performed, and when the value before the subtraction is “0” (“Yes” in step S423, ie, If it is a non-advantaged section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the process of updating the difference number counter (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, the present embodiment is configured to execute the advantageous section counter management irrespective of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantaged section. The processing efficiency is enhanced by not executing. For this reason, the processing order is such that the subtraction processing of the advantageous section clear counter is performed first, and then the update processing of the difference number counter is performed. Of course, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section. If the specification is such that the subtraction processing of the advantageous section clear counter and the update processing of the difference number counter are executed during the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted. It is also possible to execute the process of updating the difference number counter prior to the process.

  Further, even when the determination in step S426 is "Yes" (at the time of the replay winning), the processing of step S434 is executed. By doing in this way, even if an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference sheet counter due to noise or the like at the end of the game, “Yes” is determined in step S434. , The advantageous section can be ended. On the other hand, when such confirmation is unnecessary, if “Yes” in step S426, the processing of this flowchart may be ended.

In the example of FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the replaying operation symbol has been stopped and displayed in step S426. If it is determined that the replaying operation symbol has been stopped and displayed, the difference counter is updated (steps S427 to S427). S430) is skipped to speed up the processing.
In particular, in the game in which the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the payout number of the game is regarded as “0” (deemed payout number) and the bet number of the next game is regarded as “0”, and the difference number counter is updated. . However, for example, an SB (Single Bonus) is provided as a winning combination during an advantageous section, and when the SB is won, one SB game with a bet number of “1” is executed in the next game, but this SB game is executed. In some cases, a replay is won, and the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the bet number is “3” (other than the SB game, the game cannot be performed with the bet number “1”). However, in this case, since the number of payouts only in the SB game does not match the number of bets in the next game, how to count the difference counter becomes a problem.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference number counter in a game in which the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of the advantageous section counter management in step S416 in FIG. 52, the same processes as those in FIG. 51 are denoted by the same step numbers.
In Example 1 of FIG. 51, the payout number is first added to the difference counter, and then the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the bet number is first subtracted from the difference counter, and then the payout number is added to the difference counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the payout number is added after the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter, the carry flag may be set to “1” even if the carry-down does not finally occur, and the calculation result is It has been described that whether or not the carry flag is “0” cannot be determined based on whether or not the carry flag is “1”.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the payout number is added (Step S428) after subtracting the bet number from the difference counter (Step S430), and in Step S441, the value of the carry flag is not referred to. It is determined whether the operation result is less than “0”.
More specifically, in step S441 in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register storing the upper digit) value of the HL register value is "1". It is determined whether or not the result of the calculation is less than “0”.

For example,
Difference counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
Assume that
In this case, the difference counter value after the calculation is
0000 (H) -3 (H) = FFFD (H)
Becomes
Therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
Becomes
Note that “/” indicates a delimiter of every four bits in binary notation.

In the above example, the HL register value before the operation is “0000 (H)”, but the HL register value before the operation is not “0000 (H)” and “the difference number of current game> HL register Value ", for example,
This game difference = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
Becomes
Therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
Becomes

Furthermore, when the HL register value is not “0000 (H)” and “the difference number of the current game <HL register value”, for example, first,
This game difference = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
Becomes
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
Becomes

Second,
This game difference = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FC (H)
Becomes
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
Becomes

Furthermore, third,
This game difference = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after operation)
Becomes
Therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
Becomes

On the other hand, the upper limit value of the difference counter is “2400 (D)”. Here, when “2400 (D)” is represented by a binary number,
"0000/1001/0110/0000 (B)"
Becomes
Since the upper limit value of the difference number counter is “2400 (D)”, when a value exceeding “2400 (D)” is stored in the difference number counter, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number is determined. The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
At the end of this game, the difference counter value becomes “2400 (D)”, but since it did not exceed “2400 (D)”, it was determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section was not satisfied, and the next game was started. Suppose you have migrated. Then, in the next game, the difference number increases the most when the bet number is “1” and the payout number is “15 (D)”, so the difference number in the game is “14 (D)”. Becomes
Therefore, the difference number counter value in this case is “2414 (D)”.
Here, when “2414 (D)” is represented by a binary number,
"0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)"
Becomes

Also, when the difference counter value becomes “2414 (D)”, it exceeds “2400 (D)”, so the difference counter is cleared to “0 (D)” in the game.
As described above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take during the game is “2414 (D)”, that is, “0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)”.

Therefore, when the HL register value is “2414 (D)”,
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/110 (B)
And the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is “0”.
Therefore, when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of “0 (D)” to “2414 (D)”, the D7 bit of the H register value is always “0”.

As described above, the D7 bit (the most significant bit) of the H register value is always “0” and never becomes “1” except in the case of a borrow.
In addition, in order for the D7 bit of the H register value to be “1”, the difference number counter value needs to be “32768 (D)”, and the difference number reaches such a value except for the borrow. The advantageous section is not continued until this.

On the other hand, as described above,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
, The HL register value after the operation is “FFFD (H)”.
Here, “FFFD (H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1101 (B)"
It is.

Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
And the D7 bit of the H register value becomes “1”.
Similarly, before the operation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0002 (H)
When the difference counter is updated, the HL register value becomes “FFFF (H)”.

Here, “FFFF (H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
It is.
Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
And the D7 bit of the H register value becomes “1”.
Thus, when a borrow occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes “1”.

As described above, as a result of updating the difference counter, if no borrow has occurred, the D7 bit of the H register value is “0”, and if a borrow has occurred, the D7 bit of the H register value is “0”. 1 ".
Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, when determining whether the operation result is less than “0”, it is determined whether the D7 bit of the H register value is “1”. When the D7 bit of the H register value is “1”, it is determined that the operation result is less than “0”.
By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not the calculation result is "0" without determining whether or not the carry flag is "1" as a result of the calculation.
Then, since it is determined whether or not the calculation result is “0” without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the payout number is added to the difference counter value after subtracting the bet number.

As is apparent from the above description, even if the maximum value “2414 (D)” that can be taken by the difference number counter is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, the D6 bit, D5 bit, and The D4 bit is also “0”.
On the other hand, when a borrow of the difference counter value occurs, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6 bit, the D5 bit, and the D4 bit become “1”.

Therefore, in FIG. 52, in step S441, it may be determined whether the D6 bit is “1” instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is “1”. , D5 bit is “1”, and it may be determined whether D4 bit is “1”. In any case, when the bit is “1”, the operation result is less than “0”, and when the bit is not “1”, the operation result is not less than “0”.
As is clear from the above, in the example 1 (step S431) of FIG. 51, the operation result is less than “0” with reference to the D7 bit (or D6, D5, or D4 bit) of the H register value. It is also possible to determine whether there is.

  As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the advantageous section clear counter is updated (step S422), the difference number counter is updated (steps S428 and S430), and whether the advantageous section clear counter is “0” is determined. The determination (step S424), the determination whether the difference number counter has exceeded the upper limit value (step S434), and the initialization of the information regarding the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the bet number (specified number) in the current game. Will be executed. Therefore, even if the result of playing the game with the bet number (specified number) “2” results in the advantageous section clear counter becoming “0” or the difference counter exceeding the upper limit value, the advantageous section ends. I do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, in parallel with the main processing, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 at a period of 2.235 ms (however, the time period is not limited).
When the process proceeds to the interrupt process of step S451, in step S452, a process of saving the register value and prohibiting a duplicate interrupt is performed as an initial process. Here, in order to use the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing in the interrupt processing, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Further, the interrupt disable flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. The reason for this is that, for example, an interrupt processing execution request may be made during the execution of the power-off processing.

In the next step S453, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54 to be described later, and is a process for detecting whether or not a signal of a power-off detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. The interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process for subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed is mentioned.

Next, the process proceeds to step S456 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 55 described below, and is a process of turning on the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10.
The errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include a non-recoverable error and a recoverable error. For the non-recoverable error, an error display is output by the main processing (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41). The display of the error is performed by this LED display control every time the interruption process is performed.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S457, where the input port 51 is read. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, and the like have been operated, the switch signal, and the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data (level data, rising data, The falling data is generated and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).

  In the next step S458, it is determined whether the set value is within a normal range. Here, the set value data stored at the address “F000 (H)” is read, and the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether the set value data is within the range of “0” to “5”). Judge) whether or not. When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and when it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process shifts to a non-recoverable error process. In this embodiment, the error in this case is referred to as an “E6” error, and the fact that the error is “E6” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In step S459, a check process of a built-in random number is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number is provided, and it is determined whether this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormal clock frequency of the random number for the lottery is detected (for example, when the random number is updated slowly), the error flag is turned on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S460 to determine whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether or not the error flag is ON). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S461, and When it is determined that the error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process shifts to a non-recoverable error process. The error display content at this time is “E7”.

  In step S461, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of the reels 31 (left, middle, and right), and includes a stop, a constant speed, an acceleration, a deceleration, a deceleration start, and a standby according to the operation state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S462, and a port output process is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the (reel) motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In a next step S463, an input error check process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not there is any abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S464, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (a non-transmitted control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in the interrupt processing after that point (if the command buffer is empty, in principle, the interrupt processing coming next to that point), this step S464 is executed. Transmits a control command to the sub-control board 80.

In the next step S465, data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in the register. Then, in the next step S466, an external signal is output from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33) (signal transmission to the external centralized terminal board 100).
Next, the process proceeds to step S467 to perform a ratio display preparation process. This process is a process for updating a timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputting segment data, and the like.

  In the next step S468, a random number updating process is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step S469, in which the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interruption is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of the interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As shown in the above processing, the number of credits LED 76, the number of acquired LEDs 78, the state display LEDs 79 (79a to 79f), the set value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74 are turned on / off by the interruption processing every 2.235 ms. Controlled.
Further, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt processing, the transmission processing is performed.

Note that, in the case of the non-recoverable error processing, the interrupt processing is not performed (the interrupt processing is interrupted until the normal recovery).
The non-recoverable error is a serious error that cannot occur normally, and executes processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from an input port, transmission of a control command to the sub-control board 80) and the like. In order to prevent this, the interrupt itself is prohibited.
If an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer when the unrecoverable error occurs, the command is not sent to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 in FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal has been turned on in the previous interrupt processing. Here, when a voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value (in the example of FIG. 3, equal to or lower than V1), a predetermined input is performed by a voltage monitoring device (power cutoff detecting circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50. Since a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal has been input. Further, when the power-off detection signal is turned on, it is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If it is determined in the previous interrupt process that the power-off detection signal is on, the process proceeds to step S482, and if it is not, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off detection signal is on in the current interrupt processing. If it is determined that the switch is not turned on, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switch is on, the process proceeds to step S483.
When it is determined “Yes” in both steps S481 and S482 (when a power-off detection signal is input for two consecutive interrupts), it is determined that power-off has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all the output ports 52 are turned off. By this processing, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (during rotation of the reel 31) or the hopper motor 36 is being driven (during payout of medals), the driving is stopped.
Next, the process proceeds to step S484, and the power-off processing completed flag is stored in the RWM 53. This process is a process of storing data indicating that the normal power-off process has been executed in the RWM 53.

In the next step S485, checksum data of the RWM 53 is calculated. This processing is for calculating a checksum including a work area (RWM 53) used by the program, and the target program use area includes a program work area, an unused area, a stack area, and the like.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S485 to continue the calculation of the checksum. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation of the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Here, the data stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also referred to as complement data) that becomes “0” when all the data in the program use area and the value stored at the predetermined address are added at the time of the checksum of the RWM 53. ).
When the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed at the start of the program, the checksum data is added to all the data in the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as described above. If the calculated checksum data is "0", it is determined that the value is a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is determined that the value is an abnormal value.
Next, the flow advances to step S488 to enter a reset waiting state. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power cut-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, and in step S488, the state waits for output of the reset signal.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, the output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process of outputting “00000000 (B)” from the output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S492, the output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process is a process of outputting “00000000 (B)” from the output port 4 as in the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. This process updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter by shifting it right by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is “0”. When it is determined that the LED display counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S495. .
In step S495, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, a process of changing the LED display counter “00000000 (B)” to “00010000 (B)” is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S497 to acquire error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data. Here, in the storage area of the RWM 53, a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs, and LED display data indicating on / off of the game start display LED 79d to the replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79 are stored. A storage area and a storage area for storing bet display data indicating on / off of (1 to 3) bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Not used D1: Not used D2: Not used D3: "1" when the game can be started, "0" when the game cannot be started
D4: "1" when a medal can be inserted, and "0" when a medal cannot be inserted.
D5: "1" when replay wins, "0" when no replay wins
D6: Not used D7: Not used Note that the D3 to D5 bits of the LED display data correspond to the segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.

The bet display data is configured as follows.
0 bets: 00000 000
When one bet: 00000001
When two bets: 00000011
When three bets: 00000111
The D0 to D2 bits of the bet display data correspond to the segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.
Then, in a step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Also, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, an OR operation (synthesis) is performed on the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data), and the operation result is set as segment data for the output port 3. When an OR operation is performed on the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data), the result is data indicating whether the status display LED 79 is turned on or off. When there is a display request for digit 5 (when “Yes” in step S516), the segment data is output from output port 3.
Next, the process proceeds to step S499 to clear the register for setting the segment data for the output port 4.

  In the next step S500, a value obtained by performing an AND operation on the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0" is determined. Judge. When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S516. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display request is not “0”, it is determined that a display request is made, and the process proceeds to step S501.

  In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table according to the present embodiment includes an LED segment table 1 that defines segment data when displaying an error number, and an LED segment table other than the error number (the number of credits, the number of payouts, the set value, the display during setting change, the pressing order). An LED segment table 2 which defines segment data for displaying the instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions is provided, and is stored in the use area of the ROM 54. Then, in step S501, the head address of the LED segment table 2 is read, and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501, offset and segment data are defined as follows.
Offset “0”: Segment data displaying “0” Offset “1”: Segment data displaying “1” Offset “2”: Segment data displaying “2” Offset “3”: Displaying “3” Segment data offset “4”: Segment data displaying “4” Offset “5”: Segment data displaying “5” Offset “6”: Segment data displaying “6” Offset “7”: “7” Segment data to be displayed Offset “8”: Segment data to display “8” Offset “9”: Segment data to display “9” Offset “A”: Segment data to display “=” Offset “B”: “A Segment data to display

For example, first, when the payout number data “10 (H)” is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset of the payout number data is “1” and the lower digit offset is “0”. Becomes Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "1" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "0" is obtained.
Also, for example, secondly, when the setting change display data “88 (H)” is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset of the setting change display data is “8” and the lower digit is “8”. Is “8”. Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "8" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "8" is obtained.

Furthermore, for example, thirdly, when the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset of the push order instruction number is “A”, and the lower digit is The offset is “1”. Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "=" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "1" is obtained.
Further, for example, fourthly, when the designated number display data "0B (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset is "0" and the lower digit offset is "B". Becomes Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "0" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "A" is obtained.

Next, the process proceeds to step S502, and first, set value data is obtained. Here, the setting value data stored at the address “F000 (H)” is read and stored in the A register. Next, “1” is added to the A register value to generate set value display data, which is stored in the A register. The set value display data is an offset value when the set value is displayed.
As described later, the segment data stored at the address (of the LED segment table 1 or 2) obtained by adding the offset value to the head address value of the LED segment table 1 or 2 is obtained.
Next, the process proceeds to step S503, and it is determined whether or not there is a display request for a set value. Here, when the D register value is “00010000 (B)” and the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, it is determined that there is a display request for the set value. If it is determined that there is a display request for the set value, the process proceeds to step S514, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, credit amount data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, an upper digit offset is obtained. In this process, an operation of dividing the credit amount data (A register value) acquired in step S504 by "10 (D)" is executed, the quotient value is stored in the A register, and the surplus value is stored in the E register. Processing.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the upper digit of the credit amount. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1a) of the D register value is “1”, and if it is “1”, it is determined as “Yes”. When it is determined that there is a display request for the upper digit of the credit number, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S507, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the lower digits of the credit amount. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (bit corresponding to digit 2a) of the D register value is “1”. If the D1 bit is “1”, “Yes” is determined, and the process proceeds to step S513. . On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display request for the lower digit of the credit number, the process proceeds to step S508.

  In step S508, the acquired number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, in the acquired number data, the number-of-payouts data is stored at the timing when the medal is paid out based on the winning of the small role. At the timing of the setting change, the setting change display data “88 (H)” is stored. Furthermore, when it is the timing to instruct the prescribed number, designated prescribed number display data “0B (H)” is stored. Further, at the timing when the instruction function is activated (notifying the pressing order), the pressing order instruction number “= x (x = 1 to 6)” is stored. Then, any of these data is obtained and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether or not an error is displayed. In this process, the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497) is read, and it is determined whether or not the value is "0". When it is "0", it is determined that the error is not being displayed, and the process proceeds to step S511.
In step S510, the LED segment table 1 for error display is set. The description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 is omitted. In step S510, a process of storing the head address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register is performed. Therefore, in this case, the head address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) instead of the head address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

  In the next step S511, an offset for the upper digit is obtained. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not “0”), an operation of dividing the B register value by “10 (D)” is performed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored. Is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when the error is not being displayed (when the B register value is “0”), the A register value (payout number data, display data during setting change, instruction specified number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to “10 ( D) ”, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register.

  In the next step S512, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to digit 3a) of the D register value is “1”, and if it is “1”, it is determined that a display request has been made. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S513.

In step S513, an offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit value and the lower digit value are exchanged between the A register and the E register. Then, the process proceeds to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is obtained. In this process, the data (start address of the LED segment table 1 or 2) stored in the HL register and the data (offset value) stored in the A register are added, and the data corresponding to the added address (LED segment This is the process of storing the segment data (of Table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for the output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since the digits 1b to 4b perform the lighting process in the ratio display process (step S522) described later, the segment data of the digits 1b to 4b is not set here.
Accordingly, in step S515, "Yes" (set value display request is issued) in step S503, and when the segment data for display of the set value is acquired in step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

  Next, the flow advances to step S516 to determine whether there is a display request for digit 5. Here, the display request of digit 5 is made when the D register value is “00010000 (B)”. If it is determined that there is a display request for digit 5, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that there is no display request for digit 5, the process proceeds to step S517.

  In step S517, segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as segment data for output port 3. If "Yes" in step S516 (when there is a display request for digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for the output port 3.

  In the next step S518, the data of the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value is “0”. If the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "0", it is determined whether or not the digit to be turned on in the current interrupt processing is the digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is “1”, it is determined that it is the lighting timing of the digit 4a. In this case, data obtained by performing an OR operation on the segment data set in step S517 and “10000000” is set as the segment data for the output port 3. As a result, data that can turn on the segment P (the advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a is set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S519, and the segment data for the output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. When there is no display request for digit 5 (when “No” in step S516), this is to prevent the digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) from turning on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S520, where a digit signal is output from the output port 2 and a segment signal is output from the output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as digit data of the output port 2 and output from the output port 2.
The data of the segment signal output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when digit 5 is turned on) or the data set in step S517 (when digits 1 to 4 are turned on).

Next, proceeding to step S521, a segment signal is output from the output port 4. The segment signal data output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when there is a setting value display request) or the data cleared in step S519 (when there is no setting value display request). In other words, if the segment data for the output port 4 has been cleared in step S519, “00000000 (B)” is output from the output port 4.
Next, the process proceeds to step S522 to shift to a ratio display process (a process for turning on the management information display LED 74). In the present embodiment, the description of the ratio display process is omitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous section display LED 77 and the power-off (when the power-off occurs during the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77) will be described.
In the interrupt processing, if power interruption is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps. In this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained after the power interruption.
Then, after the power is turned on, in the program start processing (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is off, it is determined as “No” in step S208. The process proceeds to the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in S213.

  40, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set in step S253, and this range is an unused area of the RWM 53 as described above. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag at the address “F062 (H)” is not targeted for initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter at the address “F051 (H)”.

In the power-off recovery processing of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM 53 ends, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, the interrupt processing of FIG. 53 is executed at an interval of 2.235 ms after step S262. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. Further, “No” in step S512 is when there is a display request for the digit 4a. In this case, when the error is not displayed (“No” in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, the D7 bit of the segment data is set to “1” in step S518, Data is output (step S520). Thereby, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
As described above, when the power is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, if the interrupt processing is executed in the power-off recovery processing, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit again.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch is on after the power is turned off, the following occurs.
If the setting key switch is ON in the program start processing in FIG. 38, “Yes” is determined in step S208, and the flow shifts to the setting change processing (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) in step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range includes the advantageous section display LED flag of the address “F062 (H)”. When it is determined that the power-off recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including the address “F062 (H)”) is initialized.

Therefore, by initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, even if “1” indicating lighting is stored up to that point, it becomes “0” indicating turning off.
Thereafter, an interrupt is activated in step S233 of FIG. When the interruption is started, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 when the lighting timing of the set value display LED 73 is reached in the LED display control (FIG. 55). Then, in FIG. 39, when the process proceeds to step S240, the set value can be changed (the set value is changed by turning on the setting change switch).

Also, in FIG. 39, when the interrupt process is activated in step S233 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is already "Even when the lighting timing of the digit 4a is reached. Since it is "0", the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch is on and the process shifts to the setting change process, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. Even if the setting change process ends and the process shifts to the main process, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

In the main process of FIG. 41, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, and when power is cut off during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, during rotation of the reel 31, the following is performed. .
When the interruption of the power is detected in the interruption processing, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) is also stopped by the power cut.

  Next, when the power is supplied, the power returns to the state before the power was cut off through the power return process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. As a result, the same drive signal of the motor 32 as before the power was turned off is output from the output port 52. Here, the drive signal of the motor 32 before the power is turned off is a signal for maintaining the constant speed state. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that, when the motor 32 (reel 31) is in a constant speed state, one interruption (2.235 ms) and one step drive are performed. However, even if a driving signal in a constant speed state is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after the driving is stopped, the motor 32 cannot be driven because the rotation torque is weak.

  Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (does not cut the index). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is re-accelerated (re-operated). For example, the acceleration of the motor 32 is, for example, one step drive at 20 interrupts (20 × 2.235 = 44.7 ms), one step drive at 16 interrupts, and one step drive at 12 interrupts,. This is a method in which one-step driving is gradually performed in a short time. The acceleration state requires, for example, about 100 steps. Thus, the rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on and the interrupt is started in step S262 in FIG. 40, the digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter. If the value is the value for lighting 3a ("00000100 (B)" in FIG. 34), the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)" after 4 interrupts from that point, and the digit 4a (the advantageous section display LED 77) is turned on. Timing is coming.

On the other hand, the power is turned off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in the remaining "1" to several steps), and after the power is turned on. Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and re-acceleration is performed, as described above, at least several tens of interrupts are required until the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches the constant speed state. It costs.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 enters the constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. That is, when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

When the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively far from the reel sensor 33, several to several tens of interrupts are performed after the interruption is started until the reel sensor 33 determines that the reel 31 does not detect the index of the reel 31. Cost. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the motor 32 is re-accelerated.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to light up after the power is turned off and before the reel 31 re-rotates and returns to the constant speed state.

In the main process of FIG. 41, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, and in the medal payout process by winning in step S294, when the power is cut off while the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the following is performed. . Note that, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process by winning as shown in FIG. 49, in step S398, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and when each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detects the movable piece 39a as shown in FIG. , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal has been normally paid out. Then, the hopper motor 36 continues to be driven until it is determined that medals corresponding to the number of payouts have been paid out.
During the payout of medals, if power interruption is detected in the interrupt processing before all medals are paid out, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. The drive signal is also turned off. As a result, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when power is supplied, the process returns to step S294 (medal payout process by winning) of the main process (FIG. 41) via the above-described power return process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. As a result, a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was turned off. As shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process for winning a prize in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when returning from the power-off, as described above, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (the advantageous section display LED 77) arrives within four interrupts.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required for paying out one medal cannot be said unconditionally, but it takes about 100 ms. Therefore, the process returns to the medal payout process by winning after the power is turned off, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the remaining medals are paid out. In other words, when the medal payout process based on the winning is completed after the power is turned off, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at that time.

Further, as a method for preventing the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off momentarily when the power supply is momentarily interrupted, the following method can be cited.
As shown in FIG. 54, when the power-off is detected, the outputs of all the ports 52 are turned off in step S483. Is not output. Thus, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is the segment P of the digit 4a, is turned off.

Then, the process proceeds to step S488 in FIG. 54, and after waiting for reset, if the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, an ON signal of D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2, and Outputting an ON signal of D7 bits (segment P) from the output port 3 may be mentioned. In FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S488, and in the loop process after waiting for reset, no interrupt process occurs. Therefore, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 in this case is always turned on (static lighting). Thereby, even if an instantaneous interruption occurs, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from being turned off visually.
Alternatively, in FIG. 54, in the process of step S483, the process of turning off the output ports 2 and 3 but turning off the other output ports may be executed. Even with such control, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off due to an instantaneous interruption.

  In the present embodiment, the segment P of the digit 4a is set as the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LED 77 may be configured by a separate and independent LED. Then, the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically lit, and if the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off even when the power failure is detected, the advantageous section display LED 77 is prevented from being turned off at the moment of an instantaneous interruption. can do.

Next, the difference number display on the sub-control board 80 will be described. The sub-control board 80 displays the difference number on the image display device 23 during the AT. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following storage areas are provided in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80.
Comprises:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number counter 3) Pull back flag 4) Pull back game number counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to each game, on / off of the AT flag, to the sub control board 80. Note that the command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 turns from off to on and from when on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives on / off information of the AT flag from the main control board 50 and turns on / off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores the fact that the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 has been turned from off to on (rising data of the AT flag) and from off to on (falling data of the AT flag). .

Further, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game number counter for each game during the AT, and terminates the AT when the AT game number counter becomes “0”. Further, when the difference number counter becomes “2400 (D)” or the advantageous section clear counter becomes “0”, the AT (and the advantageous section) ends.
When ending the AT and the advantageous section, the main control board 50 executes the initialization process of the difference number counter. Therefore, when the next game is shifted to the normal section, the difference number counter becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, the sub control board 80 includes a sub difference number counter that counts the difference number during AT. The sub difference number counter is “0” at the start of the AT (except when the AT is won during the retraction period described later and the AT is started), and thereafter, the game and the difference number are updated. It should be noted that when a carry occurs, unlike the difference counter of the main control board 50, the carry is not corrected to “0” and the carry remains.

For example, when AT starts,
1st game: Non-winning role (number of difference "-3")
2nd game: Non-winning of role (number of difference "-3")
Third game: Winning order of the bell in the order of pushing (number of difference "+5")
Fourth game: non-winning of the role (number of difference "-3")
Fifth game: Winning order of bell
Assume that
In this case, the sub difference number counter (2 byte counter)
1st game: 0 (H) -3 (H) = FFFD (H)
Second game: FFFD (H) -3 (H) = FFFA (H)
Third game: FFFA (H) +5 (H) = FFFF (H)
Fourth game: FFFF (H) -3 (H) = FFFC (H)
Fifth game: FFFC (H) +5 (H) = 0001 (H)
And will be updated.

At the time of the replay winning, the sub difference number counter is not updated like the difference number counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the game at the time of the replay winning, the number of payouts may be calculated by setting the number of payouts to “0” and the number of bets of the next game (at the time of replaying the game) to “0”.
Further, as described above, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization process when ending the advantageous section, but the sub difference number counter of the sub control means 80 sets the AT (advantage section) to In some cases, the initialization process is not immediately executed and the counting is not stopped even when the process is completed. The sub-control board 80 turns on (“1”) the pull-back flag when the AT is finished and the count of the sub difference number counter is continued.

  The sub-control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value at the end of the AT. If the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, “2000 (D)”), the sub difference number counter Continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds the predetermined value (or is equal to or more than the predetermined value), the sub difference number counter is cleared. In the case where the AT ends when the sub difference number counter approaches the upper limit value and the AT is pulled back, the sub difference number counter value may reach the upper limit value immediately. Then, the difference number is not transferred to the next AT.

The pull-back flag is a flag for determining whether the AT has been pulled back within the predetermined number of games ("50" in this embodiment) after the end of the AT (whether or not a re-win has been achieved).
At the end of the AT, the withdrawal flag is turned on, and “50 (D)” is set in the withdrawal game number counter. The withdrawal game number counter is for counting the number of games after the end of the AT (during the withdrawal period). At the end of the AT, "50 (D)" is set in the pull-back game number counter, and thereafter, if no AT is won, the game continues to subtract "1". Then, when the withdrawal game number counter becomes "0", the AT withdrawal fails, the withdrawal flag is turned off, and the sub difference counter is cleared (initialized).
Then, when the pull-back flag is on after the end of the AT, the sub control board 80 updates the sub difference number counter.

In addition, during the withdrawal period (when the withdrawal flag is on), when a special role such as BB is won and a special game such as a BB game is executed, the withdrawal game number counter is decremented (updated) during the special game. )do not do.
On the other hand, if the player wins the AT before the return game number counter reaches “0”, the return of the AT is successful, and in the subsequent AT, the number of images succeeding the previous AT difference is displayed.
For example,
The difference number at the first AT: +1000 sheets The difference number at the end of the first AT until the second AT is won: -100 sheets, the difference number at the start of the second AT is “+900 sheets”. The image is displayed.

An upper limit value that can be counted by the sub difference counter is set. In the present embodiment, the following settings are made.
1) Upper limit during AT: 2414 (D)
2) The upper limit value when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped during the AT and the obtainable number (expected difference number) in the special game related to the special role is “250 (D)”: “2414 (D) ) -250 (D) = 2164 (D) "
3) Upper limit during withdrawal period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds “2414 (D)” during AT, counting of the number of sub difference numbers is stopped and the sub difference number counter is cleared.
In the present embodiment, the sub difference number counter value and the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 are linked (matched). For example, when the sub difference number counter reaches “1000 (D)” during AT, the image is displayed on the image display device 23 as “1000 acquired during AT: 1000”.

As described above, when the difference number counter of the main control board 50 exceeds “2400 (D)”, the AT (and the advantageous section) ends. Therefore, the maximum value that can be taken by the difference counter is “2414 (D)” as described above.
Accordingly, the maximum value that can be counted of the sub difference number counter of the sub control board 80 is set to “2414 (D)” in accordance with the difference number counter of the main control board 50.
Since the maximum value of the sub difference number counter is “2414 (D)”, the maximum difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is “2414”. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessively large number of images from being displayed as an image, and to prevent an image display that remarkably arouses gambling.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), when the number of obtainable BB games is 250, the BB is won during the AT and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is won. Is stopped, the sub difference number counter value at that time is determined. If the sub difference counter value exceeds “2164 (D)”, the value exceeds “2414 (D)” at the end of the BB game. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub difference is displayed. The number counter is cleared (2).

  In this case, the image display device 23 displays “congratulations”, “celebration”, or the like as an image display corresponding to the difference number. In this way, instead of displaying “congratulations” or the like already from the start of the BB game, the sub difference counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub difference counter is not cleared until “2414 (D)” is exceeded. The counter may be kept counting, and when it exceeds “2414 (D)”, the sub difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as “congratulations” may be displayed.

Furthermore, the difference number may increase during the pullback period. For example, there is a case where a difference is counted up as a result of winning a special combination during the pullback period and completing a special game.
In particular, if the specification is such that the player wins the AT when a specific BB is won, the game shifts to the AT after the end of the BB game. On the other hand, when the sub difference counter is close to the upper limit value at the end of the BB game, the upper limit value is immediately reached even if the difference number is taken over by the AT after the end of the BB game. Therefore, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds “2000 (D)” during the retraction period, the sub difference number counter is cleared. For example, during the AT withdrawal period, when the player wins the BB with AT and completes the BB game, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds “2000 (D)” at the end of the final game of the BB game, Clears the sub difference counter. As a result, in the AT after the end of BB, the display of the difference number starts from “0”.

  As described above, even if the game shifts to the special game during the withdrawal period, the withdrawal game number counter is not decremented during the special game. Then, when the special combination is won during the pullback period, the update of the sub difference number counter may be continued or interrupted during the special game. As an example of suspending the update, for example, when the sub difference number counter value during the retraction period is “1000 (D)” and the BB with AT is won, the sub difference number counter value is set to “1000 (D)”. Stop at Then, even if "250" cards are obtained in the subsequent BB game, the "250" cards are not added to the sub difference counter. Therefore, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number starts from “1000”.

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub difference number counter, for example, when the sub difference number counter value during the retraction period is “1000 (D)”, the BB with AT is won, and in the subsequent BB game, When the number of “250” has been acquired, the sub difference counter at the end of the BB game is “1250 (D)”. Then, when shifting to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number is started from “1250”.
In addition, in the case of continuing to update the sub difference number counter, when the sub difference number counter value during the retraction period is “1800 (D)”, the BB with AT is won, and “250” is obtained in the subsequent BB game. When the number of coins has been obtained, the sub difference counter at the end of the BB game is “2050 (D)”, which exceeds “2000 (D)”. Therefore, the sub difference counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number starts from “0” in the AT after the BB ends.

Further, the sub difference counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the bet number, but in the present embodiment, the difference of the game is limited only when the game is started with a predetermined specified number. Update the number.
Here, the difference counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the bet number of the game.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition for updating the sub difference number counter is defined as when the bet number (specified number) is “3”, and when the game is started with the bet number (specified number) “2”. Does not update the difference number in the game.

Next, the sub difference counter management process will be described with reference to a flowchart.
FIGS. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the sub difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart following FIG.
In step S531 in FIG. 56, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on (whether or not the AT is currently being performed). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S532.

  In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the retraction flag is on. If it is determined that the pull-back flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and if it is determined that the pull-back flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends. That is, when the non-AT is in progress and the pullback flag is off, the sub difference counter is not updated.

  In the next step S533, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated to determine the bet number of the game, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command capable of determining the bet number of the game to the sub control board 80. If it is determined that the bet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S534.

  In step S534, it is determined based on the received bet command whether or not the bet amount (specified number) is “3”. When it is determined that the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub difference counter is updated only when the bet number is “3”. Therefore, even during the AT or during the withdrawal period, when the bet number is other than “3”, the sub difference counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference counter on the main control board 50 is updated irrespective of the bet number (specified number) in the game.

When the process proceeds from step S534 to step S535, the sub control board 80 subtracts the bet number (“3”) from the sub difference number counter. Next, proceeding to step S536, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a payout command has been received. During the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41, after the display determination is made in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits a payout command capable of determining the payout number to the sub-control board 80.
If it is determined in step S536 that the payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, where the sub control board 80 adds the payout number to the sub difference number counter.
In the next step S538, sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on. If it is determined that the switch is on, the process proceeds to step S539. If it is determined that the switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG.

  In the step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is turned on in the current game (whether or not the rising of the AT flag is turned on). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned on in the current game, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned on (the rising of the AT flag is off) in the current game, the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 at the time of the AT before the previous game.

  In step S540, sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the retraction flag is on. If it is determined that the pull-back flag is on, the process proceeds to step S541, and if it is determined that the pull-back flag is not on, the process in this flowchart ends. For example, when the AT flag is turned on in this game ("Yes" in step S539) and the withdrawal flag is off ("No" in step S540, that is, when it is not during the withdrawal period), the sub difference number is set at this time. Since the counter is “0”, there is no need to update the sub difference number counter, and the process according to this flowchart ends.

When proceeding from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the withdrawal flag. In the next step S542, the sub-control board 80 clears the withdrawal game number counter. Here, "Yes" in step S539 and "Yes" in step S540 correspond to the case where the AT is won during the retraction period. Therefore, in this case, the withdrawal flag is turned off, and the withdrawal game number counter is cleared.
Next, proceeding to step S543, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter has exceeded the upper limit value “2414 (D)”. If it is determined that the sub difference counter has exceeded “2414 (D)”, the flow proceeds to step S546. Then, in a step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared. This can occur when the difference number increases during the retraction period after the end of the AT and the sub difference number counter exceeds “2414 (D)”.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S543 that the sub difference number counter does not exceed “2414 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub control board 80 stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to BB in the current game. It is determined whether or not. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50.
"Yes" in this step S544 is a case where the BB with AT is won during the withdrawal period. In this flowchart, it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed in the game that has won BB.
If it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB has been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and if it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB has not been stopped and displayed, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

  In step S545, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds “2164 (D)”. When it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds “2164 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared as described above, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S545 that the sub difference number counter has not exceeded “2164 (D)” (the sub difference number counter value is maintained), the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  As described above, when the BB game of the present embodiment ends with payout exceeding 250 as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), the sub difference counter is set to “2164 (D)” at the start of the BB game. Is exceeded, the game will exceed “2414 (D)” (upper limit) by the last game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of the flowchart, at the time of starting the BB game (before the start), it is determined whether or not the sub difference counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game. Before the start, the sub difference number counter is cleared. Since the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub difference number counter, in the BB game after the sub difference number counter is cleared, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference number is not displayed. For example, "congratulations" or "celebration" is displayed instead of the number display.

  If it is determined in step S538 that the AT flag is not on, and the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG. 57, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the AT flag has been turned off in this game (whether the fall of the AT flag is on or not). That is, it is determined whether or not the AT has ended in the current game). If it is determined that the AT flag has been turned off in the current game, the process proceeds to step S548. If it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned off (the fall of the AT flag is off) in the current game, the process proceeds to step S551. .

  In step S548, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". If it is determined that the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the flow proceeds to step S549. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not less than “2000 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S557.

In step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pull-back flag. Next, proceeding to step S550, the sub-control board 80 sets an initial value “50 (D)” in the withdrawal game number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
When the sub difference number counter is smaller than "2000 (D)" at the end of the AT by the processing in steps S548 to S550, the pull-back flag is turned on, and the initial value of the number of pull-back games is "50 (D)". Is set. Note that the reason why the initial value of the number of retraction games is set to “50 (D)” is to set the AT retraction within 50 games as a continuous AT chunk (a condition for transferring the sub difference number to the next AT). Therefore, the number of retraction games is not limited to “50 (D)”, but can be variously set, such as “30 (D)” or “100 (D)”, according to the specification.
Also, if the sub difference number counter is equal to or more than "2000 (D)" at the end of the AT, the sub difference number counter may exceed the upper limit value during the AT after the retraction even if the AT is pulled back. In such a case, the withdrawal flag is not set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference number counter is not less than “2000 (D)” and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. In other words, if the sub difference number counter is equal to or more than "2000 (D)" at the end of the AT, the sub difference number counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the process subsequently shifts to AT.

When the process proceeds from step S547 to step S551, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is in the BB operation (BB game). The information on the operation state flag shown in FIG. 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
If it is determined in step S551 that the BB operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S552, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pull-back flag is on. If it is determined that the pull-back flag is on, the process proceeds to step S553, and if it is determined that the pull-back flag is not on, the processing in this flowchart ends.

In step S553, "1" is subtracted from the withdrawal game number counter. In other words, during the retraction period, when the BB is operating (during the BB game), the renewal game number counter is not updated (subtracted). The present invention is not limited to this, and the number of the withdrawal game number counter may be decreased even during the BB game during the withdrawal period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the withdrawal game number counter has become “0”. When it is determined that the number-of-pull-back games counter is not “0”, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number-of-withdrawals game counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S555.

In step S555, the retraction flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the withdrawal game number counter is cleared. If "Yes" in step S554, the withdrawal game number counter is "0", so the clearing of the withdrawal game number counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, if "No" in step S560 described later, the rewind game number counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, proceeding to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. As described above, when the withdrawal flag is off and the withdrawal game number counter is "0" (clear), the sub difference counter is cleared (set to "0"), and thereafter "0" is maintained until the start of AT. maintain.

When it is determined in step S551 that the BB operation is being performed and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the final game during the BB operation (BB game). The determination of whether or not the final game of the BB game may be made by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game on the sub-control board 80 side, or may be transmitted from the main control board 50. The determination may be made based on an incoming command.
When it is determined that the game is the last game of the BB game, the process proceeds to step S559, and when it is determined that the game is not the last game, the process according to the flowchart ends.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pull-back flag is on. If it is determined that the pull-back flag is on, the process proceeds to step S560, and if it is determined that the pull-back flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S560, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter is less than “2000 (D)”. When it is determined that the sub difference number counter is less than “2000 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S561, and the number-of-withdrawal-games counter is reset to “50 (D)”. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. Thereby, the BB game is executed when the withdrawal flag is ON, and when the sub difference number counter is less than “2000 (D)” in the last game of the BB game, the BB game is again executed from the next game with the withdrawal period (50 games). ) Will be newly set. That is, when the number of withdrawal games is set to the initial value “50” after the end of the AT, the BB game is executed during the withdrawal period, and when the difference counter is less than “2000 (D)” in the last game of BB game, , The number of withdrawal games is reset to “50”.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S560 that the sub difference number counter is not less than “2000 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S555. After step S555, the withdrawal flag is turned off, the withdrawal game number counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. Thereby, the withdrawal period ends. As described above, in the last game of the BB game, when the payback period is during, the sub difference number at that time is determined, and when the sub difference number is “2000 (D)” or more, the payback period ends. .

In the above-described sub difference counter management, the sub difference counter is updated at the timing when the bet command is received. That is, the sub difference number is updated before all the reels 31 stop. On the other hand, since the difference number counter is executed in the advantageous section counter management of the game end check processing, the subtraction of the bet number is also executed after all the reels 31 have stopped.
Therefore, similarly to the difference counter, the sub difference counter may perform the subtraction of the bet number and the addition of the payout number after all the reels 31 are stopped.

Further, even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (even if the digit is borrowed), the sub difference number counter stores the value (the value with a borrow). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the case of the difference counter, when the sub difference counter is negative at the end of the game (when there is a borrow), the counter may be corrected to “0”.
Furthermore, even if the specification is such that the sub difference number counter may be negative, the image display device 23 displays the difference number “0”.

In this case, the following processing may be performed.
As described above, the sub difference number counter is a 2-byte counter, and its upper limit is “2414 (D)”, that is, “096E (H)”. Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is “0 (H)”. Therefore, by determining whether or not the value of the most significant digit is “0 (H)”, it is possible to determine whether or not a digit borrow has occurred. When it is determined that the carry-down has occurred (the value of the most significant digit is not “0 (H)”), the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 may be set to “0”.

  Further, in the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)) can be similarly applied. The sub bonus sets the number of games, the number of payouts, or the number of difference as an end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether the sub-bonus symbol has been stopped and displayed. In step S551, it is determined whether or not a sub bonus game is being played. Furthermore, in a step S558, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus game is the final game.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Subsequently, a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specified number (bet number) is instructed before starting the game.
The display of the pressing order instruction information is the operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). Here, the “instruction function” is a device that facilitates winning. Therefore, the specified number of instructions is not the operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the accessory condition apparatus, the prescribed number for each RT, and the number of winnings in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58 (A), BB1 and BB2 are provided as the accessory condition apparatus (special combination). When BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops, the game shifts to BB1 game. The BB1 game ends with payout exceeding 100 cards. After the end of the BB1 game, the game shifts to non-RT.
When the player wins BB2 and stops the symbol combination corresponding to BB2, the game shifts to BB2 game. The BB2 game ends with payout exceeding 30 cards. After the end of the BB2 game, the game shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), RT includes non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, during BB1 operation, and during BB2 operation.
The non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins. When the player wins BB1 in the non-RT, the game moves to the inside of BB1. When the player wins BB2, the game moves to the inside of BB2.
During the inside of BB1, the operation is continued until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped inside BB1, the operation shifts to BB1 operation, that is, BB1 game. Similarly, the inside of BB2 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops inside BB2, the operation shifts to BB2 operation, that is, BB2 game.
In addition, the special role that can carry over the winning is limited to one. Therefore, BB2 does not win when it is inside BB1. Similarly, when BB2 is inside, BB1 is not won.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the specified number is limited to “3” during the operation of BB1 and the operation of BB2 (at the time of operating the accessory). The game cannot be started with the bet number “1” or “2”.
On the other hand, the prescribed number in non-RT, inside BB1, and inside BB2 when the accessory is not operating is “2” or “3”. As a result, the game can be started if the specified number is either “2” or “3”.
In FIG. 58 (C), the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is “65536”. For example, the winning probability of the winning number “1” (normal replay) in non-RT is “9000/65536”. The number of advantageous section lotteries indicates the number when the denominator is “16384”. Therefore, when the number of advantageous section lotteries is “16384”, it means that the section is won with a probability of “16384/16384”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), in the non-RT, BB2 is randomly selected for the specified number “2”, but BB1 is not randomly selected. Conversely, with the prescribed number "3", BB1 is drawn, but BB2 is not drawn.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), when the specified number of non-RT is “3” or the specified number in the BB2 is “3”, lottery of the advantageous section is possible. Then, in the lottery of the advantageous section, it is set so as to be always won in the advantageous section except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the game section almost an advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment has the above-described “7P” type specification.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game proceeds inside the BB2 and with the specified number “3”. Then, the AT is randomly selected in the BB2, and when the AT is won, the AT is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that BB2 that has won the election will not be awarded.
For example, if it is a non-RT at the present time, it is necessary to shift from the non-RT to the inside of the BB2 (to win the BB2 in the non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play a game with a prescribed number “2”.
Therefore, in the case of non-RT at the present time, the game is performed with the specified number “2”, the BB2 is won, and the next game is shifted to the inside of the BB2. Further, since the lottery of the advantageous section is received inside the BB2 when the specified number is “3”, the game proceeds with the specified number “3” inside the BB2.

Also, BB2 won with the specified number "2" cannot stop and display the symbol combination unless the specified number is "2". Similarly, BB1 won with the specified number “3” cannot stop and display the symbol combination on the activated line unless the specified number is “3”.
Therefore, in non-RT, the player wins BB2 with the specified number “2”, moves to the inside of BB2, and proceeds with the game with the specified number “3”. Is not stopped and displayed on the activated line.
As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role is stopped, the game is shifted to the special game, and the special game is not designed to increase the number of medals. , In other words, to create the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58C, in non-RT, it is possible to win BB2 with a probability of about “１ ／”, so that it is possible to move from non-RT to the inside of BB2 early.
Further, within the BB2, when a small combination or a replay is won, the advantageous section is won with a probability of 100%. Therefore, within the BB2, most of the game period is an advantageous section. Note that it is of course possible to set the winning probability of the advantageous section to less than 100%.

  Further, the instruction function can be activated (the processing relating to the instruction function is executed) only when the game is played with one specified number, particularly in the present embodiment, the specified number “3”. Therefore, when the player wins the AT during the advantageous section in the BB2 and the AT is executed, when the player starts the game with the specified number “3” and wins the pushing order bell, the instruction function is activated. Then, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. On the other hand, when the game is started with the prescribed number (the number of bets) “2” during the AT, the instruction function is not activated even when the push-bell is elected.

Further, similarly to the eleventh embodiment, even when the game is played with the specified number “2” during the AT, the difference counter is updated based on the bet number and the payout number in the game, and Update the advantageous section clear counter. However, the AT game number counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) is not updated. On the other hand, when the game is played with the specified number "3" during the AT, the difference number counter, the advantageous section clear counter, and the AT game number counter (for the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) are used. Update about everything.
Regardless of the specified number, the RT always shifts when the shift condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination satisfying the shift condition is stopped and displayed). On the other hand, with respect to the main game state (usually, CZ, AT, etc.), any specified number may be set to be transferable, or the game is performed with one specified number (for example, “3”). May be set to be transferable only when the

  In the inside of BB2, when the player starts a game with a specified number of "2" due to a player's operation error and the player is not elected in the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 that has been elected can be stopped and displayed. Becomes On the other hand, if the player starts a game with the specified number of “2” due to an operation error of the player and any of the roles is won in the game, the winning of the role won in the game is given priority, The symbol combination corresponding to BB2 having the winning is not stopped and displayed. However, if the player wins the replay in the game, the next game will also be played with the bet number “2”, so even in the next game, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning BB2 is stopped and displayed. there is a possibility.

  Suppose that the game starts inside the BB2 and at the AT with the specified number “2”, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game is finished, the process shifts to non-RT (AT). In this non-RT, information corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and the player is notified that the game should be performed with the specified number "2" (instruction of the specified number). . This is to allow the player to play the game with the prescribed number “2”, win the BB2, and shift the inside of the BB2. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the specified number “2” is designated until BB2 is won.

  As described above, when information corresponding to the specified number “2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, “0A” is displayed. Note that the instruction of the prescribed number “2” is not limited to “0A”, and other indications are provided unless they are confused with the number of payouts, the display “88” during setting change, the error number, and the pressing order instruction information. It may be. For example, since the maximum number of medals displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is “15”, for example, “22” may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number “2”.

In the present embodiment, the specified number is specified only during the AT, and the specified number is not specified during the non-AT. For example, after the BB2 game is over, if the game shifts to non-RT and the current time is not AT, the specified number is not specified. Therefore, in this case, at the discretion of the player, it is necessary to play the game by the specified number "2" and shift the game to the inside of the BB2.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of a non-RT and non-advantage section, if the player plays the game with the specified number "3" and wins the small role or replay, the player wins the advantageous section. Then, when a non-RT and advantageous section is reached, the specified number “2” may be indicated (even if it is a non-AT).
Further, the present invention is not limited to the above, and when a transition is made to non-RT, the specified number “2” may be indicated regardless of AT / non-AT, advantageous section / non- advantageous section.

  Also, in non-RT, when the player sets the bet number to “2”, the specified number may not be specified, and when the player sets the bet number to “3”, the specified number may be specified. In the main process of FIG. 41, the bet number is determined in the medal management process of step S276. If the current bet number is determined to be “2”, the specified number “2” is not specified. (Execution of the acquisition number data clearing process). If the current bet number is “3”, the specified number “2” can be designated (the designated prescribed number display data is stored as the acquired number data). No.

  In addition, when the BB2 game ends and the game shifts to non-RT, a wait process may be executed at the end of the final game of the BB2 game. During the wait processing, the game cannot proceed (the main processing shown in FIG. 41 proceeds). For this reason, after the wait process is completed, the process shifts to a game start set process of the next game (non-RT), where a specified number is specified.

In the non-RT during the AT, the instruction of the specified number “2” is continued until BB2 is won. Therefore, the game may be completed in one game or may be performed in a plurality of games.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), when a game is played with the specified number “2” in non-RT, a replay (normal replay, watermelon replay, cherry replay) may be won. As a result of playing the game with the specified number “2”, when the player wins the replay, whether or not to specify the specified number “2” in the next game is optional. In non-RT and AT, a specified number “2” may be instructed before the game is started, regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped until the BB2 is won. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, in the next game (re-game), the player cannot arbitrarily select a specified number (bet number), so that the specified number is not specified in the game. It may be.

The same applies to a case where a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed as a result of playing a game with the specified number “3” in a non-RT and AT, for example. In the next game (re-game), the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (the bet number), so that the specified number may not be specified in this case as well. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the specified number “2” may be instructed for the purpose of alerting.
In the non-RT and AT, when the game is performed with the specified number "2" and the player wins BB2 and shifts from the next game to inside the BB2, thereafter, the specified number of instructions is provided unless the game is shifted to the non-RT again. Is not performed.

  In addition, the timing of instructing the prescribed number is after all reels 31 are stopped, and when there is a payout based on the winning of the small role, after the payout processing is completed, and the start switch 41 of the next game is operated. Before (for example, before a medal can be bet (before accepting a bet)). Therefore, after the payout based on the winning of the small role in the final game of the BB2 game, the specified number “2” is designated before the game of the next game (non-RT) starts. As shown in FIG. 42 (eleventh embodiment), in step S321 of the game start set process (MS_GAME_SET), when the game is non-RT and AT, the main control board 50 sets a specified number of instruction conditions. Judge that it is satisfied.

If it is determined in step S321 in FIG. 42 that the specified number of instruction conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and the acquired number data includes “0B” as specified instruction number display data corresponding to the specified instruction number “2”. (H) "is stored.
Thus, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing of turning on the digit 3a (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the upper digit of the instruction specified number display data "0B (H)" is determined in step S511. The offset for use “0 (H)” is obtained, and in step S514, segment data indicating “0” is obtained based on the LED segment table 2. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "0" is displayed on the digit 3a (the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

  At the timing of turning on the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the lower digit offset “B (H)” of the designated number display data “0B (H)” is acquired in step S513. In step S514, segment data indicating “A” is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. When this segment data is output from the output port 3 in step S520, "A" is displayed on the digit 4a (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

In the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start set process of step S272 is a process before the bet is enabled and before the start switch 41 is operated. Before the switch 41 is operated, the specified number of instructions is displayed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42, after storing the designated instruction number display data as the acquired number data in step S322, the automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when instructing the specified number in the next game at the time of the replay winning, the specified number is instructed before the automatic bet. Thereby, the prescribed number can be instructed to the player as soon as possible.
In FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the acquired number data (designated instruction number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, in the interrupt processing after step S280, “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

  Here, information “0A” corresponding to the specified instruction number “2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the specified number “2”, the instruction function is performed even during the AT. Does not work. That is, even when the push order bell is won in the game, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This is because, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the instruction function is limited to the specified number “3”. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the information “0A” corresponding to the specified instruction number “2” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the acquisition number display LED 78 at least until the stop of all the reels 31. Is "00".

  On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information “0A” corresponding to the specified instruction number “2” was displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but the game was played with the specified number “3”, and the push-bell was won. If so, the pressing order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This processing is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, in this case, the acquired number display LED 78 displays information “0A” corresponding to the specified instruction number “2” before the start of the game, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the specified number “3”), “ After displaying "00", if the player wins the push order bell, push order instruction information (for example, "= 1") is displayed.

Also, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is cleared in step S290 (after all reels stop) in FIG. Since the acquired number data has been cleared in step S280 after the start switch 41 is operated, the processing of step S290 may be skipped in a game in which the pressing order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Then, when the small role wins and the medal payout process by winning is executed in step S294, the obtained number data is incremented by "1", and accordingly, the obtained number is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 accordingly. You.

  Then, when the process proceeds to the game start set process in step S272 of the next game, if the condition for specifying the specified number is satisfied, information corresponding to the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 as described above. When displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions, the specified number of display data is stored as acquired number data. At this time, the number of paid out data of the previous game may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, before storing the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions, the acquired number data may be cleared. For example, in FIG. 42, before step S311, a process of clearing the acquired number data is executed.

In the AT and the non-RT, even though the specified number “2” is designated, the game is executed with the specified number “3” by ignoring the specified number and the BB1 is won, and the inside of the BB1 is shifted. Further, it is conceivable to execute the BB1 game.
In order to suppress such an action, for example, the processing related to the instruction function is not executed inside the BB1. Further, in the BB1 game, the payout rate is set to be less than “1” so that the medal cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
It is to be noted that since the specified number of games to be played is up to the player, even if the specified number of games is played with the specified number of “3” in the AT and non-RT, the game is not performed. No penalty will be imposed on the person.

In the above example, when the specified number is indicated, an example is shown in which the indicated number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to displaying the number on the number display LED 78, the prescribed number of instructions may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub-control board 80 side).
Here, the display start timing for displaying the specified instruction number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is set to be substantially the same as the display start timing for displaying the specified instruction number on the acquired number display LED 78 (before the game starts). Can be
Further, the display end timing after displaying the specified instruction number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or different from the display end timing after displaying the specified instruction number on the acquired number display LED 78.
The display end timing after displaying the specified instruction number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is as follows.
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all the reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in the specified number of "2" games (4) All the reels in the specified number of "2" games (5) After winning the BB2 in the game of the specified number "2" (6) When the reels 31 are stopped in the game of the specified number "2" and the game won in the BB2.
When the specified number of instructions is displayed on the dedicated display, the specified number of instructions can be continuously displayed on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 are each three.
On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 are each four.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing an outline of a configuration including a reel 31 (31A to 31D) and a stop switch 42 (42A to 42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31 </ b> A to 31 </ b> D are shown so as not to be blocked by the front surface of the front door 12. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 located behind the front surface of the front door 12 is shown so as to be seen. Further, in the right side view, the illustration of the medal insertion slot 47 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front surface of the front door 12, and the operation buttons 24 and the medal slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation buttons 24 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 so that bidirectional communication with the sub-control board 80 is possible. For example, at least a part of the operation button 24 is formed so as to be lit, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled by controlling the sub-control board 80. When the operation button 24 is operated, the signal is input to the sub-control board 80.
A start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are arranged below the control panel 12c of the front door 12.

In the front view of FIG. 59, a vertical line passing through an intermediate point between the four reels 31A to 31D is defined as a line L1 (center line). The line L1 is at an intermediate position between the reels 31B and 31C. W1 (uniform) is all between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D. Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged symmetrically with respect to the line L1.
Regarding the four stop switches 42A to 42D, W2 (uniform) is provided between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D. The switch L is arranged so that the line L1 passes through an intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

The gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2 = W1), may be larger than the gap W1 (W2> W1), or may be smaller than the gap W1 (W2 <W1).
Further, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is defined as a line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is defined as a line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is disposed on the right side (closer to the center) of the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is disposed on the left side (closer to the center) of the line L3.

Further, in the front view, assuming that the interval (center-to-center distance) between the reels 31 is W3, the distance between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D is W3 (constant). It is.
If the interval (center-to-center distance) between the stop switches 42 is W4, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D is W4 (constant). ).

Further, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operation part) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged so as to intersect the line L2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be disposed on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting with the line L2, or the line L2 without intersecting with the line L2. May be arranged on the right side (near the center).
Further, in the front view, the medal insertion slot 47 is arranged so that the medal insertion slot 47 and the line L4 intersect. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the medal insertion slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outside) of the line L4 so as not to intersect with the line L4. Alternatively, the medal insertion slot 47 may be disposed on the left side (close to the center) of the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed horizontally long, and a line that contacts the left end of the operation button 24 is a line L4, and a line that contacts the right end of the operation button 24 is a line L5.
In this case, in the front view, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that a part of the leftmost stop switch 42A crosses the line L4. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a part of the rightmost stop switch 42D intersects the line L5.

  As shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by engraving, printing, or the like, and has an arrow shape pointing toward the stop switch 42 in the example of FIG. Further, the left index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it may be slightly shifted from the center line). The right index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42D (it may be slightly shifted from the center line).

With the above arrangement, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A using the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the rightmost stop switch 42D can be operated using the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A using the left index 12d as a guide. Similarly, the stop switch 42D can be operated using the right index 12d as a guide.

When the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 are three, as shown in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), a pressing order of “3! = 6” can be provided at the maximum. On the other hand, when the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 are four, a pressing order of “4! = 24” can be provided at the maximum.
Then, as the number of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 increases, the base (during the non-AT operation and during the non-AT, indicates the number of outs per 100 ins. In the case of 50 out-numbers, it becomes the base 50).

  Assuming that the number of the reels 31 and the stop switches 42 is 4, the pressing order bells to be drawn are 1234 bells (the stop switches 42A → 42B → 42C → 42D indicate the correct pressing order), 1243 bells,. , 4312 bells, and 4321 bells. Then, as shown in FIG. 58, assuming that the number of hits of each push order bell is the same, the number of hits of each push order bell is set to “1500”. In this manner, the number of hits of each pushing order bell can be set to “１ ／”, and accordingly, when the pushing order bell is won, the probability that the pushing order operated by the player matches the correct answering order is reduced. can do.

Here, when the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 are three, an image such as “123” or “left center right” can be displayed during the AT. For this reason, it is easy to intuitively understand the correct answer pressing order.
On the other hand, when the number of the reels 31 and the number of the stop switches 42 is four, the following method can be used to notify the correct push order during the AT.

  For example, as a first method, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, to notify the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated. Can be For example, when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is in the order of the stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, "3412" is reported (at least one of image display, voice display, and lamp color notification). ). Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "A", "B", "C", and "D", respectively, and in the above example, "CDAB" is reported.

As a second method, a color for identification is given to the base of the reel 31 and / or the stop switch 42.
For example, the base of the reel 31A and / or the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the base of the reel 31B and / or the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the base of the reel 31C and / or the color of the stop switch 42C are yellow, The base of the reel 31D and / or the color of the stop switch 42D are red (different colors). Then, in the above example, instead of the notification of “3412”, notification of “yellow red white blue” (at least one of image display, display by sound, and notification by lamp color) is given.

Still further, as a third method, the image corresponding to the fourth (last) stop switch 42 to be operated among the first to fourth stop switches 42 to be operated is darkly displayed (or concealed). Is mentioned. In this case, “the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first> the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated ≧ the stop switch 42 to be operated third” Brightness of image ≧ brightness of image corresponding to stop switch 42 to be operated fourthly ”.
When the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or concealed), and the image corresponding to the fourth stop switch 42 is operated. The brightness of the image to be changed is set to be substantially the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, when the image is notified of the pressing order of “3412” as in the above example, “3 · 12” is first displayed as an image. Note that “●” is an image corresponding to the “4” th pressing order, and may be darkened (concealed) so that the character “4” cannot be seen at all, or “4”. It may be dim so that the characters can be identified.

When the image is displayed as "3 ● 12", the image is displayed in the same manner as when 6 is selected, so that the player can intuitively understand the pressing order. Then, when the first stop switch 42C is operated, one of the following 1) to 3) is executed.
1) "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to the display of "●", and "●" is changed to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as “34 ● 2”.
2) Change “1” corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to display such as “−” or “「 ”, and change“ ● ”to“ 4 ”. Specifically, the image is displayed as “34-2” or “34 ○ 2”.
3) Change “1” corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image) and change “●” to “4”. Specifically, the image is displayed as “34 * 2” (“*” means blank).

Further, even after the second stop, images may be displayed as "34 ●●", "34--", "34OO", and "34 **" in the same manner as described above.
Further, after the third stop, images may be displayed as “● 4 ●●”, “−4−−”, “○ 4OO”, and “* 4 **”.
Alternatively, after the third stop, erasing the image itself in the pressing order may be mentioned.
Even if all the pressing orders are displayed as “4312” as in the first method described above, after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is displayed. Is preferably deleted as described in 1) to 3) above, since the operated stop switch 42 is easily understood. Specifically, after displaying the image “4312”, “43 ● 2” (after operating the stop switch 42C) → “43 ●●” (after operating the stop switch 42D) → “4 ●●●” (stop switch 42B) (After operation) and image display (“●” may be “○”, “−”, “*” as described above).

Furthermore, as a fourth method, there is a method of notifying the pressing order using four-character idioms. For example, when the pressing order is notified using “spring, summer, autumn and winter” as one of the four-character idioms, the correct pressing order is “spring → summer → fall → winter”.
When the pressing order is “3412” as described above, a notification (image display, sound display) of “autumn, winter, spring and summer” may be given as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the third method, an image is displayed as “Autumn-Spring-Summer” before the first stop, and an image is displayed as “Autumn-Winter-Summer” after the first stop.
In any of the first to fourth methods, when a pressing order error occurs on the way, the image in the pressing order may be kept displayed as it is, or at the time when the pressing order error occurs. The image may be deleted.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, when the 24-push pressing order bell is provided as described above, 24 types of the pressing order instruction number and the pressing order instruction information are provided. For example, if the push order instruction information is “A1” to “A9”, “AA”, “AC”, “AF”, “F1” to “F9”, “FA”, “FC”, “FF”, 24 types can be provided.

Although the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and for example, the following various modifications are possible.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In a non-advantageous section, a lottery in an advantageous section is performed only when the result of the lottery is the target lottery result. As described above, when the winning combination lottery result is non-winning (as a result of the internal lottery and the condition device does not operate) as described above, the advantageous section shift lottery, which is processing related to the advantageous section, is performed. This is because it was considered that it is preferable not to perform it. Therefore, it is not always necessary to set in this way, and the advantageous section shift lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process is executed after the advantageous section shift lottery. Here, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined to be an advantageous section is provided, and when the result of the winning lottery is obtained, the advantageous section shifting process (FIG. 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section shifting lottery. May be. Similarly, the combination lottery result (winning number) always determined to the AT is provided, and when the combination lottery result is obtained, the AT lottery is not executed and the AT setting process (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) is performed. May be executed.
Furthermore, a winning lottery result (winning number) determined to be an advantageous section and AT is always provided, and when the winning lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section shift processing and the AT lottery processing are not executed, and the advantageous section shift processing and AT setting processing may be performed.
In addition, in the case where a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is not won in the advantageous section shifting lottery is provided, the advantageous section shifting lottery may be executed even when the result of the winning lottery is obtained. In this case, the winning number of the advantageous section may be set to “0”.

(3) When the player wins the AT, the initial game number of the AT is determined, and the number of games is stored in the AT game number counter. When the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT is ended. However, the AT is not limited to such a game number management type AT, but may be a difference number management type AT. In the case of the difference number management type AT, at the time of winning the AT, an initial value of the difference number that can be obtained is determined and stored in an AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, every time there is a payout, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter, and when the AT difference number counter becomes “0”, the AT ends.
Also in the case of such a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is decremented when it is one specified number (for example, “3”), but when it is another specified number (for example, “2”), the AT difference counter is decremented. Do not decrement the difference counter.

  (4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 39, the setting change is possible after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the power is turned off, when the process shifts to the setting change process, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off before the setting can be changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the state in which the setting can be changed ends (after “Yes” in step S242 in FIG. 39), the advantageous section display is performed before the process proceeds to the main processing (before step S248). A clear (initialization) process of the LED flag may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to control the advantageous section display LED 77 to turn off after the set value is determined.

(5) One clear section counter and one difference counter are provided. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and two advantageous section clear counters and two difference number counters (important counters) may be provided to check the consistency.
For example, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided as advantageous section clear counters. During the advantageous section, both the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are updated each time the game is consumed. For example, in FIGS. 51 and 52, in the determination in step S424, the determination is made on the first advantageous section clear counter. When it is determined that the first advantageous section clear counter is “0”, it is determined whether the value of the second advantageous section clear counter is “0”, or the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear. It is determined whether or not the counter and the counter have the same value. If it is determined that the values are “0” or the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

The same applies to the difference counter.
A first difference number counter and a second difference number counter are provided as difference number counters. Then, each time the game is completed, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated. In addition, for example, in FIGS. 51 and 52, in the determination in step S434, the determination is made on the first difference counter. When it is determined that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, whether the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit, or whether the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. Judge. If it is determined that the value exceeds the upper limit or is the same, the process proceeds to step S435.

If the advantageous section clear counter value and / or the difference number counter value are determined as described above, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (incorrect value) due to the influence of noise or the like, the advantageous section clear counter value is obtained. Is greater than or equal to “0” and / or whether the difference counter value exceeds the upper limit value.
If the first advantageous section clear counter does not match the second advantageous section clear counter, or if the first difference counter does not match the second difference counter, for example, an error message is displayed to advance the game. (Main processing) is stopped.

  (6) In the sub difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB has been stopped and displayed in step S544, and the process advances to step S545 to determine that the sub difference number counter has exceeded “2164 (D)”. When the sub difference counter is cleared, the BB game may output a special effect different from the normal BB game. The special effect during the BB game can indicate to the player that the sub difference number counter has been cleared.

  When the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub difference counter is not determined, and in the BB game, the sub difference counter is set to, for example, "2000 (D)" (an example of a threshold value. However, it is also possible to determine whether or not the number has exceeded. When it is determined that the sub difference counter has exceeded “2000 (D)”, the sub difference counter is cleared, and a special effect (an effect indicating that the sub difference counter has been cleared) is performed from the next game. May be output.

  Furthermore, in the above case, if a power failure occurs in a game in which the sub difference number counter during the BB game exceeds “2000 (D)” (a special effect has not yet been output), return from the power failure. The special effect may be output from the played game. In this case, when returning from the power-off, the sub difference number counter value or the fact that the BB game is being performed may be read, and it may be determined whether or not to output a special effect.

  Further, when the power interruption occurs during the rotation of the reel 31 of the game in which the sub difference number counter during the BB game exceeds “2000 (D)”, even if the special effect is output from the game recovered from the power interruption, Good. Therefore, in this case, if the power is not cut off, a special effect is output from the next game, but if the power is cut off while the reel 31 is rotating, the special effect is output from the game. Become.

  (7) The player plays the game with the specified number “2” during the AT (the instruction function does not operate when the specified number is “2”), wins the pressing order bell, and the stop switch 42 is operated by chance in the correct answer pressing order. When the small counter is paid out and the difference sheet counter exceeds “2400 (D)”, an effect indicating the end of the AT, such as displaying an image such as “END”, may be output at the end of the game. preferable. This is to prevent the AT from ending in a game in which the correct answer pressing order is not notified and giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  (8) On the other hand, as described above, in order to prevent the AT from ending in a game for which the correct answer pressing order is not notified, for example, when a game is played with the specified number “2”, the pushing order bell is won. Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the payout number of the game is set to “2” or less (the difference number of the game is “0” or less) so that the AT does not end in the game. You may.

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub difference number counter continued counting even during the BB game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the player wins the BB during the AT and shifts to the BB game, the sub difference counter may not be updated (the updating of the sub difference counter is interrupted during the BB game). .
In this case, for example, before step S531 in FIG. 56, it is determined whether the BB operation is being performed (determined by the operation state flag). When the BB operation is being performed, the process according to the flowchart ends.
When the sub difference number counter is not updated during the BB game, the processing in steps S551 and S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 becomes unnecessary. If “No” in the step S547, the process proceeds to a step S552.

B. 12. Twelfth Embodiment (1) As in the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when a lottery of a winning combination is not won, a shift lottery of an advantageous section (processing related to an advantageous section) is not executed. As described above, the rules are considered. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into consideration, the shift lottery of the advantageous section may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the shift lottery of the advantageous section (the processing relating to the advantageous section) is performed only in one specified number (the specified number “3” in the example of FIG. 58) in one game state (RT). I did it. This is done in consideration of the rule that the transition lottery of the advantageous section (the processing relating to the advantageous section) is determined to be only one specified number in one game state (RT). Therefore, if this point is not taken into consideration, the shift lottery of the advantageous section may be executed with a plurality of specified numbers in one game state (RT).

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the non-RT and AT indicate the specified number “2”. However, when the game is the last game of the AT game, it is not necessary to indicate the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that a game is played inside the BB2, and that the BB2 wins and shifts to the BB2 game is irregular. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specification may be such that after the AT is executed inside the BB2, when the end condition of the AT is satisfied, the BB2 is won and the BB2 game is executed. In this case, when the end condition of the AT is satisfied inside the BB2, after the end of the game that satisfies the end condition of the AT (after all the reels 31 are stopped and the payout process is executed at the time of winning the small role), Prior to the start of the next game (non-AT) (before betting is possible), a prescribed number “2” is instructed to urge BB2 to win. In the twelfth embodiment, the BB2 is won with the specified number “2”, so the specified number for winning the BB2 is “2”. For example, when the BB to win with the specified number “1” is provided. In order to win the BB, the specified number "1" is designated.
Further, the BB game in the case of such specifications may be a BB game in which medals increase or a BB game in which medals decrease.

(4) When instructing the prescribed number, it was executed in the game start set processing (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in the BB2 game, it is determined whether or not the game is the last game of the BB2 game. If the game is the last game, the specified number of the next game is indicated at the time of the game end check processing. However, when the small role wins in the final game of the BB2 game, there is a payout, and when the payout number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the specified number is indicated after the payout number is displayed. If the LED indicating the prescribed number is a dedicated LED, the designated number of the next game can be designated to the dedicated LED while the payout number is being displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the freeze is executed in the final game of the BB2 game, when the specified number of the next game is indicated at the end of the game, any timing before the execution of the freeze, during the execution of the freeze, or after the end of the freeze It may be.

  (5) As in the twelfth embodiment, the function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed when the game can be executed with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers. For example, in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number "3" in the game during the advantageous section (for example, in the case of inside BB2 in FIG. 58), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is set to a special three-bet It may be set to a button. In other words, if the number of credits is “3” and it is advantageous to play a game with the prescribed number “3” during the advantageous section and the three-bet switch 40b is operated, the bet “3” is set. I do. On the other hand, if the number of credits is “2” and it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number “3” during the advantageous section and the 3 bet switch 40b is operated, “2” is not bet. Set as follows.

  Alternatively, even if it is possible to play a game with the prescribed number “3”, if the number of credits is “2”, operating the 3-bet switch 40b will set “2” bet. Is also good. In particular, in FIG. 58, it is preferable that the non-RT and AT be set so that if the number of credits is “2” and the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, “2” bet is made.

(6) As in the twelfth embodiment, when most of the game sections are set as the advantageous sections, the instruction function can be activated at an arbitrary timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from the difference number counter) capable of counting minus the difference number is provided, and the payout rate in a predetermined period is calculated. When the payout rate in a predetermined period has reached a predetermined lower limit value (for example, the predetermined lower limit value is set higher than the lower limit value in the rule), the instruction function is activated to increase the payout rate. Is also good. Then, when the payout rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the operation of the instruction function ends.
Activating the indicating function when the predetermined lower limit value is reached may be included in “AT” or may not be included in “AT”. However, since the operation of the instruction function is still the same, it corresponds to the processing related to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is the acquired number display LED 78. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to another existing LED, or a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions may be separately provided.
When a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is separately provided, the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is displayed in the game start set process, and then even if the start switch 41 is operated, the specified number of specified LEDs is displayed. Need not be deleted. Further, even if all the reels 31 are stopped, a small win is won, and medals are paid out, the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions does not have to be erased.
In addition, when a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is provided, the specified number is specified in an arbitrary display mode because the specified number of instructions is not confused with the payout number, the error number, and the like. Can be. For example, if the specified number of instructions is “2”, “2” can be displayed.

  (8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example in which the specified number “2” is specified has been given. However, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the specified number “1” may be specified or the specified number “3” may be specified. Conceivable. If the specification has a possibility of indicating any of the specified numbers “1” to “3”, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 when indicating the specified number “1” is “A1”, and the specified number is indicated. The display indicating “2” is “A2”, and the display indicating the specified number “3” is “A3”.

C. Thirteenth Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, the line L1 is set to pass through the center of the four reels 31 and pass through the center of the four stop switches 42. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire four stop switches 42 may be arranged on the right side of the position in FIG. 58, for example, so that a part of the stop switch 42B intersects the line L1. Conversely, the four stop switches 42 may be entirely shifted leftward from the position shown in FIG. 58, and may be arranged so that, for example, a part of the stop switches 42C intersects the line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but these Roman numerals may be used as lamps. In this case, for example, when the stop switch to be operated next is 42C, the lamp of the Roman numeral "3" is turned on.
Also, different colors may be assigned to ranges in which Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written, and colors corresponding to Roman numerals "1" to "4" may be assigned to the stop switches 42A to 42D. No. In the example described above, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of Roman numeral "1" is white, the range of Roman numeral "2" is blue, the range of Roman numeral "3" is yellow, and the range of Roman numeral "4" is red. Can be

  (3) A portion including the periphery of the reel 31 may be configured by the image display device 23. Then, different colors are given to the respective stop switches 42 as described above. In this case, for example, when designating the stop switch 42B (blue) at the time of notification of the pressing order, the periphery of the reel 31B may emit blue light.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the interval W3 between the reels 31 is set longer than the interval W4 between the stop switches 42.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31.

  (5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a pressing order of a maximum of 24 selections can be provided as the pressing order bell. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a first stop pushing order bell. Here, in the related art, the first stop pushing order bell has three options. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to set four options. When the correct answer pressing order is displayed as an image when the first stop pressing order bell is won, for example, if the stop switch 42 to be the correct answer is the stop switch 42C, the image may be displayed as "XX1X".

  Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a first stop and a second stop push order bell (a push order bell in which the correct push order is set for the first stop and the second stop). For example, the first stop is set as a stop switch 42C, the second stop is set as a stop switch 42A, and the third and fourth stops are set as arbitrary (any of the stop switches 42B and 42D is possible). In this case, the correct answer pressing order can be set to 12 options. Further, when the correct push sequence is displayed as an image, in the above example, the image may be displayed as “2 × 1 ×”. Then, after the stop switch 42C is operated, an image display such as “2 × − ×” may be given.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<14th embodiment>
The fourteenth embodiment relates to the timing of starting and ending the display of the pressing order instruction information.
Hereinafter, fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G) in which the display start timing or the display end timing of the pressing order instruction information is different will be described.

<Fourteenth Embodiment (A)>
FIGS. 60 and 61 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (A).
FIG. 60 shows the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the elapse of the minimum game time. FIG. 61 shows the start switch before the elapse of the minimum game time. The timing of the display start and the display end of the pressing order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.

Here, the hardware configuration of the fourteenth embodiment (A) is the same as the hardware configuration of the eleventh embodiment shown in FIGS.
In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the main processing (M_MAIN), pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), medal payout by winning (M_WIN_PAY), interrupt processing (I_INTR), and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) are described in the eleventh embodiment. The main processing (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41 of the embodiment, the pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) of FIG. 48, the payout of medals by winning in FIG. 49, the interruption processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 53, and the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. ) Is the same.
Then, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), similarly to the eleventh embodiment, the pressing order indication information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when the pressing order bell is won during the AT.

An input port read process is executed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 53. If the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then, "Yes" in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. Becomes
Also, as shown in FIG. 41, if "Yes" in step S278, thereafter, the combination lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section shift lottery process (step S283), and the pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) ).

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, in the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), when the condition for activating the indicating function is satisfied, that is, when a role having an advantageous push order such as a push order bell is won during the AT, , And generates a pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number, and stores it as acquired number data. Then, by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing, the pressing order indication information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), an interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed every 2.235 ms, as in the eleventh embodiment. Further, the dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that one cycle is generated by five interrupts.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, or the start switch 41 after the minimum game time elapses. Regardless of whether or not is turned on (operated), after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the rotation of the reel 31 is started, more specifically, the pressing order instruction number is stored as acquired number data. Within 5 interrupts (2.235 × 5 = 11.175 ms), the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.

After the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the first interrupt, or the push order instruction may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the fifth interrupt. Information may be displayed.
Although not shown in FIG. 41, the control command set 1 is executed between the pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 and the reel rotation start preparation in step S285. In the control command set 1 between the pressing order instruction number set and the reel rotation start preparation, the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the control command is composed of a first control command and a second control command. Each of the first control command and the second control command is 1-byte data. The first control command is data indicating a type of the control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable). Then, one control command is constituted by the 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, the first control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by one parallel communication line, and the first control command is transmitted by the other parallel communication line. 2 The control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, a control command consisting of 2 bytes of data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), a 64-byte storage area is secured in the RWM 53 as a control command buffer. As described above, since one control command is constituted by the 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command, 32 control commands can be stored in the control command buffer. Then, by transmitting the control command during the interrupt processing, the control device transmits the untransmitted control commands stored in the control command buffer to the sub-control board 80 in the order of storage.
If the control command is stored when the control command buffer is empty, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the transmission of the control command during the interrupt processing that arrives next to that point.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, or the start switch 41 after the minimum game time elapses. Regardless of whether or not is turned on (operated), after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the rotation of the reel 31 starts, more specifically, the pressing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer. The push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in about one interrupt (2.235 ms) from.

  In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the sub-control board 80 includes a first sub-control board (sub-main control board) and a second sub-control board (sub-sub-control board). The first sub-control board and the second sub-control board are control boards that belong to the lower order of the main control board 50, and control the selection and output of effects during a game and during a game standby. Further, the second sub-control board is a control board belonging to a lower level than the first sub-control board. Then, a control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the first sub-control board in one direction, and the first sub-control board and the second sub-control board perform bidirectional communication.

Further, the first sub-control board determines at what timing and what effect to output based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, the first sub-control board transmits a control command relating to the determined effect to the second sub-control board.
Further, effect peripherals such as an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, and an image display device 23 are electrically connected to the second sub-control board. Then, the second sub-control board selects an effect based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board, and controls so as to output various effects from the effect peripheral device.

Specifically, when receiving the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub-control board stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Also, the first sub-control board executes the sub-main processing every 16 ms, analyzes the control command in the loop processing during the sub-main processing, and as a result, determines that the control command is an image-related control command. Stores the image command corresponding to the analysis result in the command buffer.
Further, the first sub-control board transmits the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in a command transmission process (executed before the loop process) during the next sub-main process.

For this reason, 32 ms (= the cycle of the sub-main processing) from when the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number as the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the image command. It takes about 16 ms × 2).
Then, the second sub-control board performs a drawing process based on the received image command, and displays an image on the image display device 23.
In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes the drawing process at 30 fps (frames per second). Therefore, it takes about 33.33 ms to display one image on the image display device 23.

As described above, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub control board, the image (push order instruction image) in which the second sub control board instructs the push order is displayed on the image display device. It takes about 65.33 ms (= 32 ms + 33.33 ms) until the image is displayed on 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the elapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 60, after the rotation of the reel 31 starts, the reel 31 can be stopped. , That is, before the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 is ready to be accepted, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum game time elapses, it takes about one second from the on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, before the rotation of the reel 31 starts, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.
In the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum game time elapses. Regardless of whether the button is turned on (operated), the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started first, and then the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

  Although not shown in FIG. 41, the control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288. In the control command set 1 between the reel stop acceptance check and the all reel stop check, a control command relating to the operation of the stop switch 42 and a control command relating to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board analyzes the received control command, and as a result, determines that the control command is a control command related to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped first). If so, an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is transmitted to the second sub-control board.
Similarly, when it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped second), the image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is changed to the second command. When the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control board and is determined to be a control command related to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last), the operation is performed in accordance with the operation of the third stop switch 42. The image command is transmitted to the second sub-control board.

When the second sub-control board receives the image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42, the second sub-control board prompts the operation of the second stop switch 42 (for example, the operation of the second stop switch 42). The pressing order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Similarly, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is received, an image corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (for example, a pressing order instruction image urging the operation of the third stop switch 42) is displayed. The image is displayed on the image display device 23.

When an image command corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is received, for example, the display of the pressing order instruction image is terminated, and the image corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (for example, all reels 31 are stopped). (An image corresponding to the state) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, after the third stop switch 42 is turned on, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 41, when all the reels 31 stop ("Yes" in step S289), the acquired number data is cleared (step S290). For example, suppose that the pressing order indication information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when the pressing order bell is won during the AT. In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes “00” due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is ended.
In the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends first, and thereafter, the push order instruction on the acquired number display LED 78. The display of information ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in step S294, a medal payout due to winning (M_WIN_PAY) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, "1" is added to the acquired number data in step S399 during medal payout due to winning (M_WIN_PAY). As a result, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is set to “+1” by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S399. For example, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 changes from “00” to “01”.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the number of obtained medals is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 when the medals are paid out.

  In the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the pushing order bell is won during the AT and the pushing order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, all the reels 31 are stopped. Then, the acquired number data is cleared, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes “00”. Thereafter, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 remains “00” until the payout of the medals. When there are ten payouts, for example, when the medal is paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is "00" → "01" → "02" → ... → "09" → "10". Count up.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the combination lottery process (step S282) and the advantageous section shift lottery process (step S283) are executed, the pressing order instruction number set (step S284) is executed next. I do.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time elapses. After that, and before the rotation of the reel 31 starts, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be started. That is, immediately after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be started.

<14th embodiment (B)>
The fourteenth embodiment (B) is different from the fourteenth embodiment (A) in the timing of starting the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, and the display of the pressing order instruction information at the start of rotation of the reel 31. Is to start.
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 in the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 62, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined with step numbers, and steps identical to those in FIG. 41 are assigned identical step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, the processing is executed in the order of the push order instruction number set, the reel rotation start preparation, and the reel rotation start, but in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIG. The processing is executed in the order of number setting and reel rotation start.
That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), the order of step S284 and step S285 is reversed from that of FIG. 41, and after performing the preparation for starting the reel rotation, the pressing order instruction number set is executed.

Input port reading processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53. If the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then, "Yes" in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. Becomes
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, if "Yes" in step S278, then, the lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section shift lottery process (step S283), the control command set 1 (step S601), the reel rotation start The preparation (step S285) and the pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are executed.

In step S601, control command set 1 is executed. In the control command set 1, the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, after step S601, the process proceeds to step S285.
In step S285, preparation for starting reel rotation is executed. In this reel rotation start preparation, first, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the minimum game time (the minimum time from the start of rotation of the reel 31 to the start of rotation of the reel 31 in the next game) is “0”.

The RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing a timer value of the minimum game time. The initial value of the timer value is “1834 (D) (2.235 ms × 1834 ≒ 4099 ms)”. Furthermore, the timer value is decremented by "1" every interruption process (2.235 ms). When it is determined that the timer value is not “0”, it is determined again whether the timer value is “0”, and when it is determined that the timer value is “0”, the initial value of the timer value is changed. After setting, the process proceeds to step S284.
As described above, in the preparation for starting the reel rotation in step S285, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S284.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 is executed, the process proceeds to step S602.
In step S602, the control command set 1 is executed. In the control command set 1, a control command relating to the operation of the stop switch 42 and a control command relating to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, after step S602, the process proceeds to step S288.
The execution of the control command set 1 between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288 is as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A).
Except for the above, it is the same as the flowchart of FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.

FIGS. 63 and 64 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (B).
FIG. 63 shows the display start and display end timings of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is operated after the lapse of the minimum game time. FIG. 64 shows that the start switch 41 is operated before the lapse of the minimum game time. The timing of the display start and the display end of the pressing order instruction information when it is performed is shown.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), after executing the advantageous section shift lottery process in step S283, the process proceeds to step S601, and the control command set 1 is executed. In the control command set 1, the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.

  For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum game time elapses, or the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum game time elapses. Regardless of whether or not the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the rotation of the reel 31 is started, more specifically, one interrupt (2. At about 235 ms), the pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board).

In the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the control command set 1 in step S601 is executed, next, the reel rotation start preparation is executed in step S285, and then the pressing order instruction number set in step S284 is executed.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, or the start switch 41 after the minimum game time elapses. Is turned on (operated), the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started when the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

Further, as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub control board, the second sub control board instructs the image display device 23 to issue the push order. It takes about 65.33 ms to display an image. For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 63, after the rotation of the reel 31 starts, the reel 31 stops. Before the determination is made, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum game time elapses, it takes about one second from the on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 63, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is first started, and then the image is displayed. The display of the pressing order instruction image on the display device 23 is started.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the elapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 64, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is first started, and thereafter, Then, display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.
That is, depending on whether the operation time of the start switch 41 is before or after the elapse of the minimum game time, the display start of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 and the push order instruction on the image display device 23 are performed. The order of starting the display of the image is switched.

  Here, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, or whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operate) after the minimum game time elapses. After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started. That is, immediately after the start switch 41 was turned on (operated), the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 was started immediately.

However, if the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is too early, the start switch 41 is turned on because the winning lottery (internal lottery) wins a role having an advantageous pressing order such as a pressing order bell. After (operation), the player immediately knows.
In this case, although there is no advantageous pushing order, there is a possibility that a player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare role, which is a condition for determining the additional number of AT games, may be discouraged.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the pushing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, so that when the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the pushing of the acquired number display LED 78 is performed. The display of the order instruction information is started.
Thus, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player waiting for the rare role from being discouraged immediately after the start switch 41 is operated.

When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, and the push order instruction number is stored as acquisition number data, and then 5 interrupts (2.235) The display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started within (× 5 = 11.175 ms).
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), before storing the push order instruction number as the acquisition number data, the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer and stored in the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board). The transmission is performed, and it takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number to the first sub-control board to when the second sub-control board displays the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23. It takes time.

As described above, the time required from the storage of the pressing order instruction number as the acquired number data to the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is set to “X”, and the main control board 50 sets the pressing order instruction number to Assuming that the time required from transmission to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is “Y”, “X <Y” is satisfied. Is set to
When the cycle of the interrupt process is "T" and the number of digits to be dynamically turned on by the interrupt process is "N", the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, and then pushed to the acquired number display LED 78. It takes a maximum of “T × N” time to display the order designation information. For this reason, it is set so as to satisfy “T × N <Y”.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the elapse of the minimum game time, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is first started, and thereafter, the push order on the image display device 23. The display of the instruction image is started.

<Fourteenth embodiment (C)>
The fourteenth embodiment (C) is different from the fourteenth embodiments (A) and (B) in the timing of ending the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, and differs from the fourteenth embodiment (A) in that the pressing order instruction information is displayed when the medal is paid out. Is terminated.
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 in the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 65, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined with step numbers, and steps identical to those in FIG. 41 are assigned identical step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290 to clear the acquired number data. However, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIG. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, and the display determination of the symbol is performed without clearing the acquired number data.
Also, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the medal payout due to winning (M_WIN_PAY) (step S603) is different from FIGS. 41 and 49 of the eleventh embodiment.

Input port reading processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53. If the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then, "Yes" in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. Becomes
As shown in FIG. 65, if "Yes" in step S278, then, a lottery lottery process (step S282), an advantageous section shift lottery process (step S283), a push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) The control command set 1 (step S601) and the reel rotation start preparation (step S285) are executed.
Step S601 is the same as that of the fourteenth embodiment (B).

In FIG. 65, the control command set 1 (step S602) is executed after the reel stop acceptance check (step S287), and the all reel stop check (step S288) is executed next. This is the same as FIG. 62B.
Further, as shown in FIG. 65, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, and a symbol display determination is performed. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), after stopping all the reels 31, the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 49 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 66, steps different from those in FIG. 49 are denoted by underlined step numbers, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 49 are denoted by the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the number-of-payouts data is acquired in step S391, the process proceeds to step S611, and after the number-of-payouts data is stored as the acquired number data, the process proceeds to step S392. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the payout number data is stored as the acquisition number data between step S391 and step S392.
As shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when one medal payout process is executed in step S398, the process proceeds to step S400, and “1” is subtracted from the payout number data. For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), unlike FIG. 49 of the eleventh embodiment, “1” is not added to the acquired number data between step S398 and step S400.

67 and 68 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (C).
FIG. 67 shows the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time elapses. FIG. 68 shows the start switch before the minimum game time elapses. The timing of the display start and the display end of the pressing order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared even after all the reels 31 have stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the acquisition number display LED 78 continues to display the pressing order instruction information (for example, “= 1”).

In the fourteenth embodiment (C), if the number-of-payouts data is stored as the number-of-acquisition data in step S611 of FIG. 66, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process Accordingly, the acquired number of medals (for example, “10” when paying out ten medals) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the pressing order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medal is paid out. Subsequently, at the time of payout of the medals, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from the pressing order instruction information to the acquired number (for example, from “= 1” to “10”).
The timing for starting the display of the number of tokens acquired, the timing for transmitting the pressing order instruction number as a control command, and the timing for starting and ending the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 are described in the fourteenth embodiment ( Same as A).

In the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all reels 31 are stopped, the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared, and in step S611 of medal payout by winning (M_WIN_PAY) in FIG. Store the data.
For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, it is possible to continue to display the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 even after all the reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the pressing order instruction information is continuously displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medal is paid out, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from the pressing order instruction information to the acquired number when the medal is paid out. Although the LED 78 is used as a display for both the push order instruction information and the acquired number, the display of the acquired number can be prevented.

<14th embodiment (D)>
The fourteenth embodiment (D) is different from the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (D) in the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, and the reel 31 can be stopped. At this time, the display of the pressing order instruction information is started.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 in the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (D) shown in FIG. 69, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined with step numbers, and steps identical to those in FIG. 41 are assigned identical step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286, the process proceeds to step S604, and it is determined whether or not the reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the reel 31 has reached the constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 has become ready to be accepted. If it is determined that the reel 31 can be stopped, the flow advances to step S284 to execute a pressing order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF).
Note that the content of the processing in the pressing order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) in step S284 is the same as in the eleventh embodiment and the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C).
Further, the contents of the processing in the control command set 1 in steps S601 and S602 are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and (C).

70 and 71 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (D).
FIG. 70 shows the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the elapse of the minimum game time. FIG. 71 shows the start switch before the elapse of the minimum game time. The timing of the display start and the display end of the pressing order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the reel 31 can be stopped, the pressing order instruction number set is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the start is started before the minimum game time elapses. Regardless of whether the switch 41 is turned on (operated) or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, when the reel 31 is allowed to stop, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is displayed. Is started.

Also, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the elapse of the minimum game time, it is shown in FIG. As described above, after the rotation of the reel 31 is started and before the reel 31 can be stopped, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started, and the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses. ), The display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 starts, as shown in FIG.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), the time when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) is before or after the minimum game time elapses. , The display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the reel 31 can be stopped.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, the reel 31 can be stopped. Then, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time elapses. First, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started, and thereafter, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.

In the fourteenth embodiment (D), the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be delayed until the reel 31 can be stopped. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player waiting for the rare role from being discouraged immediately after the start switch 41 is operated.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), although the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is delayed, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 when the reel 31 can be stopped. Is started, the pressing order instruction information can be notified to the player before the player operates the stop switch 42.

<Fourteenth Embodiment (E)>
In the fourteenth embodiment (E), as in the fourteenth embodiment (B), the display of the pressing order instruction information is started at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and, like the fourteenth embodiment (C), the payout of medals. The display of the pressing order instruction information is sometimes terminated.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B) and FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C). .
In FIG. 72, steps S271 to S286 are the same as FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), and steps S287 to S303 are the same as FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (E).
FIG. 73 shows the timing of starting and ending the display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, and FIG. 74 shows the start switch before the minimum game time has elapsed. The timing of the display start and display end of the pressing order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.
As shown in FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the pressing order of the acquired number display LED 78 is changed. The display of the instruction information is started, and the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is ended at the time of payout of the medals, similarly to FIGS. 67 and 68 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

The timing of starting the display of the number of tokens acquired, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 are described in the fourteenth embodiment (B). ) Is the same.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. At the start of the rotation of, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player waiting for the rare role from being discouraged immediately after the start switch 41 is operated.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), as in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared, and the medals are paid out by winning (M_WIN_PAY) shown in FIG. In step S611), payout number data is stored as acquisition number data.
For this reason, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the push order instruction information can be continuously displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medal is paid out. Further, when the medal is paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is performed. Since the switching is performed from the pressing order instruction information to the acquired number, the acquired number display LED 78 is used as a display for both the pressing order instruction information and the acquired number, but it is possible to prevent the display of the acquired number from being disturbed.

<Fourteenth Embodiment (F)>
FIG. 75 is a front view showing an outline of a configuration including the reel 31, the stop switch 42, and the operation instruction lamp 25 in the fourteenth embodiment (F).
As shown in FIG. 75, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), a stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below each reel 31. The stop instruction lamp 25 instructs the reel 31 to be stopped, and is constituted by an LED lamp.

The left stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the left reel 31 and is turned on when the stop of the left reel 31 is instructed.
Similarly, a stop instruction lamp 25 provided below the middle reel 31 and lit when instructing the stop of the middle reel 31 is the middle stop instruction lamp 25.
The right stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the right reel 31 and is turned on when the right reel 31 is instructed to stop.
Then, the sub-control board 80 controls turning on / off of each stop instruction lamp 25.

Here, the sub-control board 80 includes a first sub-control board and a second sub-control board, and the stop instruction lamp 25 is electrically connected to the second sub-control board.
Then, based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board controls turning on / off of each stop instruction lamp 25 and displays an image on the image display device 23.

Specifically, when the condition for activating the indicating function is satisfied, that is, when a winning combination having an advantageous pushing order such as a pushing order bell is won during the AT, the main control board 50 executes the control during the main process (M_MAIN). In the command set 1, a pressing order instruction number as a control command is stored in a control command buffer.
Then, the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as the control command stored in the control command buffer to the first sub-step by transmitting the control command (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing. Send to control board.

When receiving the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub-control board stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Furthermore, the first sub-control board executes the sub-main processing every 16 ms, analyzes the control command in the loop processing during the sub-main processing, and as a result, when it is determined that it is the push order instruction number. The lamp control command and the image command corresponding to the analysis result are stored in the command buffer.

Further, the first sub-control board transmits the lamp control command and the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in the command transmission processing during the next sub-main processing.
Therefore, similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as the control command to the first sub control board, the second sub control board transmits the lamp control command and the image. It takes about 32 ms (= sub-main processing cycle 16 ms × 2) to receive the command.

Then, the second sub-control board executes the control of turning on / off the (left, middle, right) stop instruction lamp 25 based on the received lamp control command, and performs the drawing process based on the received image command. Then, the image is displayed on the image display device 23.
For example, when receiving the lamp control command and the image command indicating the first left stop, the second sub-control board turns on the left stop instruction lamp 25 and turns off the middle stop instruction lamp 25 and the right stop instruction lamp 25. At the same time, an image prompting the operation of the left stop switch 42 is displayed on the image display device 23.

In the fourteenth embodiment (F), the second sub-control board executes an interrupt process every 1 ms, and controls the turning on / off of each stop instruction lamp 25 in this interrupt process.
For this reason, the second sub-control board takes about 1 ms from receiving the lamp control command transmitted from the first sub-control board to turning on the stop instruction lamp 25 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped. It costs.

Further, as described above, it takes about 32 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board to when the second sub-control board receives the lamp control command.
Therefore, it takes about 33 ms (= 32 ms + 1 ms) from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board to when the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25.

Also, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes the drawing process at 30 fps (frames per second), so that one image is displayed as an image. It takes about 33.33 ms to display on the device 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board transmits an image. It takes about 65.33 ms (= 32 ms + 33.33 ms) to display the push order instruction image on the display device 23.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the stop instruction lamp 25 is turned on first, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

FIGS. 76 and 77 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (F).
FIG. 76 shows the display start and display end timings of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time elapses. FIG. 77 shows the start switch before the minimum game time elapses. The timing of the display start and display end of the pressing order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.

Although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), after the preparation for starting the rotation of the reel is executed, the pressing order instruction number set is executed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 76 and FIG. 77, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), whether the operation time of the start switch 41 is before the lapse of the minimum game time. Regardless of whether or not the elapsed time has elapsed, when the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.

Further, although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), when the ON of the third stop switch 42 is detected, the acquired number data is cleared. Then, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes “00” by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 ends.
The timing of starting the display of the number of obtained medals and the transmission timing of the push order instruction number as a control command are the same as those in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (E).

  Also, as described above, it takes about 33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board to when the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25, It takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board to when the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23.

For this reason, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the elapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 76, first, after the rotation of the reel 31 is started and before the reel 31 can be stopped, first stop. The instruction lamp 25 is turned on, and thereafter, a pressing order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum game time elapses, it takes about one second from the on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, before the rotation of the reel 31 starts, first, the stop instruction lamp 25 is turned on, and thereafter, the pressing order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the elapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 76, first, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information, and then the stop instruction lamp 25. Lights up, and finally, the pressing order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the elapse of the minimum game time, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first turned on as shown in FIG. The order indication image is displayed, and finally, the push order indication information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (E), when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. Thus, when the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player waiting for the rare role from being discouraged immediately after the start switch 41 is operated.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first turned on regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time elapses. Then, the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Both the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board. However, in order to display an image on the image display device 23, it is necessary to execute a drawing process. 25 turns on earlier.

<Fourteenth embodiment (G)>
The fourteenth embodiment (G) is different from the fourteenth embodiment (F) in that a dedicated 7-segment display (7-segment) for displaying the pressing order instruction information is provided, and the display end timing of the pressing order instruction information is ended. Otherwise, the configuration is otherwise the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (F).
Note that a dedicated 7-segment display for displaying the pressing order instruction information is referred to as a pressing order instruction LED.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), a storage area for the pressing order instruction data is secured in the RWM 53. The push order instruction data is data for displaying the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED.

78 and 79 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (G).
FIG. 78 shows the display start timing and the display end timing of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time elapses. FIG. 79 shows the start switch before the minimum game time elapses. The timing of the display start and display end of the pressing order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.

In the fourteenth embodiment (G), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), after the preparation for starting the rotation of the reel is executed, the pushing order instruction number set is executed.
For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the minimum game time when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) is the same as in the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F). Regardless of whether the time is before or after the lapse of time, when the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the display of the pressing order instruction information is started.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction number is set in the storage area of the push order instruction data of the RWM 53. As a result, in the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the pressing order instruction LED.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (F), since the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the acquired number data is cleared by the time the medal is paid out, so that the acquired number display LED 78 is displayed. The number of medals obtained can be displayed.
On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), in order to maintain the pressing order instruction data without clearing even at the time of payout of medals, as shown in FIGS. Push order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) is continuously displayed on the order instruction LED.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), when the payout of medals is completed, the pressing order instruction data is cleared. Then, by the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the display of the push order instruction LED becomes “00”.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, after the payout of the medals, the display of the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED ends.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 but is displayed on the dedicated push order instruction LED. Even if the continuation is continued, the display of the number of obtained medals can be prevented.
It should be noted that the display start timing of the number of obtained medals, the transmission timing of the push order instruction number as a control command, the display start and display end timings of the operation instruction lamp 25, and the display start of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. The display end timing is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (F).

<Summary of Fourteenth Embodiment>
The pressing order instruction information is output from when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) to when the reel 31 can be stopped (the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted). If it displays, before a player turns on (operates) the stop switch 42, the player can be notified of the correct push order.
Therefore, the timing for starting the display of the push order instruction information is as follows.
1) When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 2) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the rotation of the reel 31 starts 3) When the rotation of the reel 31 starts 4) After the rotation of the reel 31 starts And before the reel 31 can be stopped. 5) When the reel 31 can be stopped.

When the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, if the display of the push order instruction information is completed between the time when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) and the time when the medal is paid out, the medal is displayed. The display of the acquired number of items can be prevented.
For this reason, the timing for ending the display of the push order instruction information is as follows.
1) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) 2) When the third stop switch 42 is turned off after being turned on (when the player releases his / her hand from the third stop switch 42)
3) When all reels 31 are stopped. 4) When paying out medals.
When the push order instruction information is displayed on the dedicated push order display LED, the display of the push order instruction information may be continued at the time of payout of the medals, and the display of the push order instruction information may be terminated after the payout of the medals. .

By the time the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 on the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board), a control command is generated on the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 A certain time is required for transmitting the control command to the sub-control board 80, receiving and analyzing the control command at the sub-control board 80, drawing processing and display at the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board).
Therefore, even if the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 and the transmission of the control command to the sub-control board 80 are simultaneously performed on the main control board 50, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is performed. Will be late.

Further, depending on whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, the rotation of the reel 31 and the start of display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 are determined. May be interchanged.
Therefore, the timing of starting the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is as follows.
1) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the rotation of the reel 31 is started. 2) After the rotation of the reel 31 is started and before the reel 31 can be stopped.

In addition, from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the sub control board 80 to when the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) finishes displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. It takes a certain amount of time.
For this reason, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated).
Then, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display end timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display start timing of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, and the push order The timing of ending the display of the instruction image on the image display device 23 is not limited to the combinations shown in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G), and can be set in an appropriate combination.

In a game in which the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, even if a push order error occurs during the game, the push order instruction information is kept until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). May be kept displayed as it is, or the display of the pressing order instruction information may be ended when a pressing order error occurs.
Similarly, in a game in which the pressing order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23, even if a pressing order error occurs on the way, the pressing order instruction is performed until a predetermined time after the ON (operation) of the third stop switch 42. The image may be kept displayed as it is, or the display of the pressing order instruction image may be ended when the pressing order error occurs.

Also, at the time of replay winning when three coins are inserted, three medals are automatically bet and a game can be started, so that a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, and a replay display The LED 79f lights up.
At this time, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, first, the 1-bet display LED 79a is turned on, and the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display The LED 79d and the replay display LED 79f are turned off.

Thereafter, the 2-bet display LED 79b and the 3-bet display LED 79c are sequentially turned on, and finally, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are turned on.
At the time of replay winning when three cards are inserted, when the 1-bet display LED 79a is turned on and the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are turned off, the pressing order is changed. The display of the instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 may be ended.

In addition, at the time of the small winning, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on, when the third stop switch is turned off, when all the reels 31 are stopped, or when the medal is paid out, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is ended. At the time of the replay winning, when the 1-bet display LED 79a is turned on and the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are turned off, the pressing order of the acquired number display LED 78 is set. The display of the instruction information may be ended.
That is, the display end timing of the pressing order instruction information may be made different between the time of winning a small role and the time of winning a replay.
Of course, the display end timing of the pressing order instruction information may be the same at the time of winning the small role and the time of winning the replay.

Although the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and for example, the following modifications are possible.
(1) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, the first control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 using one parallel communication line, and the first control command is transmitted using the other parallel communication line. By transmitting the two control commands to the sub-control board 80, a control command consisting of two bytes of data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by one interruption process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a control command composed of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 using only one set of 8-bit parallel communication lines.
In this case, the first control command and the second control command may be sequentially transmitted by transmitting the control command during one interruption process. As a result, a control command consisting of two bytes of data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Further, the first control command may be transmitted by transmitting the control command during one interrupt processing, and the second control command may be transmitted by transmitting the control command during the next interrupt processing. As a result, a control command consisting of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in two interrupt processes.
Furthermore, the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by serial communication without being limited to parallel communication.
Further, a control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by an electrical connection, and a control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by a connection using an optical communication unit. Is also good.

(2) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board). The substrate) performed the drawing process based on the received push order instruction number, and displayed the push order instruction image on the image display device 23.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main control board 50 transmits the condition device number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) The drawing order may be displayed on the image display device 23 by executing the drawing process based on the received condition device number.

Also, for example, the main control board 50 transmits the effect group number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) transmits the received effect group number. May be executed on the basis of, and the pressing order number may be displayed on the image display device 23.
(3) The various modifications shown in the first to fourteenth embodiments and the first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to being carried out alone, but can be carried out in appropriate combinations.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment relates to the timing of addition processing of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47.
Hereinafter, the fifteenth embodiments (A) to (C) in which the timing of the medal addition process is different will be described.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (A)>
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (A) is the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.
That is, when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal flows down the medal path in the medal selector. On the medal passage in the medal selector, a passage sensor 46, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided from the upstream side. A blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 first pass through the passage sensor 46, and then reach the position of the blocker 45. When the blocker 45 is on, medals flowing down the medal path pass through the blocker 45, and then reach the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The input sensors 44a and 44b are installed at a predetermined distance.
Before the medal reaches the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are off.
When a medal flows down the medal path, first, the insertion sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the insertion sensor 44b is kept off.

When the medals further flow down the medal path, the insertion sensor 44a remains on and the insertion sensor 44b is turned on from off.
Thereafter, when the medals further flow down the medal path, the insertion sensor 44a changes from ON to OFF, and the insertion sensor 44b remains ON.
Thereafter, when the medals further flow down the medal path, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on while the insertion sensor 44a is kept off.
Then, the medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b reach the hopper 35.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (A).
At the timing (a) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
At the timing (b) in FIG. 80, the closing sensor 44a is on and the closing sensor 44b is off.
The state (b) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
When the state of (b) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. When receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (c) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both on.
The state (c) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (b) or (c) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
If the state of (c) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred and the sub control board 80 Send a command. When receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 80, the closing sensor 44a is off and the closing sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
When the state of (d) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and performs the sub control as in the cases of (b) and (c) in FIG. An error command is transmitted to the board 80. When receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
The state (e) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (e) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In the state of (e) in FIG. 80, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted and executes a medal "1" addition process (bet process or credit process).
Here, when the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, if the bet number is less than the specified number, the main control board 50 executes a process of adding “1” to the bet number. For example, when the prescribed number in the game is “3” and the bet number at that time is “1”, the bet number is changed from “1” to “2” by the bet number “1” adding process. Update to

At the time point (e) in FIG. 80, if the bet amount has already reached the specified number and the credit amount has not reached the maximum number of “50”, the main control The board 50 executes a process of adding “1” to the number of credits. For example, if the credit amount at that time is “20”, the credit amount is updated to “21”.
Further, when the state shown in (e) in FIG. Then, upon receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an input sound from the speaker 22.
If a medal passing error occurs before the state of (e) in FIG. 80 occurs, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal “1” addition process and does not transmit the insertion command.

When a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 80 are repeated.
Then, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, by executing the process of adding “1” to the bet number, when the bet number reaches the specified number, the main control board 50 causes the start switch 41 to operate. The game is accepted (game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (B)>
The fifteenth embodiment (B) is different from the fifteenth embodiment (A) in the execution timing of the medal “1” addition process.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (B) is the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (B).
Since (a) to (c) in FIG. 81 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIG. 80, the description is omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. Since it is different from (d) and (e) in FIG. 80, it will be described below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 81, the closing sensor 44a is off and the closing sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 81 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state shown in (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and adds “1” to the medal (bet processing or credit processing). ). At this time, if the bet number is less than the specified number, the process of adding “1” to the bet number is executed, and if the bet number has already reached the specified number, the credit amount is reduced to the maximum number “50”. When it has not reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed in the same manner as in the fifteenth embodiment (A).

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state shown in (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an input sound from the speaker 22.
However, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), if the state (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. . When receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

For this reason, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), there is a case where the medal “1” addition process is executed, and after the insertion sound is output, it is determined that a medal passing error has occurred, and an error sound is output.
As described above, when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the process of adding the medals “1” is executed, and the insertion sound is output. Thereafter, the state of (d) in FIG. When the error sound is continuously output, the error sound is output after the insertion sound is output. Therefore, even if an error occurs, the player can be notified by the insertion sound that the medal has been inserted. .
When a medal passing error occurs in the state of (b) or (c) in FIG. 81, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal “1” addition process and does not transmit the insertion command.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 81, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
When a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 81 are repeated.
When the bet number reaches the specified number by executing the process of adding “1” to the bet number, the main control board 50 operates the start switch 41 in the state of (e) in FIG. The game is set to the acceptable state, and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.
For this reason, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the medal “1” addition processing is executed, the timing for outputting the insertion sound and the operation of the start switch 41 are accepted, and the game start display LED 79d is turned on. Timing is different.

Here, as described in the fifteenth embodiment (A), the “1” addition process of the medal is performed at the timing of (e) in FIG. 80 (when both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). It is common to do.
However, if the medals flow down the medal path to the position shown in FIG. 81 (d), the medals enter the hopper 35 because they have already passed through the blocker 45.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), at the timing (d) in FIG. 81 (when the input sensor 44b remains on and the input sensor 44a is turned off from on), the medal “1” is obtained. Execute addition processing. As a result, it is possible to prevent so-called swallowing of medals, in which medals enter the hopper 35 even though the addition processing of medals is not executed.

  In the fifteenth embodiment (B), as described above, if the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and the sub control board 80 By transmitting an error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22. In this case, when the error sound is output, the medal addition processing has already been executed and the insertion sound has been output. Therefore, the error may be canceled and the medals jammed in the medal selector may be put into the hopper 35. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

When medals are continuously inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 and the number of credits reaches the maximum number "50", the 51st medal is displaced from the medal passage at the position of the blocker 45, It is returned from the medal payout slot 16.
At this time, at the timing when the 50th medal is in the state of (d) in FIG. 81 (the insertion sensor 44a is off and the insertion sensor 44b is on), the credit number “1” is added and the blocker is executed. Turn 45 off. Thus, the 51th medal can be reliably returned from the medal payout opening 16 without swallowing.

  In the fifteenth embodiment (B), the operation of the start switch 41 is performed when the bet number reaches the specified number by executing the process of adding “1” to the bet number in the state of (d) in FIG. Can be accepted. At this time, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 transmits a start command to the sub control board 80. Then, upon receiving the start command, the sub-control board 80 outputs a sound effect from the speaker 22.

Here, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A), when the operation of the start switch 41 is made receivable and the input command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (e) in FIG. There is a possibility that the closing sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 may overlap.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), an input command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG. 81, and the operation of the start switch 41 is performed at the timing (e) in FIG. Make it acceptable. This makes it possible to prevent the closing sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 from overlapping.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (C)>
In the fifteenth embodiment (C), the execution timing of the medal “1” addition process is the same as that in the fifteenth embodiment (B). Are different.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (C) is the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (C).
Since (a) to (c) in FIG. 82 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the description is omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. Are different from (d) and (e) in FIGS. 80 and 81, and will be described below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 82, the closing sensor 44a is off and the closing sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 82 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In the fifteenth embodiment (C), when the state of (d) in FIG. 82 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and adds “1” to the medal (bet processing or credit processing). ). At this time, if the bet number is less than the specified number, the process of adding “1” to the bet number is executed, and if the bet number has already reached the specified number, the credit amount is reduced to the maximum number “50”. When the number of credits has not reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is performed in the same manner as in the fifteenth embodiments (A) and (B).

However, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), unlike the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 does not transmit the input command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG.
In the fifteenth embodiment (C), the main control board 50 transmits the input command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (e) in FIG. Then, upon receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an input sound from the speaker 22.

Here, it is assumed that the state of (d) in FIG. 82 has continued for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 50 has determined that a medal passing error has occurred, and has transmitted an error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, it is assumed that the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.
In this case, the medal “1” addition processing is executed, but the insertion sound is not output, but the error sound is output. As a result, priority can be given to error notification.

Then, when the error is released, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 outputs an input sound from the speaker 22 based on the received input command. As a result, the player can be notified that the medal has been inserted, so that the player can be relieved.
In addition, in the state of (e) in FIG. 82, by executing the process of adding “1” to the bet number, when the bet number reaches the specified number, the operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted, and Turning on the game start display LED 79d is the same as in the fifteenth embodiments (A) and (B).

<Sixteenth embodiment>
The sixteenth embodiment relates to a chute passage 48 for guiding the medals passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and a chute sensor 49 provided in the middle of the chute passage 48.
FIG. 83 is a view showing the medal selector, the chute passage 48, and the chute sensor 49. The medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the insertion sensor 44a, the insertion sensor 44b, and the shoot sensor 49, and is a hopper. FIG.

  The chute passage 48 is a passage for guiding the medals M passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and is connected to a downstream side of the medal passage of the medal selector. Then, the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 reaches the hopper 35 through the medal path and the chute path 35 of the medal selector.

The shoot sensor 49 is a sensor provided for determining whether or not there is a medal clogging or a goto action, and is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting and receiving unit, and is disposed at a predetermined position in the middle of the chute passage 48. And is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Since the chute passage 48 is a passage for guiding the medals M passing through the input sensors 44a and 44b to the hopper 35, the chute sensor 49 is disposed downstream of the input sensors 44a and 44b.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the insertion monitoring counter adds “1” when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passing of the medal M (when both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off → on → off) ( The counter is decremented by "1"("-1") when the shooting sensor 49 detects the passing of the medal M. For this reason, the closing monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0" at normal times.
The timing of adding “1” to the input monitoring counter is the timing when the input sensor 44b is turned off from on (the timing of (e) in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82).
Further, the timing of adding “1” of the input monitoring counter is not limited to the timing at which the input sensor 44b is turned off from on, and for example, the timing at which the input sensor 44a is turned on from off (see FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). (B), or the timing at which the input sensor 44a changes from on to off (the timing of (c) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82), and the timing at which the input sensor 44b changes from off to on. (The timing of (d) in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82) may be used. This is because if the medal M reaches these timings, the medal M is considered to enter the hopper 35.
When the medal M passes through the shoot sensor 49, the shoot sensor 49 changes from off to on to off. However, the timing of subtracting “1” from the insertion monitoring counter is the timing when the shoot sensor 49 changes from on to off. is there.

When the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M (insertion monitoring counter = “+ 1”) and the shoot sensor 49 does not detect the passage of the medal M, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b Is detected, the insertion monitoring counter becomes “+2”, and the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred.
Furthermore, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M and only the shoot sensor 49 detects the passage of the medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes “−1” and the main control board 50 Judge as a passing error.

The main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has not occurred when the insertion monitoring counter has become “+2” or “−1”. For example, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal passing error has occurred when the insertion monitoring counter has reached a predetermined value equal to or greater than “+2” and when the insertion monitoring counter has reached a predetermined value equal to or less than “−1”.
Further, when the chute sensor 49 detects the medal M after the chute sensor 49 detects the medal M even after a lapse of a predetermined time, the main control board 50 determines that a medal staying error has occurred. If the main control board 50 determines that the medal stays error, the main control board 50 stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

As shown in FIG. 83, the medals M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 reach the hopper 35 through the medal passage and the chute passage 48. At this time, it passes through the input sensor 44a, the input sensor 44b, and the shoot sensor 49.
Here, it is assumed that the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. In FIG. 83, the position of M1 indicates the position of the medal M placed in the medal slot 47, the position of M2 indicates the position of the medal M jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48, and the position of M3 indicates the shoot The position of the second medal M from the tip of the passage 48 is shown, and the position of M4 is the position of the third medal M from the tip of the chute passage 48.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the sixteenth embodiment, when the medal M is clogged at the tip of the chute passage 48, the chute is moved to a position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 can be detected. A sensor 49 is provided.
Therefore, when the medal M is clogged at the tip of the chute passage 48, the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 is detected by the chute sensor 49, and if this state continues for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 50 judges that a medal stay error has occurred and stops the progress of the game until the error is eliminated.

  For example, it is assumed that three medals M are inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 when the prescribed number is “3” and the bet number and the credit number are both “0”. In this case, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the third medal M, the main control board 50 enters a state where the operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted (game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d Lights up. At this time, when the first medal M (M2) is clogged at the tip of the chute passage 48, the third medal M (M4) is detected by the chute sensor 49. When this state continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal stay error has occurred, and stops the progress of the game. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in a state where the medal M is jammed in the chute passage 48.

  Note that the position of the shoot sensor 49 is not limited to a position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 can be detected when the medal M is clogged at the tip of the chute passage 48. Assuming that the prescribed number is “N”, the shoot sensor 49 may be disposed at a position where the N-th medal M can be detected from the tip of the chute passage 48 when the medal M is clogged at the tip of the chute passage 48. . Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in a state where the medal M is jammed in the chute passage 48.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
The seventeenth embodiment relates to a payout medal passage 134 that guides medals ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 to a medal payout opening 16.
FIG. 84 is a front view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 85 is a rear view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 86 is a left side view of the passage forming member 130, and FIG. It is AA arrow sectional drawing.

The slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 having a front opening, and a front door 12 closing the opening of the cabinet 13.
Further, a medal payout device 15 is arranged below the inside of the cabinet 13.
Further, a medal slot 47, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, and the like are disposed at the center of the front surface of the front door 12, and a medal selector is provided at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 on the back surface of the front door 12. Is arranged.
Further, a medal payout port 16 is provided at a lower portion of the front door 12, and a medal tray for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout port 16 is provided at a lower front portion of the front door 12. A passage forming member 130 is attached to a lower portion.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the passage forming member 130 is formed in a bent shape, and is attached to a predetermined position at the lower portion of the back surface of the front door 12 so that the return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage are formed. 134.
Further, the return medal path 132 is a path for guiding the medals whose insertion has been prohibited by the blocker 45 of the medal selector to the medal payout opening 16.
Further, the payout medal passage 134 is a passage for guiding medals ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout opening 16.
In addition, the return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage 134 merge into one passage on the way.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, an upper medal receiving opening 131 is provided above the passage forming member 130. The upper medal receiving opening 131 is an opening for receiving a medal which is not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45, and is an opening on the upstream side of the return medal passage 132, and closes the front door 12. It is formed so as to be located below the blocker 45 of the medal selector in a state where it is set.
Then, the medals which are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45 are guided by the return medal passage 132 after passing through the upper medal receiving slot 131, pass through the medal payout slot 16, and are stored in the medal tray.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, a lower medal receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the passage forming member 130 and to the left as viewed from the front (to the right as viewed from the back). ing. The lower medal receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving medals ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15, and is an opening at the upstream end of the paid-out medal passage 134. It is formed so as to be located in front of the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 with the 12 closed.
Then, the medals ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 are guided by the payout medal passage 134 after passing through the lower medal receiving opening 133, pass through the medal payout opening 16, and are stored in the medal tray. .

As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the lower medal receiving slot 133 is formed on the back side of the passage forming member 130, and forms the back surface of the front door 12 on the front side of the passage forming member 130. A plate material is arranged. As described above, there is a distance corresponding to the depth of the passage forming member 130 from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12.
Here, the medals M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133, pass through the payout medal passage 134, and face the lower medal receiving opening 133 on the back surface of the front door 12. Bounces off. At this time, if the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is short, the medals M that have bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 and are ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 next to the medals M. There is a possibility that the medal M will collide.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the distance from the lower medal receiving slot 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is “L1” and the diameter of the medal M is “D”, “L1” ≧ 2D ”.
That is, the distance “L1” from the lower medal entrance 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be at least twice the diameter “D” of the medal M.
As a result, the medal M that has bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 next to the medal M are less likely to collide.

That is, the medals M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 fall toward the back surface of the front door 12 (to the right in FIG. 87) while falling downward due to gravity. For this reason, the medals M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 hit the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position. Further, the medals M that have bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 fall toward the lower medal receiving opening 133 (leftward in FIG. 87) while falling downward due to gravity.
If the distance “L1” from the lower medal entrance 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be at least twice the diameter “D” of the medal M, the medal is ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15. And the medal M heading toward the back side of the front door 12 and the medal M hitting the back side of the front door 12 and bouncing back toward the lower medal entrance 133 can be sufficiently secured, and the two medals M collide. It can be made difficult.

  Further, when the medals M are ejected one after another from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 at short intervals, even if the distance “L1” from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is equal to the diameter “D” of the medal M, Even if it is set to twice or more, there is a possibility that the medals M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 and the medals M that bounce off the back of the front door 12 will collide.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, after the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and rebounds, the next medal M is ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal ejection device 15. You have set.
That is, the interval at which the medals M are ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, the ejection speed of the medals M from the ejection unit 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, and the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12. Are set so as to satisfy the above relationship.

As described above, the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 rebounds by hitting the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position, and after dropping to a lower position, the next medal M is delivered to the medal payout device. If the two medals M are ejected from the discharge section 103, the distance and the height difference between the medals can be sufficiently ensured, and the medals M can be less likely to collide.
Here, when the medal M that has bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 next to the medal M collide, the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133 or the payout medal. There is a possibility that the medals M will be jammed in the passage 134.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, by setting the two medals M so as not to easily collide, the medals M are prevented from clogging in the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133 or in the payout medal passage 134. .
In the present embodiment, the medals M that have bounced off the back of the front door 12 and the medals M ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 after this medal M are set so as to be less likely to collide. However, when a large number of medals M are continuously ejected from the discharge unit 103, this does not mean that all the medals M before and after do not collide, and at least the first medal M and the second medal M are It is enough if there is no collision. When winning a small role, two payouts are the most common, so if the first medal M and the second medal M are set to be hard to collide with each other, the vicinity of the lower medal entrance 133 can be set. This is because the medal M can be prevented from clogging in the payout medal passage 134.

Here, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with a plurality of holding portions 102 capable of holding the medals M stored in the hopper along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101. I have.
When the following conditions (a) and (b) are satisfied or the conditions (a) and (c) are satisfied, two or more medals M are continuously output from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15. It will be injected.
(A) The medals M are held in two adjacent holding portions 102 of the hopper disk 101, respectively.
(B) When the remaining number of credits until reaching the upper limit of the number of credits is “N” and the number of paid-out medals M is “M”, “(M−N) ≧ 2” is satisfied.
(C) When the number of credits is “2” or more, the settlement switch 43 is operated.

For example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is held in each of the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “B” and the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “C”. In this case, even if the medal M is not held in the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “D”, the above condition (a) is satisfied.
Also, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is not held in the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “B”, but the holding unit 102 is located at the position of the character “C”. When the medal M is held in each of the holding unit 102 and the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “D”, the above condition (a) is satisfied.

Further, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “B”, the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “C”, and the position of the character “D” When the medal M is held in each of the holding units 102, the condition (a) is satisfied.
Of course, even when the medals M are held in all the holding portions 102 of the hopper disk 101, the condition (a) is satisfied.

Further, for example, when the upper limit of the number of credits is “50” and the number of credits is “47”, the remaining number of sheets until reaching the upper limit of the number of credits is “3”. When the small winning of “5” or more wins, the condition (b) is satisfied.
Furthermore, for example, when the number of credits has already reached the upper limit of “50”, the remaining number of sheets until the number of credits reaches the upper limit of the credit is “0”. When the above small combinations win, the condition (b) is satisfied.

As described above, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, at least the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “B” and the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “C” respectively have medals. If the above condition (b) or (c) is satisfied under the condition that M is held, two or more medals M are continuously ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15.
Also, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is not held in the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “B”, but at least at the position of the character “C”. In a situation where the medal M is held in each of the holding unit 102 and the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “D”, the medal payout can be performed even when the condition (b) or (c) is satisfied. Two or more medals M are continuously ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the device 15.

Further, there is a case where the medals M ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 bounce against the back surface of the front door 12 and return near the lower medal receiving opening 133. When the returned medals M pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133, they fall into the cabinet 13 and cannot be paid out to the player.
Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving opening 133 is “L2” and the thickness of the medal M is “T”, “L2 ≧ T Is set to satisfy.

That is, the height “L2” of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving slot 133 is set to be equal to or greater than the thickness “T” of the medal M.
As a result, even if the medals M ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 bounce against the back surface of the front door 12 and return to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving slot 133, the returned medals M are not replaced by the lower medal receiving port. 133 can be prevented from passing through the lower medal receiving opening 133.

  Further, since the hopper disk 101 of the medal dispensing device 15 is disposed so as to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, the medal M is ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 in a state of being inclined with respect to the horizontal plane. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the lower medal receiving slot 133 and the payout medal passage 134 are also inclined in accordance with the inclination of the medal M to be ejected.

  Here, the direction perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the medal M ejected in an inclined state is defined as a height direction. In the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the payout medal passage 134 is “L2” and the diameter of the medal M is “D”, “L2 <D” is satisfied. You have set. That is, the height “L2” of the payout medal passage 134 is set to be smaller than the diameter “D” of the medal M.

Accordingly, even if the medal M that has bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 rotates in the payout medal passage 134, the surface and the back surface of the medal M in the payout medal passage 134 can be prevented from being parallel to the vertical plane. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal M from blocking the payout medal passage 134.
It should be noted that all the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
The eighteenth embodiment relates to an external signal transmission process.
In the eighteenth embodiment, signals indicating ON / OFF can be output as the external signals 4 and 5.
In the eighteenth embodiment, the external signal 4 is an ON signal of a setting key switch (setting key switch signal), a signal indicating that an error has been detected, a signal indicating that an error is being displayed, or the power switch 11 is ON. This is a signal indicating that power has been turned on (detection of power-on).
The external signal 5 is a signal indicating that the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 has been opened (a door switch ON signal).

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing main storage areas of the RWM 53 described in the eighteenth embodiment.
The input port 0 level data at the address “F00A (H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating ON / OFF of the input port 0. Each bit of the input port 0 is configured as follows.
D0: Setting switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D1: Reset switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D2: Setting key switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D3: Door switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D4: Not used D5: Not used D6: Power off detection signal D7: Full detection signal

Here, the D6 bit “power-off detection signal” is input when power-off occurs (for example, when “Yes” is determined in step S482 in FIG. 54 (eleventh embodiment)). Signal.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 10 includes a sub tank for storing medals overflowing from the hopper 35. Further, a full sensor that is turned on when a medal contacts the sub tank when the sub tank is full is provided. When the full sensor is turned on, a full detection signal is input to the D7 bit of the input port 0.
Although not shown in FIG. 88, in addition to the storage area for the input port 0 level data, each bit of the input port 0 has been turned off (at the time of the previous interrupt processing) and turned on (at the time of this interrupt processing). And a storage area for input port rising data for storing data indicating that each bit of the input port 0 has been turned on (at the time of the last interrupt processing) to off (at the time of the current interrupt processing). It is also possible to provide an input port falling data storage area for storage.

Further, the input port 51 shown in FIG. 1 is not limited to the input port 0, for example,
(1) An input port 1 for inputting operation switch signals such as a bet switch 40 (40a and 40b), a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 43;
(2) The input port 2 to which signals from the passage sensor 46, the input sensor 44, the payout sensor 37, the reel sensor 33, and the like are input.
Etc. are provided.
A storage area for input port level data corresponding to each input port is provided. Further, as described above, it is also possible to provide a storage area for input port rising data and input port falling data for each input port.
Further, when only the storage area for the input port level data is provided (when the storage area for the input port rising data and the input port falling data is not provided), the storage area for the input port level data in the current interrupt processing is provided. In addition, a storage area for input port level data in the previous interrupt processing may be provided.

The external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery from the address “F013 (H)” is a storage area for a timer value for counting the time to output the external signal 4 at power-off recovery. In this embodiment, when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1 and the main control board 50 detects the return from the power-off, the address “F013 (H)” is set to “136 (D)” as an initial value. Then, "1" is decremented for each interrupt. Until this value becomes “0”, it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating “on” can be output as the external signal 4).
In the eighteenth embodiment, as in the other embodiments, the interrupt cycle is “2.235 ms”. Therefore, the “136” interrupt corresponds to “303.96 ms”. Thus, at the time of recovery from the power-off, the external signal 4 is turned on for about “300” ms (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 4 management time at the address “F014 (H)” is a storage area for a timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 4. In the present embodiment, when the output of the external signal 4 is started (except for the above-described return from the power-off), the initial value “24 (D)” is set, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. . Until this value becomes “0”, it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating “on” can be output as the external signal 4).
The “24” interrupt corresponds to “53.64 ms”. As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least “50” ms or more (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output).

The external signal 5 management time at the address “F015 (H)” is a storage area for a timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 5. In the present embodiment, when the output of the external signal 5 is started, the initial value “24 (D)” is set, and “1” is decremented for each interrupt. Until this value becomes “0”, it is determined that the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating “on” can be output as the external signal 5).
Similarly to the above, the “24” interrupt corresponds to “53.64 ms”. As a result, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least “50” ms or more (a signal indicating “on” can be output as the external signal 5).

In addition, the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power-off and recovery, the external signal 4 management time, and the external signal 5 management time in this embodiment are all 1-byte timers for measuring “255 (D)” or less. Then, these timer values are decremented by the timer measurement in step S455 during the interrupt processing of FIG.
Here, in the eighteenth embodiment, the three timers are arranged at addresses “F013 (H)” to “F015 (H)”. Therefore, in the timer measurement, “F013 (H)” is set as the measurement start timer address in the first step. Also, "3" is set as the number of 1-byte timers. Thus, all timers including addresses “F013 (H)” to “F015 (H)” are decremented by “1” by the timer measurement process.
In addition, when the subtraction process is executed when the timer value is “0”, in other words, when “0” is subtracted from “00 (H)”, the value becomes “00 (H)”. .

The error number of the address “F051 (H)” is a storage area for storing a number corresponding to the detected error when the error is detected. As shown in FIG. 88, when no error is detected, the value of the address “F051 (H)” is “0 (D)”. For example, when an “E5” error is detected, a value “105 (D)” corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address “F051 (H)”.
FIG. 88 illustrates “E0” to “E7” as error numbers.
Here, in the above-described eleventh embodiment, “E1”, “E5”, “E6”, and “E7” errors have been exemplified as non-recoverable errors. On the other hand, the “E0” to “E7” errors in the eighteenth embodiment (FIG. 88) all correspond to recoverable errors.

  When these recoverable errors occur, the progress of the game is stopped in principle. Even during the rotation of at least one reel 31, at least a part of errors (in the example of the eighteenth embodiment, “E7”, “E6”, and “E5” errors) are detected. When an error is detected during the rotation of at least one reel 31, the progress of the game is continued until all the reels 31 stop, and when all the reels 31 stop, an error state (before executing the payout processing). (Error display), and the progress of the game is stopped. Then, when the error is removed by the hall clerk, the progress of the game is resumed. Of course, if any of the errors “E7”, “E6”, and “E5” occurs during the rotation of the reel 31, the progress of the game is stopped (the stop control by operating the stop switch 42 is not performed). ) Is also possible.

In FIG. 88, an “E0” error is an error when the insertion sensor 44 determines that medals have stayed.
The “E1” error is an error when it is determined that medals did not pass in the order of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The “E2” error is an error when it is determined that the sub tank is full.
The “E3” error is an error when it is determined that the medal in the hopper 35 is empty.
The “E4” error is an error when the payout sensor 37 determines that the medal has stayed (clogged) in a situation where the medal payout signal is being output.
The “E5” error is an error when the payout sensor 37 is turned on in a situation where a medal payout signal is not output.
The “E6” error is an error when the insertion sensor 44b detects a medal in a situation where the blocker 45 does not form a medal channel.
The “E7” error is an error when it is determined that medals have stayed in the selector passage.

  When any of the above errors is detected, a number corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address “F051 (H)”. When the error number is stored at the address “F051 (H)”, an error display corresponding to the stored error number can be performed. For example, outputting the segment data corresponding to the number stored at the address “F051 (H)” to the acquired number display LED 78 to display the error number. Specifically, when the error signal “101 (D)” is stored in the address “F051 (H)”, the digit display is performed in the LED display control in the interrupt processing (for example, FIG. 55 of the eleventh embodiment). At the lighting timing of 3, the lighting data of digit 3 and the segment data for lighting and displaying "E" are output. At the lighting timing of digit 4, lighting data of digit 4 and segment data for lighting and displaying "1" are output.

When any error number is stored in the address “F051 (H)” (when the error number is not “0”), the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output). ).
The hall clerk turns on the reset switch after removing the generated error. When it is detected that the reset switch is turned on, it is determined whether or not the generated error has been removed. When it is determined that the error that has occurred has not been removed, the current state (error display) is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that the generated error has been removed (no error has occurred), the error number stored in the address “F051 (H)” is cleared. When the error number of the address “F051 (H)” is cleared, the error display (display of the error number using digits 3 and 4) ends.
The above is an example in which the error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 based on the other embodiments described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the error number may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76, or the error display may be performed. A dedicated LED may be provided, and the LED may be displayed.

  The error detection flag at the address “F294 (H)” is a storage area for storing that an error has been detected in consideration of a case where it is not possible to immediately shift to an error state when the error is detected. It is. In the example of FIG. 88, bits D0 to D2 in the storage area of the address “F294 (H)” are used as detection flags of “E7”, “E6”, and “E5” errors, respectively. The “E7”, “E6”, and “E5” errors are all errors that may be detected even when at least one reel 31 is rotating.

Here, for example, even under a situation where the reel 31 is rotating, it is determined whether or not an “E5”, “E6”, or “E7” error has occurred by the interrupt processing. Then, when the occurrence of these errors is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the bit corresponding to the error of the error detection flag is set to “1”. When the error detection flag is “1”, the external signal 4 is output.
However, even when these errors are detected in a situation where the reels 31 are rotating, the state does not immediately shift to the error state (error display), but after all the reels 31 have stopped. Before the payout process is executed, the state shifts to an error state.

  If all bits of the error detection flag are "1" when all the reels 31 have stopped, the corresponding error number is stored in the address "F051 (H)". When the error number is stored at the address “F051 (H)”, the stored error number is displayed. When the error number is stored in the address “F051 (H)” after the error detection flag is stored in the address “F294 (H)”, when the error detection flag in the address “F291 (H)” is cleared. Is optional. For example, first, the error detection flag is not cleared until the error is removed. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored and after all the reels 31 are stopped, the external signal 4 is turned on based on either the error detection flag or the error number (indicating that the external signal 4 is on) Signal can be output). When it is determined that the error has been removed, both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared. When the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). However, even when the error detection flag and the error number are both cleared, for example, if the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is not turned off (the external signal 4 is turned off). Is not output).

  Secondly, when the error number is stored in the address “F051 (H)” after the error detection flag is stored in the address “F294 (H)”, the error detection flag in the address “F291 (H)” is cleared. It is mentioned. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error detection flag until the error number is stored (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output). ). When the error number is stored and the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error number (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4). Thereafter, when it is determined that the error has been removed, the error number is cleared. As a result, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). However, even when the error detection flag and the error number are both cleared, for example, if the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is not turned off (the external signal 4 is turned off). Is not output).

When an error is detected during the rotation of the reels 31 or the like, it is not possible to immediately shift to the error state (error display) (the error state cannot be shifted until all the reels 31 have stopped), but immediately when the error is detected. Since the external signal 4 needs to be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), an error detection flag is provided.
Therefore, when an error "E5", "E6", or "E7" occurs in a situation where it is possible to immediately shift to the error state, such as when the reel 31 is stopped, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. Whether to do so is optional. For simplicity of processing, even when an “E5”, “E6”, or “E7” error occurs in a state where the state can be shifted to an error state, “1” is stored in the error detection flag. Is also good. Alternatively, when an “E5”, “E6”, or “E7” error occurs and the state cannot be shifted to the error state immediately (for example, at least one reel 31 is rotating), the error detection flag is set to “1”. , And when it is possible to immediately shift to the error state (for example, during game standby), the error number may be stored, but “1” may not be stored in the error detection flag.

  In the storage area of the RWM 53 described above, the storage areas of the addresses “F00A (H)”, “F013 (H)” to “F015 (H)”, and “F051 (H)” are the storage areas in the used area. . On the other hand, the storage area at the address “F294 (H)” is a storage area outside the used area. Further, a program for detecting an error is stored in a control area of the ROM 54 outside the used area.

89 and 90 are time charts showing the output timings of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5. FIG. 89 shows Example 1 and FIG. 90 shows Example 2.
89A shows the relationship between the ON / OFF of the setting key switch and the output of the external signal 4. In FIG. When the ON of the setting key switch is detected, the external signal 4 is immediately turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the setting key switch is turned on to when the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output) is “0” ms. Therefore, when the ON of the setting key switch is detected, the external signal 4 is turned on immediately (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output).
Whether or not the setting key switch is on is detected in the interrupt processing. For example, during the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 (the eleventh embodiment), in the input port read processing of step S457, the level data of the input port 0 is read, and when the level data of the setting key switch is “1”, the external The signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on is output as the external signal 4).

Further, when the setting key switch is once turned on, the external signal 4 is turned on for "50" ms or more (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4) (t3 in the figure). Therefore, even if the setting key switch is turned on and immediately turned off (for example, after "10" ms), the external signal 4 is turned on (external) until at least "50" ms elapses. A signal indicating ON can be output as the signal 4).
When the setting key switch is turned off, the condition is that "50" ms or more has elapsed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 was able to be output). The external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4). If "50" ms or more has elapsed since the external signal 4 was turned on (the signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 was output), the external signal 4 was turned off when the setting key switch was detected to be off. (A signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) (t2 in the figure).

Therefore, after detecting the ON of the setting key switch and turning on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), the turning off of the setting key switch is performed before elapse of “50” ms. When the detection is detected, the external signal 4 is turned off after the minimum “50” ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4 can be output).
On the other hand, after detecting the ON of the setting key switch and turning on the external signal 4 (enabling the output of the signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), turning off the setting key switch after 50 ms or more has elapsed. Upon detection, the external signal 4 can be turned off immediately (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4 can be output).

(B) shows the relationship between error detection / non-detection and the output of the external signal 4. Here, “error detection” corresponds to any bit being “1” in the error detection flag of the address “F294 (H)”, and “error non-detection” refers to the error. This corresponds to the detection flag being “0”.
As soon as "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 can be output). After "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output) is "0" ms.
Further, once “1” is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal is turned on for at least “50” ms (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output) (time t3). When the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 can be turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2). As described above, the error detection flag is cleared when the error is removed or when the error is not removed but the error number is stored.

Therefore, after detecting that the error detection flag has become “1” and turning on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), before the elapse of “50” ms When it is detected that the error detection flag has become “0”, the external signal 4 is turned off after at least “50” ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). Can be output).
On the other hand, after detecting that the error detection flag has become “1”, turning on the external signal 4 (enabling the signal indicating ON to be output as the external signal 4), and after elapse of “50” ms or more, When it is detected that the error detection flag has become “0”, the external signal 4 can be turned off immediately (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4).

  (C) shows the relationship between the display / non-display of the error and the output of the external signal 4. The “error display” here means that the error number of the address “F051 (H)” is a value other than “0” (in the example of FIG. 88, any of “100 (D)” to “107 (D)”). ?) Is stored, and "non-display of error" is equivalent to that the value of the error number is "0". Although a storage area for storing a flag indicating display / non-display of an error may be provided, as in the present embodiment, based on data stored in a storage area for displaying an error number, By determining whether to display an error, it is possible to reduce the storage area to be used.

When a value other than “0” is stored in the error number, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output). After the value other than the error number “0” is stored, the minimum value of the time t1 until the output of the external signal 4 is “0” ms.
Further, when a value other than “0” is temporarily stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least “50” ms (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4 is enabled) (time t3). Also, after a value other than “0” is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least “50” ms (a signal indicating that the signal is turned on can be output as the external signal 4). Is cleared, the external signal 4 can be turned off immediately (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2).

Therefore, when the error number is stored and the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output) and the error number is cleared before elapse of “50” ms, After at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4 can be output).
On the other hand, when the error number is stored and the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output) and the error number is cleared after elapse of “50” ms or more, The external signal 4 can be turned off immediately (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(D) shows the relationship between the power on / off and the output of the external signal 4. Here, various detection methods may be used to determine whether or not the power is turned on (in FIG. 1, whether or not the power switch 11 is turned on). In this example, “power is turned on” refers to the address “F013”. (H) stores the initial value “136 (D)” of the external signal 4 output time at the time of power-off recovery.
When the power-on is detected (when the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at the time of power-off recovery), the external signal 4 can be immediately turned on (the external signal 4 indicates ON). Signal can be output). The minimum value of the time t1 until the output of the external signal 4 after the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is restored is “0” ms.
Further, when the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power-off, the external signal 4 is turned on for “300” ms (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output) ( Time t3). Here, “300” ms corresponds to the interrupt count “136”. Further, when the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power-off recovery becomes “0”, the external signal 4 can be turned off immediately (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4 can be output). (Time t2).

Therefore, the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is restored, and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), the power switch 11 is turned off. (When the D7 bit of the input port 0 level data becomes “1”), the external signal 4 is turned off after “300” ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4. A signal indicating OFF can be output as the signal 4).
On the other hand, the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is restored, and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), the output time of the external signal 4 is “ When 300 ms has elapsed, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) even if the power switch 11 is kept on.

(E) shows the relationship between the opening / closing of the front door 12 and the output of the external signal 5. Here, “the front door 12 has been opened” corresponds to the time when the door switch is turned on. Particularly, in the eighteenth embodiment, this corresponds to the case where the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data (or the input port 0 rising data) becomes “1”.
When the door switch is detected to be turned on, the external signal 5 can be turned on immediately (a signal indicating that the door switch is turned on can be output as the external signal 5). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the door switch is detected to when the external signal 5 is output is “0” ms.
When the ON of the door switch is detected, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 5) (time t3). As a result, even when the front door 12 is closed immediately after the front door 12 is opened, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least “50” ms (indicating that the external signal 5 is turned on). Signal can be output).

Therefore, after the door switch is detected to be turned on and the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating that the door switch is turned on can be output as the external signal 5), the door switch is detected to be turned off before "50" ms has elapsed. At least, after at least “50” ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 5, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off as the external signal 5 can be output).
On the other hand, after the door switch is detected to be on and the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 5), the door switch is detected to be off after "50" ms has elapsed. In some cases, the external signal 5 can be turned off immediately (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

  The output destination of the external signal 4 or the external signal 5 is a hall computer or the like. The external signal 4 or 5 is turned on for “50” ms or more (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 or 5 can be output). ), The hall computer (data lamp) or the like can reliably receive the external signals 4 and 5. Therefore, even if an illegal act such as turning on the setting key switch for a moment (for example, about “5” to “10” ms) or an illegal act including opening the front door 12 for a moment is performed, The external signal 4 or 5 can be received by a computer or the like.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 90 is a modified example of Example 1 shown in FIG.
In FIG. 90,
A time t1 from the time when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be turned on to the time when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4).
Time t1 from the time when the error detection flag shown in (b) becomes “1” to the time when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating “on” can be output as the external signal 4).
The time t1 from the time when the error number shown in (c) is stored to the time when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output),
Time t1 from when the door switch shown in (e) is detected to be turned on to when the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating that the door switch is turned on can be output as the external signal 5).
Are set to “0” ms.

In FIG. 90, the interval of the time t1 is illustrated as exceeding “0”. However, in actuality, for example, during (a), the timing when the setting key switch is turned on from off and the timing of the external signal 4 The timing at which the output is turned on from off is substantially the same (the timing at which the output of the external signal 4 is turned on from off from the timing at which the setting key switch is turned on is within "2"). .
A time t3 at which the external signal 4 shown in (a) to (c) in the drawing and the external signal 5 shown in (e) in the drawing are turned on (signals indicating on as the external signals 4 and 5 can be output). Is a minimum of 50 ms. This is the same as the example in FIG.
Further, the time t3 at which the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output) in FIG. 89D is "300" ms, as in the example of FIG.

Furthermore,
A time t2 from the time when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be turned off to the time when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t2 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) is cleared to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
Time t2 from when the error number shown in (c) is cleared to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
A time t2 from the time when the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power-off recovery shown in FIG.
Time t2 from when the door switch shown in (e) is detected to be turned off to when the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating that the door switch is turned off can be output as the external signal 5).
Are "50" ms.

For example, a timer for managing the output time of the external signal 4 when the setting key switch is turned off, when the error detection flag is cleared, or when the error number is cleared is set. The value “24 (D)” is set, and the timer value is decremented by “1” for each interrupt processing. When the timer value becomes “0”, the external signal 4 is turned off (the external signal 4 is turned off. Can be output).
Similarly, when the door switch is detected to be off, a timer value “24 (D)” for managing the output time of the external signal 5 is set, and the timer value is decremented by “1” for each interrupt processing. When the timer value becomes “0”, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

Next, the output of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 will be described based on a flowchart. FIGS. 91 to 94 are flowcharts showing the external signal output processing.
FIG. 91 and FIG. 92 are flowcharts showing Example 1 of the external signal output process. FIG. 92 is a flowchart following FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of the external signal output process. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing Example 3 of the external signal output process.
The external signal output process (step S3221) is, for example, a process that enters between step S455 (timer measurement) and step S456 (LED display control) in FIG.

First, an example 1 of the external signal output process will be described.
In FIG. 91, in step S3231, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that the setting key switch is on. If it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3237; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3232.

In step S3232, it is determined whether an error has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether any bit of the error detection flag is “1”. If it is determined that any bit of the error detection flag is “1”, the process proceeds to step S3237, and if it is determined that none of the bits is “1” (error is not detected), the process proceeds to step S3233.
In step S3233, it is determined whether an error is being displayed. In this process, the error number is read, and it is determined whether or not the error number is “0”. If the value is "0", it is determined that no error is being displayed, and the flow advances to step S3234. If the value is other than "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed, and the flow advances to step S3237.

  In step S3234, it is determined whether or not “300” ms has elapsed since the power was turned on. As described above, when the return from the power-off is detected, the initial value “136 (D)” is set at the output time of the external signal 4 at the address “F013 (H)” at the time of the power-off, and every time the interrupt processing is performed. "1" is subtracted at a time. Then, in step S3234, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power-off recovery is “0”. When the output time is “0”, “300” ms has elapsed since the power was turned on. It proceeds to step S3235. On the other hand, if the output time of the external signal 4 is not “0” when the power is restored, the process proceeds to step S3241.

In step S3235, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 4 has exceeded a predetermined time. Here, the external signal 4 management time of the address “F014 (H)” is set to “24 (D)” in step S3240 described later. Then, in step S3235, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 management time is "0". Proceeding to step S3236, if it is determined that the value is not "0", the flow proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3236, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). Then, the process proceeds to step S3242 (of FIG. 92).

  On the other hand, if “Yes” is determined in the step S3231, S3232, or S3233, and the process proceeds to the step S3237, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is turned on from off in the current interrupt processing. In this interrupt processing, whether the D2 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on depends on, for example, first, if the input port 0 rising data is present, the input port 0 rising data Is determined whether or not the D2 bit is “1”. Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is stored, the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is set to “0” in the previous interrupt processing, and the input port 0 level data is stored in the current interrupt processing. When the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned on from off in this interrupt processing. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that the setting key switch has not been turned on, the process proceeds to step S3238.

  In step S3238, it is determined whether the error detection flag has been turned on from off. Here, for example, the error detection flag in the previous interrupt processing is saved, and the error detection flag in the current interrupt processing is compared with the error detection flag in the current interrupt processing. Is determined. When it is determined that the error detection flag has been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error detection flag has not been turned on, the process proceeds to step S3239.

  In step S3239, it is determined whether the error number has changed from non-display (“0”) to display (other than “0”). Here, for example, the error number in the previous interrupt processing is stored, and the error number in the current interrupt processing is compared with the error number in the current interrupt processing, so that the error number in the current interrupt processing is other than “0” to “0”. It is determined whether or not it has become. When it is determined that the error number has changed from “0” to other than “0”, the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error number remains “0”, the process proceeds to step S3241.

When the process proceeds from step S3237, S3238, or S3239 to step S3240, "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms is set as an initial value in the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014 (H)". . Then, the process proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3241, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on is output as the external signal 4). Then, the process proceeds to step S3242 (of FIG. 92).
In step S3242, it is determined whether the door switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that the door switch is on. When it is determined that the door switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S3245, and when it is determined that the door switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S3243.

In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, the external signal 5 management time of the address “F015 (H)” is set to “24 (D)” in step S3246 described later. In step S3243, it is determined whether or not the external signal 5 management time is “0”. If it is determined that the external signal 5 management time is “0”, the process proceeds to step S3244. Proceed to S3247.
In step S3244, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

  On the other hand, in step S3242, it is determined that the door switch is on, and in step S3245, it is determined whether the door switch has been turned on from off in the current interruption process. In this interrupt processing, whether or not the D3 bit (door switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined by, for example, first, when the input port 0 rising data is present, the input port 0 rising data It is determined whether the D3 bit is “1”. Second, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is stored, the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is set to “0” in the previous interrupt processing, and the input port 0 level data is stored in the current interrupt processing. When the D3 bit is "1", it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off in this interrupt processing. When it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3246, and when it is determined that the door switch has not been turned on, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3246, “24 (D)” corresponding to the output time “50” ms is set as an initial value in the external signal 5 management time at the address “F015 (H)”. Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.
In step S3247, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 5). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of the external signal output process.
In the example of FIG. 92,
(1) As shown in step S3237, when the setting key switch is turned on from off,
(2) As shown in step S3238, when the error detection flag changes from off to on,
(3) As shown in step S3239, when the error number is newly stored, the output time of the external signal 4 is set.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 93, in this interrupt processing, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on, whether the error detection flag is on, and whether the error number is stored. Thus, the output of the external signal 4 is controlled.

In FIG. 93, the same processes as those in FIGS. 91 and 92 are denoted by the same step numbers. In the example of FIG. 93, steps different from those in FIGS. 91 and 92 are not provided.
In the example of FIG. 93,
(1) When it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is ON (when the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at the address “F00A (H)” is “1”)
(2) In step S3234, when “300” ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on (the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power-off recovery from the address “F013 (H)” is not “0”)
(3) When it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being displayed (when the error number stored at the address “F051 (H)” is other than “0”),
(4) In step S3232, when an error is being detected (when any bit of the error detection flag at address "F294 (H)" is "1")
Proceeds to step S3240, and stores the number of interrupts “24 (D)” corresponding to the output time “50” ms of the external signal 4 at the address “F014 (H)”.

  Therefore, in the previous interruption processing, for example, it is determined that the setting key switch is ON in step S3231, and "24 (D)" is set in the external signal 4 management time of address "F014 (H)" in step S3240. Thereafter, if it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is ON in the current interrupt process, the process advances to step S3240 to reset the external signal 4 management time "24 (D)". When it is determined in step S3234 that "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on, when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being displayed, and when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being detected. The same is true. Then, after step S3240, the process proceeds to step S3241.

  If it is determined in step S3232 that no error is being detected, the process advances to step S3235. In step S3235, it is determined whether the output time “50” ms of the external signal 4 has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 4 management time of the address “F014 (H)” is “0”, it is determined that the output time “50” ms of the external signal 4 has elapsed. If the output time of the external signal 4 has elapsed, the process advances to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4 can be output), and the output time of the external signal 4 has elapsed. If not, the flow advances to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

Next, the flow proceeds to step S3242, and it is determined whether the door switch is on. When it is determined that the door switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S3246, and when it is determined that the door switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S3243.
In step S3246, “24 (D)” is set in the external signal 5 management time at the address “F015 (H)”. Also in this case, similarly to the above, it is determined that the door switch is ON in the previous interrupt processing, and “24 (D)” is set as the external signal 5 management time in step S3246. If it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, the external signal 5 management time "24 (D)" is reset in step S3246. Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.

  In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time “50” ms of the external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 5 management time of the address “F015 (H)” is “0”, it is determined that the output time “50” ms of the external signal 5 has elapsed. If it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed, the process advances to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off as the external signal 5 can be output). If it is determined that the elapsed time has not elapsed, the flow advances to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5 can be output). Then, the processing according to the flowchart is ended.

As described above, in Example 1 of FIG. 91, whether the setting key switch has been turned on from off, whether the error detection flag has been turned on from off, and whether the error number is other than "0" to "0" In each of the determinations as to whether or not the external signal 4 has been set, the external signal 4 management time is set in the interrupt processing determined to be “Yes”. , The external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 93, when the setting key switch is on, when the error detection flag is “1”, and when an error number other than “0” is stored, the external signal 4 (A signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output). When the setting key switch is turned off, the error detection flag is “0”, and “0” is stored as the error number, the external signal 4 management time becomes “0”. The signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

  In other words, the external signal 4 is turned on until "50" ms has elapsed after the setting key switch is turned off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number. (A signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Therefore, for example, when an error is detected for a moment (for example, only for the “3” interrupt) or when the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4 is output). Even when the condition of “enable output” is satisfied, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating “on” can be output as the external signal 4) for at least “50” ms.

  In the external signal output process (interrupt process) shown in FIG. 93, if the next interrupt process is executed after the timer value “24 (D)” related to the external signal 4 is set in step S3240, The timer value is subtracted from “24 (D)” to “23 (D)”. Thereafter, in the external signal output processing of the next interrupt processing, when the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling the signal indicating ON to be output as the external signal 4) is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3240, and again. The timer value “24 (D)” is set.

  Thereafter, the timer value is decremented every time the interrupt processing is performed. However, if the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) is not satisfied, the process of step S3240 is performed. , The timer value eventually becomes “0 (D)”. When the timer value becomes “0 (D)”, it is determined “Yes” in step S3235, and the flow advances to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (output a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). Possible).

  By doing so, the external signal 4 is turned on (the external signal 4 is turned on) when the condition that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on as an external signal 4 can be output) is satisfied. Signal can be output). The external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4) while the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling the output of the signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) is satisfied. Possible). Next, when the condition that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output) is not satisfied, the timer value becomes “0 (D)” for each interrupt processing. It is subtracted by "1 (D)". Until the timer value becomes “0 (D)”, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating “on” can be output as the external signal 4). When the timer value becomes “0 (D)”, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

The above also applies to the external signal 5.
In the external signal output process (interrupt process) shown in FIG. 93, when the timer value “24 (D)” for the external signal 5 is set in step S3246 and the next interrupt process is executed, the timer value becomes “24 (D)” is subtracted from “24 (D)”. Thereafter, in the external signal output processing of the next interrupt processing, when the door switch is ON (when the condition of turning on the external signal 5 (enabling the signal indicating ON as the external signal 5 can be output) is satisfied) Proceeding to step S3246, the timer value "24 (D)" is set again.

  Thereafter, the timer value is decremented every time the interrupt process is performed, but the condition that the door switch is turned off (the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 5 can be output) can no longer be satisfied. In this case, since the process in step S3246 is not performed, the timer value eventually becomes “0 (D)”. When the timer value has become “0 (D)”, it is determined “Yes” in step S3243, and the flow advances to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (output a signal indicating off as the external signal 5). Possible).

By doing so, the external signal 5 is turned on from when the door switch is turned on (the condition that the external signal 5 is turned on (the signal indicating ON as the external signal 5 can be output) is satisfied). (A signal indicating ON as the external signal 5 can be output). The external signal 5 is turned on (the signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 5) while the condition of turning on the external signal 5 (enabling the output of the signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) is satisfied. Possible). Next, when the condition that the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating that the signal is turned on as the external signal 5 can be output) is not satisfied, the timer value becomes “0 (D)” for each interrupt processing. "1" is subtracted at a time. Until the timer value becomes “0 (D)”, the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating “on” can be output as the external signal 5). When the timer value becomes “0 (D)”, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
In Example 2 of FIG. 93 described above, since the rising data is not generated and the level data or the like at the time of the previous interrupt processing need not be confirmed, the hall computer can be externally connected while simplifying the external signal output processing. The time during which the signal indicating that the signal 4 or 5 is on can be received can be secured.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing Example 3 of the external signal output process. 94, steps that perform the same processing as in FIG. 93 are assigned the same numbers, and steps that perform different processing are underlined with respect to the step numbers.
In example 3 of FIG. 94, when determining whether to output the external signal 4, first, in step S3251, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 management time of the address “F014 (H)” is “0”. Judge. If it is not "0", the flow advances to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output). On the other hand, when the external signal 4 management time is “0”, in the determinations of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, if the output condition of the external signal 4 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3240, and the address “F014 (H )) Is set to “24 (D)” corresponding to the output time “50” ms, and the flow advances to step S3241. On the other hand, if it is determined in any of the steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232 that the output condition of the external signal 4 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (as the external signal 4 A signal indicating off can be output).

  Similarly to the above, when determining whether or not to output the external signal 5, first, in step S3252, when the external signal 5 management time of the address “F015 (H)” is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is. If it is not "0", the flow advances to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5 can be output). On the other hand, when the external signal 5 management time is “0”, when it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S3246, and the external signal 5 management time of the address “F015 (H)” is set. Is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms, and the flow advances to step S3247. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is not on, the flow advances to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off as the external signal 5 can be output).

As described above, in Example 3 of FIG. 94, when the set timer value (the external signal 4 management time or the external signal 5 management time) is “0” and the output condition of the external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied, the timer Set the value. Even if the set timer value becomes “0”, if the output condition of the external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied, the timer value is set again.
In the method of Example 3 in FIG. 94, similarly to Example 2 in FIG. 93, since the rising data is not generated and the level data or the like at the time of the previous interrupt processing need not be confirmed, the external signal output processing is performed. While simplifying, it is possible to secure a time during which the hall computer can receive a signal indicating that the external signal 4 or 5 is on.

Although the eighteenth embodiment has been described above, the eighteenth embodiment is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) When the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, or when any of the displayed errors is satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and individual external signals (for example, external signals 4, 6, and 7) are turned on (signals indicating ON as external signals 4, 6, and 7 can be output). You may. Also, a specific external signal (for example, external signal 5 or 6) may be turned on when either the setting key switch is turned on or when the door switch is turned on, or when both are satisfied. A signal indicating ON may be output as the external signal 5 or 6).

(2) The various timer values of the addresses “F013 (H)” to “F015 (H)” are decremented by “1” for each interrupt processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, “N (N ≧ 2) "N" may be subtracted by "N" interrupts, or "1" may be subtracted by "N" interrupts. For example, after “12 (D)” is set as the external signal 4 management time or the external signal 5 management time, “1” may be subtracted every two interrupts.
(3) The various modifications and numerical values described in the eighteenth embodiment are examples, and can be appropriately designed. For example, in FIG. 89, since the times t1 and t2 are the minimum "0" ms, various settings such as "5" ms and "10" ms are possible.

Also, in FIG. 89, the time t3 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in the figure) is a minimum of “50” ms, and is, for example, “75” ms or “100” ms Various settings can be made.
Particularly, at time t3 in FIGS. 89 and 90 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in FIGS. 89 and 90), the hall computer or the like reliably receives the external signals 4 and 5. The time may be any time possible, and may be less than "50" ms depending on the performance of the hall computer or the like.
Furthermore, the time t2 in FIG. 90 is not limited to “50” ms, but can be variously set according to specifications and the like.

(4) When the setting key switch is turned on from off or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on is output as the external signal 4). The configuration may be such that the external signal 4 is turned on when the change mode or the setting check mode is set (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4).
Here, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the setting key switch is turned on from off or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 is output). When the configuration is such that output is possible, the external signal 4 is turned on even if the setting key switch is turned on from off to on during rotation of the reel 31 (a signal indicating on is output as the external signal 4). Possible).
On the other hand, when the configuration is such that the external signal 4 is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting check mode is entered (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is turned on can be output), the reel Even when the setting key switch is turned on from off during the rotation of the motor 31, the external signal 4 is turned off based on the status of the setting key switch (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). Do). However, there is a possibility that the external signal 4 is turned on based on an error (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4).

(5) In the eighteenth embodiment, when the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, when an error is being displayed, or when "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on, When the two conditions were satisfied, the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON was output as the external signal 4). However, it is not necessary to provide all of these conditions, and the external signal 4 is turned on only when one or a part of the conditions is set, for example, when the setting key switch is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output). ) Configuration. In other words, even if other conditions, for example, “300” ms have not elapsed since the power was turned on, the external signal 4 is not turned on (a signal indicating on is not output as the external signal 4). It may be.
(6) All of the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification including the eighteenth embodiment are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
The nineteenth embodiment relates to a setting change end sound.
Hereinafter, the setting change end sound will be described for a case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (the nineteenth embodiment (A)) and for a case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (the nineteenth embodiment (B)). I do.
In the following description, the "setting change state (also referred to as" setting change mode "or" setting change processing ")" is a state in which the set value can be changed, and the game is started (progressed). ) The game state is not possible. In the setting change state, the processing can be ended without changing the set value.
The “setting confirmation state (also referred to as“ setting confirmation mode ”or“ setting confirmation processing ”)” is a state in which the setting value cannot be changed but the current setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be started (progressed) as in the setting change state.
On the other hand, “normal state (also referred to as“ normal mode ”)” refers to a state other than the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In the normal state, the game can be started (progressed) except in special circumstances such as an error.

<Nineteenth Embodiment (A): When the Gaming Machine is a Slot Machine>
FIG. 95 is a block diagram schematically showing control of the slot machine 10 in the nineteenth embodiment (A), and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.
In FIG. 95, as a configuration not shown in FIG. 1, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided. Although the above configuration is not shown in FIG. 1, this does not mean that the first embodiment does not include the above configuration.
The setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are not necessarily provided on the main control board 50, but may be provided as separate devices.

The door switch 17 is attached to either the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 in FIG.
Then, as shown in FIG. 22, the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 are usually closed, but the front door 12 is opened at the time of setting change or setting confirmation. The door switch 17 is a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 is opened and detects opening of the front door 12. When the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the door switch 17, a door open error is notified.
The setting key insertion port 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are mounted on the main control board 50.
The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is turned on by inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. This is the switch used.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when changing the set value in the setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated to recover the state before the occurrence of the error after removing the generated error.
In the following description, there are a case where the switch is referred to as a “setting change (reset) switch 153”, a case where the switch is referred to as a “setting change switch 153”, and a case where the switch is referred to as a “reset switch 153”.
In the present embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are provided integrally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

  When shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 in a state where the power is turned on, and is rotated, for example, clockwise by 90 degrees. As a result, the setting key switch 152 is turned on. When the door switch 17 is turned on and the setting key switch 151 is turned on while the power is on, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state. In the setting check state, the set value cannot be changed (although the set value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current set value can be checked. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

  When the power is off, a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the power switch 11 is turned on. It is possible to shift to the setting change state (setting change processing in FIG. 39).

  When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on as described above, as shown in FIG. 38, a checksum is executed (step S204), the designated switch is turned on (step S208), and power-off recovery is abnormal ( If the setting can be changed (Step S210) or the setting can be changed (Step S210), the process can shift to the setting change process (setting change state).

In the nineteenth embodiment, the “designated switch” in step S208 is two switches, the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.
Alternatively, in addition to the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152, a setting door switch (a switch that is turned on when a cover provided to cover the setting key insertion slot 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 is opened) is opened. If provided, there are three switches including a setting door switch.
In the following description, it is assumed that the setting door switch is not provided, and the designation switches are the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.

In FIG. 38, in step S208, only when the door switch 17 is on and the setting key switch 152 is on, "Yes" is determined in step S208, and the state can be shifted to the setting change state. On the other hand, when only one of the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 is on or both switches are off, “No” is determined in the step S208, and the setting change state is set. Does not migrate.
As a result, when the front door 12 is not opened or when the setting key is not inserted, there is no possibility of a gobbling action, and the state does not shift to the setting change state.

In FIG. 38, the “start of the setting change state” is firstly determined when “Yes” is determined in step S209 or when “No” is determined in step S210. . In this case, in the “setting change state”, the processing in steps S221 to S233 in FIG. 39 is also included in the processing in the setting change state.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, when an output request at the start of the setting change is set in step S234 and the control command set 1 in step S235 is executed (a command to start the setting change is issued to the sub-control board 80). Is transmitted) in the “start of setting change state”.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in FIG. 39, immediately before step S221 may be defined as “start of the setting change state”. Immediately after step S231 (at the end of initialization) may be defined as "start of setting change state". Furthermore, the time when the interrupt is activated in step S233 or immediately after step S233 (immediately before step S234) may be defined as “start of the setting change state”.

Further, in FIG. 39, the “end of the setting change state” may be defined when the setting key switch 152 is turned off in step S243.
Alternatively, second, in FIG. 39, when an output request at the end of the setting change is set in step S246 and the control command set 1 in step S247 is executed (the sub-control board 80 is instructed to terminate the setting change) Is transmitted) in the “end of the setting change state”.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when “Yes” is determined in step S242 (when the start switch 41 is operated and the set value is determined), “the end of the setting change state” may be determined.

Further, as will be described later, the setting change state may be terminated on condition that the front door 12 is closed, in other words, on condition that the door switch 17 is turned off from on. In this case, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state does not end when the front door 12 is open (when the door switch 17 is on).
When the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is off), the setting change state is not ended. This is for anti-goto action.
In the following description, in the nineteenth embodiment (A), when “Yes” is determined in step S243 in FIG. 39, that is, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, “when the setting change state ends ".

In steps S246 and S247 of FIG. 39, when a command indicating that the setting change has been completed is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command. Upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 executes an output (output by the effect lamp 21) for visually displaying the end of the setting change and the end of the setting change.
Here, the setting change end sound in the present embodiment corresponds to outputting a sound “setting change ends” from the speaker 22.

Here, there are various thoughts on the speed of speaking a word (Japanese). For example, if the speed of about 300 characters per minute is appropriate, "the setting change is finished.""T01" may be set to about "2000" ms for the time from the start of the output of the sound to the end of the output.
FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change end sound and the lamp effect, and one game time described later in the nineteenth embodiment.
When receiving the command indicating that the setting change has been completed, the sub-control board 80 immediately outputs a setting change end sound. Here, in FIG. 39, if “Yes” is determined in step S243, in the first interrupt processing (FIG. 53) after “Yes” is determined in step S243, the setting change is ended in step S464. Command is sent.

In the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 independently executes an interrupt process. For each interrupt process, it is determined whether or not a control command (a command indicating that the setting change has been completed) is received. ing. When it is determined that a command indicating that the setting change has been completed has been received, the output of the setting change end sound is started.
Because of the above process, at least one interrupt (refers to the interrupt by the main control board 50. One interrupt time is "2.235" ms) from the determination of "Yes" in step S243 in FIG. After that, the process of outputting the setting change end sound or the output of the setting change end sound by the sub-control board 80 is started. In other words, in FIG. 39, the setting change end sound is not output until after at least one interrupt has elapsed after “Yes” is determined in step S243.

  In FIG. 96, the timing at which the setting change state is changed from on to off is when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, as described above. However, after the setting key switch 152 is turned off, a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 receives the command and starts outputting the setting change end sound. Since the time is extremely short, in FIG. 96, the end timing of the setting change state and the output start timing of the setting change end sound are matched.

As an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, in addition to the setting change end sound, the effect lamp 21 is turned on in a predetermined lighting mode ("lighting" is a concept including blinking. Is a concept including the lighting color.).
Here, when the lighting by the effect lamp 21 is executed, at least the lighting mode in the case where the lighting by the effect lamp 21 is executed at the time of winning the special combination (gear) is set. For example, assuming that the lamp A among the effect lamps 21 is set to be turned on in the lighting mode a as the effect indicating that the special role has been won, the effect lamp 21 is used as the effect indicating that the setting change has been completed. In the case of lighting, lighting a lamp other than the lamp A can be mentioned. In this case, if a lamp different from lamp A is turned on, the lighting mode may be the same as the lighting mode when indicating that the special role has been won.

When the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lamp A may be turned on. However, the lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating that the special combination has been won.
As described above, when the lighting of the effect lamp 21 is performed as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, it is determined that the special role has been won (that the special role has been won in the game, or that the special role has been won). (The winning is carried over) so as not to be the same as the lighting mode of the effect lamp 21 in the effect for notifying the effect. Thereby, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is completed, even if the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the special role is won by the player. Can be prevented from being confused.

Further, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is different from the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the special role has been won, so that the two are not confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects, and if the lighting pattern is viewed, the effect indicates that the setting change is completed. It is preferable to be able to understand.
Further, for the effect lamp 21, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed and the lighting pattern indicating that the special role has been won are made the same, and for other lamps other than the effect lamp 21, the setting change is performed. The lighting pattern indicating that the special combination has ended may be different from the lighting pattern indicating that the special combination has been won.
Specifically, for example, when it is indicated that the setting change has been completed, the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps are all turned on, and when it is notified that the special role has been won, the effect lamp 21 is turned on. Lighting, but not turning on the other lamps. In this way, by checking the lighting patterns of the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps (the lamps of the general gaming machine), the administrator can grasp which state is in.

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, in principle, the sound is output simultaneously with the setting change end sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is started and before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, after the output of the setting change end sound is ended, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started.
As shown in FIG. 96, in the following embodiment, at the same time as the start of output of the setting change end sound, the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has ended is executed.
Further, if the lighting time of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is “T02”,
T01> T02
T01 = T02
T01 <T02
However, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that “T01 <T02” as shown in FIG. For example, as described above, when the time T01 is set to about “2000” ms, the time T02 may be set to, for example, about “2500” ms to about “4000” ms.

Next, the case where the setting change state is ended, the state is shifted to the normal state (a state in which the game can be started), and the game is started immediately will be considered.
In the following, as shown in FIG. 96, the time required from the moment when the setting change state ends to the time when the game is started (until the game start condition is satisfied) (preparation time until the game is started) is referred to as “T11”. I do. Further, the time (one game time) from the start of the game (after satisfying the start condition of the game) to the end of the game is defined as “T12”.
In the setting change state, as shown in FIG. 39, since the data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared, for example, before the start of the setting change, even if there is bet data or credit data, the data is cleared including these. . Therefore, immediately after the end of the setting change state, the bet amount is “0” and the credit amount is “0”. Therefore, after the end of the setting change state, as shown in FIG. 2, it is necessary to insert a medal M from the medal insertion slot 47 and bet a specified number before starting a game.

Here, in the normal game (when the accessory is not operated), the bet number “3” is a generally used specified number, but in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the minimum bet number “1” is set as the specified number. It is assumed that the game can be started with the bet number “1”. Note that when the specified number is “1”, the game can be started earlier than when the specified number is “2” or “3”.
In FIG. 2, when the medal M is at the position M1 and the medal M is released into the medal selector, as described in the first embodiment, the medal M passes through the passage in the medal selector and is applied to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Is detected. When the insertion sensors 44a and 44b determine that the medal has passed normally, a bet "1" is made.

In FIG. 2, the time from when the medal M is inserted from the position M1 to when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M and the predetermined number is betted corresponds to the preparation time “T11” for starting the game (in addition, The preparation time “T11” in this case does not consider the operation time for closing the front door 12 or canceling the door open error.)
Here, when the specified number is “1”, one medal insertion is required, when the specified number is “2”, two medal insertion is required, and when the specified number is “3”, Requires the insertion of three medals. In FIG. 2, the time from the state of the medal M1 until one bet is inserted to bet “1” is “T11a”, and the time from two medals to bet “2” is bet. If it is assumed that “T11b” and the time until three medals are inserted and “3” is bet is “T11c”,
T11a <T11b <T11c
Becomes
However, since two or three medals can be continuously inserted, T11b (in the case of the prescribed number "2") is shorter than twice the time of T11a (in the case of the prescribed number "1"). It is believed that there is. Similarly, T11c (when the specified number is “3”) is considered to be shorter than three times the time of T11a (when the specified number is “1”).

When the predetermined number is bet, the game can be started by operating the start switch 41. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the start switch 41 is operated at the moment of betting "1". Therefore, the time from the bet on the specified number until the start switch 41 is operated is “0”.
In FIG. 41, when the start switch 41 is operated (“Yes” in step S278), the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286.
Here, the motor 32 accelerates the reel 31 to reach a speed of 80 rotations per minute. When a speed of 80 rotations per minute is reached, a constant speed state is set at that speed. Until the reel 31 enters the constant speed state, operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is prohibited, and after reaching the constant speed state, operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 becomes possible.
The time from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the rotation of the reel 31 starts) to when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be received is defined as “T12a”.

Next, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted until the first stop switch 42 is operated is “0”.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, as shown in FIG. 13, a reel stop control time (time until the reel 31 stops) and a time of the four-phase excitation state are required (the four-phase excitation state is not necessary). Before the end, the operation of the next stop switch 42 may be accepted (this example will be described later). The total time is referred to as “T12b”.
When the four-phase excitation state ends, the operation of the next (second) stop switch 42 can be accepted. Here, it is assumed that the second stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 to be stopped first ends and the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops first to the time when the second stop switch 42 is operated is set to “0”.

When the second stop switch 42 is operated, the operation of the third stop switch 42 can be accepted after the reel stop control time and the time “T12b” that is the time of the four-phase excitation state elapses, as described above. Becomes Here, it is assumed that the third stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the second motor 32 ends and the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops second to the time when the third stop switch 42 is operated is set to “0”.
When the third stop switch 42 is operated, similarly to the above, the reel stop control time and the time “T12b” which is the time of the four-phase excitation state are required.

The moment when the last reel 31 stops may be defined as the end of one game. However, in the nineteenth embodiment (A), when the time of the four-phase excitation state with respect to the last reel 31 ends, It is determined that one game has been completed (when there is no payout).
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations is stopped in the game, it is determined that the game has ended when the payout process ends, specifically, when the process in FIG. 49 ends.
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, an automatic bet process is executed at the start of the next game, as shown in FIG. For this reason, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the end of the game is not the end of the automatic betting process but the end of the four-phase excitation state for the third reel 31.

For example, first, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and the addition processing to the credit is executed, the end of the addition processing to the credit is determined to be the end of the game.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and the actual medal payout process is executed, the payout of the last medal (driving of the hopper 36) is ended, and “Yes” in step S401 in FIG. "(When it is determined that the payout number data is" 0 ") is determined as the end of the game. However, immediately after the end of the setting change, the number of credits is “0”, and the game is started immediately after the end of the setting change state, and even if it is assumed that the small role having the maximum payout number “15” has won, All paid-out medals will be credited. Therefore, there is no case where medals are actually paid out in one game immediately after the end of the setting change.
The time from when the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 to the third reel 31 is completed to when the payout of medals (addition to credit) is completed is “T12c”. And
However, at the time of winning a winning combination (when there is no payout of medals), “T12c = 0”.

  Further, when an effect (notification effect of the winning combination, etc.) is output when all the reels 31 are stopped, the effect time is not included in one game time. For example, even when an effect for several seconds is output from the time when all the reels 31 are stopped, the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 when the last reel 31 is stopped (at that time, the time when all the reels 31 are stopped) (Even if the effect whose output has been started sometimes is continued), one game is to be ended. That is, the end of one game is based on the control by the main control board 50.

As described above, when performing an operation for starting a game immediately after the end of the setting change state and starting the game, a preparation time “T11” is required until the game is started.
Further, one game time “T12” is, as described above,
(1) Time “T12a” from the time when the start switch 41 is operated (after the rotation of the reel 31 starts) to the time when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted.
(2) Time from when the first stop switch 42 is operated to when the reel 31 stops, and the time “T12b” in the 4-phase excitation state
(3) The time from the operation of the second stop switch 42 to the stop of the reel 31 and the time “T12b” in the four-phase excitation state.
(4) The time from the operation of the third stop switch 42 to the stop of the reel 31 and the time “T12b” in the 4-phase excitation state.
(5) The time “T12c” until the payout of medals (addition to credits) is completed when a small part is won.
Cost.
Therefore,
T12 = T12a + 3 × T12b + T12c
Becomes
It is assumed that the three “T12b” times are the same.

Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery of a winning combination is performed (step S282 in FIG. 41). .) May be selected.
“Freeze” in this case refers to a state in which the progress of the game is stopped for a certain period of time. Therefore, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery of the combination is executed, the special combination is won, and when it is determined that the freeze is executed as the effect corresponding to the special combination, the rotation of the reel 31 starts. do not do. Then, after the end of the freeze, the rotation of the reel 31 starts. When the progress of the game is stopped by freeze, the sub-control means 80 outputs an effect using the image display device 23 or the like.
Assuming that the freeze time in this case is “T12d”, one game time “T12” when the freeze is executed is “T12a + T12b × 3 + T12c + T12d”.

Next, the shortest time of one game time “T12” will be considered. In order for one game time to be the shortest, the freeze is not executed and the winning combination does not win.
Therefore, the shortest time of one game time “T12” is “T12a + 3 × T12b”.
First, the specified number is set to "1", and in FIG. 2, the time from when the medal M is inserted (dropped) into the medal selector from the position of M1 until the bet is placed (time required for starting the game). It is assumed that “T11” is at least about “800” ms.
In addition, it is assumed that the time “T12a” from when the start switch 41 is operated to when the reel 31 has a constant speed and when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted is about “1200” ms.

Furthermore, since the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 is controlled to stop, and the time “T12b” until the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted) is: As illustrated in FIG. 13, the shortest is about “140” ms (the shortest reel stop control time is about “40” ms, and the four-phase excitation state is the shortest about “100” ms). Assume that
In this case, “T11 + T12”, which is the time required to start one game and the one game time (the shortest time), is “800 (T11) +1200 (T12a) + 140 × 3 (T12b × 3)” = “2420” ms About.
One game time “T12” in a case where medals are paid out after all the reels 31 are stopped or a freeze is executed when the start switch 41 is operated is longer than the above-mentioned time.

On the other hand, as described above, when the setting change state ends, the setting change end sound is output for the time “T01” (about “2000” ms), and the effect lamp 21 for notifying the end of the setting change is output. Lighting is output for a time “T02” (for example, about “2500” to “4000” ms).
Therefore, when the game is started immediately after the end of the setting change state, the setting change end sound “T01” outputted immediately after the end of the setting change state, the preparation time “T11” for starting the game, and one game The relationship with the time “T12 (shortest time)” is
T01 <T11 + T12
Becomes
Thereby, even if the operation (preparation) for starting the game is performed from the moment when the setting change state is finished, and the game is started at the moment when the preparation for starting the game is ready, the game is finished. The output of the setting change end sound has ended before.
FIG. 96 shows the relationship between the above-mentioned times “T01”, “T11”, and “T12”.

Here, the above example is an example in which after the stop switch 42 is operated and the four-phase excitation state ends, the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the stop switch 42 is operated and before the four-phase excitation state ends, the operation of the next stop switch 42 may be accepted. With such control, the game can be completed more quickly. For example, after the stop switch 42 is operated (the operation of the stop switch 42 is received), the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be received at the time of the next interrupt processing.
In this case, the time of the four-phase excitation state among the time of “T12b” described above can be considered to be substantially “0”, and thus “T12b (shortest time) = 40 (ms)”.
Therefore, in this case, “T11 + T12”, which is the time required to start one game and one game time (the shortest time), is “800 (T11) +1200 (T12a) + 40 × 3 (T12b × 3)” = “2120” Ms.
Therefore, even when the control is performed in this manner, “T01 <T11 + T12” is satisfied.

The production timing of the slot machine 10 includes the operation of the start switch 41 (at the start of rotation of the reel 31), the operation of the first stop switch 42 (at the stop of the first reel 31), and the operation of the second stop switch 42 (the When the second reel 31 is stopped) and when the third stop switch 42 is operated (when all the reels 31 are stopped), an effect that finally notifies the winning combination of the game (the most important effect in the game) is output. This timing is often when all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, when outputting an effect notifying the winning combination of the game when all the reels 31 are stopped, the effect is output after the output of the setting change end sound is completed. Effect does not overlap with the setting change end sound. Therefore, even when the game is started immediately after the end of the setting change state, it is possible to accurately understand the effect when all the reels 31 are stopped.

However, when there is an effect to be output when the start switch 41 or the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the output time of the effect and the output time of the setting change end sound may overlap.
Here, the speaker 22 of the present embodiment has a plurality of channels. Then, the channel for outputting the setting change end sound and the channel for outputting the notification effect of the winning combination are set to be different. Thus, even when the notification effect of the winning combination is output from the speaker 22 after the output of the setting change end sound is started, the setting change end sound is not erased in the middle. However, the setting change end sound and the announcement sound of the winning combination may overlap.

The lighting time T02 of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is
T02 <T11 + T12
T02 = T11 + T12
T02> T11 + T12
Both cases can be considered. However, as described above, if the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is not confused with the lighting of the effect lamp 21 as the notification effect of the winning combination, no problem occurs.

Further, the preparation time “T11” before starting the game eliminates the time for closing the front door 12 and the door open error (error indicating that the front door 12 is open) after the setting change state ends. Not considering the time to do.
When the setting change state ends, at least the front door 12 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state ends, the slot machine 10 detects a door open error and issues an error notification. When a door open error has occurred, the game cannot be advanced (started). When a door open error occurs, the blocker 45 is controlled to be turned off (a state in which medals are returned), so that no bet is placed even if medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 47. Even if the player has bet, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the game is not started.

  To cancel the door open error, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. Although it is possible to configure so that the door open error is eliminated at the moment when the door switch 17 is turned off, in general, a key is inserted into a key insertion opening for opening the front door 12 provided on the front door 12. By inserting the key and rotating the key counterclockwise (for example, counterclockwise) in the direction opposite to the case where the front door 12 is opened, the door open error is eliminated (error notification is ended). Therefore, the preparation time “T11” for starting the game after the end of the setting change state includes an operation time for closing the front door 12, inserting a key, and canceling the door open error. This is because the game cannot be started with the door open error occurring.

  When the setting change state is ended on condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state can be ended even if the front door 12 is open. Accordingly, in this case, the output of the setting change end sound is started with the front door 12 being opened, and the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is ended is also started.

  On the other hand, if the front door 12 is not closed, the specification change state may not be terminated. In this case, closing the front door 12 (turning off the door switch 17) is set as one of the conditions for ending the setting change state, without simply turning off the setting key switch 152 to end the setting change state. Note that the setting change state may be ended only by closing the front door 12. In this case, when the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is turned off), the output of the setting change end sound is started. Alternatively, the setting change state may end when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is released. In this case, when the door open error is released, the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Even in the case where the setting change state ends when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is released, as described above, the time “T11 + T12” from the end of the setting change to the end of one game. Since the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is shorter than “”, the output of the setting change end sound has ended before one game immediately after the setting change ends.
When the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the output of the setting change end sound is started while the front door 12 is open when the setting change state is to be ended even when the front door 12 is open. Therefore, even after the front door 12 is closed, the door open error is released, and one game is ended after the time “T11 + T12”, the output of the setting change end sound is ended before the end of the game. .
If the (operation) time from the end of the setting change state to the closing of the front door 12 and the release of the door open error is “T10”, the time from the end of the setting change state to the start of one game is set. The preparation time is “T10 + T11”. Therefore, it goes without saying that “T01 <T10 + T11 + T12”.

The above is a case in which the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is set to be shorter than the time “T11 + T12” from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game. The relationship between the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound and the time “T11 + T12” from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game can be variously set as follows.
(1) The output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is set to be shorter than the average time “T11 + T12” when the winning is not achieved in the result of the lottery result.
(2) The output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is set to be shorter than the average time “T11 + T12” when the special combination is won as a result of the lottery result. When the special lottery is won as a result of the lottery result, the above-mentioned freeze may or may not be executed, and therefore the average time is “T12”. For example, when a special role is won, a freeze is executed with a probability of "p"%, and a freeze is not executed with a probability of "100-p"%, the average value of one game time "T12" is:
“Average one game time without freeze T12 × (100−p) / 100” + “Average one game time T12 × p / 100 with freeze”
Becomes

<Nineteenth Embodiment (B): When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
Next, the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change end sound, and one game time in the pachinko gaming machine will be described.
First, an outline of the pachinko gaming machine will be described.
FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 98 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 as viewed from the back side. In FIG. 98, units including the image display device 543 and the game board 504 are not shown, and the glass door 505 is shown from the back side. Further, in FIG. 98, illustration of other substrate cases other than the main substrate case 550 is omitted as appropriate.
FIG. 99 is a block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine 500.

  In the hall, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is generally installed on an island. First, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes an outer frame 501 and a front frame 502. The outer frame 501 is a frame formed to surround the outer periphery of the pachinko gaming machine 500. The front frame 502 is attached to the front side (the player side) of the outer frame 501 in FIG. The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame 501 in FIG. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is installed on an island, the outer frame 501 is fixed to the island, but the front frame 502 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 501. It becomes accessible.

  The front frame 502 includes a game board 504. Although not shown, the game board 504 is provided with an image display device 543, nails, accessories, a windmill, various winning ports (including a starting port 532 described later), and the like. In addition, at a portion other than the game board 504 of the front frame 502, an effect lamp 541, a speaker 542, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508, and the like are provided.

In FIG. 97 of the front frame 502, a key insertion port 521 is formed at the right edge.
In a state where the front frame 502 is closed with respect to the outer frame 501 (a state shown in FIG. 97), a key is inserted from the key insertion slot 521 and the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502 are unlocked. The front frame 502 can be opened forward (on the player side) with respect to the outer frame 501 with the hinge mechanism 503 as a central axis. When the front frame 502 is opened to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, the glass door 505, the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, the upper plate 506, the lower plate 507, and the firing handle attached to the front frame 502 side. The whole including 508 moves forward with respect to the outer frame 501.
When the front frame 502 is released, a frame release switch 523 described later is turned on. When the frame release switch 523 is turned on, a frame release error is notified.

  The glass door 505 is attached to be openable and closable so as to cover a game area on the front surface of the game board 504. For example, when clogging of a game ball or the like occurs in a game area, the problem is solved. By inserting a key into the key insertion slot 521 and unlocking the glass door 505, the lock between the glass door 505 and the game board 504 is released, and the glass door 505 can be opened. When the glass door 505 is opened, a door opening switch 522 described later is turned on. When the door opening switch 522 is turned on, a door opening error is notified.

In the block diagram of FIG. 99, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 and a sub-control board 80 corresponding to the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10 And a control board (effect control board, effect board) 540.
The main control board 530, the payout control board 520, and the sub control board 540 each include a CPU, a RWM, a ROM, and the like, similarly to the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 99, illustration of the CPU, the RWM, the ROM, and the like is omitted.

Based on the turning on of the power switch 511, the power supply board 510 controls power supply.
The power supply board 510 and the payout control board (also called “prize ball control board”) 520 are connected to a harness (one or more lead wires (also called “signal lines”)). . Note that each of the substrates shown in FIG. 99 is assumed to be connected to a harness. Although illustration of the relay board is omitted in FIG. 99, actually, each board illustrated in FIG. 99 is connected directly via the relay board in addition to the case where the board is directly connected. There is.
A launch board 512 is connected to the power board 510. The launch substrate 512 is a substrate for driving and controlling the launch device 513. The launching device 513 is a device for launching a game ball on the game board 504 (game area). When the firing handle 508 is operated, the operation is detected, and the driving of the firing device 513 is controlled so that the game ball is launched into the game area.

  The payout control board 520 is connected to the power supply board 510. The payout device 524 is connected to the payout control board 520. The payout device 524 is a device for renting out game balls corresponding to the requested number when a ball lending request is made from the CR unit, and for paying out prize balls corresponding to the winning when a game ball is won. is there. The payout control board 520 and the CR unit are connected via an external terminal plate 525.

A door open switch 522 and a frame open switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520. The door open switch 522 and the frame open switch 523 may be connected to the main control board 530.
As described above, when the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the door open switch 522 is turned on, the sub control board 540 executes, for example, notification of a door open error.
When the front frame 502 is released, the frame release switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the sub control board 540 executes, for example, notification of a frame opening error.

  The main control board 530 is connected to a start-up switch 533 for detecting a prize to a start-up 532 which is one of the prize openings provided in the game area of the game board 504. When the game ball wins the starting opening 532 and the main control board 530 detects that the starting opening switch 533 is turned on, a random number value is acquired as described later, and a hit / fail judgment is executed (lottery process). Then, based on the result of the determination, the special symbol display device 531 determines the change time and the stop symbol of the special symbol, and controls the change pattern and the stop symbol of the special symbol display device 531 so as to correspond to the determination result.

In addition, on the game board 504, as a prize port other than the start port 532, a general prize port, a large prize port (a prize port that becomes a jackpot and is opened during a special game) and the like can be mentioned. Is omitted in the nineteenth embodiment (B).
Further, the special symbol display device 531 is provided on the game board 504 and is a device for displaying the result of the determination as to whether or not it is valid based on that the starting port switch 533 has been turned on by a special symbol. In other words, the “special symbol” is a symbol that indicates whether the result of the winning / failing determination is a winning or a non-winning according to the stopped symbol after the change. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
The flow from the start to the stop of the change of the special symbol will be described later.

The main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion port 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536. Note that the setting key insertion port 534, the setting key switch 535, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are not necessarily provided on the main control board 530, and may be provided as separate devices.
The setting key switch 535 is a switch that is turned on when a predetermined setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion port 534 and is turned, for example, 90 degrees clockwise.

The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing the set value during the setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated to recover the state before the occurrence of the error after removing the generated error. In the following description, there are a case where the setting is referred to as a “setting change (reset) switch 536”, a case where the setting is referred to as a “setting change switch 536”, and a case where the setting is referred to as a “reset switch 536”.
In the present embodiment, the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 are provided integrally, but the invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 may be provided separately.
In the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port 534, the setting key is rotated to turn on the setting key switch 535, and the reset switch 536 is turned on. By turning on the power switch 511, the state can be shifted to the setting change state.

Upon transition to the setting change state, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 537. The set value display LED 537 is equivalent to the set value display LED 73 in the slot machine 10 shown in FIG.
Then, when changing the set value, the user operates the setting change switch 536. Each time the setting change switch 536 is operated (pressed) once, the set value is incremented by “+1”. For example, when the set value is in six steps, every time the setting change switch 536 is pressed, “1” → “2” →. The set value changes cyclically in the order of “→ 5” → “6” → “1” →. Then, the setting key is rotated, for example, in a counterclockwise direction, and when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the set value is determined and the setting change state ends. When the setting change state ends, the set value displayed on the set value display LED 537 also goes out.

Further, when the power is off, a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port 534, the setting key is rotated, and the power switch 511 is turned on while the reset switch 536 is off. Become. In the setting confirmation state, the set value cannot be changed, but the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 537. When the setting key switch 535 is turned off by rotating the setting key, the setting confirmation state ends. When the setting confirmation state ends, the set value displayed on the set value display LED 537 also goes out.
In the pachinko gaming machine 500, unlike the slot machine 10, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the state does not shift to the setting confirmation state and the setting value is not displayed.

  The management information display LED 538 corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the slot machine 10, and in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, is referred to as a performance display monitor as described above. The management information display LED 538 includes four 7-segments, similarly to the management information display LED 74.

  The sub-control board 540 is a board that is connected to the main control board 530, determines the effect contents based on the command transmitted from the main control board 530, and controls to output the determined effect. In FIG. 99, one sub-control board 540 is shown, but actually, for example, the sub-control board 540 is composed of a sub-main board (a board for controlling the entire effect) and a sub-sub board (for example, image display). Substrate for controlling the image display of the device 23).

The effect peripheral device includes an effect lamp 541, a speaker 542, and an image (liquid crystal) display device 543, as in the slot machine 10. The output of these is controlled by the sub-control board 540.
As shown in FIG. 97, at least a part of effect lamp 541 is attached so as to cover the outer peripheral edge of front frame 502. The speaker 542 is mounted above the front frame 502. Furthermore, the image display device 543 is attached so that an image is displayed substantially at the center in the game area of the game board 504.

Next, a control process of the pachinko gaming machine 500 will be described.
FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of starting the pachinko gaming machine 500 after turning on the power.
When the power switch 511 is turned on and the power is turned on, in step S701, the main control board (specifically, equivalent to the main CPU) 530 determines whether the condition for shifting to the setting change state is satisfied. Judge. In the present embodiment, the setting change state transition condition is that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that all of these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S702, and if it is determined that all three switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S702, the process proceeds to a setting change process (setting change state). Then, when the setting change processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S709.

  In step S703, the main control board 530 determines whether the condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the setting confirmation state transition condition is that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off. When it is determined that these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S704, and when it is determined that these conditions are not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S706.

  In step S704, the setting is confirmed, and the main control board 530 reads the set value data stored in the RWM and displays the current set value on the set value display LED 537. Next, the process proceeds to step S705 to determine whether the setting key switch 535 has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch 535 has been turned off, it is determined that the condition for ending the setting confirmation state is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S710. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is not off, the process returns to step S704, and the setting confirmation state (display of the setting value) is continued.

If “No” is determined in the step S703 and the process proceeds to the step S706, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on, the process proceeds to step S709; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S707.
In step S707, it is determined whether the RWM of the main control board 530 is normal. When the power is turned off, the power-off information is stored in the RWM of the main control board 530, and when the power is turned on next, it is determined whether or not the power-on information matches the power-off information. I do. If they match, it is determined that the RWM is normal, and if they do not match, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal. When it is determined that the RWM is normal, the process proceeds to step S708, and when it is determined that the RWM is not normal, the process proceeds to step S709.
In step S708, a state return process is performed. This process is a process of returning the state of the solenoid, the state of the special symbol display device 531 and the like to the state when the power is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

  If the setting change process (setting change state) in step S702 is completed, if the reset switch 536 is determined to be on in step S706, or if the RWM is determined to be abnormal in step S707, the process proceeds to step S709. Then, the RWM clear processing is executed. This process is a process of clearing data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (a process of initializing the predetermined storage area). The data to be cleared does not include the set value data. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, a timer interrupt is permitted. This process is a process of setting the interrupt process to the permission state. Therefore, when the interrupt processing timing comes after the interrupt processing is permitted in step S710, the interrupt processing is executed.
In the next step S711, a random number update process (increment process of a random number counter) is executed. This random number is used for various lotteries (selection of stop symbols, selection of effects, etc.).

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the setting change processing in step S702 of FIG. In the present embodiment, the time when the process of step S721 is started is the time when the setting change process (setting change state) is started.
In step S721, the main control board (main CPU) 530 reads the set value described in the RWM, and determines whether the set value is within a normal range. In the present embodiment, the values stored in the RWM corresponding to the set values “1” to “6” are “0” to “5”.

  For example, if the value stored in the RWM is “0”, the set value is “1”. Therefore, in step S722, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the RWM is within a range of “0” to “5”. When it is determined that the value is within the range, the process proceeds to step S724. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in the RWM is not in the range of “0” to “5”, “0” is stored in the RWM. When the value of RWM is “0”, the set value is “1”. The set value “1” is a basic set value as described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S724.

In step S724, the main control board 530 displays the set value corresponding to the value stored in the RWM on the set value display LED 537. For example, when the value of RWM is “0”, “1” is displayed on the set value display LED 537.
Next, proceeding to step S725, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting change switch 536 has been operated. When it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S726, and when it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S729. In step S726, “1” is added to the set value. For example, if “1” has been displayed on the set value display LED 537 until then, the display is updated from “1” to “2” by the process of step S726, and the set value data stored in the RWM is changed to “0”. "To" 1 ". In the example of FIG. 101, when the setting value “6” is displayed in step S724 and it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the processing in step S726 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S727. Shall be considered.

In step S727, it is determined whether the set value has exceeded the upper limit. For example, the setting value “6” is displayed in step S724, and if it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 535 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit has been exceeded. On the other hand, when the setting values “1” to “5” are displayed in step S724 and it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated in step S725, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the setting value has been exceeded. Is not determined.
If it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S728. If it is determined that the upper limit of the set value has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S729.

In step S728, a basic setting value is set. That is, “0” is stored as the set value data of the RWM, and “1” is displayed on the set value display LED 537. Then, the process proceeds to step S729.
In step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether a condition for ending the setting change processing (setting change state) is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the condition for ending the setting change process is satisfied. Therefore, in step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting key switch 535 is on. When it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is on, the process returns to step S724 and determines that it is off. If so, the process proceeds to step S730.

In step S730, the setting value display of the setting value display LED 537 is not displayed.
Next, proceeding to step S731, the main control board 530 transmits a setting change end command to the sub control board 540. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
When receiving the setting change end command, the sub-control board 540 outputs a setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and executes a lighting process of the effect lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change has ended.

Note that the end timing of the setting change state in the pachinko gaming machine 500 is
(1) When "Yes" is determined in step S729 (when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off).
(2) When the display of the set value by the set value display LED 537 is not displayed in step S730.
(3) When transmitting a setting change end command in step S731.
In the nineteenth embodiment (B), the end timing of the setting change state is determined when the setting key switch 535 is detected to be turned off in the above (1). Is determined.
The present invention is not limited to this, and the above (2) and (3) may be determined as the end timing of the setting change state.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500.
In the pachinko game 500, the start timing of one game may be any one of the following.
(1) When a game ball is fired by the firing device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504. In this case, even if the game ball has not reached the game area, one game is started.
(2) When a game ball is fired by the launching device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504, and the game ball enters the game area. Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 97, a rail is provided in a range from the lower side of the game area to the left side and up to the upper left, for guiding the game ball fired by the firing device 513 into the game area. ing. The moment when the game ball comes off the rail (the moment when the game ball enters the game area) is defined as the start of one game.

(3) When the game ball wins the starting port 532 provided in the game area. Or, when the game ball wins the start port 532 provided in the game area and the start port switch 533 is turned on.
As described above, the start time of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500 can be variously determined as to which time point to start. The time when the game is entered "is defined as the start timing of one game.
The timing of ending one game is the time when the change of the special symbol display device 531 ends and the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In step S741, the main control board (main CPU) 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has been won in the starting port 532, that is, whether or not the starting port switch 533 has been turned on. If it is determined that the start port switch 533 has been turned on, the process proceeds to step S742.
In step S742, various lottery processes are executed at the timing when the starting port switch 533 is turned on. A random number value is extracted at the timing when the starting port switch 533 is turned on, and based on the extracted random number value, a jackpot lottery (judgment as to whether it is a jackpot or a loss), a special symbol lottery (a special symbol stop symbol) Lottery of which symbol is to be made) and a variation pattern lottery (a lottery of the variation time of the special symbol).

In the next step S743, prize ball processing (prize ball payout processing) based on winning in the starting port 532 is executed. Here, the payout control board 520 drives and controls the payout device 524, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls.
In addition, among the various lottery processes executed in step S742, at least a part of the lottery result including the fluctuation time is transmitted to the sub control board 540. Upon receiving the lottery result of the current game, the sub-control board 540 controls the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

  Next, proceeding to step S744, the main control board 530 starts changing the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 based on the lottery result in step S742. The change of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 is a condition that the change of the previous special symbol is completed at that time, and when the special symbol is changing, the change of the next special symbol is performed. The change is suspended, and after the change of the special symbol currently changing is finished, the change of the next special symbol is started.

In step S745, the sub-control board 540 causes the image display device 543 to change the decorative design. The fluctuation of the decorative pattern corresponds to a part of the effect in the game this time.
Here, the device that directly indicates the result of the jackpot lottery in step S742 is the special symbol display device 531. The stop symbol after the change by the special symbol display device 531 includes a special symbol corresponding to the jackpot (for example, “7”). )) And a special symbol (for example, “−”) corresponding to the loss.

  Further, the decorative symbol is changed by the image display device 543 so as to be linked (synchronized) with the change of the special symbol. When stopping at a special symbol corresponding to the jackpot, the decorative symbol is also stopped at a decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot such as "777". On the other hand, when stopping at the special symbol corresponding to the loss (non-winning), the decorative symbol is also stopped at the decorative symbol corresponding to the loss (the symbol other than the decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit). The special symbol display device 531 is composed of a small 7-segment display, but the image display area of the image display device 543 for displaying the decorative symbol as an image is larger than the image display area of the special symbol display device 531 (for example, a game). (Having a size that occupies more than half of the area). Thereby, the player can confirm whether or not the current game is a big hit by seeing the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped.

The fluctuation of the decorative symbol in step S745 is controlled so as to be within the fluctuation time determined by the lottery in step S742. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbol is completed, the process proceeds to step S746, where the main control board 530 varies the special symbol for the variation time determined by the lottery, and then changes the special symbol so as to become the stop symbol determined by the lottery. finish.
Next, the process proceeds to step S747 to execute post-stop processing of the special symbol. The post-stop processing includes, for example, processing for shifting to a special game when the current game has a big hit.

In the nineteenth embodiment (B) of the pachinko gaming machine, similarly to the nineteenth embodiment (A) of the slot machine, a setting change end sound and lighting of a lamp indicating the end of the setting change are made after the end of the setting change state. Execute. Furthermore, when it is assumed that the game is started simultaneously with the end of the setting change state, the output of the setting change end sound is finished before the end of the game.
As described above, in FIG. 101, when it is assumed that the setting change state is ended when it is determined “Yes” in step S729, then, in step S731, a setting change end command is transmitted to the sub control board 540, and Upon receiving the command, the control board 540 starts outputting a setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and the like.

The time from when “Yes” is determined in step S729 to when the output of the setting change end sound (and the predetermined lighting by the effect lamp 541) is started is longer than “0” ms, for example, in step S729. This timing is about the time when one interrupt time (for example, “4” ms in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) has elapsed since the determination was “Yes”. In other words, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed after the determination of “Yes” in step S729.
Then, the setting change end sound outputs a sound “Setting change is ended.” As in the nineteenth embodiment (A). Further, assuming that the time from the start of the output of the voice of “the setting change is ended” to the end of the output is “T01” in the same manner as in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the time “T01” is the same as that in the nineteenth embodiment (A). As in the case of (2), it may be set to about "2000" ms.

In addition, as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, an effect of lighting the effect lamp 541 in a predetermined lighting mode is executed in addition to the setting change end sound.
Here, when the lighting by the effect lamp 541 is executed, at least the lighting mode in the case where the lighting by the effect lamp 541 is executed at the time of the big hit is not set. For example, assuming that the lamp A of the effect lamps 541 is set to be lit in the lighting mode a as an effect indicating a jackpot, the effect lamp 541 is lit as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed. In this case, turning on a lamp other than the lamp A may be mentioned. In this case, if a lamp different from the lamp A is turned on, the lighting mode may be the same as the lighting mode for indicating that a big hit has occurred.

When the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, turning on the lamp A may be mentioned. The lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode for indicating that a big hit has occurred.
As described above, when the lighting of the effect lamp 541 is performed as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 at the time of the jackpot is not set to be the same. Thereby, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is completed, even if the lighting of the effect lamp 541 is performed as the effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the player mistakes the game as a big hit. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is different from the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 when a big hit occurs, so that the two are not confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects (or is used very infrequently). It is preferable to be able to understand that it is an effect meaning the end of.
Further, for the effect lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed may be the same as the lighting pattern at the time of the jackpot. However, for the other lamps than the effect lamp 541, the setting change is not required. The lighting pattern indicating the end and the lighting pattern at the time of the jackpot may be different.
Specifically, for example, when it is indicated that the setting change has been completed, the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps are all turned on, and when a big hit occurs, the effect lamp 541 is turned on. Is not turned on. In this way, by checking the lighting patterns of the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps (the lamps of the general gaming machine), the administrator can grasp which state is in.

Further, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, in principle, the effect is output simultaneously with the setting change end sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is started and before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Further, after the output of the setting change end sound is ended, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started.
In the nineteenth embodiment (B), lighting of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is executed simultaneously with the start of output of the setting change end sound.

Further, assuming that the lighting time of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is “T02” as in the nineteenth embodiment (A),
T01> T02
T01 = T02
T01 <T02
However, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that “T01 <T02”. For example, as described above, when the time “T01” is set to about “2000” ms, the time “T02” may be set to, for example, about “2500” ms to about “4000” ms.

Next, a case where the game is started as soon as possible after the setting change state is finished will be described.
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the configuration is such that, during the setting change state, the firing device 513 cannot be operated to launch the game ball into the game area. Therefore, unless at least the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even during the setting change state, the launching device 513 may be operated to launch the game balls into the game area. In this case, control may be performed so that a prize ball is not paid out even when a game ball has won one of the winning ports during the setting change state. Further, even if a game ball is won in the starting port 532, the jackpot lottery is not executed, and the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531 and the fluctuation of the decorative symbol by the image display device 543 are not executed. Can be

In the setting change state, at least the front frame 502 is opened as described above. First, a case will be described in which it is assumed that a game can be performed even when the front frame 502 is opened.
Then, the timing of starting the game is when the game ball has won the starting port 532 as described above.
First, assuming that the preparation time before starting the game is “T21”, the game ball is guided to a fireable position in the firing device 513, the game ball is launched from the fireable position, and the starting ball 532 is won. Is the time “T21”.
In this case, the time “T21” is considered to be about “2000” ms.
In the above assumption, it is assumed that the first ball of the game ball fired from the firing device 513 wins the starting port 532.

When the game ball wins the starting port 532, it is determined as "Yes" in step S741 in FIG. 102, and then the change of the special symbol is started (step S744). Then, the change of the special symbol is stopped (step S746). Here, in FIG. 102, the time from when “Yes” is determined in step S741 to when the processing in step S746 is completed is one game time, and this one game time is “T22”.
First, when a game ball wins at the starting port 532 in a state where there is no holding ball, one game time “T22” is determined from a range of about “10000” to “30000” ms, for example. And Therefore, the shortest time of one game time “T22” is “10000” ms.

  Note that, for example, when the number of reserved balls becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, three), a shortening function for improving the time efficiency by shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is known. Since this is a state after the end of the change state, there is no pending ball. Therefore, in one game time “T22”, the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is not considered.

As described above, the time required to start the game immediately after the end of the setting change state is “T21 + T22”.
The shortest time of “T21 + T22” is about “12000” ms.
Therefore,
T01 (time at which the setting change end sound is output) <T21 + T22 (preparation time for starting the game + 1 minimum time for the game)
Becomes

Furthermore, immediately after the end of the setting change state (along with the start of output of the setting change end sound), when lighting is performed by the effect lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change has ended, the lighting time T02 of the effect lamp 541 and “T21 + T22” Is related to
T02 (about “2500” to “4000” ms) <T21 + T22
Becomes
Thereby, even if the game is started immediately after the setting change state is finished, the output of the setting change end sound is finished and the effect lamp indicating the end of the setting change before one game is finished. This means that the lighting of 541 has been completed.
FIG. 96 shows the time relationship at this time.

Further, in the above one game, the time for closing the front frame 502 after the end of the setting change state and the operation time for eliminating the frame open error after closing the front frame 502 are not considered.
Similarly to the slot machine 10, when the setting change state ends, at least the front frame 502 should be open. Therefore, even after the setting change state ends, the pachinko gaming machine 500 detects the frame opening error and notifies the error. When the frame opening error is notified, the game cannot be started. First, when the frame opening error occurs, the firing device 513 is not operated. Second, although the launching device 513 is in an operable state, even if a game ball is won in the start port 532 (even if a game ball is detected by the start port switch 533), the game is not started (lottery processing). Is not executed, the change of the special symbol display device 531 is not started, and the prize ball is not paid out).

To cancel the frame opening error, the front frame 502 is closed and the frame opening switch 523 is turned off. Further, a key is inserted into the key insertion slot 521 and a predetermined operation is performed to eliminate a frame opening error (end error notification). Therefore, the preparation time “T21” from the end of the setting change state to the start of the game includes the operation time for closing the front frame 502, inserting a key, and canceling the frame opening error. After the setting change state ends, the time until the frame opening error is eliminated by closing the front frame 502 and turning off the frame opening switch 523 is “T20”.
T01 (output time of setting change end sound) <T20 + T21 + T22
T02 (lighting time of effect lamp 541) <T20 + T21 + T22
Becomes

  In the above example, the setting change state is ended when the setting key switch 535 is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front frame 502 is closed (the frame opening switch 523 is turned off). It is also possible to end the setting change condition on condition that the operation of releasing the frame opening error (the operation of inserting a key into the key insertion slot 521 and rotating it in a predetermined direction) is performed. In this case, the front frame 502 is closed, and at the end of the operation of releasing the frame opening error, the setting change state ends, and the output of the setting change end sound is started. Note that by closing the front frame 502, the setting change state may be terminated on the condition that the frame opening switch 523 is turned off (without performing the operation of releasing the frame opening error). In this case, the setting change state is ended when the frame release switch 523 is turned off, and a setting change end sound is output.

  Therefore, even in the case of the specification in which the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame opening error is released, as described above, the time from the end of the setting change to the end of one game “ Since the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is shorter than “T21 + T22”, the output of the setting change end sound has ended before one game immediately after the setting change ends.

The above is the case where one game time “T22” is completed in the shortest time.
On the other hand, the relationship between the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound and the time “T21 + T22” from the end of the setting change to the end of one game can be variously set as follows. .
(1) The output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is shorter than the total time of the average one game time “T22” and the preparation time “T21” at the time of a loss (non-winning) in the jackpot lottery. Set.
For example, assuming that the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 at the time of the loss is in a range from “T22 (min1)” to “T22 (max1)” and the average time is “T22 (avg1)”,
T01 <T21 + T22 (avg1)
To be set.

(2) The output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is set to be shorter than the total time of the average one game time “T22” and the preparation time “T21” when the jackpot is determined by the jackpot.
For example, assuming that the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 at the time of the big hit is in a range from “T22 (min2)” to “T22 (max2)” and the average time is “T22 (avg2)”,
T01 <T21 + T22 (avg2)
To be set.

<Twentieth embodiment>
The twentieth embodiment relates to a board case of a control board.
As a board case for accommodating the control board, a double door system and a slide system are known, but the twentieth embodiment is a slide system board case.
In the slide method, the exposed area of the control board is smaller than in the double door method, so that the number of points to be illegally accessed can be reduced by that much.
In the twentieth embodiment, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 slide in a state where the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560. For this reason, the surface of the main control board 530 exposed during the sliding movement is a solder surface.
In the control board, a surface on which the CPU, the connector, and other electronic components are mounted is referred to as a “component surface”, and a surface on which the feet of the electronic components are soldered is referred to as a “solder surface”.

  In the twentieth embodiment, a board case 550 for accommodating a main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500 will be described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The board case 550 of the twentieth embodiment is not limited to the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500, but may be a payout control board 520, a sub control board 540, or a control board on which another CPU is mounted. The present invention can be applied to a case that accommodates a control board that requires security.

Further, the board case 550 of the twentieth embodiment is not limited to the control board of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and is a control board on which the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, and other CPUs of the slot machine 10 are mounted. The present invention can be applied to a case that accommodates a control board that requires the above.
Specifically, the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 is formed in the same or similar shape as the main control board 530 of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) of the twentieth embodiment is formed. ) Can be accommodated.
The board case 56 shown in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10) can also be applied to the main control board 530 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 and other control boards. Furthermore, the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment may be implemented alone, but the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment may be implemented simultaneously.

FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) and the main control board 530 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) and the main control board 530 viewed from the rear side.
FIG. 105 is an external perspective view of a state where the main control board 530 is accommodated in the board case 550 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 106 is a front view of a state where the main control board 530 is accommodated in the board case 550 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 107 is a front view of the state in which the main control board 530 is housed in the board case 550 as viewed from the rear (back) side.

Here, “front side” refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and “rear (back side)” refers to the solder side of the main control board 530.
Further, “upper” in “upper case 560” refers to the component surface side of main control board 530, and may be referred to as “front case (or cover)” or “component surface case (or cover)”. .
Furthermore, “lower” in “lower case 570” refers to the solder surface side of main control board 530, and includes “rear (back) side case (or cover)” and “solder surface case (or cover)”. May be referred to.
Further, FIGS. 103 and 106 show a state where the cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560, and FIG. 105 shows the upper case 560 without the cover 561.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 530 includes the setting change (reset) switch 536 described above and a setting key insertion port 534. Further, connectors 539a to 539h for connecting harnesses to other substrates, electronic components, or electronic devices are provided. Various components shown in the twentieth embodiment, such as FIG. 103, are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these.
In addition, holes 530a for screwing when attaching (fixing) the main control board 530 to the upper case 560 are formed at four corners of the main control board 530.

On the other hand, in the upper case 560, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530, the setting change (reset) switch 536, and the setting key insertion port 534 each have an appropriate gap. The openings 563a to 563i that can pass (pass through) are formed.
In the upper case 560, a cover 561 is attached to the part where the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 are exposed when the main control board 530 is attached. In this embodiment, the opening and closing of the cover 561 is not detected by a sensor or the like, but the opening and closing of the cover 561 can be detected by a sensor. Then, the condition can be changed to a setting change condition on condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is open), or the condition can be set on condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is open). The change state may be terminated.

On one end side of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, specifically, on the left edge viewed from the front side in FIG. 103, caulking portions 562 and 572 are provided, respectively. The caulking portions 562 and 572 are used for sealing (caulking) the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 in a fitted state. After sealing (caulking), the fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 cannot be released unless the caulking portion 562 on the upper case 560 side is broken.
Further, in FIG. 103, when viewed from the front side, side walls 565 and 571 are provided on the opposite ends of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 from the one end sides (the sides on which the caulked portions 562 and 572 are provided). Have been. These side walls 565 and 571 come into contact when upper case 560 and lower case 570 are fitted.

In FIG. 104, bosses 564 (four) are provided on the back side of the upper case 560. In FIG. 104, two bosses 564 are visible. The spacing between the four bosses 564 is the same as the spacing between the four holes 530a in the main control board 530. Further, the boss 564 has a screw hole.
In the state shown in FIG. 104, when the main control board 530 is brought into contact with the back side of the upper case 560, the four holes 530a of the main control board 530 and the screw holes of the four bosses 564 of the upper case 560 overlap.

Further, in this state, connector 539a of main control board 530 passes through opening 563a of upper case 560, and its connector surface is exposed to the front side of upper case 560.
Similarly, the connectors 539b and 539c of the main control board 530 pass through the opening 563b of the upper case 560, and the connector surface is exposed to the front side of the upper case 550.
The connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f of the main control board 530 pass through the openings 563c, 563d, and 563e of the upper case 560, respectively, and the connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.

Furthermore, the connectors 539g and 539h of the main control board 530 pass through the openings 563f and 563g of the upper case 560, respectively, and the connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.
In this way, all the connectors provided on main control board 530 are exposed to the front of upper case 560 through the openings formed in upper case 560. FIG. 105 and FIG. 106 show the state at this time.
In this case, the gap between each of the connectors 539a to 539h and each of the openings 563a to 563g is set to be an appropriate gap, and each of the connectors 539a to 539h is connected to each of the openings 563a to 563g. 563g can be penetrated without resistance, and after the passage, there can be no more unnecessary gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g (for example, the gap between the connector and the openings). Is about 0.5 mm in design value). Thus, it is difficult to perform the goto action using the gap between the connector and the opening.

Furthermore, a setting change (reset) switch 536 and a setting key insertion port 534 of the main control board 530 penetrate through openings 563h and 563i formed in the upper case 560, respectively, and contact (access) from the front side of the upper case 560. The cover 561 is mounted on the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 as shown in FIGS. No exposure. However, the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) including the cover 561 is made of a transparent resin, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 can be visually confirmed from outside the cover 561. It has become.
In the above state, screws are inserted into the holes 530a (four places) from the solder surface side of the main control board 530 and screwed to the bosses 564 of the upper case 560 to fix the main control board 530 to the upper case 560. Is done.

Thus, even when upper case 560 and lower case 570 are fitted, main control board 530 moves integrally with upper case 560.
As described above, since the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 before the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted to each other, when the upper case and the lower case 570 are fitted to each other, the upper case There is no relative movement between case 560 and main control board 530. Therefore, the openings 563a to 563g slightly larger than the outer shapes of the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530 are formed on the upper case 560 side, and the connectors 539a to 539h penetrate the openings 563a to 563g. With such a structure, it is possible to provide a structure in which an unnecessary gap is not generated between each of the connectors 539a to 539h and each of the openings 563a to 563g. For example, after the upper case 560 and the lower case 5670 are fitted to each other, an act of shifting the positional relationship between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 by a goto action may be performed. Does not relatively shift, for example, it is not possible to increase the gap between each of the connectors 539a to 539h and each of the openings 563a to 563g. Thereby, a goto action can be suppressed.

Next, a method of fitting the upper case 560 to which the main control board 530 is attached and the lower case 570 will be described.
FIG. 108 is a side cross-sectional view showing a fitting state of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570. FIG. 108A shows a temporary fitting state (before sliding movement), and FIG. (After slide movement).
In FIG. 108, the cross-sectional area is not hatched in consideration of the legibility of the drawing. In the drawing, the upper case 560 is shown by a solid line, and the lower case 570 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
As shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the upper case 560 is provided with a side wall 565, and the lower case 570 is provided with a side wall 571.

As shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the lower edge (the lower case 570 side) of the upper case 560 in the longitudinal direction is referred to as a lower edge 560a. In the lower case 570, an edge in the longitudinal direction is referred to as an outer edge 570a.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the shapes of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are formed so as to overlap in the positional relationship shown in FIG. When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are formed to be in contact with each other. This position is referred to as a “temporary fitting state”. In the provisionally fitted state, the gap L between the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 is formed to be about several tens mm (for example, about "10" to "30" mm). ing.
Further, in the temporarily fitted state, upper case 560 and lower case 570 can be separated at any time. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 108A, the upper case 560 can be moved with respect to the lower case 570 in a direction away from the lower case 570 without interference of components and the like.

FIG. 109 is a plan view of the vicinity of the side wall 565 and the side wall 571 from the lower case 570 side in the temporarily fitted state.
In the temporarily fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, since the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 have a gap L, one end of the solder surface of the main control board 530 can be seen from the gap L. I have. Here, in the connector of the main control board 530, assuming that the foot of the connector 539g is a connector foot 539g ′ and the foot of the connector 539h is a connector foot 539h ′, these connector feet 539g ′ and 539h ′ are respectively in the longitudinal direction. It has two rows of legs (see FIG. 104).
Then, in the provisionally fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, the connector feet 539g 'and 539h' are formed so that only one row outside is exposed. In other words, even in the provisionally fitted state, all of the connector feet 539g 'and 539h' are not exposed, and only a part is exposed.

Then, the lower case 570 is configured to be slidable with respect to the upper case 560 from the provisionally fitted state shown in FIG. The direction of the sliding movement is the longitudinal direction of the substrate case 550, and is the left direction in FIG.
When the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the upper case 560, the main control board 530, and the lower case 570 can move to the end point of the slide movement without interference. Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 can be slid to a position where they come into contact with each other. The state shown in FIG. 108 (b) is the fully fitted state. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state where the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 are in contact with each other (full-fit state).

  In the fully fitted state, engagement members (not shown) formed on the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are engaged. Accordingly, the upper case 560 cannot be moved in a direction away from the lower case 570 with respect to the lower case 570. However, in this state, the lower case 570 can be slid with respect to the upper case 560 in the opposite direction to the above, and the sliding movement in the reverse direction can always return from the fully fitted state to the temporarily fitted state. be able to.

  In the provisionally fitted state shown in FIG. 108A, the swaged portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the swaged portion 572 of the lower case 570 are displaced in the vertical direction, but the position shown in FIG. In the fitted state, the caulked portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the caulked portion 572 of the lower case 570 overlap, and a caulking is possible using both. When the caulking portion 562 and the caulking portion 572 are caulked at this position, the main case 560 and the lower case 570 are separated or the upper case 560 is separated unless the caulking portion 562 of the upper case 560 is cut (destroyed) thereafter. On the other hand, the lower case 570 cannot be slid and returned to the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG.

However, it is conceivable that the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 by some method to return to the temporarily fitted state, and that the solder surface of the main control board 530 is exposed.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109, if all of the connector feet are not exposed and only a part of the connector feet is exposed, the gotting action can be made difficult.
Further, even in the provisionally fitted state, not all the connector feet are exposed. In the example of the twentieth embodiment, the exposed connector feet are the connector feet 539g 'and 539h', and the other connector feet are exposed. The feet of 539a, 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, 539g are not exposed.

When the slide method is adopted for the board case 550, the sliding direction is usually the longitudinal direction of the board case. In this case, the slide movement amount is related to the number of exposed connector legs.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, a connector is arranged near the outer peripheral edge of the main control board 530. For example, if the connector is provided at the center of the main control board 530, the opening of the upper case 560 corresponding to the connector is inevitably formed in a substantially rectangular shape with four sides surrounded by side walls. However, if the connector is arranged inside a substantially rectangular shape whose four sides are surrounded by side walls, it becomes difficult to insert and remove the connector. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, connectors 539a to 539h are arranged near the outer peripheral edge of the main control board 530.

Specifically, in FIG. 103, a connector 539a is arranged near the left edge of the main control board 530, connectors 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539f are arranged near the upper edge, and connectors 539g and 539h are arranged near the right edge. Was placed.
Each of the connector openings 563 of the upper case 560 has no wall at least on the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563a through which the connector 539a passes has a substantially concave shape without a side wall on the left side (outside) in the figure.
As shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563b through which the connectors 539b and 539c penetrate has a substantially concave shape having no side wall on the upper side (outside) in the figure.

Further, the periphery of the openings 563c, 563d, and 563e that penetrate the connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f, respectively, has a substantially L-shape having no side walls on the upper side and the right side (outer side) in FIG. .
Further, the periphery of the openings 563f and 563g through which the connectors 539g and 539h penetrate, as shown in FIG. 105, has a shape having a side wall only on the left side (inside) in the figure. Thus, the connector has a shape that facilitates connection and removal of the connector.

Further, in the case where the connectors are arranged on the main control board 530 as described above, when the lower case 570 is slid and moved as in the present embodiment, the feet of the connectors first exposed are the connectors 539g and 539h. Feet (539g 'and 539h').
Furthermore, when the slide movement amount is set larger than in the present embodiment, the foot of the connector 539f is exposed next.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the connectors of the main control board 530, the connectors 530a to 539f are configured so that the legs of the connectors are not exposed even when the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 506. For example, in FIG. 105, if the connector group of the connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f is arranged further to the left side in the figure (to approach the connectors 539b and 539c), the sliding movement amount is larger than that of the present embodiment. Even if it is provided, it can be configured so that the foot of the connector 539f is not exposed.

  When the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h arranged near the right edge of the main control board 530 in FIG. 105 are easily exposed. . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the feet of the connectors 539g and 539h (connector feet 539g ′ and 539h ′) are exposed. It is designed to make it a little more difficult to goto by exposing only a part of the foot instead of exposing everything.

It is preferable that the number of connectors from which at least some of the feet are exposed by sliding movement is as small as possible.
Further, when the number of legs of one connector is “N (N is an integer of 2 or more)”, the number of exposed legs is “N−1” or less (that is, not all are exposed). Is preferred. Furthermore, when the number of rows of feet of the connector is “1”, it is preferable that the feet of the connector are not exposed.
Alternatively, when the number of pins of the connector is “N”, that is, the number of legs of the connector is “N”, among the “N” pins, the “n” th (“n” ≦ “N−1”) )) Pin is exposed, but the (n + 1) th and subsequent pins are not exposed (that is, all pins are not exposed).
Furthermore, among the pins of the connector, one reference pin may be configured to be at least not exposed. If at least one pin is not exposed, the goto action can be made more difficult than when all pins are exposed.

In addition, when the main control board is the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500, as shown in FIG. 99, the main control board 530 includes Since it is electrically connected to the control board 540 and the like, it is connected to these boards and electronic components. The connection is made using a lead wire. Further, a plurality of lead wires are combined into one to form a harness, and a connector terminal is attached to an end of the harness, and the connector terminal and a connector on the main control board 530 are connected.
Here, among the lead wires connected to the main control board 530, the lead wire for which security is to be particularly ensured is a lead wire to which a signal of the starting port switch 533 (a signal relating to lottery) is input. Therefore, the connector to which the signal of the starting port switch 533 is input is configured such that the connector foot is not exposed (at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed) even when the connector is slid. Is preferred.

Further, with respect to the connector connected to the payout control board 520, from the viewpoint of preventing the payout goto, the connector foot is not exposed even if the connector is slid (at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not provided). (Not exposed).
Further, a lead wire for supplying power to the main control board 530 (a lead wire connected to the power supply board 510 when the power supply board 510 and the main control board 530 are directly connected), a sub control board 540, At least one foot row or at least one pin is not exposed for each connector to which the connected lead wire and the lead wire connected to the board for outputting an external signal are respectively connected. It is preferable to configure.

On the other hand, when the main control board is the main control board 50 in the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes a medal selector, various operation switches, a power switch 11, a medal number display device, It is electrically connected to a display device, a medal payout device, and the like.
Among the lead wires connected to the main control board 50, the lead wire for which security is to be particularly ensured is the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 (the signal relating to the lottery) is input. Therefore, as for the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 is input is connected, even when the connector is slid, the connector foot is not exposed (at least one foot row is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed). It is preferable to configure as follows.

  Furthermore, the lead wire to which the signal of the input sensor 44 is input also needs security from the viewpoint of preventing credit. Therefore, as for the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the closing sensor 44 is input is connected, the connector foot is not exposed even if the connector is slid (at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is (Not exposed).

Further, each connector to which a lead wire connected to the medal payout device, specifically, a lead wire for outputting a drive signal of the hopper motor 36 and a lead wire to which a signal from the payout sensor 37 is input is connected. Also, from the viewpoint of preventing dispensing, it is preferable that the connector foot is not exposed (at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed) even when the connector is slid. .
In addition, similarly to the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, a connector having a lead wire related to the power supply, a connector having a lead wire connected to the sub-control board 80, and a lead connected to a board for transmitting an external signal. It is preferable that at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed for each connector to which a wire is connected.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
The twenty-first embodiment relates to the thickness (diameter) of a lead wire (also referred to as a “signal wire”).
In the twenty-first embodiment, the lead wire for starting is made the thinnest, and at least one or more lead wires having the same thickness as the lead wire for starting are provided in one connector terminal having the lead for starting, In addition, by providing at least one lead wire that is thicker than the lead wire related to starting, it is difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting, and a goto action (starting illegally or starting at intentional timing) is suppressed. Is what you do.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, a lead wire related to starting corresponds to a lead wire connecting the starting port switch 533 and the main control board 530.
In the slot machine 10, a lead wire related to starting corresponds to a lead wire connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 50.
Note that the “lead wire related to starting” is actually composed of two wires, one of which is a starting signal wire and the other is a GND wire. In the present embodiment, the start signal line is referred to as a “lead line related to start”, and does not include the GND line. However, the lead wire other than the lead wire for starting may include the GND wire.

FIG. 110 is a plan view showing a state in which harnesses B to H are connected to connectors 539b to 539h of main control board 530, respectively.
In FIG. 110, illustration of the substrate case 550 is omitted. Although FIG. 110 illustrates the main control board 530, the present invention is not limited to the main control board 530, and can be applied to the main control board 50. In other words, the twenty-first embodiment can be applied to both the slot machine 10 and the pachinko gaming machine 500.
The connector terminals attached to the tips of the harnesses B to H are respectively referred to as “harness B connector terminal” to “harness H connector terminal”.

The connector 539a is usually a connector to which no cable or the like is connected. The connector 539a is a connector that is connected to the matching device when the control authority of the gaming machine checks data stored in the CPU, the ROM, and the RWM using the matching device.
The connectors 539b to 539h are concave connectors mounted on the main control board 530, and are respectively connected to a harness B connector terminal to a harness H connector terminal (convex connector).
FIG. 111 is a front view showing the harnesses B to H and the harness B to H connector terminals in detail.
Each of the harnesses B to H is composed of a plurality of lead wires, and in FIG. 111, each lead wire is numbered. For example, the harness B includes nine lead wires 1 to 9 in a first row (upper row in the figure) and nine lead wires 10 to 18 in a second row (lower row in the figure). Harness.

Each connector terminal of the harnesses B, C, D, G, and H is composed of two rows. In contrast, each of the connector terminals of the harnesses E and F is constituted by one row.
The respective harnesses and connector terminals shown in FIG. 111 are merely examples, and the connector terminals may be composed of, for example, three or more rows. The number of lead wires in one row is determined according to the application (the number of signal lines), and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 111, and may be one, or may be ten or more. .
In addition, even if it consists of one lead wire, it shall be called "harness."
Furthermore, in the harness, each lead wire is separated from each other (with or without bundling), specifically, such as a flat cable or a ribbon cable other than a discrete wire cable. In which all the lead wires are integrally connected (whether or not they are separable).

In FIG. 111, two types of thickness are illustrated as the lead wires. In the drawing, a single circle indicates a thin lead, and a double circle indicates a thick lead. Here, "the thickness of the lead wire" indicates the diameter of the lead wire. Therefore, if the thickness of the lead wire indicated by a single circle is the diameter D1 and the thickness of the lead wire indicated by the double circle is the diameter D2, then "D1 <D2".
Note that in the example of FIG. 111, two types of lead wire thickness are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a harness may be composed of three or more types of lead wires.

In FIG. 111, a lead wire related to starting (a lead wire connecting the starting port switch 533 and the main control board 530 in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500. In the case of the slot machine 10, the start switch 41 and the main control board 50 are used). Is the seventh lead of the harness D. The lead wire related to starting uses a thin lead wire among two types of thicknesses. This is because the use of a thin lead wire makes the lead wire related to starting less noticeable as much as possible. In addition, the use of thin lead wires makes it easier to break the wire when an illegal act (modification or the like) is performed, so that abnormalities can be easily found. In other words, a thick lead wire is harder to break even if a wrongdoing is performed than a thin lead wire. Because it is difficult.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lead wire for starting may be a thick lead wire. Alternatively, when three types of lead wires are used, an intermediate lead wire may be used as a lead wire for starting.
In some cases, only two leads, a lead wire for starting and a GND wire thereof, are connected to one connector terminal.
On the other hand, the harness D shown in FIG. 111 has a plurality of other lead wires in addition to the lead wire (No. 7) for starting.

  Further, in the harness D including the lead wire (No. 7) related to starting, at least one or more lead wires having the same thickness as the lead wire (No. 7) related to starting are provided. This is because, even if it is known that the lead wire related to the start is included in the connector D, it is difficult to specify which lead wire (it is difficult to perform a goto action). In this example, the second, fourth, and eighth lead wires have the same thickness as the seventh lead wire (lead wire for starting).

  Further, an eighth lead having the same thickness is arranged adjacent to the seventh lead of the harness D. This is because, by arranging a lead wire having the same thickness adjacent to the lead wire for starting, it is difficult to specify the lead wire for starting. In the example of FIG. 111, in the harness D, the No. 8 lead wire located on the right side of the No. 7 lead wire has the same thickness as the No. 7 lead wire, but is not limited thereto. The thickness of the line may be the same as the thickness of the seventh lead wire. Alternatively, the thickness of the third lead wire may be the thickness of the seventh lead wire. In the harness D, the lead wire “adjacent” to the seventh lead wire corresponds to the third, sixth, and eighth lead wires in the example of FIG. At least one of these lead wires is set to the same thickness as the seventh lead wire.

  Further, the harness D is provided with one or more lead wires having a thickness different from that of the lead wire (No. 7) for starting. In the example of FIG. 111, the first, third, fifth, and sixth lead wires have different thicknesses from the lead wire (No. 7) for starting. By including in one connector terminal (harness D connector terminal) a lead wire having a thickness different from the thickness of the lead wire related to starting, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the lead wire related to starting.

In addition to the lead wires related to starting, important signal wires, specifically, the lead wires related to the insertion of game media, the lead wires related to dispensing, and the lead wires for transmitting external signals, etc. In view of the above, one or more other signal lines having the same thickness are provided in one connector terminal, and one or more other signal lines having another thickness are provided in one connector terminal in the same manner as the lead wire for starting. Is preferred.
Furthermore, it is preferable that the lead wire for starting and the lead wire for power supply are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. This is because the lead wire for starting is hardly affected by noise.
Here, “not adjacent” means that, for example, when the 7th lead wire of the harness D is a lead wire relating to starting, the 3rd, 6th, and 8th wires of the harness D are not set as the power supply lead wires. It is mentioned.

In the case where the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are linearly arranged on the main control board 530 and the distance between the two connector terminals is short as in the present embodiment, the fifth harness G is used. It is preferable that the first lead wire of the harness H is not set as the power lead wire when the lead wire of the harness H is set as the lead wire for starting.
On the other hand, even when the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are linearly arranged on the main control board 530, if there is a certain distance between the two connector terminals, the fifth lead of the harness G is used. The wire may be set as a lead wire for starting, and the first lead wire of the harness H may be set as a power supply lead wire.

Furthermore, when the connector terminal of the harness including the lead wire related to the start and the connector terminal of the other harness are adjacent to each other, the harness including the lead wire related to the start is arranged below the other harness, and the start is performed. It is preferable to arrange the wiring so as to hide the lead wire as much as possible from the outside.
FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding a lead wire related to starting. In FIG. 112, for simplicity of the drawing, the harness D and the harness E are each composed of a single row of lead wires, the harness D is composed of three lead wires, and the harness E is composed of five lead wires. FIG. Then, it is assumed that the lead wire closest to the harness E among the harnesses D is set as the lead wire related to starting.
In this case, the direction in which the harness D extends is set to the harness E side, and wiring is performed so that the harness E passes above the harness D. As a result, the lead wire for starting the harness D is hidden from the outside as much as possible, and security can be enhanced.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
The twenty-second embodiment relates to a setting change state. The description of the twenty-second embodiment partially overlaps with the nineteenth embodiment, but will be described again.
First, in the case of the slot machine 10, whether or not the door switch 17 is on, whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on, and whether or not the reset switch 153 is on, before shifting to the setting change state. And it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that all these switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all of the switches are off, the setting does not change. As a result, even if a hole is illegally opened in the front door 12 with a drill or the like and the setting key switch 152 is accessed, unless the door switch 17 is turned on, the state does not shift to the setting change state.

  Further, even if all of the door switch 17, the setting key switch 152, and the reset switch 153 are turned on after the power is turned on, the state does not shift to the setting change state. When the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the state can be shifted to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the current setting value can be confirmed, but the setting value cannot be changed. When shifting to the setting confirmation state, the door switch 17 may be turned on. Furthermore, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the condition may be that the reset switch 153 is off.

Further, the setting change state end condition is set that the setting key switch 152 is turned off from on and the door switch 17 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the setting change state ends in a state where the door switch 17 is turned off, that is, in a state where the front door 12 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of a gobbling action).
Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that the door switch 17 is on, and to end the setting change state on condition that the door switch 17 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that the door switch 17 is on, and to determine whether the door switch 17 is on / off at the end of the setting change state. You may.

Secondly, the on / off of the door switch 17 is not determined when shifting to the setting change state, but the on / off of the door switch 17 is determined at the end of the setting change state, and if the door switch 17 is not on, The setting change state may not be terminated.
Thirdly, the on / off state of the door switch 17 is not determined when shifting to the setting change state. However, if the door switch 17 is not on, even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the set value is not changed. May be set.
Fourthly, when shifting to the setting change state, ON / OFF of the door switch 17 is not determined, and the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 153 during the setting change state. If the door switch 17 is not turned on when the start switch 41, which is an operation for finalizing the value, is operated, the setting value may not be finalized (the new setting value is not stored in the RWM 53). .

  Further, in order to shift to the setting change state in the slot machine 10, since the power is turned on while the reset switch 153 is turned on, before shifting to the setting change state (setting change processing), or the setting change state. The current setting value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared before the setting value can be changed after shifting to (setting change processing). In this case, the set value data is “0”. Therefore, the set value at the start of the setting change state is “1”.

  When the reset switch 153 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 (role ratio monitor) in the storage area of the RWM 53 is changed. Such data is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 includes a game number counter, a payout number counter (including a ring buffer), each ratio data, and the like.

  In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is turned on, the frame release switch 523 is turned on, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned on. And it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that these three switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all of the switches are off, the setting does not change. As a result, in an unauthorized state where the front frame 502 is not opened, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the state does not shift to the setting change state.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 98, the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is not configured in a closed state (see FIG. 22) like the slot machine 10, but is in an open state.
For this reason, depending on the condition of the island installed in the hall, it is conceivable that the main control board 530 may be accessed without opening the front frame 502 by wrapping around the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500. However, if the frame release switch 523 is not turned on, it is determined that the state is not normal, and the state is not shifted to the setting change state (the set value cannot be changed).

Further, even if the frame release switch 523 is turned on, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned on after the power is turned on, the state does not shift to the setting change state. Furthermore, after the power is turned on, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the state does not shift to the setting change state and shifts to the setting confirmation state. do not do.
In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, as described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting key switch 535 turned on (the reset switch 536 is turned off). It is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state.

Further, in the case where the opening of the front frame 502 and the opening of the glass door 505 can be individually detected as in the present embodiment, when both the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are simultaneously opened (that is, when the door is opened). When the release switch 522 is turned on and the frame release switch 523 is turned on), the specification may be changed to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state.
By setting in this manner, the function of the set value can be inspected without performing an extra procedure in the manufacturing process of the pachinko gaming machine 500. Further, after the pachinko gaming machine 500 is installed in the hall, even if the glass door 505 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 500 during the work of the board maintenance in the hall, the setting change and the setting confirmation can be performed in parallel with the board maintenance. Therefore, convenience can be improved.

  Further, when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the door opening switch 522 (the switch that is turned on when the glass door 505 is opened) is not detected. Therefore, when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the glass door 505 may be open or closed. However, it is determined that the glass door 505 is closed when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and that the door opening switch 522 is determined to be on / off when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and is determined to be off. The condition may be changed to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are covered with a cover 561. Then, in order to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion port 534, it is necessary to open the cover 561.
Therefore, a sensor for detecting the opening and closing of the cover 561 (hereinafter, referred to as “cover sensor”) may be provided so that the state can be shifted to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state on condition that the cover sensor is on.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, in the setting change state, the point that the set value can be changed every time the setting change switch 536 is operated is common to the slot machine 10.
In the slot machine 10, the operation of the start switch 41 is an operation for determining the set value. In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, turning off the setting key switch 535 determines the set value, and This is an operation to end the setting change state.
Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the setting change state can be ended on condition that the setting key switch 535 is turned off from on and the frame opening switch 523 is on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the setting change state ends in a state where the frame opening switch 523 is turned off, that is, in a state where the front frame 502 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of a goto action).

In the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that the frame opening switch 523 is on, and to end the setting change state on condition that the frame opening switch 523 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to make a transition to the setting change state on condition that the frame opening switch 523 is on, and not to determine the on / off state of the frame opening switch 523 when the setting change state ends. It may be.

Secondly, when shifting to the setting change state, the ON / OFF of the frame release switch 523 is not determined, but when the setting change state ends, the ON / OFF of the frame release switch 523 is determined, and the frame release switch 523 is turned ON. Otherwise, the setting change state may not be ended.
Thirdly, the on / off state of the frame opening switch 523 is not determined when shifting to the setting change state. However, if the frame opening switch 523 is not on, even if the setting change switch 536 is operated, the setting value is changed. It may be set so as not to be performed.

  Fourthly, when shifting to the setting change state, ON / OFF of the frame release switch 523 is not determined, and during the setting change state, the set value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 536. When the setting key switch 535, which is an operation for finalizing the set value, is turned off and the frame release switch 523 is not turned on, the set value is not determined (no new set value is stored in the RWM). May be set.

  Also, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, even if the power is turned on with the reset switch 536 turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the management information display LED (performance Data relating to the information displayed on the display monitor 538 is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 538 is a base value.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 be provided on the back side of the front frame 502 on the side close to the hinge mechanism 503. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 from being easily accessed by only slightly opening the front frame 502.
For example, in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are arranged inside the cover 561. However, when the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change The change (reset) switch 536 is disposed on the right side in the area of the main control board 530. Thus, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 can be arranged closer to the hinge mechanism 503. In FIG. 98, since the left side in the figure is the open side, if it is formed as shown in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are located far from the open side (the left side in the figure). Can be arranged.

  In the slot machine 10 as well, the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are set on the main control board 50 when the front door 12 is opened. It is preferable to arrange them so as to be shifted. For example, when the main control board 50 is arranged as shown in FIG. 22 and the front door 12 is viewed from the front side (player) side, the left side is the rotation axis side of the front door 12 and the right side is the open side. When the door 12 is opened and the main control board 50 is viewed, it looks as shown in FIG. Therefore, if the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are arranged on the left side in FIG. 10A, the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) are located far from the open side of the front door 12. A switch 153 can be provided.

Furthermore, as a countermeasure to make it difficult to shift to the setting change state due to goto action, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port 534, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise. Thus, the setting key switch 535 may be turned on. In this case, if the configuration key is configured to be rotatable clockwise and the configuration key is not rotated when the configuration key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the configuration changed state is difficult to understand. be able to.
In particular, when the key is inserted into the key insertion slot 521 and the front frame 502 is opened, the front frame 502 can be opened by rotating the key clockwise. The direction of rotation of the key and the direction of rotation of the setting key are opposite to each other, making it difficult to recognize the transition to the setting change state.

The same applies to the slot machine 10.
After the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key switch 152 may be turned on by rotating the setting key counterclockwise. In this case, if the configuration key is configured to be rotatable clockwise and the configuration key is not rotated when the configuration key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the configuration changed state is difficult to understand. be able to.
In particular, when the front door 12 is opened, if the key is rotated clockwise to open the front door 12, the rotation direction of the key when the front door 12 is opened and the rotation direction of the setting key will be described. In the opposite direction, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

FIG. 113 is a side sectional view showing the positional relationship among the upper case 560, the cover 561, the setting key insertion port 534, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 of the board case 550. In FIG. 113, as in FIG. 108, the cross section is not hatched from the viewpoint of the visibility of the drawing.
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 113, the highest surface of the upper case 560 is a surface S1, and the opening surfaces of the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are a surface S2. In this case, the surface S2 is formed lower than the surface S1. By forming in this manner, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion port 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536 by inserting a wire-like object from the outside, for example, the surface S1 is accessed rather than the surface S1. It is more difficult to access S2. Therefore, the set goto action can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 113, when the cover 561 is attached to the upper surface of the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536, the surface S3 (FIG. 113), which is the upper surface of the cover 561, , Is disposed at a position lower than the surface S1 of the upper cover 560.
By forming in this manner, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion port 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536, a wire-like object is inserted from between the upper cover 560 and the cover 561, Even if it is attempted to open the 561, such actions can be made difficult, so that the set goto action can be suppressed.

As described above, the nineteenth to twenty-second embodiments have been described. However, these embodiments are not limited to the contents described above, and for example, the following various modifications are possible.
A. Nineteenth Embodiment (1) In the nineteenth embodiment, a setting confirmation end sound may be output when the setting confirmation state ends. For example, outputting a voice saying "Setting confirmation is finished."
Furthermore, if the game is started at the same time as the end of the setting confirmation state,
a) The output of the setting confirmation end sound is ended before the end of the game when the game is completed in the shortest time.
b) The output of the setting confirmation end sound is ended before the end of the game when the game is ended in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game ended in the average time of one game in the game (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the jackpot (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) which has won the special role. Then, the output of the setting confirmation end sound ends.
It is set as follows.

(2) At the same time as the end of the setting confirmation state, an effect indicating that the setting confirmation state is ended is output by the effect lamp 21 (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the effect lamp 541 (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500). You may. Also in this case, similarly to the nineteenth embodiment, the effect time by the lamp is:
a) The ramp effect ends before the game ends when the game ends in the shortest time.
b) Before the game ends when the game is ended with the average time of one game, the ramp effect is ended.
c) Before the end of the game when the game ended in the average time of one game in the game (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the jackpot game (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) that has won the special role. , End the lamp effect.
And the like.

(3) When the setting change state is terminated (or when the setting confirmation state is terminated as in the above example), a setting change (or confirmation) end sound and a lamp effect are output. The end sound and the lamp effect are controlled by the sub-control board 80 or 540.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the setting change (or confirmation) state is ended, an output indicating that the setting change (or confirmation) state is ended is executed by an output device controlled by the main control board 50 or 530. May be.

(4) In the slot machine 10, the setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152) and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on the main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. A setting change board, and a setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152), a setting change (reset) switch 153, and a setting value display LED 73 may be provided on the setting change board.
The same applies to the pachinko gaming machine 500. A setting change board is provided separately from the main control board 530, and a setting key insertion port 534 (setting key switch 535), a setting change (reset) switch 536, and a setting value display LED 537 are provided on the setting change board. Is also good.

(5) As an example of the setting change end sound, the example of outputting the sound "End setting change" is shown, but the sound is not necessarily limited to this wording. For example, "Setting value has been updated" is used. There may be.
(6) In the nineteenth embodiment, an example in which the game is started immediately after the end of the setting change state is shown. However, it is assumed that the game is started immediately after the end of the setting change state during actual hall opening. I haven't. For example, it is assumed that the hall manager changes settings and then tries to play one game. In such a case, while confirming that the setting change state has been correctly terminated by the output of the setting change end sound and the effect lamp, the notification by the setting change end sound and the effect lamp should not be confused with the effect output in the game. Is one of the purposes.

B. Twentieth Embodiment (1) In the twentieth embodiment, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are brought into contact with each other to enable sliding movement. However, the method of engaging the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 before the sliding movement includes various methods, and is not limited to the method shown in FIG. Further, when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the shape may be such that they can overlap with a certain degree of freedom. Alternatively, the shape may be such that the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 overlap only at a specific position.

(2) How the connectors 539a to 539h are arranged on the main control board 530, and which connector foot is set to be exposed when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are in a temporarily fitted state. And various methods.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 slide and move as in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the connector legs that are first exposed are the connector legs 539g ′ and 539h ′. Therefore, in the case of the connector 539a provided symmetrically with the connectors 539g and 539h on the main control board 530, even if the sliding movement amount increases, the connector legs are not exposed.

  Therefore, for example, on the main control board 530, in FIG. 103, from the connector 539a side (the left side in the figure), a connector important in terms of security (a connector having a signal line for starting, a signal for receiving and paying out game media). (A connector having a signal line, a connector having a signal line relating to the output of an external signal, and a connector having a signal line relating to production) are sequentially arranged, and connectors of signal lines which are not so important in terms of security are adopted as connectors 539g and 539h. It is mentioned.

  (3) Although the substrate case 550 has the caulked portions 562 and 572, the present embodiment can be applied to a substrate case 550 having no caulked portion. For example, a board case accommodating the sub-control board 540 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 may not have a caulking portion, but the twentieth embodiment can be applied to such a board case.

C. Twenty-First Embodiment (1) The types and numbers of the connectors and the types and numbers of the harnesses (connector terminals) shown in the above-described embodiments are examples, and are not limited thereto.
For example, in FIG. 111, all of the harnesses B and C may be configured with thick lead wires, or may be configured with all thin lead wires.
Further, the harness E has been described as an example in which only thin lead wires are arranged in one line, but a harness and a connector terminal in which two or more thin lead wires are arranged may be used.
Furthermore, the harness and the connector terminal may be in any number of rows, and the number of lead wires (terminals) in one row may be any number.
Further, in a harness in which a thick lead wire and a thin lead wire coexist in one row, the number of the thick lead wires in the row may be one or more, and the number of the thin lead wires may be one or more.

(2) In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, a set of lead wires connected to one connector of the main control board 530 is referred to as “one harness”.
For example, the harness G connected to the connector 539g is a single harness, and the harness H connected to the connector 539h is a single harness. When the harness G and the harness H are bound together at one end, they are referred to as a “harness group” and not as a “single harness”.

(3) When the main control board 530 is connected to another board by a harness, a specific connector is mounted on the main control board 530, and the specific connector is connected to a harness composed of N lead wires. Assume that the connector terminals are connected.
On the other hand, at the other end of the harness, N lead wires are divided into Nx (Nx ≧ 1) and Ny (Ny ≧ 1), and a connector terminal X is attached to the tip of the Nx lead wires. The connector terminal X is connected to another board, and a connector terminal Y (≠ connector terminal X) is attached to the tip of Ny lead wires, and the connector terminal Y is connected to another board (Nx leads It is assumed that the line is connected to the same substrate as the connected substrate or to a different substrate).
In this case, “one harness” in the present embodiment indicates a set of N lead wires connected to the main control board 530 side.

D. Twenty-second embodiment (1) In the pachinko gaming machine 500, it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation state with. Also in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the frame release switch 523 is on, and shift to the setting confirmation state on condition that it is on.

  (2) As described above, there may be a case where a setting change board is provided on a board different from the main control board 50 or 530. In this case, in the case of the slot machine 10, the setting is changed to the open axis side of the front door 12 (closer to the open axis) inside the housing, in other words, to the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. It is preferable to dispose a substrate. Similarly, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the setting is made on the back side of the front frame 502 toward the hinge mechanism 503 (closer to the hinge mechanism 503), in other words, on the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. Preferably, a change substrate is arranged. With this arrangement, the setting key insertion holes 151 and 534 and the setting change (reset) switches 153 and 536 can be arranged at positions far from the open ends. Also in this case, it is preferable that the main control board 50 or 530 is disposed at a position far from the open end.

In particular, although the management information display LED 74 or 538 is mounted on the main control board 50 or 530, it is preferable that the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 is not easily seen. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 at a position away from the open side, and also to arrange the main control board 50 or 530 at a position away from the open end.
However, by merely arranging the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 at a position away from the open side, the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 is not easily seen. Is also possible. Similarly, even when the management information display LED 74 or 538 is mounted at a substantially central position of the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, the management information display LED 74 or 538 is simply arranged at a position distant from the open end. It is also possible to make the information displayed by the display LED 74 or 538 invisible easily.

  E. FIG. All the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification including the nineteenth to twenty-second embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<23rd embodiment>
The twenty-third embodiment relates to an effect lamp (decorative lamp unit) 541.
Here, the term “substantially the same” is a concept including those that are approximately the same but are not completely the same due to manufacturing errors and the like, and those that are not completely the same but appear visually the same. Further, “substantially the same” is a concept including “the same”.
The description of the twenty-third embodiment partially overlaps with the nineteenth embodiment (B), but will be described again.
FIG. 114 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and FIG. 115 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  FIG. 116 is a front view of the right base member 650 in a state where upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 are removed, and FIG. 117 is an upper side of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622. FIG. 118 is a right side perspective view of the right base member 650 with parts removed, and FIG. 118 is a rear view of the right base member 650 with upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed. It is.

  119 is an enlarged front upper view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, and FIG. 120 is an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622. FIG. 121 is an enlarged top perspective view of the right base member 650 with the upper part removed from the left side, and FIG. 121 is a right base member with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed. FIG. 650 is an enlarged view of the upper part on the left side of FIG.

FIG. 122 is an enlarged bottom view of the upper portion of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed, and FIG. 123 is an enlarged sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 119.
FIG. 124 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613, the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover 622, and the right frame lamp substrate 621 removed, and is a view corresponding to FIG.
FIG. 125 is an enlarged rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed and the right frame lamp cover 622 attached.
FIG. 126 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a rectangular frame-shaped outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown), and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501. It has.
A game board 504 is attached to the center of the front frame 502 with a game area (not shown) facing the front side. A glass door (glass frame) 505 is attached so as to cover the game area of the game board 504.

Further, on the front side of the front frame 502 and below the glass door 505, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508, and the like are attached.
Further, a hinge mechanism 503 is provided on the left side of the outer frame 501.
The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 so as to be openable and closable, and the glass door 505 is attached to the front frame 502 by a hinge mechanism 503 so as to be openable and closable.

On the right side of the front frame 502, a locking device (not shown) is provided, and on the right side of the glass door 505, a key insertion port 521 into which a key for operating the locking device is inserted is provided. .
Then, when the front frame 502 is closed with respect to the outer frame 501 and a key is inserted from the key insertion slot 521 and the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502 are unlocked, the front frame 502 is The hinge mechanism 503 can be opened (moved) forward (toward the player) with respect to the outer frame 501 around the center axis.

When the front frame 502 is opened to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, the glass door 505, the upper plate 506, the lower plate 507, the firing handle 508, and the like attached to the front frame 502 are moved forward. Together with the frame 502, it moves forward with respect to the outer frame 501 around the hinge mechanism 503 as a central axis.
When the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, whereby the opening of the front frame 502 is detected.

When a key is inserted from the key insertion port 521 and the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are unlocked in a state where the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502, the glass door 505 becomes With the hinge mechanism 503 as a central axis, the front mechanism 502 can be opened forward with respect to the front frame 502.
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door opening switch 522 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, whereby the opening of the glass door 505 is detected.

In the game area of the game board 504, a starting port 532, a special symbol display device 531 and an image display device 543 are provided (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)).
Furthermore, in the center of the glass door 505, two transparent glass plates (not shown) are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and an upper part on the front side of the glass door 505, a right side part, and An effect lamp (decorative lamp unit) 541 is attached to the left side so as to surround the periphery of the glass plate.
Further, when the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502, the glass plate is located in front of the game area of the game board 504. Thereby, the game area of the game board 504 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 through the glass plate.

  As shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the effect lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541 includes an upper frame lamp portion 610 arranged along the upper front edge of the glass door 505 and a right end edge of the front surface of the glass door 505. And a left frame ramp 630 arranged along the left edge of the front surface of the glass door 505.

That is, the upper frame lamp portion 610 is a decorative lamp portion formed in a horizontally elongated shape from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front part of the glass door 505.
The right frame lamp section 620 is a decorative lamp section formed in a vertically long shape from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the right front portion of the glass door 505.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp portion 630 is a decorative lamp portion formed in a vertically long shape from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the glass door 505.

Further, the right end of the upper frame ramp 610 and the upper end of the right frame ramp 620 are continuous, and the left end of the upper frame ramp 610 and the upper end of the left frame ramp 630 are continuous.
Thereby, the upper edge, the right edge, and the left edge of the glass plate disposed in the center of the glass door 505 are surrounded by the upper frame lamp 610, the right frame lamp 620, and the left frame lamp 630. .

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the upper frame lamp section 610 includes an upper frame right lamp substrate 611, an upper frame left lamp substrate 612, and an upper frame lamp cover 613.
The upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is a connector 642a to which a light emitting element (also referred to as “light emitting means”) for emitting light on the right side of the upper frame lamp section 610 and a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are connected. Reference numeral b denotes a mounted lamp substrate, which is disposed on the upper right side of the upper front surface of the glass door 505 with the light-emitting element mounting surface facing the front side (player side).

The upper frame left lamp substrate 612 is a lamp substrate on which a light emitting element for emitting light on the left side of the upper frame lamp unit 610 and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal is connected are mounted. The glass door 505 is disposed on the left side of the upper front side with the mounting surface of the element facing the front side.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 116, 119 and 120, four LEDs 641a to 64d are mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 as light emitting elements. Although not shown, four LEDs are mounted on the upper frame left lamp board 612 as light emitting elements, similarly to the upper frame right lamp board 611. These LEDs are all full-color LEDs.

In addition, the full-color LED includes three LEDs, one that emits red light, one that emits green light, and one that emits blue light. By adjusting the outputs of these three LEDs, full color can be expressed. Things.
That is, a light emitting element that emits red light, a light emitting element that emits green light, and a light emitting element that emits blue light are provided. By adjusting the outputs of these three light emitting elements, light emission capable of expressing full color is provided. The means is a full color LED.

Further, the light emitting element mounting surfaces of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are configured in white.
Specifically, a white coating film is formed on the entire surface of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 on which the light emitting elements are mounted. Further, the white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or performing silk screen printing (also referred to as silk printing or screen printing).

The upper frame lamp cover 613 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612, and as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the front surface of the glass door 505. Mounted on top.
Further, the upper frame lamp cover 613 has a horizontally long shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front part of the glass door 505, and is formed of a colorless and translucent resin.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 613 faces the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612. For this reason, light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 irradiates the upper frame lamp cover 613. Thus, when the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 emit light, the upper frame lamp cover 613 appears to glow.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is formed of a colorless and translucent resin. Therefore, the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 can be seen through the upper frame lamp cover 613. Therefore, if the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are made of, for example, green or black, the appearance of the upper frame lamp portion 610 becomes poor when the light emitting elements are turned off. When the light-emitting element emits light, the light-emitting element may emit light of a color different from the set color and may be seen.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the entire surface of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 on which the light emitting elements are mounted is made white. Thus, even if the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 can be seen through the upper frame lamp cover 613, the appearance of the upper frame lamp portion 610 is not deteriorated. Can be.
Further, by forming the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 in white, light emitted from the light emitting element can be transmitted to the upper frame lamp cover by the light emitting element mounting surface. The light is efficiently reflected toward the 613 side. Thus, the upper frame lamp cover 613 can be made to look brighter. Furthermore, by forming the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element with white, the color development of the light emitting element can be seen clearly. In particular, when the light-emitting element emits light, it can be made to emit light in the set color and look.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the right frame lamp section 620 includes a right frame lamp substrate 621 and a right frame lamp cover 622.
The right frame lamp substrate 621 is a lamp substrate on which a light emitting element for causing the right frame lamp portion 620 to emit light and a connector 642c to which a harness for transmitting a control signal is connected are mounted. The glass door 505 is disposed on the front right side with the mounting surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the right front part of the glass door 505.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, seven LEDs 641e to 64k are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper part of the right frame lamp substrate 621. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the lower part of the right frame lamp substrate 621 as light emitting elements. These LEDs are all full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp substrate 621 is configured in white. Forming a white coating by applying a white resist or silk screen printing on the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element of the right frame lamp substrate 621 is the same as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611.

The right frame lamp cover 622 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 621, and is attached to the right front side of the glass door 505 as shown in FIGS.
The right frame lamp cover 622 has a vertically long shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the right side of the front surface of the glass door 505, and is formed of a colorless and translucent resin.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 622 faces the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp substrate 621. For this reason, light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 621 irradiates the right frame lamp cover 622. As a result, when the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 emits light, the right frame lamp cover 622 appears to glow.

  By making the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element of the right frame lamp substrate 621 white, the appearance of the right frame lamp section 620 is not deteriorated, and the light emitted from the light emitting element is transmitted to the right frame lamp 621. Making the right frame lamp cover 622 shine more brightly by making the light efficiently reflected toward the cover 622 side and making the color of the light emitting element look clearer can be achieved by the above-described upper frame lamp section 610. Is the same as

Further, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the left frame lamp portion 630 includes a left frame lamp substrate 631 and a left frame lamp cover 632.
The left frame lamp board 631 is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the left frame lamp section 630 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal is transmitted are connected. The glass door 505 is disposed on the front left side with the surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the left frame lamp substrate 631 is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the left front part of the glass door 505.
Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 631 as light emitting elements. These LEDs are all full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 631 is configured in white. Forming a white coating by applying or printing a white resist on the entire surface of the left frame lamp substrate 631 on which the light emitting elements are mounted is the same as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611.

The left frame lamp cover 632 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (the player side) of the left frame lamp board 631, and is attached to the left front part of the glass door 505 as shown in FIGS.
The left frame lamp cover 632 has a vertically long shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left portion of the glass door 505, and is formed of a colorless and translucent resin.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 632 faces the light emitting element mounting surface of the left frame lamp substrate 631. Therefore, light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 631 is applied to the left frame lamp cover 632. Thus, when the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 emits light, the left frame lamp cover 632 appears to glow.

  By configuring the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element of the left frame lamp substrate 631 in white, the appearance of the left frame lamp portion 630 is not deteriorated, and the light emitted from the light emitting element is transmitted to the left frame lamp 631. To make the left frame lamp cover 632 look brighter and brighter and make the color of the light emitting element look clearer by efficiently reflecting the light toward the cover 632 side, the above-described upper frame lamp portion 610 is used. Is the same as

The glass door (glass frame) 505 includes a right base member 650 (see FIGS. 116 to 121) and a left base member (not shown).
The right base member 650 is a member serving as a skeleton of a right portion of the glass door 505, and the left base member is a member serving as a skeleton of a left portion of the glass door 505. Further, the left base member is formed to be substantially symmetrical with the right base member 650. Then, the skeleton of the glass door 505 is configured by the right base member 650 and the left base member.

As shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 to which the upper frame right lamp board 611 is mounted and a right portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 are mounted on the upper front surface of the right base member 650. An upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 is provided.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, a right frame substrate mounting portion 653 to which a right frame lamp substrate 621 is mounted and a right frame to which a right frame lamp cover 622 is mounted are provided on the right front portion of the right base member 650. A cover attachment portion 654 is provided.

Although not shown, an upper frame left substrate mounting portion to which the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 is mounted and an upper frame left cover mounting portion to which the left portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is mounted are provided on the upper front surface of the left base member. Is provided.
Further, although not shown, a left frame substrate mounting portion to which the left frame lamp substrate 631 is mounted and a left frame cover mounting portion to which the left frame lamp cover 632 is mounted are provided on the left front portion of the left base member. .

Then, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, the upper frame left lamp substrate 612, the upper frame lamp cover 613, the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, the upper frame left substrate mounting portion (not shown), the upper frame right cover mounting portion 652, The upper frame lamp portion 610 is constituted by the upper frame left cover attaching portion (not shown).
As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached so as to straddle the upper front surface of the right base member 650 and the upper front surface of the left base member.
The right frame lamp board 621, the right frame lamp cover 622, the right frame board mounting section 653, and the right frame cover mounting section 654 constitute a right frame lamp section 620.
Further, a left frame lamp portion 630 is configured by the left frame lamp substrate 631, the left frame lamp cover 632, the left frame substrate attachment portion (not shown), and the left frame cover attachment portion (not shown).

The upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651 is a portion to which the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is mounted, and is provided on the upper front surface of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS.
As shown in FIGS. 120 to 122, the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651 is provided with a substrate support rib 661 a shaped along the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611. The substrate supporting rib 661a is for supporting the upper frame right lamp substrate 611. When the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is arranged at a predetermined position of the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is mounted on the substrate support rib 661a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 116, FIG. 117, FIG. 119 and FIG. 120, three positioning bosses 682a to 682c are provided in the upper frame right side substrate mounting portion 651. These positioning bosses 682a to 682c are used when positioning the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 at a predetermined position of the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, and are formed in a columnar shape.
Further, as shown in FIG. 123, a screw boss 681 is provided in the upper frame right side substrate mounting portion 651. The screw boss 681 is used when fixing the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. A screw hole 684 is provided at the center of the screw boss 681.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123, a positioning hole 685a is provided at a position corresponding to the positioning boss 682a on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611. The positioning hole 685a is a hole into which a positioning boss 682a is inserted when positioning the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 at a predetermined position of the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, and is provided on one side of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611. It penetrates from the surface to the other surface.
As shown in FIG. 123, a fixing hole 686a is provided at a position corresponding to the screw boss 681 on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611. The fixing hole 686a is a hole used when fixing the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, and extends from one surface of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the other surface. Penetrates.

  When the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a from the side opposite to the mounting surface of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is positioned at a predetermined position of the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651. At this time, the position of the screw hole 684 provided at the center of the screw boss 681 matches the position of the fixing hole 686a. Then, a screw 683a is inserted into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, and the screw 683a is screwed into the screw hole 684, whereby the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is attached to the upper frame right substrate. It is fixed to the portion 651.

As shown in FIG. 123, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a are provided close to each other.
In the present embodiment, the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a is set to be larger than the diameter of the positioning boss 682a. The fixing hole 686a is formed in a circular shape, and the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a.

Furthermore, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an elliptical shape, the minor diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the positioning boss 682a, and the major diameter of the positioning hole 685a is It is set larger than the diameter of the screw shaft 688.
Further, the opening area of the positioning hole 685a is set to be different from the opening area of the fixing hole 686a. In the present embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.

Thus, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a have different shapes and different opening areas. Thus, when fixing the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a can be prevented from being confused, and the assembling work can be smoothly performed. I am trying to be.
In addition, since the short diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set smaller than the diameter of the screw shaft 688, the screw shaft 688 cannot be inserted into the positioning hole 685a. The hole 686a is not mistaken.

  Also, when the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a and the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is positioned at a predetermined position of the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the positioning boss 682a Protrudes toward the mounting surface of the LED 641a on the right frame lamp substrate 611 of the upper frame. The tip of the positioning boss 682a projecting toward the mounting surface of the LED 641a is referred to as a projecting portion 687. The protruding portion 687 is formed in a convex curved surface (dome shape). Thus, the light emitted from the LED 641a is reflected by the protruding portion 687 formed in a convex curved shape, so that the upper frame lamp portion 610 appears to shine neatly.

Further, a screw 683a is inserted into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, and the screw 683a is screwed into the screw hole 684, so that the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is connected to the upper frame right substrate. When fixed to the mounting portion 651, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is exposed on the mounting surface side of the LED 641a in the upper frame right lamp board 611.
As shown in FIG. 123, the height T1 of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set to be larger than the height T2 of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a.

That is, when the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is “T1”, and the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is “T2”, “T1> T2” is set. .
That is, the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set larger than that of the LED 641a.

  Further, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a has been subjected to a surface treatment for reflecting light emitted from the LED 641a. Specifically, as a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 641a, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is plated with silver. Examples of the silver plating include silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

  As described above, the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set to be larger than the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a, and further, the screw head 689 is subjected to a surface treatment for reflecting light, thereby emitting light from the LED 641a. The reflected light is reflected by the screw head 689 of the screw 683a, so that the upper frame lamp section 610 looks bright and luminous.

The upper frame right cover attachment portion 652 is a portion to which the right portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached, and is provided on the upper front surface of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS.
Further, a cover fitting groove 662a is provided in the upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652. The cover fitting groove 662 a is a groove into which the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 fits, and is formed along the upper edge of the right base member 650. Then, the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662a, and the upper frame lamp cover 613 is screwed from the back side of the right base member 650. Fixed to

The right frame substrate mounting portion 653 is a portion to which the right frame lamp substrate 621 is mounted, and is provided on the right front portion of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS.
As shown in FIG. 124, the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 is provided with substrate support ribs 661b to 661b along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp substrate 621. These substrate support ribs 661b to 661e are for supporting the right frame lamp substrate 621. When the right frame lamp board 621 is arranged at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion 653, the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621 is mounted on the board supporting ribs 661b to 661e.

As shown in FIGS. 116, 117, 119, and 120, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is provided with a positioning hole 685b and a fixing hole 686b close to each other.
The positioning hole 685b is a hole into which a positioning boss is inserted when positioning the right frame lamp substrate 621 at a predetermined position of the right frame substrate mounting portion 653, and is positioned from one surface of the right frame lamp substrate 621 to the other side. It penetrates to the surface.
The fixing hole 686b is a hole used when fixing the right frame lamp substrate 621 to the right frame substrate mounting portion 653, and penetrates from one surface of the right frame lamp substrate 621 to the other surface. .

Although not shown, a positioning boss is provided at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 685b in the right frame substrate mounting portion 653, and a screw boss is provided at a position corresponding to the fixing hole 686b. ing. Then, when the positioning boss provided on the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 is inserted into the positioning hole 685b, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame substrate mounting portion 653. Then, a screw is inserted into the fixing hole 686b from the mounting surface side of the LEDs 641e to 64k on the right frame lamp board 621, and this screw is screwed to a screw boss provided in the right frame board mounting portion 653. The board 621 is fixed to the right frame board mounting portion 653.
In FIG. 116, FIG. 117, FIG. 119, and FIG. 120, illustration of the positioning boss and the screw is omitted to make the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b easy to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, in this embodiment, both the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are formed in a circular shape. Furthermore, the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686b is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 685b. Therefore, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b is different from the opening area of the positioning hole 685b. Specifically, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b is set to be larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685b.
Thus, when fixing the right frame lamp board 621 to the right frame board mounting portion 653, the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are not mistaken, so that the assembling operation can be smoothly performed. .

The right frame cover mounting portion 654 is a portion to which the right frame lamp cover 622 is mounted, and is provided on the right front portion of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS. 119, 120, and 124.
The right frame cover mounting portion 654 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662b. The cover fitting groove 662b is a groove into which the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 fits, and is formed along the right edge of the right base member 650.

Then, by fitting the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 into the cover fitting groove 662b and screwing the right frame lamp cover 622 from the back surface side of the right base member 650, as shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. The cover 622 is fixed to the right frame cover attaching portion 654.
As shown in FIGS. 118 and 125, the left edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 (the edge on the game board 504 side) covers the outside of the left edge of the right base member 650 (the edge on the game board 504 side). It is formed as follows.

Further, as described above, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape (see FIG. 116), and the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 has a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp substrate 621. (See FIG. 124). The width W1 in the short direction of the right frame lamp board 621 (FIG. 116) is substantially the same as the width W2 of the right frame board mounting portion 653 in the short direction (FIG. 124).
That is, when the width in the short direction of the right frame lamp board 621 is “W1”, and the width in the short direction of the right frame board mounting portion 653 is “W2”, “W1 ≒ W2” is satisfied. Have been. Thus, the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 is covered with the right frame lamp substrate 621.

The entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the right frame lamp substrate 621 is made of white. The entire surface of the mounting surface of the element can be made to function as a reflection plate, so that the coloring of the light emitting element can be seen clearly.
The “substantially rectangular shape” means “approximately rectangular shape”. Therefore, if it is a substantially rectangular shape, for example, there may be irregularities in the middle of the long side or the short side, or all or a part of the long side or the short side may be curved or inclined, Further, the corners need not be right angles, and further, the corners may be rounded. Further, “substantially rectangular” is a concept including “rectangle”.

Further, the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 is formed in a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp substrate 621, and the right frame cover mounting portion 654 is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame substrate mounting portion 653. Is formed. The edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 on the right frame cover mounting portion 654 side is formed in a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp substrate 621.
For this reason, when the right frame lamp board 621 is attached to the right frame board attachment portion 653 and the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached to the right frame cover attachment portion 654, the entire inside of the right frame lamp cover 622 becomes the right frame lamp. It appears to be covered by the substrate 621. Therefore, even if the molding color of the right base member 650 is not white (for example, even if it is black), the entire inside of the right frame lamp cover 622 looks white, and the light emitting element appears to emit light neatly.

As shown in FIG. 115, a lens unit 670 is provided at a position on the right frame lamp cover 622 facing the right frame lamp substrate 621. As shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and (b), the lens portion 670 is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness.
FIG. 126A shows a partial cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622, and FIG. 126B shows another partial cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622. Is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), the lens portion 670 has the same thickness at all portions, but has different curvatures depending on the portions.
As described above, by making the shape of the lens portion 670 into a shape in which curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness are connected to each other, the manufacturing cost of the mold for forming the right frame lamp cover 622 can be reduced, Light emission of the light emitting element can be seen clearly.
In addition, the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the left frame lamp cover 632 also have a lens portion at a position facing the lamp substrate, and the lens portions are formed by joining curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. The shape is the same as that of the right frame lamp cover 622.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, and a pachinko gaming machine 500 of the slot machine 10. A sub control board (effect control board, effect board) 540 corresponding to the sub control board 80 and a payout control board (prize ball control board) 520 are provided.
The main control board 530 controls the progress of the game, the sub control board 540 controls the output of the effect, and the payout control board 520 controls the operation of the payout device 524. These control boards are all connected to a harness.

The sub-control board 540 is connected to the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 by harness connection.
The sub-control board 540 controls light emission of the light-emitting elements mounted on these lamp boards.
Note that a connector mounted on these lamp boards is used for the harness connection between the sub-control board 540 and these lamp boards.

Specifically, the sub-control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530, determines the effect contents based on the command transmitted from the main control board 530, and controls to output the determined effect. At this time, the sub-control board 540 controls light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631.
The sub-control board 540 includes a sub-main board that controls the entire effect, and a sub-sub board that controls the image display of the image display device 23.

  As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 530 includes a start port switch 533 for detecting that a game ball has won a start port 532 provided in the game area of the game board 504. Are connected (see FIG. 99). When the game ball wins the starting opening 532 and detects that the starting opening switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value, executes various lotteries based on the acquired random number value, and displays a special symbol display device. The variable display of the special symbol in 531 is started. Then, the main control board 530 determines the variation time and the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 based on the result of the various lotteries, and the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 corresponding to the determination. Control the display.

Specifically, the main control board 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has been won in the starting port 532 (the starting port switch 533 has been turned on) (step S741 in FIG. 102). Then, when determining that the starting port switch 533 has been turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value and, based on the acquired random number value, a jackpot lottery (a jackpot or missed lottery), a special symbol. A lottery (a lottery to determine which symbol is a special symbol to be stopped) and a variation pattern lottery (a lottery for a time for displaying a special symbol in a variable manner) are executed (step S742 in FIG. 102).
Further, when executing the above-described various lotteries, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating at least a part of the lottery result to the sub-control board 540. Then, when receiving the command indicating the lottery result, the sub-control board 540 controls the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Specifically, the main control board 530 transmits a command (big hit command) indicating that a big hit has been made to the sub-control board 540 when a big hit is won in the big hit lottery.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the jackpot command, the sub-control board 540 sets the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to the big jackpot. Is emitted in a light emission pattern corresponding to.
In addition, as a light emitting pattern corresponding to the jackpot, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within a range of “0” to “255”. Thereby, the light emitting element can emit light in a so-called rainbow color, and it is possible to notify a player that a jackpot has been won by a jackpot lottery.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is formed of white. Therefore, the color of the light emitting element can be seen clearly by causing the light emitting element to emit light in a rainbow color at the time of the big hit.
When a big hit occurs, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the big hit. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 may emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the jackpot, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may be used. The element may emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the jackpot.

When a big hit occurs, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the big hit, and the right frame lamp board 621 and The light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light.
By setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to “255”, the light emitting element can emit white light.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the door release switch 522 and the frame release switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520 (see FIG. 99).
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When detecting that the door open switch 522 is on, the main control board 530 transmits a command (door open command) indicating that the door open switch 522 is on to the sub control board 540.
When receiving the door opening command, the sub-control board 540 turns the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 into white. Control to emit light.

When the front frame 502 is released, the frame release switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When detecting that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the main control board 530 transmits a command (frame opening command) indicating that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on to the sub control board 540.
Upon receiving the frame release command, the sub-control board 540 turns the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 into white. Control to emit light.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to “255”, the light emitting element can emit white light.
Further, when the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is detected to be on, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 emits white light, so that the glass door 505 and the front frame are turned off. The hall clerk can be notified that 502 is open.

  Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is formed of white. Therefore, when the light-emitting element emits white light, it is conspicuous, so that the clerk of the hall can easily notice that the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open.

Note that when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, a light-emitting element mounted on one or more lamp substrates among the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 621 and the left frame lamp substrate 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp substrates may emit white light. Is also good.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, the light-emitting elements may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the time when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the game ball wins the starting port 532 and detects that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value, and based on the acquired random number value. , A jackpot lottery (a lottery or a lottery lottery), a special symbol lottery (a lottery to determine which symbol is the stop symbol of the special symbol), and a variation pattern lottery (a lottery for changing the time to display the special symbol). At the same time, the special symbol display device 531 starts the special symbol change display.

In addition, the main control board 530 determines the special symbol change time and the stop symbol in the special symbol display device 531 based on the results of the various lotteries, and the special symbol display device 531 in the special symbol display device 531 corresponds to the determination. Controls the display of symbols.
Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the game ball wins the starting port 532 and detects that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, one game starts, and the special symbol display device 531 finishes the change display of the special symbol, When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, one game may end.

Further, when executing the above-described various lotteries, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating at least a part of the lottery result to the sub-control board 540. Then, when receiving the command indicating the lottery result, the sub-control board 540 controls the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.
More specifically, when a win is determined in the jackpot lottery, the main control board 530 transmits a command (missing command) indicating the loss to the sub-control board 540.

Further, upon receiving the out-of-position command, the sub-control board 540 executes an effect pattern lottery at the time of the out-of-position (a lottery to select either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2).
The sub-control board 540 is mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 in a manner according to the result of the effect pattern lottery. The light emitting element is controlled to emit light, and the red LED mounted on the decorative board on the game board 504 is controlled to emit light.

FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (b) show an effect pattern at the time of a loss in the jackpot lottery, (a) is a time chart showing an effect pattern 1 at the time of a loss, and (b) is a time chart. 6 is a time chart showing an effect pattern 2 at the time of a loss.
127 (a) and (b), “LED1” indicates the LEDs 641e to 641k (all are full-color LEDs) mounted on the right frame lamp board 621, and “LED2” indicates the upper frame right side lamp board 611. The mounted LEDs 641a to 641d (all are full color LEDs) are shown.

  127 (a) and 127 (b), “LED3” indicates one red LED mounted on a board provided with decoration on the game board 504, and “LED4” indicates decoration on the game board 504. 2 shows another red LED mounted on the substrate provided in the LED. The mounting surface of the red LED on the board provided with the decoration on the game board 504 is configured in green.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to 10 seconds both when the effect pattern 1 is determined and when the effect pattern 2 is determined.
As shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 1 (the LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) is turned on (ON) at the same time as the start of the change of the special symbol. Turns off (off) before the end of the special symbol change. In the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 1 is set to 6 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 2 (the LEDs 641a to 641d mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611) lights up after the start of the change of the special symbol. Before the end of the change of the special symbol, the light is turned off at the same time when the LED 1 is turned off. In the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 2 is set to 1 second.
Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 3 (one red LED mounted on the board provided with the decoration on the game board 504) has the special symbol variation. It turns on after the start and turns off before the end of the special symbol change. In the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 3 is set to 2 seconds.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 4 (the other red LED mounted on the board provided with the decoration on the game board 504) starts to change the special symbol. After that, the light is turned on at the same time as the lighting of the LED3, and before the end of the change of the special symbol, and turned off at the same time as the lighting of the LED2. In the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 127 (b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, similarly to the effect pattern 1, the LED 1 is turned on at the same time as the start of the special symbol change, and the end of the special symbol change. Turns off earlier. Also, in the effect pattern 2, the lighting time of the LED 1 is set to 6 seconds, as in the effect pattern 1.
Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 2 does not light, unlike when the effect pattern 1 is determined. Therefore, in the effect pattern 2, the lighting time of the LED 2 is 0 second.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 3 is turned on after the start of the change of the special symbol, and before the end of the change of the special symbol, and the LED 1 is turned off. It turns off at the same time. In the effect pattern 2, the lighting time of the LED 3 is set to 4 seconds.
Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 4 is turned on at the same time as the turning on of the LED 3 after the start of the change of the special symbol, and after the end of the change of the special symbol. It is turned off before the LED 3 is turned off. In addition, in the effect pattern 2, as in the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a game in which the jackpot lottery has been lost, either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is determined by the effect pattern lottery, and the LEDs 1 to 4 emit light according to the determined effect pattern. Control.
Then, the LED 1 is turned on (emits light) for 6 seconds when the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is determined.
For this reason, the average value of the time during which the LED 1 is turned on (emit light) in the game shifted in the jackpot lottery is 6 seconds.

The LED 2 is turned on for one second when the effect pattern 1 is determined, and is not turned on when the effect pattern 2 is determined.
For this reason, the average value of the time in which the LED 3 is turned on in the game which is shifted in the jackpot lottery is 1 second or less.
Furthermore, the LED 3 is turned on for 2 seconds when the effect pattern 1 is determined, and is turned on for 4 seconds when the effect pattern 2 is determined.
Therefore, the average value of the time during which the LED 4 is turned on in the game that is shifted in the jackpot lottery is 2 seconds or more and 4 seconds or less.

Further, the LED 4 is lit (light-emitting) for 3 seconds when the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is determined.
For this reason, the average value of the time during which the LED 4 is turned on in the game that is shifted in the jackpot lottery is 3 seconds.
As described above, the average value of the time during which the LED 1 is turned on in the game that is shifted in the jackpot lottery is set to be longer than the average value of the time that the LEDs 2 to 4 are turned on in the game that is shifted in the jackpot lottery.

  As described above, the entire surface of the right frame lamp substrate 621 on which the LEDs 641e to 641k are mounted is made white, and the right frame lamp cover 622 is made of a colorless and translucent resin. For this reason, the light emission of LED1 (LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) can be seen clearly, so that even in games that have been lost in the jackpot lottery, a beautiful effect using the LED1 can be shown. it can.

As described above, the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention has been described, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and for example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) In the twenty-third embodiment, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 is made of a colorless and translucent resin. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
The lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may have a colorless or white and translucent portion.

Therefore, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be entirely colorless and translucent, or may be entirely white and translucent.
Further, in the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613, for example, only a portion corresponding to the front of the light emitting element is colorless and has translucency, and the other portions are colored and translucent such as red and blue. It may have a light-transmitting property and may not have a light-transmitting property.
Further, in the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613, for example, only the portion corresponding to the front of the light emitting element is white and has translucency, and the other portions are colored and translucent such as red and blue. It may have a light transmitting property or may not have a light transmitting property.

Furthermore, all or a part of the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be configured to be visible in substantially the same or similar color as one emission color of the full-color LED as the light emitting means.
Specifically, for example, the LEDs 641e to 641k of the right frame lamp substrate 621 are set to output blue (red (R) output value “0”, green (G) output value “0”, and blue (B) output value “ 255 "), and the entire right frame lamp cover 622 is made of a blue resin that looks substantially the same color as the LEDs 641e to 641k emit blue light, or a blue resin that looks similar to the above blue color. It can be made of resin.

Due to a manufacturing error, the color of the right frame lamp cover 622 is, for example, a red (R) output value “0”, a green (G) output value “0”, and a blue (B) output value “250”. In some cases, the emission color may be the same as the emission color at the time, and the emission color when the output value of red (R) is “5”, the output value of green (G) is “5”, and the output value of blue (B) is “255”. It may be the same color as.
In consideration of such a point, it is described as “substantially the same color”.
Note that “substantially the same color” is a concept including “the same color”. Further, “substantially the same color” is a concept including a color that is not completely the same color but appears to be the same color in appearance.
FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating substantially the same color using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE (International Commission on Illumination) standard color system (XYZ color system).
FIG. 128 shows a range of “substantially the same color” as blue, taking blue as an example.
In FIG. 128, black circles indicate blue (red (R) output value “0”, green (G) output value “0”, blue (B) output value “255”), and a circle around the black circle Indicates an example of a range of “substantially the same color” as blue.

The “similar color” is a concept that does not include the target color but includes colors near the target color.
FIG. 129 is a view for explaining similar colors using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system.
FIG. 129 shows the range of blue “similar colors” using blue as an example.
In FIG. 129, white circles indicate blue (red (R) output value “0”, green (G) output value “0”, blue (B) output value “255”), and hatching around the white circle. Indicates an example of the range of blue “similar colors”.

Further, the range of the blue “similar color” is not limited to the range of the hatched circle in FIG. 129, and the range of the blue “similar color” is not limited to the range that a general player recognizes as blue. "Similar colors".
For example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. 129, when the x-axis is within a range from 0 to 0.2 and the y-axis is within a range from 0 to 0.3, a general player is blue. Therefore, it can be set to a range of blue “similar colors”.

The same applies to the range of “similar colors” other than blue.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. Therefore, the range of green “similar colors” can be used.
In addition, for example, in the chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. Is a range that is recognized as red, so that it can be a range of red “similar colors”.

Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, the mounting surface of the light emitting element (light emitting means) on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is entirely white, but at least a part thereof is substantially white. It should just be done.
For example, on the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641d on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, the periphery of the LEDs 641a to 641d may be substantially white, and the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 may be black.
Note that “substantially white” is a concept including “white”. Further, “substantially white” is a concept including a color that is not completely white but looks white in appearance.

  Even when at least a part of the lamp cover is configured to be visible in substantially the same or similar color as the emission color of the light emitting unit, at least a part of the mounting surface of the light emitting unit on the lamp substrate is substantially white. With this configuration, even if the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate can be seen through the lamp cover, the appearance can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the color of the light emitting means can be clearly seen. When the means emits light, it can be made to emit light in the color set as shown.

(2) In the twenty-third embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set to be larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the opening area of fixing hole 686a may be set smaller than the opening area of positioning hole 685a.
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a modification of the cross section taken along line AA of FIG. 119, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 123. As shown in FIG. 130, the diameter of the positioning boss 682a may be set larger than the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a. In this case, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a becomes smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, and the positioning boss 682a cannot be inserted into the fixing hole 686a. Even in this case, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a can be prevented from being mistaken.

(3) In the twenty-third embodiment, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an elliptical shape, but is not limited to this, and may be formed in a circular shape, for example.
(4) In the twenty-third embodiment, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is silver-plated as a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 64d, but is not limited thereto. As a surface treatment for reflecting light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 64d, for example, a white paint may be applied to the screw head 689 of the screw 683a.

(5) In the twenty-third embodiment, the upper frame lamp section 610 includes two upper frame right lamp substrates 611 and upper frame left lamp substrates 612 as lamp substrates. May be provided, or three or more lamp substrates may be provided.
In addition, the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be a single member integrally formed. For example, a first member (upper frame right member) located at a right portion, and a second member located at a central portion may be provided. It may be composed of three members: a member (upper frame center member) and a third member (upper frame left member) located on the left side.

(6) In the twenty-third embodiment, the right frame lamp unit 620 includes only one right frame lamp substrate 621 as a lamp substrate, but is not limited thereto, and may include two or more lamp substrates. .
Further, the right frame lamp cover 622 may be a single member formed integrally, and for example, a first member (right frame upper member) located on the upper portion and a first member located on the lower portion. Two members (lower right frame member) may be used.

(7) In the twenty-third embodiment, the left frame lamp unit 630 includes only one left frame lamp substrate 631 as a lamp substrate, but is not limited thereto, and may include two or more lamp substrates. .
That is, as described in the twenty-third embodiment and the modified examples (5) to (7), the upper frame lamp section 610, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 each have only one lamp substrate. It may be provided, or a plurality of lamp substrates may be provided.
Further, the left frame lamp cover 632 may be a single member integrally formed, and for example, a first member (left frame upper member) located on the upper portion and a first member located on the lower portion. Two members (lower left frame member) may be used.

Further, for example, an upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and an upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are attached to the front upper portion of the glass door 505, and the upper frame lamp is so covered as to cover the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612. The upper frame lamp section 610 may be configured by attaching the cover 613.
Similarly, a right frame lamp board 621 is attached to the right front part of the glass door 505, and a right frame lamp cover 622 is attached so as to cover the right frame lamp board 621 to form a right frame lamp section 620. Alternatively, the left frame lamp board 631 may be attached to the left front part of the glass door 505, and the left frame lamp cover 632 may be attached so as to cover the left frame lamp board 631, thereby forming the left frame lamp section 630.

  That is, the effect lamp (decorative lamp unit) 541 such as the right frame lamp unit 620 may be unitized, but the lamp substrate such as the right frame lamp substrate 621 is directly attached to a predetermined position of the glass door 505, The effect lamp 541 may be configured by directly attaching a lamp cover such as the right frame lamp cover 622 so as to cover the substrate.

(8) In the twenty-third embodiment, when it is detected that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like emits white light to emit the glass door 505. Also, the opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the clerk of the hall.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like is caused to emit white light, and is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can let the hall clerk know that you are there.

Here, although the description partially overlaps with the nineteenth embodiment (B), the setting change state and the setting confirmation state will be described.
As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the setting key switch 535 having the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are provided on the main control board 530 (see FIG. 99). .

The setting key switch 535 is a switch that is turned on when a predetermined setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion port 534 and is turned, for example, 90 degrees clockwise.
The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing the set value during the setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated to recover the state before the occurrence of the error after removing the generated error.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 are turned on in a state where the power switch 511 is turned off (power is turned off). Transition.
Specifically, when the power switch 511 is turned on, the main control board 530 determines whether the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. Is determined (step S701 in FIG. 100).
When it is determined that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on (“Yes” in step S701 of FIG. 100), the processing shifts to the setting change state. (Step S702 in FIG. 100).

Upon transition to the setting change state, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED.
In the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 536 is operated once, the set value is incremented by “+1”. In the present embodiment, the setting value has six steps from setting 1 to setting 6, and in the setting change state, every time the setting change switch 536 is operated once, the setting value changes from “1” to “2”. ... → “5” → “6” → “1” →...
When the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the set value is determined and the setting change state ends.

When the setting key switch 535 is turned on with the power switch 511 turned off, and the power switch 511 is turned on with the reset switch 536 turned off, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state.
More specifically, when the main control board 530 determines that the condition for shifting to the setting change state is not satisfied (“No” in step S701 in FIG. 100) when the power switch 511 is turned on, Next, it is determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off (step S703 in FIG. 100).

When it is determined that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off ("Yes" in step S703 in FIG. 100), the state shifts to the setting confirmation state. (Step S704 in FIG. 100).
In the setting confirmation state, the set value cannot be changed, but the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED. As a result, the current set value can be confirmed.
When the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when shifting to the setting change state, the main control board 530 transmits to the sub-control board 540 a command (setting change start command) indicating the shift to the setting change state.
Then, upon receiving the setting change start command, the sub-control board 540 activates the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631. , So as to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting change state (setting change end command) to the sub control board 540.
Then, upon receiving the setting change end command, the sub-control board 540 ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
Thus, while the setting change state (step S702 in FIG. 100) continues, the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting change state ends, the light emitting element emits white light.

Further, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 530 transmits to the sub-control board 540 a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating transition to the setting confirmation state.
When receiving the setting confirmation start command, the sub-control board 540 sets the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to white. Is controlled to emit light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting confirmation end command) indicating the end of the setting confirmation state to the sub control board 540.
Then, upon receiving the setting confirmation end command, the sub-control board 540 ends the control of causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
Thus, while the setting confirmation state (step S704 in FIG. 100) continues, the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the light emitting element emits white light.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to “255”, the light emitting element can emit white light.
Further, in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 emits white light, thereby confirming that the state is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Can inform the clerk.

  Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is formed of white. Therefore, when the light-emitting element emits white light, it is conspicuous, so that the clerk of the hall can easily notice that the light emitting element is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

  When the setting is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on at least one of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may emit white light. Is also good.

Further, when the light emitting element is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the light emitting element is blinked when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened and when the light emitting element is controlled to be in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened. The flashing pattern of the light emitting element can be different between when the light emitting element is controlled and when the light emitting element is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, the condition for shifting to the setting change state is not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 with the power switch 511 turned off, and turning on the power switch 511 in this state.
For example, the setting key switch 535 may be turned on while the power switch 511 is turned off, and the power switch 511 may be turned on in this state. That is, the condition that the reset switch 536 is on may not be a condition for shifting to the setting change state.

Further, the condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state is not limited to the setting key switch 535 being turned on with the power switch 511 turned off, the power switch 511 being turned on with the reset switch 536 being turned off.
For example, turning on the setting key switch 535 while the power switch 511 is on may be a condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state.

(9) In the twenty-third embodiment, when it is detected that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like emits white light, and the glass door 505 is turned on. Also, the opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the clerk of the hall.
Further, in the above modified example (8), in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like is caused to emit white light, and the state is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Let the hall clerk know that this is happening.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of return from power-off, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like emits white light to indicate that the power-off is being restored. You can also let them know.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when returning from the power-off), the processing according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 100 is executed. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when returning from a power-off.
When the power switch 511 is turned off (when the power is turned off), the main control board 530 stores information on the time when the power is turned off in the RWM.
When the power switch 511 is turned on (when returning from power-off), the main control board 530 determines whether the information at the time of return from power-off matches the information at the time of power-off. (Step S707 in FIG. 100).

Then, when the information at the time of return from the power-off matches the information at the time of the power-off, it is determined that the RWM is normal ("Yes" in step S707 of FIG. 100), and a state return process is executed. (Step S708 in FIG. 100).
On the other hand, when the information at the time of return from the power-off does not match the information at the time of the power-off, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal (“No” in step S707 of FIG. 100), and the RWM clear processing is executed ( Step S709 in FIG. 100).

The state return processing (step S708 in FIG. 100) is processing for returning the solenoid state, the state of the special symbol display device 531 and the like to the state at the time of power-off.
Furthermore, the RWM clearing process (step S709 in FIG. 100) is a process of clearing data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (a process of initializing the predetermined storage area). If the setting change processing (step S702 in FIG. 100) is executed or if it is determined that the RWM is abnormal (“No” in step S707 in FIG. 100), then the RWM clear processing is executed.

Further, when the setting confirmation state is completed, the state return processing (step S708 in FIG. 100) is executed, or the RWM clear processing (step S709 in FIG. 100) is executed, thereafter, the processing for permitting the timer interrupt (FIG. 100) Step S710) of Step 100 is executed.
Then, when the process for permitting the timer interrupt is executed, a series of processes executed when returning from the power-off is ended.

Further, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when returning from power-off), the main control board 530 transmits a command (power-return start command) indicating that power has been restored from power-off to the sub-control board 540. .
Then, upon receiving the power return start command, the sub-control board 540 activates the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631. , So as to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the process for permitting the timer interrupt is executed, the main control board 530 sends to the sub-control board 540 a command indicating that a series of processes to be executed when returning from power-off is completed (power-return end command). Send.
Then, upon receiving the power return end command, the sub-control board 540 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
Thus, the light-emitting element continues to emit white light during a series of processing when returning from power-off, and when the series of processing to be executed when returning from power-off ends, the light-emitting element emits white light. Ends.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to “255”, the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, when returning from the power-off, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp substrate such as the upper right-side lamp substrate 611 emits white light to notify the store clerk that the power-off is being restored. it can.

Further, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 is formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element of the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is formed of white. Therefore, when the light-emitting element emits white light, it is conspicuous, so that the clerk of the hall can easily notice that the power-off state is being restored.
During the return from the power-off, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 621 and the left frame lamp substrate 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp substrates may emit white light. Is also good.

In addition, during the return from the power-off, the light-emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the return from the power-off.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the light emitting element blinks while returning from the power-off, the glass door The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different between when the 505 or the front frame 502 is open, when the state is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and when the power is turned off.

  (10) In the twenty-third embodiment and the modified examples (8) to (9), when it is detected that the door release switch 522 or the frame release switch 523 is turned on, when the setting is changed to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, or Upon return from power-off, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the like emits white light, and the glass door 505 and the front frame 502 are opened, the setting is changed, and the setting is confirmed. The hall clerk is now informed that it is being controlled or is recovering from a power failure.

  However, the emission color of the light emitting element is not limited to white. For example, when it is detected that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is turned on, when it is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, or when it returns from a power-off, it is mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like. The light emitting element may emit light in a color that does not emit light during a normal game.

  In addition, as a color that does not emit light during a normal game, for example, a specific red color can be given. Further, as a specific red color, for example, when the output value of red (R) is set to “255” and each output value of green (G) and blue (B) is set to “0”, the light emitting element is activated. The emitted red color can be mentioned. Such a red color is a red color that is not emitted during a normal game, and is conspicuous when the light-emitting element emits light in such a red color, so that the glass door 505 and the front frame 502 are opened, a setting change state, The shop clerk of the hall can easily notice that the setting is being controlled to the confirmation state or that the apparatus is returning from the power-off state.

(11) In the twenty-third embodiment, the effect lamp (decorative lamp unit) 541 in which the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white is described by taking the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500 as an example. The twenty-third embodiment can be applied to a case where the gaming machine is the slot machine 10.
FIG. 131 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10 according to a modification of the twenty-third embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).
The following description partially overlaps with the seventh embodiment (FIG. 22), but will be described again.

As shown in FIG. 131, the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 whose front side is open, and a front door 12 which is attached to the cabinet 13 so that the front side opening can be opened and closed.
At a predetermined position of the cabinet 13, a door sensor (not shown) for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided. When the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, whereby the opening of the front door 12 is detected.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a symbol display device 14 in which three reels 31 are arranged side by side is arranged inside the cabinet 13, and symbol display inside the cabinet 13 is performed. A main control board 50 housed in a main board case 56 is disposed at a position corresponding to a position above the device 14.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, a door sensor, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a sub control board 80, and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51 or an output port 52. ing.

At the center of the front door 12, a transparent display window (not shown) is provided. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Thus, three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 can be visually recognized from the front side of the slot machine 10 through the display window.
A bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, and the like are disposed on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window. .

Furthermore, an image display device 23 is arranged on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, and an effect lamp (decorative lamp section) is provided on the upper, right and left sides of the front door 12. ) 21 is attached.
Further, a sub-control board 80 housed in a sub-board case 87 is arranged at an upper portion on the back side of the front door 12 and at a position corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23.

  The sub control board 80 controls an effect, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like. The effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, and the like are electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. Then, the sub-control board 80 determines what kind of effect to output at what timing based on the command received from the main control board 50, and according to the determination, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image The output of the display device 23 is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 131, the effect lamp (decorative lamp portion) 21 includes an upper frame lamp portion 26 arranged along the upper front edge of the front door 12 and a right front edge of the front door 12. A right frame ramp portion 27 is provided, and a left frame ramp portion 28 is arranged along the left front edge of the front door 12.
That is, the upper frame lamp portion 26 is a decorative lamp portion formed in a horizontally long shape from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front part of the front door 12.
The right frame lamp section 27 is a decorative lamp section which is formed in a vertically long shape from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12.
Further, the left frame lamp portion 28 is a decorative lamp portion formed in a vertically long shape from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left side of the front door 12.

As shown in FIG. 131, the upper frame lamp section 26 includes an upper frame lamp substrate 26a and an upper frame lamp cover 26b.
The upper frame lamp board 26a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the upper frame lamp section 26 to emit light and a connector for connecting a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are mounted. It is arranged on the front upper part of the front door 12 with its surface facing the front side (player side).
The upper frame lamp board 26a is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front part of the front door 12.

Further, although not shown, eight LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a. These eight LEDs are all full-color LEDs.
Furthermore, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is configured in white. Specifically, similarly to the example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the twenty-third embodiment, a white coating film is formed on the entire surface of the upper frame lamp substrate 26a on which the light emitting elements are mounted. Further, the white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or silk screen printing.

The upper frame lamp cover 26b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame lamp board 26a, and is attached to the upper front part of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 26b has a horizontally long shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front part of the front door 12, and is formed of a colorless and translucent resin.
Further, light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is applied to the upper frame lamp cover 26b.

As shown in FIG. 131, the right frame lamp unit 27 includes a right frame lamp board 27a and a right frame lamp cover 27b.
The right frame lamp board 27a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the right frame lamp section 27 to emit light and a connector for connecting a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are mounted. It is arranged on the front right side of the front door 12 with the surface facing the front side (player side).

The right frame lamp board 27a is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12.
Further, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a as light emitting elements. Each of these 16 LEDs is a full-color LED.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a is configured in white color, similarly to the upper frame lamp board 26a.

The right frame lamp cover 27b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 27a, and is attached to the front right side of the front door 12.
Further, the right frame lamp cover 27b has a vertically long shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12, and is formed of a colorless and translucent resin.
Further, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a is applied to the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As shown in FIG. 131, the left frame lamp section 28 includes a left frame lamp board 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b.
The left frame lamp substrate 28a is a lamp substrate on which a light emitting element for causing the left frame lamp portion 28 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal is transmitted are connected to the light emitting element. It is arranged on the front left side of the front door 12 with the surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the left frame lamp board 28a is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left portion of the front door 12.
Furthermore, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a as light emitting elements. Each of these 16 LEDs is a full-color LED.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 28a is configured in white, like the upper frame lamp substrate 26a and the right frame lamp substrate 27a.

The left frame lamp cover 28b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the left frame lamp board 28a, and is attached to the front left side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 28b has a vertically long shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the left front portion of the front door 12, and is formed of a colorless and translucent resin.
Further, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a is applied to the left frame lamp cover 28b.

  Similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the upper frame lamp cover 26b, the right frame lamp cover 27b, and the left frame lamp cover 28b are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the upper frame lamp is formed. By configuring the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements of the board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a in white, the appearance of the upper frame lamp section 26, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 is improved. The color of the light emitting element is made to be seen clearly while preventing the deterioration.

Although not shown, a right frame substrate mounting portion to which the right frame lamp substrate 27a is mounted and a right frame cover mounting portion to which the right frame lamp cover 27b is mounted are provided on the front right side of the front door 12. .
Further, the right frame lamp board 27a is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the right frame lamp board 27a in the short direction is substantially the same as the width of the right frame board mounting portion in the short direction. Have been. As a result, the right frame substrate mounting portion is covered with the right frame lamp substrate 27a.

  The entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element of the right frame lamp board 27a is made of white. By covering the right frame board mounting portion with such a right frame lamp board 27a, the light emitting element of the right frame lamp board 27a is formed. The entire surface of the mounting surface can be made to function as a reflection plate, whereby the color of the light emitting element can be seen clearly.

Similarly, a left frame substrate mounting portion to which the left frame lamp substrate 28a is mounted and a left frame cover mounting portion to which the left frame lamp cover 28b is mounted are provided on the front left side of the front door 12.
Further, the left frame lamp substrate 28a is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the left frame lamp substrate 28a in the short direction is substantially the same as the width of the left frame substrate mounting portion in the short direction. Have been. Thus, the left frame board mounting portion is covered with the left frame lamp board 28a. The entire surface of the left frame lamp substrate 28a on which the light emitting elements are mounted functions as a reflector so that the color of the light emitting elements can be seen clearly.

  Further, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, a positioning boss is inserted into the right frame lamp board 27a when the right frame lamp board 27a is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion. A fixing hole and a fixing hole used when fixing (screw-fixing) the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting portion are provided close to each other. The opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are set to be different. Thus, the positioning hole and the fixing hole are not mistaken, so that the assembling operation can be smoothly performed.

Further, the positioning boss has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the mounting surface side of the light emitting element when the right frame lamp board 27a is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion.
That is, the positioning boss is inserted into the positioning hole from the side opposite to the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a, and the tip of the positioning boss projects to the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a. The tip of this positioning boss is called a projection. The projecting portion is formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape). Thus, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the protruding portion formed in the shape of a convex curved surface, so that the right frame lamp portion 27 can be seen to shine neatly.

  Similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the right frame lamp board 27a is fixed to the right frame board mounting section, the right frame board mounting section is mounted from the mounting surface side of the light emitting element in the right frame lamp board 27a. And fix it with screws. At this time, the screw head is exposed on the mounting surface side of the light emitting element in the right frame lamp substrate 27a. The height of the screw head from the light emitting element mounting surface is set higher than the height of the light emitting element from the light emitting element mounting surface.

Further, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the screw head is subjected to a surface treatment for reflecting light emitted from the light emitting element.
Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the screw head, so that the right frame lamp portion 27 can be seen to shine neatly.

Similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, a lens portion is provided at a position on the right frame lamp cover 27b facing the right frame lamp board 27a. The lens portion is formed by joining curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. As a result, the emission of the light emitting element can be seen clearly while reducing the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the right frame lamp cover 27b.
Note that the upper frame lamp cover 26b and the left frame lamp cover 28b also have a lens portion at a position facing the lamp substrate, and are formed by joining curved surfaces having the same thickness but different curvatures but different shapes. The shape is the same as that of the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As described above, the slot machine 10 includes the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are connected to a harness so that information (commands) necessary for output of the effect can be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 in one direction. I have.

Further, the sub-control board 80 is connected to the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a by a harness.
Then, the sub-control board 80 determines the contents of the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control substrate 50, and controls to output the determined effect. At this time, the sub control board 80 controls light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a.

  Further, when the start switch 41 is operated in a state where a predetermined number of medals have been bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Then, when this signal is input to the main control board 50, the role lottery means 61 obtains a random number value, performs a lottery of a winning number based on the obtained random number value, and the reel control means 65 The driving of all the motors 32 is controlled so that all the reels 31 are rotated.

Thereafter, when the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Then, when this signal is input to the main control board 50, the reel control means 65 controls the drive of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the role lottery means 61. Then, the rotation of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is stopped.
Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. At this time, if the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the active line, the winning combination is won, and a medal corresponding to the winning winning is paid out.

When a lottery is performed by the role lottery means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the lottery result to the sub-control board 80.
When receiving the command corresponding to the lottery result, the sub-control board 80 emits light mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a so as to correspond to the lottery result. Controls light emission of the device.

Specifically, when the winning lottery means 61 wins the winning number corresponding to the special role, the main control board 50 transmits a command (a special role command) indicating that to the sub-control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the special role command, the sub-control board 80 sets the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the special role. Flash.
Further, as a light emitting pattern corresponding to the special role, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within a range of “0” to “255”. . As a result, the light emitting element can emit light in a so-called rainbow color, and the player can be notified that the special role has been won.

Further, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b is formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is formed of white. Therefore, when the special role is won, the color of the light emitting element can be seen clearly by causing the light emitting element to emit light in a rainbow color.
When the special role is won, the light emitting elements mounted on at least one of the plurality of lamp boards may emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a may emit light in the pattern corresponding to the special role, and the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may be emitted in the pattern corresponding to the special role. Light may be emitted.

When the special role is won, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role, and are mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a. The light-emitting element may emit white light.
By setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to “255”, the light emitting element can emit white light.

Further, as described above, the door sensor is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, and the signal is input to the main control board 50. . Then, when detecting that the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a command (door open command) to that effect to the sub-control board 80.
Upon receiving the door opening command, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. Thereby, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall that the front door 12 is open.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element of the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is formed of white. Therefore, when the light-emitting element emits light in white, it is conspicuous, so that the clerk of the hall can easily notice that the front door 12 is open.
When the front door 12 is open, the light emitting elements mounted on at least one of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may emit white light. Is also good.
When the front door 12 is open, the light emitting elements may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to when the front door 12 is open.

Further, in the slot machine 10, when the start switch 41 is operated in a state where a predetermined number of medals have been bet, one game starts, all reels 31 are stopped, and processing such as payout of medals is performed. At times, one game may end.
Furthermore, when the main lottery unit 61 is not won by the winning lottery means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a command (non-winning command) indicating that to the sub-control board 80.

Further, upon receiving the non-winning command, the sub-control board 80 executes an effect pattern lottery at the time of non-winning (a lottery to select either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2).
Then, the sub-control board 80 causes the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in a manner according to the result of the effect pattern lottery, and to display. Control is performed so that the red LED mounted on the substrate provided in the decoration around the window emits light.

FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b) show an effect pattern when the winning lottery means 61 is not won, and FIG. 132 (a) is a time chart showing an effect pattern 1 at the time of non-winning. (B) is a time chart showing the effect pattern 2 at the time of non-winning.
132 (a) and 132 (b), “LED1” indicates an LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a, and “LED2” indicates an LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a.
132 (a) and 132 (b), “LED3” indicates one red LED mounted on a substrate provided with decoration around the display window, and “LED4” indicates decoration provided around the display window. 3 shows another red LED mounted on a substrate. The mounting surface of the red LED on the substrate provided in the decoration around the display window is configured in green.

  132 (a) and 132 (b), "reel rotation start" indicates the start of rotation of the reel 31. The “first stop operation” indicates a time when the first stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped first is operated (turned on)). The “second stop operation” indicates a time when the second stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped second is operated (turned on)). The "third stop operation" indicates a time when the third stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is operated (turned on)). “Payout” indicates the time of processing such as payout of medals.

As shown in FIG. 132 (a), in a game that has not been won by the role lottery means 61, when the effect pattern 1 is determined by the effect pattern lottery, LED1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) ) Is turned on (ON) at the start of rotation of the reel 31 and turned off (OFF) at the time of the second stop operation.
In the effect pattern 1, the LED 2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) is turned on after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and turned off during the second stop operation. I do. LED1 and LED2 are turned off at the same time.

Furthermore, in the effect pattern 1, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) is turned on after the start of the rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and is turned off at the time of the first stop operation. .
Further, in the effect pattern 1, the LED 4 (the other red LED around the display window) is turned on after the start of the rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and after the first stop operation. Then, the light is turned off before the second stop operation. Also, the LED 3 and the LED 4 are turned on at the same time. Furthermore, LED4 is turned off at the same time as LED2 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b), in a game that has not been won by the role lottery means 61, when the production pattern is determined as the production pattern 2 by the production pattern lottery, the LED1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) is used. ) Is turned on (ON) at the start of rotation of the reel 31 and turned off (OFF) at the time of the second stop operation, similarly to the case where the effect pattern 1 is determined.
In the effect pattern 2, the LED 2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp substrate 26 a) does not light up unlike the effect pattern 1.

Further, in the effect pattern 2, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) is turned on after the start of the rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and is turned off at the time of the second stop operation. . LED1 and LED3 are turned off at the same time.
Further, in the effect pattern 2, the LED 4 (the other red LED around the display window) is located after the start of the rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, as in the case of the effect pattern 1. , And goes out after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation. Also, the LED 3 and the LED 4 are turned on at the same time.

As described above, in the game that is not won by the role lottery means 61, either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is determined by the effect pattern lottery, and the light emission of the LEDs 1 to 4 is controlled in accordance with the determined effect pattern. .
The LED 1 is turned on at the start of rotation of the reel 31 and turned off at the time of the second stop operation in both the effect pattern 1 and the effect pattern 2.
In the effect pattern 1, the LED 2 is turned on after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and is turned off during the second stop operation, but is not turned on in the effect pattern 2.

Furthermore, in the effect pattern 1, the LED 3 is turned on after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and is turned off at the time of the first stop operation. It is turned on after the start of rotation and before the first stop operation, and turned off at the time of the second stop operation.
Further, the LED 4 is turned on after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation in both the effect pattern 1 and the effect pattern 2, and after the first stop operation. Turns off before the second stop operation.

As described above, the average value of the time in which the LED 1 is turned on in the game that is not won by the role lottery means 61 is set to be longer than the average value of the time in which the LED 2 to the LED 4 are turned on in the game that is not won by the role lottery means 61. Have been.
Since the entire surface of the LED mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a is configured in white, and the right frame lamp cover 27b is formed of a colorless and translucent resin, the LED 1 (right frame lamp board) is formed. Since the light emission of the LED mounted on the lamp 27a can be seen clearly, even in the game not won by the role lottery means 61, a beautiful effect using the LED1 can be shown.

Further, even when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a or the like in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. By emitting white light, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled.
In the slot machine 10, the setting key switch is turned on in a power-off state (power-off state), and in this state, when the power is turned on, a transition is made to a setting change state (step S212 in FIG. 38).

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73.
In the setting change state, each time the setting change switch is operated, the set value is updated ("+1") (steps S240 to S241 in FIG. 38).
When the start switch 41 is operated in the setting change state (“Yes” in step S242 in FIG. 38), the set value is determined, and when the setting key switch is turned off (“Yes” in step S243 in FIG. 38), The setting change state ends.

In the slot machine 10, when the setting key switch is turned on while the power is on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state.
Further, in the setting confirmation state, the set value cannot be changed, but the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. As a result, the current set value can be confirmed.
When the setting key switch is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when shifting to the setting change state, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 a command (setting change start command) indicating that the state has shifted to the setting change state.
When receiving the setting change start command, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. I do.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting change state (setting change end command) to the sub-control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the setting change end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the control of causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
Thus, while the setting change state continues (during the execution of the setting change process in FIG. 39), the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting change state ends, the light emitting element emits white light.

Further, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating that the state has shifted to the setting confirmation state to the sub-control board 80.
Upon receiving the setting confirmation start command, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting check state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting check end command) indicating the end of the setting check state to the sub-control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the setting confirmation end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light-emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting confirmation state continues, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the light-emitting element stops emitting white light.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to “255”, the light emitting element can emit white light.
In the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a emits white light, thereby confirming that the hole is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Let the clerk know.

  Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element of the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is formed of white. Therefore, if the light-emitting element emits white light, it becomes conspicuous, so that the clerk of the hall can easily notice that the light-emitting element is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

  When the setting is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on at least one of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may emit white light. Is also good.

Further, when the light emitting element is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the light-emitting element blinks when the front door 12 is opened and when the light-emitting element is controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, when the front door 12 is opened, The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be different between when the state is controlled to the state or the setting confirmation state.

Also, when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a or the like is white when returning from power-off. , It is possible to notify the hall clerk that the system is recovering from the power failure.
Here, in the slot machine 10, when the power is turned off (when the power is turned off), the main control board 50 executes the power-off process shown in FIG.

Further, when the power is turned on (when returning from the power interruption), the main control board 50 executes the power return process shown in FIG.
Further, when starting the power return process, the main control board 50 transmits a command (power return start command) indicating that to the sub control board 80.
Further, upon receiving the power return start command, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. I do.

When ending the power return process, the main control board 50 transmits a command (power return end command) to that effect to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the power return end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
Thus, the light emitting element continues to emit white light during the execution of the power supply return processing of FIG. 40, and when the power supply return processing of FIG. 40 ends, light emission of the light emitting element in white light ends.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to “255”, the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, during execution of the power return process, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a emits white light to notify the hall clerk that the power return process is being executed. it can.

Further, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b is formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is formed of white. Therefore, when the light emitting element emits white light, it is conspicuous, so that the clerk of the hall can easily notice that the power return process is being performed.
During the execution of the power return process, the light emitting elements mounted on at least one of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 27a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may emit white light. Is also good.

In addition, during the execution of the power return process, the light emitting elements may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the execution of the power return process.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is opened, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the light emitting element blinks during execution of the power return process, the front door 12 is opened. The flashing pattern of the light emitting element can be different between when the power is on, when the setting is changed to the setting change state or when the setting is checked, and when the power return process is being performed.

(12) In the twenty-third embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is taken as an example of a gaming machine, and in the modification (11), the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of a gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
For example, in a parrot as a gaming machine, an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine), and a casino machine, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate provided in the decorative lamp unit is configured to be white and the decorative lamp unit is provided. By forming the lamp cover from a colorless or white resin having a light-transmitting property, light emission of the light-emitting element can be seen clearly.
The “parrot” is a slot machine that uses a game ball as a game medium.

  (13) The first to twenty-third embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to twenty-third embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Appendix>
The inventions (initial inventions) described in the initial specification and the like of the present application include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 26, in order to solve the problems to be solved by the original invention and the problems according to the original invention, respectively. Means and effects of the first invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification does not mean that it is initially limited to Inventions 1 to 26.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that does not execute processing relating to a game medium after a power failure occurs.
In a conventional gaming machine, by turning off a blocker before executing a backup process as a power-off process, even if a medal is inserted during the execution of the backup process, the medal is returned to the player via the blocker. Accordingly, a technique is known in which the medal addition processing is not performed (for example, JP-A-2015-173832).
However, for example, in the case where the power is cut off at the moment when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot, the medal passes through the blocker before the power-off processing is executed, and the medal is counted. There was a possibility. Note that it is not preferable in terms of control to execute the medal addition process (medal bet process or medal credit process) after the power is turned off.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the addition processing of the game media from being executed even when the power supply is cut off almost simultaneously with the insertion of the game media from the game media insertion slot. .

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 1 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (first embodiment (A))
Game media slot (medal slot 47),
A state in which the passage of the game medium is permitted (on state) or a state in which the passage of the game medium is not permitted (off state) is provided in the passage (medal passage) of the game medium (medal) inserted from the game medium insertion slot. ) And a controllable blocker (45);
Detecting means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b) provided in the passage of the game medium inserted from the game medium insertion port and capable of detecting the game medium (detection means B is located downstream of detection means A ) And,
From the time when the power supply is interrupted in a state where the blocker is controlled to permit the passage of the game medium, the event that the power supply is interrupted is detected, and the game medium is detected. The time until the blocker is controlled to a state where passage is not permitted is T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
When the game medium is released from the game medium insertion port toward the inside of the game machine in a state where the blocker is controlled to allow the passage of the game medium, the game medium cannot be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. From the time when it becomes possible (position M2 in FIG. 2), until the detecting means B detects the game medium and the detecting means B no longer detects the game medium (position M4 in FIG. 2). When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1 <T2
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, the power is cut off when the game medium is released from the game medium slot into the inside of the game machine and the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine. In this case, by the time the detecting means B stops detecting the game medium, the power supply is cut off and the blocker is controlled to a state in which the passage of the game medium is not permitted. , At least not detected by the detecting means B.
Therefore, since the game medium is not normally detected by the detection means A and B, the addition processing (bet processing and credit processing) of the game medium is not executed. Therefore, even if the power supply is cut off when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even if the power supply occurs immediately after the game medium is released inside the game machine, Media can be rejected. Thus, it is possible to prevent the addition processing of the game media from being executed after the power-off.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 2 The initial invention relates to a gate trace of a board case in a gaming machine having a board case accommodating a control board therein.
In a conventional gaming machine, a board case accommodating a main control board therein is known. Here, since the substrate case is generally formed by molding, gate marks remain on the substrate case. Then, a technique using this gate mark as a mark has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2017-042270).
However, since the gate trace of the substrate case has a cut portion of the resin, it is unclear when viewed from the outside. For this reason, there is a problem that a gate mark may be opened and the inside of the main control substrate may be accessed.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to suppress a gobbling action using the gate trace of the substrate case.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 2 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (second embodiment)
A predetermined IC (main CPU 55) having an arithmetic function;
A control board (main control board 50) on which the predetermined IC is mounted on one surface (a surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57);
A substrate case (a substrate case 56 composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) having a plurality of surfaces (upper surface, side surfaces, etc.) and accommodating the control substrate;
The board case is formed such that the inside is visible,
A gate mark (57b) at the time of molding the substrate case is arranged on a surface (outside the upper surface of the upper cover 57) that is outside the substrate case and that faces the one surface of the control substrate;
The predetermined IC of the control board is not positioned in a direction perpendicular to the surface facing the gate mark.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, since the predetermined IC of the control board is not located in the vertical direction of the gate trace of the substrate case, the gate trace is illegally opened to access the predetermined IC. Can be prevented.
Further, since there is no gate trace of the substrate case in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control board, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being blocked by the gate trace. As a result, it is possible to easily visually check whether or not a predetermined IC has been tampered with.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 3 The initial invention relates to processing when communication is restored after a disconnection has occurred in a communication between the main control board and the sub-control board.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine in which a command is transmitted from a main control board to a sub control board, and the sub control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received command is known.
Here, a technique is known in which the sub-control board compares the previously received command with the currently received command and determines that the command reception is abnormal based on the consistency of the received commands (for example, JP 2014-226503 A).
However, when a command is transmitted from the main control board to the sub-control board, a disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub-control board. When the communication is restored, the sub-control board may not be able to output a normal effect.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make the effect when the communication is restored after the disconnection between the main control board and the sub control board appropriate.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 3 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (third embodiment)
A main control board (50);
A sub-control board (80) for controlling an effect based on the information received from the main control board;
The sub-control board can receive information on the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
In the predetermined game state (AT), the sub-control board can output an effect corresponding to the operation of the operated stop switch based on receiving information on the operated stop switch,
The sub-control board,
In a case where a predetermined stop switch is operated at an “N” game item in the predetermined game state, when information that the predetermined stop switch is operated is received, a predetermined state corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. An effect (an effect when the reel corresponding to the predetermined stop switch is stopped) is output, and thereafter, information from the main control board cannot be received before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated. After that, the information from the main control board can be received at the “N + a” game item, and thereafter, the information that the specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch is operated is received at the “N + a” game item At this time, the effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch and the effect related to the predetermined effect (in the predetermined effect, When the reel corresponding to the specific stop switch is stopped, an effect is output. After that, when predetermined information is received in the “N + a + 1” game item, based on the predetermined information, “ N + a + 1 "game effects are output.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, when the communication is restored in the course of the “N + a” game, the effect related to the predetermined effect of the “N” game output up to that time is output. Therefore, in the “N + a” game, an effect following the “N” game can be output. Then, when the game shifts to the “N + a + 1” game, the effect returns to the normal effect, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from suddenly changing due to the return of the communication during the “N + a” game. As a result, it is possible to output an effect without a sense of incongruity before and after the occurrence of the disconnection.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 4 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of operating a stop switch at high speed.
In a conventional gaming machine, when a stop switch is operated, a reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to a lottery result. After the reel is stopped at a predetermined position, the motor is excited for a predetermined time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the ON state or when the motor is in the excited state, the operation of the next stop switch is not accepted.
Here, a technique is known in which after the first stop switch is operated until the reel status is stopped, even if the second stop switch is operated, the stop operation is not accepted ( For example, see JP-A-2017-093576.
However, in the above-described conventional technology, there is a problem that if the time until the operation of the next stop switch becomes receivable after the operation of the stop switch is long, the game cannot be played at a high speed.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to enable the stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 4 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (the fourth embodiment)
A reel (31);
A motor (32) for rotating the reel;
Reel control means (65) for controlling the drive of the motor to stop the rotation of the reel based on the detection of the operation of the stop button (stop button 42a);
Internal lottery means (role lottery means 61)
A sensor (detection sensor 42e) for detecting the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed to the deepest part (the position shown in FIG. 12C), and when the push of the stop button is released, the stop is stopped. The button is configured to be movable to an initial position (a position shown in FIG. 12A) by an urging force, and the sensor is turned off until the stop button is moved to the initial position.
In a game in which the internal drawing means determines a predetermined result, the stop button is operated on a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under a situation where all the reels are rotating by the reel control means, and the predetermined After detecting that the sensor of the stop button for the reel is turned on, an excitation state (four-phase excitation state) for stopping the predetermined reel is set, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) elapses from the excitation state. Is configured to end the excitation state when
T1 (T11 in FIG. 13) until the sensor is turned off from the moment when the stop button is pushed to the deepest position is released, and T2 is the predetermined time.
T1 <T2
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is assumed that the start of the excitation state of the motor when the reel is stopped and the moment when the stop button pressed to the deepest position is released are released simultaneously. Sometimes, the excitation state ends after the sensor is turned off. Therefore, the operation of the next stop button can be accepted at the timing when the excitation state of the motor ends.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 5 The initial invention relates to control of a medal payout device.
It is known that in a conventional gaming machine, it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, JP-A-2006-214434).
Here, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as a hopper motor for rotating the hopper disk. When a constant current is passed, the DC motor gradually accelerates from a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped. Then, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates from the start of the driving of the hopper motor to the discharge of the first medal. The required time is longer than the medal discharge interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor is rotating at a constant speed, which may give the player the feeling that the discharge of the first medal is delayed.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the first medal has been delayed.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 5 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (sixth embodiment)
A hopper (35) for storing medals,
A hopper disk (101) provided on the hopper,
A hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disk,
Control means (main control board 50) for controlling the driving of the hopper motor;
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality of (eight) holding portions (102) along the outer periphery of the hopper disk, which are capable of holding medals stored in the hopper,
When the hopper motor is driven to rotate the hopper disk, the medals held by the holding portion are formed to be sequentially discharged from a discharging portion (103),
At the moment when the last ejected medal in one payout process is ejected from the ejecting unit, the position of the holding unit where the last ejected medal is held is defined as a first position,
At the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejecting unit, the position of the holding unit where the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held is a second position,
The control means, when ending the one payout process, sets a state in which the holding unit holding the first discharge medal in the next payout process is located between a first position and a second position. The driving of the hopper motor is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, when the holding unit that holds the first ejected medals is stopped between the first position and the second position, the holding unit until the first position is reached is reached. The distance is shorter than when stopping at the second position. As a result, the time required to reach the first position is shorter than when the motor is stopped at the second position, so that even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor is gradually accelerated, the ejection of the first medal is delayed. The sense can not be given to the player.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to the arrangement of a main control board mounted inside a cabinet and a sub-control board mounted on the back surface of a front door.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine provided with an electrolytic capacitor for power storage on a sub-control board for controlling an effect (for example, JP-A-2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic solution is filled in the electrolytic capacitor for storage, but when the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a problem and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, The main CPU may malfunction. Further, there is a possibility that the main CPU may be damaged by an impact when the electrolytic capacitor ruptures.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a problem and the electrolyte scatters. Another object of the present invention is to prevent the main CPU from being damaged by an impact at that time even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a problem.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 6 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (seventh embodiment)
A cabinet (13),
A front door (12) openably and closably mounted on the cabinet;
A main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
And a sub-control board (80) for controlling the production,
The main control board is mounted inside the cabinet,
The sub-control board is attached to a back surface of the front door,
The main control board and the sub control board are arranged so as to face each other in a state where the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board,
An electrolytic capacitor (86) is arranged at a position other than a position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, since the electrolytic capacitor is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board, the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a problem, and the electrolytic solution Can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU even if the main CPU is scattered, thereby preventing the main CPU from malfunctioning.
Also, even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures, the impact can be prevented from being directly received by the main CPU, thereby preventing the main CPU from being damaged.

7. Initial Invention 7
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 7 The initial invention relates to the control of stopping the reels on the main control board side and the control of the effect output on the sub control board side.
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effect contents, and each effect content is determined when a special role is won (inside inside) and when no special role is won (inside inside). Are known with different selection probabilities (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146608).
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the effect content is selected regardless of the result of the internal drawing in both inside and outside.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately determine the effect to be output according to the result of the internal drawing.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 7 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (ninth embodiment)
A plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols,
A plurality of stop switches (42) operated by a player when stopping each of the reels;
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game,
And sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling effects.
The main control means includes:
An internal lottery that has a first lottery result (for example, "BB" single win during non-internal) or a second lottery result (for example, "non-win" during BB) Means (role lottery means 61);
A plurality of stop position determination tables that determine the stop position of the reel corresponding to the position of the reel at the moment the stop switch is operated,
Reel control means (65) for determining a stop position of the reel using any one of the stop position determination tables, and stopping the reel at the determined stop position.
The reel control means determines a stop position of the reel using the same stop position determination table in a game in which a first drawing result is obtained and a game in which a second drawing result is obtained,
The sub-control means,
A plurality of effect determination tables that determine the effect to be output,
Effect output control means (91) for determining an effect to be output using any of the effect determination tables, and outputting the determined effect.
The effect output control means is configured to determine an effect to be output by using the effect determination table different for a game having a first drawing result and a game having a second drawing result.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, the reel control means on the main control means has the same stop in the game in which the first drawing result and the game in which the second drawing result are obtained by the internal drawing means. The reel stop position is determined using the position determination table. On the sub-control means side, the effect output control means determines an effect to be output using a different effect determination table.
Thereby, even if the reel stop control on the main control means is the same, different effects can be output on the sub-control means side, and the effects can be diversified.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 8 The first invention relates to a gap between the cabinet and the front door.
In a conventional gaming machine, a projecting side projecting outward is provided at an edge of an opening on the front side of a cabinet, and the projecting side is housed inside the front door when the front door is closed. There has been known a device in which the gap between the cabinet and the front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign matter to enter (for example, JP-A-2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable that the front door is slightly opened so that the protruding side is separated from the front door, and foreign matter enters through a gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to prevent a fraudulent act (going action) in which a front door is slightly opened to allow a foreign substance to enter through a gap between the cabinet and the front door.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 8 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (eighth embodiment)
A cabinet (13),
A front door (12) openably and closably mounted on the cabinet;
A door sensor for detecting opening of the front door,
A first closing portion (13c) is provided at a lower portion of the cabinet and protrudes toward the front door when the front door is closed.
At the lower part of the front door, below the first closing part, there is provided a second closing part (12a) projecting toward the cabinet when the front door is closed.
A third closing portion (12b) projecting toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position above the first closing portion in a lower portion of the front door,
When the front door is closed, the first closing portion is formed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion,
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door is a detection start position,
The first closing portion is formed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion even when the front door is at the detection start position.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, first, the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, and thereafter, the second closing portion and the third closing portion are closed. The first closing portion will come out from between. When the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, it is possible to notify that the front door is open.
Therefore, before the notification that the front door is open can be provided, the first blocking portion does not fall out from between the second blocking portion and the third blocking portion, and the notification that the front door is open is provided. Even at a position where it is possible, since the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a bent shape, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act (going action) of invading foreign matter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section indicator.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section display has been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a gaming machine provided with a conventional advantageous section indicator, lighting control of the advantageous section indicator at the time of return from power-off has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the outset is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator at the time of recovery from power interruption.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 9 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (the eleventh embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying an operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed;
An advantageous section indicator (advantage section display LED 77) indicating an advantageous section,
After the power supply is cut off under the condition that the advantageous section indicator is lit, when the power supply is restarted with the setting change switch turned off, the advantageous section indicator is activated after interrupt processing is started. The process for turning on the light can be executed,
A process for turning off the advantageous section indicator when the power supply is restarted while the setting change switch is on after the power supply is cut off in a situation where the advantageous section indicator is on. After executing the above, it is possible to shift to the setting change processing.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section indicator can be appropriately controlled according to the situation when returning from power-off.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine having four reels and a stop button.
Conventional gaming machines generally have three reels and three stop buttons (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
It has also been proposed to reduce the number of reels and stop buttons to four in a conventional gaming machine. However, when the number of the stop buttons is set to four, there is a problem that an operation error of the stop button is likely to occur at the time of AT.
A problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make it difficult for a stop button to be operated incorrectly when the number of stop buttons is set to four.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 10 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (the thirteenth embodiment)
Four reels (31A-31D),
And four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels.
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons,
At least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is located vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
At least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is positioned vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, even when the number of stop buttons is four, the stop buttons at both the left and right sides can be operated using the left and right ends of the operation button as markers. In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility of an operation error of the stop button.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of indicating a prescribed number.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of playing with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine, an appropriate prescribed number and an inappropriate prescribed number may occur even in a game which can be played with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to enable a game to be played with an appropriate prescribed number.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 11 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
Initial invention (twelfth embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying an operation mode of a stop button (stop switch 42);
When notifying the operation mode in the notification game state, information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (acquisition number display LED 78),
In the notification game state, a game can be started when at least one of a plurality of prescribed numbers ("2" or "3") is entered.
In the notification game state, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit,
When the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit in the notification game state, a predetermined timing from when all the reels stop to when the start switch is detected to be turned on (see FIG. 42) , Displayed in step S322),
When the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit, the information corresponding to the operation mode is displayed in a display mode that can be identified (when the specified number is “2”, “0A” is displayed). Features.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, the information corresponding to the specified number can be displayed at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected to be turned on. Thus, an appropriate prescribed number in the game can be notified.
Further, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing information corresponding to the operation mode and information corresponding to the prescribed number.

12. Original Invention 12
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 12 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number in the notification gaming state.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine including a counter for counting the number of difference sheets during AT (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
In a conventional gaming machine, at the end of an advantageous section, it is required to initialize information about the advantageous section. However, after the end of the AT, there is a case where the next AT is won early, and there is also a case where it is desired to carry over the difference number of the previous AT.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make it possible to take over the difference number of the previous notification game state (AT) while initializing information on the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 12 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (the eleventh embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying an operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed;
In the first control means (main control board 50), the minimum value is a cumulative value of the difference value indicating the difference between the bet number of the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same applies hereinafter). A first difference counter (difference counter) that stores the value as "
A second control means (sub-control board 80) comprising: a second difference counter (sub-difference counter) for storing a cumulative value of the difference indicating the difference between the bet number and the payout number of the game value;
At the end of the advantageous section, the first difference counter is cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the second difference counter is not cleared.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section, so that the rule of initializing information on the advantageous section can be complied with. In some cases, the second difference counter is not cleared. In such a case, when the next notification game state starts, the difference number of the previous notification game state can be taken over.

13. Original Invention 13
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 13 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the number of difference sheets in the notification gaming state.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine including a counter for counting the number of difference sheets during AT (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in the conventional gaming machines, how to count (update) the difference number at the time of winning a replay has not been sufficiently studied.
A problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately execute a process of updating the difference number at the time of winning a replay.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 13 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (the eleventh embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed;
A difference counter for storing a cumulative value of the difference between the bet number of the game value and the payout (including the addition to the credit; the same applies hereinafter), the minimum value being "0";
And an advantageous section counter (an advantageous section clear counter) for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section,
1. At least in the game won as a small role, after stopping all the reels (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter is a value satisfying the advantageous section end condition ( 51 or 52, step S424),
1) If it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for terminating the advantageous section, the advantageous section is determined without determining the value of the difference number counter (without performing the processing of step S434). A process for ending (step S435) is enabled,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is not a value that satisfies the condition for terminating the advantageous section (when “No” in step S424), the update processing of the difference number counter (steps S428 and W429) is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (step S434). When it is determined that the value satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S434). )), The process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed,
2. In the game won in the replay, after stopping all the reels (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (FIG. 51). Or, in FIG. 52, step S424),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for terminating the advantageous section (when “Yes” in step S424), the value of the difference number counter is not determined (step S434). A process (step S435) for ending the advantageous section can be executed without executing the process,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is not a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (when “No” in step S424), the difference number counter is not updated and the difference number counter is not executed. Is determined to be a value that satisfies the condition for terminating the advantageous section (if “Yes” in step S426 in FIG. 51 or 52, the process proceeds to step S434), and the value that satisfies the condition for terminating the advantageous section is determined. (When "Yes" in step S434), a process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the initial invention, in the game won in the replay, the difference number counter is updated regardless of whether the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section. Is not executed, the process of updating the difference number in the game won in the replay can be appropriately executed. Further, it is possible to speed up the program processing.

14． Original invention 14
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 14 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a process related to an instruction function with a predetermined specified number.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine having an instruction function has been known (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in the conventional gaming machines, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately execute the processing relating to the instruction function and the processing relating to the advantageous section according to the prescribed number.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 14 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (the eleventh embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) that can execute an instruction function of notifying an operation mode of a stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed,
An advantageous section counter (an advantageous section clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable relating to the advantageous section;
A notification game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number counter) for counting a specific variable (for example, the number of games or difference number) related to the notification game state;
At least a first prescribed number (prescribed number “3”) or a second prescribed number (prescribed number “2”) of game values can be inserted,
In the game (AT) of the advantageous section, in the game started based on the insertion of the first specified number, it is possible to execute a process related to the instruction function (for example, a notification of the correct answer pressing order) (FIG. 48). , "Yes" in step S382), and in the game started based on the insertion of the second specified number, the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed ("No" in step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the notification game state, in the game started based on the insertion of the first specified number, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the notification game is performed. The counter can be updated (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the notification game state, in a game started based on the insertion of the second specified number, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the notification game counter is updated. Update cannot be executed ("No" in step S332 in FIG. 43).
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 14 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section counter can be updated with any of the first prescribed number and the second prescribed number of games, so that the advantageous section can be optimized. .
In addition, by not updating the notification game counter in the second specified number of games in which the processing related to the instruction function is not executable, consistency between the execution of the processing related to the instruction function and the update of the notification game counter may be obtained. it can.

15. Original Invention 15
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 15 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine having a signal line for starting.
Conventionally, it has been known to use a harness including a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) when electrically connecting control boards of a gaming machine. One of the signal lines is a signal line for starting.
In the related art, since a signal related to starting is used for a lottery, it is necessary to suppress a goto action on a signal line related to starting.
A problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make it difficult to identify a signal line related to starting and to suppress a goto action.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 15 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (the twenty-first embodiment)
In a gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) including a control board (main control boards 50 and 530),
A plurality of signal lines (lead wires) electrically connected to the control board;
The plurality of signal lines include at least a first signal line, a second signal line, and a third signal line,
The first signal line is a signal line relating to the start of a game (for example, the seventh lead wire of the harness D in FIG. 111),
The second signal line (for example, the eighth lead wire of the harness D in FIG. 111) and the third signal line (for example, the third lead wire of the harness D in FIG. 111) are: It is a signal line different from the signal line for starting the game,
The first signal line and the second signal line have substantially the same diameter,
The first signal line and the third signal line have different diameters.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 15 According to the initial invention, it is possible to make it difficult to identify which signal line is the signal line for starting. Thereby, the goto action on the signal line related to starting can be suppressed.

16. Original Invention 16
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 16 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of outputting a setting change end sound.
Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values.
In the related art, for example, when the setting key is turned off, the setting change process is completed, and the timing at which the setting change process ends cannot be easily grasped from outside.
Therefore, when the setting change processing is completed, it is conceivable to notify that fact.
However, in the case where the game is started immediately after the end of the setting change processing, if the end of the setting change processing is notified, the notification of the end of the setting change processing and the notification output in the game are the same. It may be output at the same time (overlapping), and it may be difficult to understand important information output in the game.
A problem to be solved by the invention at first is to appropriately output an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

The initial invention (the nineteenth embodiment)
A gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) capable of changing an advantage for a player,
Specific operation detecting means for detecting that a specific operation has been performed in order to control either the setting change state in which the advantage can be changed, or the normal state in which the advantage cannot be changed and the game can be started. (Setting key switches 152, 535)
And speakers (22, 542).
In the setting change state, when a condition for shifting to the normal state is satisfied, an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended can be output from the speaker for a time T1 (“T01” in FIG. 96). And
The start condition of the game (the specified number is bet and the start switch 41 is operated in the case of the slot machine 10, and the gaming ball has won the starting port 532 in the case of the pachinko game machine 500). In one filled game, it is possible to end the game at time T2 ("T12" or "T22" in FIG. 96),
In the setting change state, it takes at least time T3 (“T11” or “T12” in FIG. 96) until the start condition of the game is satisfied after shifting to the normal state,
When one game is started immediately after shifting from the setting change state to the normal state, the following formula is established. T1 <T2 + T3 (T1> 0, T2> 0, T3> 0 )
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 16 According to the initial invention, even if the game is started at the same time as the end of the setting change state, an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended is provided before the game is ended. Since the output is completed, the effect output at the end of the game does not overlap with the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect output at the end of the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

17． Initial invention 17
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 17 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine in which light emitted from a light emitting means mounted on a lamp board can be clearly seen.
Conventional gaming machines include a lamp board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a lamp cover that covers the lamp board, and the lamp cover is formed using a translucent milky resin material. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-19669).
Here, the LED mounting surface of the lamp substrate is generally configured in green or black.
However, when the lamp cover is formed using a translucent milky white resin material, when the LED is turned off, there is a possibility that the color of the LED mounting surface of the lamp substrate may be seen through, and when the LED emits light, There is a possibility that light will be emitted in a color different from the set color and will be seen.
Further, even when the lamp cover is formed using a colorless and translucent resin material, when the LED is turned off, the color of the LED mounting surface of the lamp substrate is seen through, and when the LED emits light, the setting is performed. There is a possibility that the light is emitted in a color different from the color to be seen.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make the appearance of the LED on the lamp substrate transparent through the lamp cover so as not to deteriorate the appearance, and to make the color development at the time of light emission of the LED look clear. is there.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 17 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment)
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) provided with a front door that can be opened and closed (for example, a glass door 505),
There is a lamp cover (for example, upper frame lamp cover 613) covering a lamp substrate (for example, upper frame right lamp substrate 611) on which light emitting means (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted.
At least a portion of the lamp cover is configured to be visible in substantially the same color or a similar color when the light emitting unit emits light in one color,
At least a part of a mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate is substantially white.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 17 According to the initial invention, the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate is made substantially white, so that when the light emitting device is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting device on the lamp substrate is passed through the lamp cover. Even if you can see through, you can make it look good.
Further, when the light emitting means emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the mounting surface of the lamp substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted, so that the light emitting means can be made to look brighter and brighter. Since the surface is configured to be substantially white, it is possible to make the light-emitting means emit light in the color set as it is.

18. Initial invention 18
(A) Problems to be solved by Initial invention 18 Same as the problems of Initial invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 18 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment)
In a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (for example, a right frame lamp unit 620) on a front door that can be opened and closed (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp substrate (for example, a right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641e-k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, a right frame lamp cover 622) to which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, a right frame substrate mounting portion 653);
A cover attaching portion (for example, a right frame cover attaching portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white and translucent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white,
The lamp substrate has a substantially rectangular shape,
The width of the lamp substrate in the short direction (“W1” in FIG. 116) is substantially the same as the width of the lamp mounting portion in the short direction (“W2” in FIG. 124). And

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 18 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it can be seen through, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative lamp unit from becoming unpleasant.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected on the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to look brighter and light emitting element mounting. Since the surface is configured in white, it is possible to make the light emitting element emit light in the color set as seen.
Furthermore, since the width in the short direction of the lamp board and the width in the short direction of the board mounting section are substantially the same, the board mounting section can be covered with the lamp board, and the mounting of the light emitting element on the lamp board. Since the surface can function as a reflector, light emitted from the light emitting element can be seen clearly.

19. Original Invention 19
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 19 Same as the problems of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 19 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment)
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) provided with a decorative lamp unit (for example, an upper frame lamp unit 610) on a front door that can be opened and closed (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp substrate (e.g., upper frame right lamp substrate 611) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613) to which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651);
A cover attachment portion (for example, an upper frame right cover attachment portion 652) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white and translucent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white,
A fixture (for example, a screw 683a) used when fixing the lamp substrate to the substrate mounting portion has an exposed portion (a screw head 689) exposed on the mounting surface side.
The height of the exposed portion from the mounting surface ("T1" in FIG. 123) is larger than the height of the light emitting element from the mounting surface ("T2" in FIG. 123),
A surface treatment (for example, silver plating) for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting element is applied to the exposed portion.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 19 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it can be seen through, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative lamp portion from becoming unsightly.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected on the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to look brighter and light emitting element mounting. Since the surface is configured in white, it is possible to make the light emitting element emit light in the color set as seen.
Furthermore, by setting the height of the exposed part from the light emitting element mounting surface to be greater than the height of the light emitting element from the light emitting element mounting surface, and performing a surface treatment on the exposed part to reflect light emitted from the light emitting element, Since the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the exposed portion, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be seen clearly.

20. Original Invention 20
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 20 Same as the problems of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 20 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment)
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) provided with a decorative lamp unit (for example, an upper frame lamp unit 610) on a front door that can be opened and closed (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp substrate (e.g., upper frame right lamp substrate 611) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613) to which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651);
A cover attachment portion (for example, an upper frame right cover attachment portion 652) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white and translucent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white,
The lamp substrate includes a positioning hole (positioning hole 685a) into which a positioning member (positioning boss 682a) is inserted when positioning the lamp substrate at a predetermined position of the substrate mounting portion. A fixing hole (fixing hole 686a) used for fixing to the mounting portion is provided in close proximity,
The opening area of the positioning hole is set to be different from the opening area of the fixing hole,
The positioning member has a protruding portion (protruding portion 687) that protrudes toward the mounting surface when the lamp substrate is positioned at the predetermined position of the substrate mounting portion,
The protrusion is formed in a convex curved shape.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 20 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it can be seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp section can be prevented from becoming unsightly.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected on the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to look brighter and light emitting element mounting. Since the surface is configured in white, it is possible to make the light emitting element emit light in the color set as seen.
Furthermore, since the opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are different, when fixing the lamp board to the board mounting portion, the positioning hole and the fixing hole should not be mistaken. Thus, the assembling work can be smoothly performed.
Furthermore, since the projection of the positioning member is formed in a convex curved shape, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the convex curved projection, so that the light emitted from the light emitting element can be seen clearly. .

21. Initial Invention 21
(A) Problems to be solved by Initial invention 21 Same as the problems of Initial invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 21 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (23rd embodiment)
In a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (for example, a right frame lamp unit 620) on a front door that can be opened and closed (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp substrate (for example, a right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641e-k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, a right frame lamp cover 622) to which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, a right frame substrate mounting portion 653);
A cover attaching portion (for example, a right frame cover attaching portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white and translucent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white,
The lamp cover has a lens portion (lens portion 670) formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 21 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it can be seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp section can be prevented from becoming unsightly.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected on the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to look brighter and light emitting element mounting. Since the surface is configured in white, it is possible to make the light emitting element emit light in the color set as seen.
Furthermore, since the shape of the lens portion is formed by joining curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same wall thickness, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be reduced while reducing the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the lamp cover. Can be seen more clearly by the lens portion.

22. Original Invention 22
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 22 Same as the problems of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 22 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (23rd embodiment)
In a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 500) provided with a decorative lamp unit (for example, an upper frame lamp unit 610 and a right frame lamp unit 620) on a front door that can be opened and closed (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp substrate (for example, an upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and a right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) to which the light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651 and a right frame substrate mounting portion 653);
A cover attaching portion (for example, an upper frame right cover attaching portion 652 and a right frame cover attaching portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white and translucent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white,
The decorative lamp section,
An upper ramp portion (upper frame ramp portion 610) disposed above the front door;
And a side ramp portion (right frame ramp portion 620) arranged on a side portion of the front door,
The upper lamp unit and the side lamp unit each include the lamp substrate (the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the right frame lamp substrate 621), so that a plurality of the lamp substrates are provided.
When a specific lottery result (a jackpot lottery) is reached, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards among the plurality of lamp boards are changed in a pattern corresponding to the specific lottery result. It is controlled to emit light (the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are changed in a predetermined pattern within a range of “0” to “255”).

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 22 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it can be seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp section can be prevented from becoming unsightly.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected on the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to look brighter and light emitting element mounting. Since the surface is configured in white, it is possible to make the light emitting element emit light in the color set as seen.
Further, by causing the light-emitting elements to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the specific lottery result, the player can be notified of the specific lottery result by clean light.

23. Original Invention 23
(A) Problems to be solved by Initial invention 23 Same as the problem of Initial invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 23 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (23rd embodiment)
In a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 500) provided with a decorative lamp unit (for example, an upper frame lamp unit 610 and a right frame lamp unit 620) on a front door that can be opened and closed (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp substrate (for example, an upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and a right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) to which the light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651 and a right frame substrate mounting portion 653);
A cover attaching portion (for example, an upper frame right cover attaching portion 652 and a right frame cover attaching portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white and translucent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white,
The decorative lamp section,
An upper ramp portion (upper frame ramp portion 610) disposed above the front door;
And a side ramp portion (right frame ramp portion 620) arranged on a side portion of the front door,
The upper lamp unit and the side lamp unit each include the lamp substrate (the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the right frame lamp substrate 621), so that a plurality of the lamp substrates are provided.
When the opening of the front door is detected or when a specific lottery result (big hit in the big hit lottery) is reached, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the lamp boards among the plurality of lamp boards is At least white light is controlled.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 23 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it can be seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp section can be prevented from becoming unsightly.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected on the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to look brighter and light emitting element mounting. Since the surface is configured in white, it is possible to make the light emitting element emit light in the color set as seen.
Further, when the opening of the front door is detected or when a specific lottery result is obtained, the light emitting element is caused to emit white light. It can inform clerks and players in the hall.

24. Original Invention 24
(A) Problems to be solved by Initial invention 24 Same as the problems of Initial invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 24 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (23rd embodiment)
In a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 500) provided with a decorative lamp unit (for example, an upper frame lamp unit 610 and a right frame lamp unit 620) on a front door that can be opened and closed (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp substrate (for example, an upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and a right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) to which the light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651 and a right frame substrate mounting portion 653);
A cover attaching portion (for example, an upper frame right cover attaching portion 652 and a right frame cover attaching portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white and translucent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white,
The decorative lamp section,
An upper ramp portion (upper frame ramp portion 610) disposed above the front door;
And a side ramp portion (right frame ramp portion 620) arranged on a side portion of the front door,
The upper lamp unit and the side lamp unit each include the lamp substrate (the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the right frame lamp substrate 621), so that a plurality of the lamp substrates are provided.
When a setting change state in which the advantage for the player can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the advantage cannot be changed but can be checked, the state is mounted on at least one of the plurality of lamp boards. The light emitting element is controlled to emit at least white light.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 24 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it can be seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp section can be prevented from becoming unsightly.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected on the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to look brighter and light emitting element mounting. Since the surface is configured in white, it is possible to make the light emitting element emit light in the color set as seen.
Furthermore, by controlling the setting change state or the setting confirmation state by emitting light in white when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled, a clear light informs the store clerk of the hall. I can let you know.

25. Initial Invention 25
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 25 Same as the problems of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 25 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (23rd embodiment)
In a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 500) provided with a decorative lamp unit (for example, an upper frame lamp unit 610 and a right frame lamp unit 620) on a front door that can be opened and closed (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp substrate (for example, an upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and a right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) to which the light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651 and a right frame substrate mounting portion 653);
A cover attaching portion (for example, an upper frame right cover attaching portion 652 and a right frame cover attaching portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white and translucent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white,
The decorative lamp section,
An upper ramp portion (upper frame ramp portion 610) disposed above the front door;
And a side ramp portion (right frame ramp portion 620) arranged on a side portion of the front door,
The upper lamp unit and the side lamp unit each include the lamp substrate (the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the right frame lamp substrate 621), so that a plurality of the lamp substrates are provided.
When returning from a power-off, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards are controlled to emit at least white light.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 25 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it can be seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp section can be prevented from becoming unsightly.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected on the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to look brighter and light emitting element mounting. Since the surface is configured in white, it is possible to make the light emitting element emit light in the color set as seen.
Further, when returning from the power-off, the light emitting element emits white light, so that the hall clerk can be informed of the recovery from the power-off by clean light.

26. Original Invention 26
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 26 Same as the problems of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 26 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (23rd embodiment)
In a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 500) provided with a decorative lamp unit (for example, an upper frame lamp unit 610 and a right frame lamp unit 620) on a front door that can be opened and closed (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp substrate (for example, an upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and a right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) to which the light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651 and a right frame substrate mounting portion 653);
A cover attaching portion (for example, an upper frame right cover attaching portion 652 and a right frame cover attaching portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white and translucent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white,
The decorative lamp section,
An upper ramp portion (upper frame ramp portion 610) disposed above the front door;
And a side ramp portion (right frame ramp portion 620) arranged on a side portion of the front door,
The upper lamp unit and the side lamp unit each include the lamp substrate (the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the right frame lamp substrate 621), so that a plurality of the lamp substrates are provided.
It is mounted on at least one of the plurality of lamp substrates (the right frame lamp substrate 621) during a predetermined game that is not won by the lottery means (during a game lost in the jackpot lottery). Controlling the light emitting elements (LEDs 641e-k) to emit light,
The average value of the time during which the light-emitting element emits light during the predetermined game is the average of the time during which the other lamp (red LED mounted on the board provided with the decoration on the game board 504) is turned on during the predetermined game. It is characterized by being set longer than the value.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 26 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover when the light emitting element is turned off. Even if it can be seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp section can be prevented from becoming unsightly.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected on the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to look brighter and light emitting element mounting. Since the surface is configured in white, it is possible to make the light emitting element emit light in the color set as seen.
Further, even in a predetermined game which is not won by the lottery means, a beautiful effect using the light emitting element can be shown to the player.

10 slot machines (game machines)
Reference Signs List 11 power switch 12 front door 12a second closing portion 12b third closing portion 12c control panel 12d index 13 cabinet 13a bottom plate 13b back plate 13c first closing portion 14 symbol display device 14a reel frame 15 medal payout device 16 medal payout opening 17 door Switch 21 Direction lamp (decoration lamp part)
22 Speaker 23 Image Display Device 24 Operation Button 25 Operation Instruction Lamp 26 Upper Frame Lamp 26a Upper Frame Lamp Board 26b Upper Frame Lamp Cover 27 Right Frame Lamp 27a Right Frame Lamp Board 27b Right Frame Lamp Cover 28 Left Frame Lamp 28a Left Frame lamp board 28b Left frame lamp cover 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Discharge sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 start switch 42 stop switch 42a Stop button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Adjustment switch 44a, 44b Closing sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal slot 47 Medal guard portion 47b medal placing portion 48 chute 49 chute sensor 50 main control board (main control means)
50a Screw hole 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
56 PCB case (Main PCB case)
57 Upper cover 57a Caulking portion 57b Gate mark 57c Depressed portion 57d Projection 57e Projection 58 Lower cover 58a Caulking portion 58b Gate mark 58c Boss 61 Role drawing means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selecting means 64 Directing group number selecting means 65 reel control means 66 winning determination means 67 payout means 71 control command transmission means 73 set value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2-bet display LED
79c 3-bet display LED
79d game start display LED
79e Input LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
86 Electrolytic capacitor 87 Sub-substrate case 91 Effect output control means 101 Hopper disk 102 Holding section 103 Discharge section 110 Reel base 120 Reel control board 121 Reel board case 130 Passage forming member 131 Upper medal receiving port 132 Returned medal path 133 Lower medal receiving port 134 Payout medal passage 151 Setting key insertion slot 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 500 Pachinko gaming machine 501 Outer frame 502 Front frame 503 Hinge mechanism 504 Game board 505 Glass door (glass frame)
506 Upper plate 507 Lower plate 508 Launch handle 510 Power supply board 511 Power switch 512 Launch board 513 Launcher 520 Discharge control board 521 Key insertion slot 522 Door open switch 523 Frame open switch 524 Discharge apparatus 525 External terminal board 530 Main control board 530a Hole 531 Special symbol display device 532 Starting port 533 Starting port switch 534 Setting key insertion port 535 Setting key switch 536 Setting change (reset) switch 537 Set value display LED
538 Management information display LED (performance display monitor)
539a to 539h Connector 539b 'to 539h' Connector foot 540 Sub-control board 541 Production lamp (decoration lamp part)
542 speaker 543 image display device 550 board case 560 upper case 560a lower edge 561 cover 562 caulking portion 563a to 563g opening 564 boss 565 side wall 570 lower case 570a outer edge 571 side wall 572 caulking portion B to H harness 610 upper frame portion Right frame lamp substrate 612 Upper frame left lamp substrate 613 Upper frame lamp cover 620 Right frame lamp portion 621 Right frame lamp cover 630 Left frame lamp portion 631 Left frame lamp substrate 632 Left frame lamp cover 641a to k LED ( Full color LED)
642a-c Connector 650 Right base member 651 Upper frame right substrate mounting part 652 Upper frame right cover mounting part 653 Right frame substrate mounting part 654 Right frame cover mounting part 661a-e Board support rib 662a-b Cover fitting groove 670 Lens part 681 Screw fixing boss 682a-c Positioning boss 683a-c Screw 684 Screw hole 685a-b Positioning hole 686a-b Fixing hole 687 Projection 688 Screw shaft 689 Screw head

Claims (1)

Cabinet and
The gaming machine comprising a front door mounted for opening and closing the cabinet,
A predetermined lamp board is provided at a predetermined position of the front door ,
A predetermined light emitting means is mounted on the predetermined lamp substrate ,
Mounting surface of the predetermined light emitting means in the predetermined lamp substrate is at least partially formed of a substantially white,
The predetermined lamp substrate is fixed by a predetermined fixing member,
On the basis of the mounting surface of the predetermined lamp substrate, a height of the predetermined fixing member in a state where the predetermined lamp substrate is fixed is higher than a height of the predetermined light emitting unit,
The gaming machine further includes a front door sensor,
A first closing portion is provided at a lower portion of the cabinet,
The first closing portion protrudes toward the front door in a state where the front door is closed,
A second closing portion and a third closing portion are provided at a lower portion of the front door,
The second closing portion and the third closing portion project toward the cabinet in a state where the front door is closed,
In a state where the front door is closed, it is configured such that there is a portion where the first closing portion is disposed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion,
When the front door is opened from the state where the front door is closed, the position of the front door when the opening of the front door is first detected by the front door sensor is a detection start position,
In a state where the front door is at the detection start position, it is configured such that there is a portion where the first closing portion is disposed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion,
In a state where the front door is closed, the third closing portion and the first closing portion at a position where the first closing portion is disposed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion. (The distance between the opposing surfaces indicates a distance in a direction perpendicular to the opposing surface between the third closing portion and the first closing portion) is "h2", and the thickness of the game medium is When “t” is set as “t”, “h2> t” is satisfied, and the first position at the position where the first closing portion is disposed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion is described. 2 Distance between opposing surfaces of the closing portion and the first closing portion (the distance between the opposing surfaces indicates a distance in a direction perpendicular to the opposing surface of the second closing portion and the first closing portion). Is “h1”, “h1> t” holds, and
In the front door,
Game media slot,
Detecting means A and detecting means B provided in a passage through which the game medium inserted from the game medium insertion port can detect the game medium (the detecting means B is located downstream of the detecting means A). When
Further comprising
In a predetermined situation in which the passage of the game medium is permitted, in a case where the game medium is inserted from the game medium insertion port, if the detection states of the detection unit A and the detection unit B for the game medium satisfy a predetermined condition. , The number of credits or the number of bets can be added by “1”.
In a predetermined situation in which the passage of game media is permitted, from the time when the power supply interruption event occurs, the event of the power supply interruption is detected and the passage of the game media is prohibited. The design value for the period up to
In a predetermined situation where the passage of the game medium is permitted, when the game medium is inserted at the initial speed “0” from the game medium insertion port, the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine. From time, when the design value of the period until the game medium reaches the position detected by the detection means A is “T2”,
A gaming machine characterized in that "T1 <T2" .